Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout066065-V10 - Construction-Related - Contract - Webber Waterworks LLCCSC No. 66065-V 10 ORT WORTH® CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility City Project No. C01239 Mattie Parker Jesus "Jay" Chapa Mayor City Manager Chris Harder Director, Water Department Prepared for The City of Fort Worth Water Department VOLUME 10 OF 12 APRIL 2026 EXECUTED PLUMMER Plummer Associates, Inc j *=• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ..*�� 1320 S University Drive, Suite 300 JOSHUA P. FRISINGER OFFICIAL RECORD Fort Worth, Texas 76107 it ° 97545 ✓ CITY SECRETARY TBPE Firm No. F-13 111 /QHAL �.. FT. WORTH, TX In Association with 6/10/2026 GAIJF Gupta & Associates, Inc ` " �uYC CONSULTING ENGINEERING Automation - Jacobs A company of Infrastructure `vJ McKIM&CREED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 00 01 07 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 Section Number and Title Division 00 Procurement And Contracting Division 01 General Requirements (Except 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing and 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing) Division 02 Demolition 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 33 0110.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.13 PVC and CPVC Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank rE'�q�ll 43 23 69 44 42 56.16 Chemical Feed Systems Peristaltic Hose Pump * . irtl� I JOSHUA P. FRISINGER r --------------- � 1� O- 97545 3/30/2026 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 ,.-� MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 Section Number and Title 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 43 11 12 Blower High Speed Turbo 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment PAULA A. MONACO a# 132844 iQr % 1,1���\ 3/30/2026 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-2 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 Section Number and Title 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 46 51 21 Aeration System, Coarse Bubble Membrane Diffusers .�P�E ?L ...t 1 *; ...............................:.... JENNY BETH MURRAY .................................... 142379 : c 3/30/2026 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-3 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 Section Number and Title 44 42 56.03 44 42 56.04 �.:�:• .....................*: BRADLEY T. DEATON II �I ...:......133296 ....; .... ENS Vertical Turbine Pumps Submersible Pumps Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 Section Number and Title 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water System 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 43 1119 Foul Air Fans 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HANNAH E. SALINAS FRELS 130165 L ENb'� 03/31/2026 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-5 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 Section Number and Title 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System NAt '.\' 3/30/2026 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-2593 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 Section Number and Title Division 26 Electrical 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing �P�E OF r jANDREW A..REED� �9�•.•.123384 ENS �.•� 03/30/2026 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 MARCH 23, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMIVR ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 000107-7 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY SIGNATURE AUTOMATION TBPE FIRM NO. F-4711 Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 Section Number and Title 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21 C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 /)J? O ANTHONY V. SCUDIERI .............................. -o. 89088 ; � �t��FSS�C E N S NG��AW 6 3�3 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JQ-IMEG LLC TBPE FIRM NO. F-26651 Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 Section Number and Title 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 37 00 Riprap 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets OF Tf 1�+ J / w : ...........:.... OVIDIU M. SIPOS 111707 !ONA L f Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-9 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS, INC. TBAE# 3027 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 Section Number and Title 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping 03/30/2026 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07- 10 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Lei Wei, PE No. 99776 Section Number and Title 31 1000 31 23 13 31 23 16 31 23 19.01 31 2323 31 23 23.15 314100 Site Clearing Subgrade Preparation Excavation Dewatering Fill and Backfill Trench Backfill Shoring MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Section Number and Title 21 13 13 2831 00 ALEX F RMAN j 1, -- 14.:::: 09 i 3/30/26 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems Fire Detection and Alarm MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07- 12 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284 Section Number and Title 04 21 13.13 Masonry Veneer 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Therman Insulation 07 26 16 Below Grade Vapor Retarders 07 27 26 Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic (FPR) Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustical Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 11 31 00 Appliances 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles March 30. Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284. MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Phillip K. Dewolfe, P.E. Section Number and Title 23 05 14B HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48B Vibration Isolation and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93B Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00B HVAC Insulation 23 09 00B Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls — Field Components and Instruments 23 09 23B Direct Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00B Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13B Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16B Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00B HVAC Fans 23 36 00B Air Terminal Units 23 37 00B Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units ,IIJ PFGILLOP fit_ pEW'OLFE �.. .................. - 3+34,'6 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 15 MARYS CREEK WRF Section Number and Title 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Water and Sewer Service 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Natural Gas Service 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures . .............. � PHILLIP K DEVVOLFE 3/30.2 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 31, 2026 0001 07- 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Section Number and Title 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Injection Grouting Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 19 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 19 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails (Railings) 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm ALEX SANNEROT 916B6 iur,kr 34 Wit 2026 aacbns Enginearirar� Group inc. Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Texas Risiration 42966 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07-17 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452 Section Number and Title 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4446 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners .• �.1 ..Ir ••AI•, . •. * . 00 ■.a+.....................i Ar ARIFUR RAHI.IA - I� R� 135 342 .• 30 March 2026 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452. MARCH 31, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 0001 07- 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 1 Section Number and Title DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 00 00 Cover 00 01 07 Engineer's Seals Pages 00 0110 Table of Contents 00 05 10 Mayor and Council Communications (M&C) 00 05 15 Addendum 1, 2 and 3 Volume 2 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 0005 15 Addendum 4 Volume 3 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 05 15 Addendum 5, 6, 7, and 8 Volume 4 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 1113 Invitation to Offerors 00 2113 Instructions to Offerors 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Statement 00 41 00 Proposal Form 00 42 43 Offeror's Proposal Form 0043 13 Proposal Security 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Non Resident Proposer 00 45 12 Subcontractor and Major Equipment Supplier List 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers Compensation Law 00 52 43 Agreement 0061 13 Performance Bond 0061 14 Payment Bond 00 6119 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 80 00 TWDB Required Documents 00 80 01 TWDB Forms and Templates DIVISION 01 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 11 17 Installation of Pre -Selected Equipment 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 2110 Unit Bid Items 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 26 13 Requests for Information 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meetings 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 32 35 Aerial Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 43 33 Manufacturer's Field Services 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 7423 Cleaning 01 75 01 Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing 01 76 00 Asset Management List 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 Warranties 01 78 39 Project Record Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 01- CONTINUED 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 01 9114 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup DIVISION 02 02 41 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting Volume 5 DIVISION 04 0421 13.13 Masonry Veneer 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 2119 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 5119 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 05 - CONTINUED 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails Railings 05 53 00 Metal Gratings DIVISION 06 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 07 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Thermal Insulation 07 26 16 Belowgrade Vapor Retarders 0727 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 08 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 4113 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 09 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglas Reinforced Plastic Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustic Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 90 01 Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) 09 90 02 Paint Product Data Sheet (PDS) 09 96 35 Chemical -Resistant Coatings DIVISION 10 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Projection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 10 90 00 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging DIVISION 11 11 31 00 11 53 13 Appliances Laboratory Fume Hoods Related Products and DIVISION 12 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles DIVISION 13 13 21 50 Laboratory Environmental Controlled Chambers and Rooms 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 21 2113 13 Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Gas 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Volume 6 DIVISION 23 23 05 14 HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments 23 09 23 Direct -Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 3113 Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16 Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units DIVISION 26 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 13 MV Cables 26 05 19 LV Wires and Cables TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding System 26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures, and Fittings 26 05 36 Cable Trays 26 05 43 Underground System 26 05 73 Power System Study 26 12 19 Pad Mounted Transformers 26 13 13 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear 26 20 00 Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors 26 22 13 Distribution Dry -Type Transformers 26 24 13 LV Distribution Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 LV Motor Control Centers 26 25 02 MV Metal -Enclosed Bus Duct 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays 26 27 26 Light Switches and Receptacles 26 28 16 LV Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Safety Switches Vnlnmo 7 DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 86 Mechanical Equipment Control Panels 26 29 87 Electrical Control Panels 26 32 13 Engine Generator Set 26 33 00 Station Battery System 26 33 54 3 -Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 36 23 LV Enclosed Automatic Transfer Switches 26 41 00 Lightning Protection System 26 43 13 LV AC Surge Protective Devices 26 50 00 Lighting System DIVISION 28 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-7 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 31 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 19.01 Dewatering 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 3700 Riprap 31 41 00 Shoring DIVISION 32 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement markings 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping DIVISION 33 33 0110.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Water System 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets DIVISION 35 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 8 DIVISION 40 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.11 Piping System, Chemical Feed 40 05 31.13 Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation 40 46 16 Protective Liquid Linings and Coatings for Substrates Exposed to Corrosive Wastewater Environment 40 47 00 Dumpster Conveyor System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 9 DIVISION 40 - CONTINUED 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Volume 10 DIVISION 41 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists DIVISION 43 43 11 12 Blower High -Speed Turbo 43 11 19 Foul Air Fans 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 43 32 69 Chemical Feed Systems 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank DIVISION 44 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 44 - CONTINUED 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 44 42 56.16 Peristaltic Hose Pump 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 44 46 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners DIVISION 46 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System 46 51 21 Aeration Systems, Coarse -Bubble Membrane Diffusers July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10- 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY The following documents are for information: Volume 11 APPENDIX I — Selection of Membrane Equipment System Supplier for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix 1 1 P,-eselectio., Package 1 Proposal Documents Appendix I.2 Approved Veolia Submittal APPENDIX II — Selection of Preselection Package 2 for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix ff1 Preselection Package 2 Proposal Documents Appendix II.2 Vulcan — Coarse Screens Appendix II.3 Old Castle— Grit Removal Appendix II.4 Saveco — Fine Screens Volume 12 6 APPENDIX H — Continued Appendix II.5 Trojan — UV System Appendix II.6 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.7 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.8 GEA — Dewatering System APPENDIX III — Funding Requirements 00 75 43 Employment Requirements and Wage Rates DB-0 154 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance — Owner DB-0 155 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance TWDB-0100 Clean Water State Revolving Fund Loan Program TWDB-0551 Supplemental Construction Contract Conditions for Non -Equivalency Projects under the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Programs TWDB-1106A AIS Monthly Certificate of Compliance — Owner TWDB-1 106B AIS De Minimis Log TWDB-1106C AIS Final Certificate TWDB-1109A Project Signage WIFIA Funding Requirements APPENDIX IV — Geotechnical Report APPENDIX V — City Obtained Permits TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 4122 13.13 OVERHEAD CRANES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Motorized overhead crane system consisting of crane bridge, bridge end trucks and wheels, hoist trolley unit, bridge and trolley drives, pendant push button control system, electrical control panel, track system for power and control for bridge and hoist drives, and all related appurtenances for a complete operating system. The specific overhead crane details for each overhead crane system are included in the Supplement at the end of this Section. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Division 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B30.2, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist). b. B30.10, Hooks. c. B30.16, Overhead Underhung and Stationary Hoists. d. B30.17, Cranes and Monorails (with underhung Trolley or Bridge). e. HST 1M, Performance Standard for Electric Chain Hoists. f. HST 2M, Performance Standard for Hand Chain Manually Operated Chain Hoists. g. HST 4M, Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists. 2. Crane Manufacturer's Association of America (CMAA): PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS OVERHEAD CRANES 412213.13-1 MARYS CREEK WRF a. 70, Multiple Girder Cranes. b. 74, Single Girder Cranes. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. UL: 674, Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Top -Running Multiple -Girder Overhead Traveling Crane: CMAA No. 70 and ASME B30.2 and B30.17. B. Top -Running and Underhung Single -Girder Overhead Traveling Cranes: CMAA No. 74, and ASME B30.17. C. Trolley Service Class: CMAA No. 70. D. Wire Rope Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 4M and CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. E. Chain Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 1M and CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. F. Hook: ASME 30.10. G. Building Clearances: CMAA No. 70 and CMAA No. 74. Where bridge span exceeds 40 feet, increase clearance to 6 inches. H. Stress and Safety Factors: CMAA No. 70 and CMAA No. 74. Carefully select materials of construction for stresses to which subjected. I. Safety of Operation, Accessibility, Interchangeability, and Durability of Parts: ASME B30.2 and OSHA requirements. Design equipment for environment operated. J. Provide system, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorages, designed in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 -2 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of construction, and specifications on bridge drive system, end trucks, runway stops footwalks and platforms, wheels, shafting, drive motor, gears and bearing, steel framing, trolley drive system, hoist motor and assemblies, hook, brakes, starting system, variable speed drive system, conductors (bus bar, festoon, cable reel), controls, remote control system, and accessories. c. Dimensioned crane system drawings to indicate the following: 1) Runway extents and end stops. 2) Bridge extents and end stops. 3) Runway electrification and connection point. 4) Bridge electrification and connection point. 5) Pendant connection point and cable length, as applicable. 6) Bridge, hoist, end truck and rail dimensions including dimensions from top of rail to high point of bridge and hoist, to high and low hook positions, to low point of bridge and electrification system, limits of hook lift positions side -to -side and end -to -end, and recommended clearances to structure. 2. Detail Shop Drawings of crane runways, brackets, hangers, and their attachments to building structural steel. 3. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 4. Motor nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and include any motor modifications. 5. Factory finish system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Factory functional test report. 2. Structural design calculations for runway beams and support system, and calculations of deflection and loads on building steel stamped by a registered professional engineer. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 5. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance that the factory finish system is identical to the requirements specified herein. 6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 7. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 -3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 9. Field performance test procedures for load testing. 10. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 11. Field functional and performance test reports and log. 12. Load test report and certification for crane use for each crane. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Indoor Applications: 1. Temperature: Maximum 110 degrees F; minimum 10 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 100 percent. 3. Atmosphere: Mildly corrosive and moist. 4. Ventilation: Atmospheric B. Outdoor Applications: 1. Temperature: Maximum 120 degrees F; minimum 10 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 100 percent. 3. Atmosphere: Mildly corrosive 4. Ventilation: Atmospheric. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish for each remote -control crane: 1. One transmitter. 2. One battery. OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 -4 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Crane manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with steel structures, panels, drive motor, control panel, trolley and hoist, hoisting cable or chain, hook, crane mounted conductors, rails, stops, and electrical equipment controls. B. Where adjustable speed drives or remote -control systems are required, crane manufacturer to furnish a coordinated operating system. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. American Crane and Equipment Corporation. 2. ProservAnchor Crane Group. 3. ACE Industries, Inc. 4. Konecranes USA. 5. P&H Morris Material Handling. 6. Anchor Crane and Hoist 7. FIMT 2.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. See supplements to this section for additional requirements. 2.04 RUNWAY A. Runway beams, brackets, and associated framework furnished under Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. B. Runway rails shall conform to cross -sections and weights per yard as specified in CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. Furnish rails, crane stops, and conductors by crane manufacturer. Floating rails are not acceptable. C. Support underhung crane runway rails by a suspension system of hanger rods and joints which will permit runway rails to adjust to normal fluctuations of weight occurring as crane travels along rails. Design suspension system for minimal support rod bending stresses. Furnish slotted holes and shims for lateral and vertical rail adjustment. Brace one rail laterally to prevent excess motion of runway. Brace both rails longitudinally. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS OVERHEAD CRANES 412213.13-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.05 BRIDGE A. Furnish girders from structural shapes proportioned to resist vertical, lateral, and torsional forces. B. Construct bridge end trucks in accordance with CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. Furnish end trucks with rail sweeps and impact -absorbing bumpers. C. Furnish runway stops attached to resist force applied when contacted and locate at limit of travel of bridge. Runway stops shall not engage the wheels. D. Provide bridge travel limit switches for bridge runs greater than 40 feet, located approximately 10 feet to 15 feet from each end of bridge runway, or as required such that bridge travel speed is reduced to low speed prior to bridge engaging runway end -stops. Bridge drive speed past limit switch locations shall be limited to low speed. E. Wheels: Rolled or forged steel with treads and flanges heat treated or cast-iron wheels with chilled tread. Minimum tread hardness 200 Brinell. Clearances, wheel loads, and tolerances in accordance with CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. Wheel axles of alloy steel For top -running cranes provide rotating axles and wheels mounted by press fit and keys. For under -running cranes provide fixed axles with wheels accurately machined and ground to receive inner bearing races. F. Bridge driving machinery consisting of electrical motor and gear speed reducer unit at each end of bridge. Furnish oil -tight speed reducer gear case and support on common base with bridge brake. G. Drive Gears: Helical, spur or herringbone type, rolled or cast steel, with machine cut teeth. H. Bearings: Combination radial and thrust type, double row, spherical ball, either prelubricated and sealed or fitted for pressure lubrication. Pressure lubrication fittings for maintenance accessibility. I. Brakes: Electrically operated, adjustable, suitable for the service class indicated, with rated torque capacities as specified in CMAA No. 70 or CMAA No. 74. 2.06 TROLLEY A. Frame: Welded steel, cast steel, or ductile iron construction, or a combination thereof. Design to control deflection of trolley assembly while transmitting the carrying load to bridge rails. OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 -6 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY B. Drive shall consist of trolley drive shaft, driven by an electric motor through a gear reduction unit. C. Drive for multiple -girder crane shall consist of electric motor through gear reduction unit mounted on each side of trolley. D. Drive shall consist of chain sprocket mounted on shaft. Furnish chain to within 5 feet of operating floor level. Drive shaft shall drive the trolley wheels through a gear and pinion or spur gear arrangement. E. Furnish roller assembly stabilizers on single -girder trolley units to prevent tipping during load pickup. F. Wheels: Rolled or forged steel, accurately machined and ground to receive inner bearing races. Furnish alloy steel axles. Rotating axles with wheels mounted press fit and keys, or with keys alone. Minimum tread hardness 210 Brinell. G. Drive Gears: Helical, spur or herringbone type, rolled or cast steel, with machine cut teeth. H. Bearings: Combination radial and thrust type, double row, angular contact ball bearings or single row tapered roller bearings. Bearings prelubricated and sealed or fitted for pressure lubrication. Locate pressure lubrication fittings for accessibility during maintenance. I. Brakes: Suitable for service class and rated torque capacities as specified in ASME B30.17. Furnish stops on trolley rails or beams. J. For bridge spans greater than 40 feet provide trolley travel limit switches, located approximately 6 feet to 8 feet from each end of trolley rails/beams, or as required such that trolley travel speed is reduced to low speed prior to trolley engaging the trolley end -stops. Trolley drive speed past the limit switch locations shall be limited to low speed. 2.07 WIRE ROPE HOIST A. Hoisting machinery shall consist of rope drum driven through gear reductions, load blocks, hook, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking. Drum size and length sufficient for minimum two turns of cable remaining on drum when hook is at lowest position. If double reeving is to be used, provide right and left-hand grooved drum. B. Rope drum and surrounding members constructed to minimize abrasion, crushing, or jamming of hoist rope. Load blocks enclosed type. Hoisting rope PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 -7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF extra flexible, improved plow steel wire rope, made especially for hoist service. C. Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure, equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load and positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other devices. D. Brakes: Mechanical and electric load brake and controls, designed in accordance with ASME HST 4M, and adjustable to compensate for wear. 2.08 ELECTRICAL A. Furnish electrical equipment including motors, motor starters, pendant control, control systems, wire, and conduit. Bridge conductors may be removed for shipment. Crane wiring by crane supplier. B. Electrical: In accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 610. C. Furnish motors compatible with adjustable frequency, variable speed, drive system, 40 to 1 speed range, suitable for hoist, trolley, and bridge drive applications. Controls with 120 -volt ac, microprocessor based, pulsed width modulation design, withstand 45 degree C temperatures, housed in NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, and supplied with 200 percent overcurrent protection. D. Bridge and trolley conductor voltage drops from runway supply taps shall permit the crane motors to operate within voltage tolerances of plus or minus 10 percent, when building supply voltage is at plus or minus 5 percent of design voltage. E. Enclosed Bus Bar Conductors: Galvanized steel strip enclosed in insulation. Collector sliding shoe type, with adjustable spring tension arms for contact between bus bar and controls. F. Enclosed Bus Bar Conductors: Stainless steel clad hard copper enclosed in insulation. Collector sliding noncopper bearing, carbon shoe type, with adjustable spring tension arms for contact between bus bar and controls. Collector mechanism components aluminum, stainless steel, plastic, or other noncorrosive materials. G. Festooned Flat Cable Conductors: Flexible cable, carried by heavy-duty roller, permanently lubricated roller bearings, with monorail support system that will dispense and retrieve flexible cable without twisting or tangling, and 20 percent spare conductor in each cable assembly. OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 - 8 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY H. Cable Reel Conductors: Flexible cable, housed on a circular wheel, counter -torque spring to dispense and retrieve cable, with sag not more than 3 feet below connection point on crane at maximum travel. I. Grounding: External in accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 250. 2.09 CONTROLS A. Controls: Fully magnetic, plain reversing type, housed in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure, with contactors of sufficient size and quantity for starting, accelerating, reversing, and stopping duty for specified crane service class. B. Bridge and Trolley Drives: Soft start controls, 460/230 -volt ac series device, installed in between drive motor and motor starter with torque and acceleration rate adjustable, suitable for crane service, and work in conjunction with crane controls. C. Control motions indicate direction of resultant crane motion. Furnish spring -loaded switch motions, with return to OFF position when switch is released and designed to prevent runaway crane situations. D. Remote Control System: 1. Infrared, line -of -sight system, handheld and capable of operating all crane functions. 2. Crane motions shall stop automatically when crane can no longer receive remote signals and designed to stop when control signal for any motion becomes ineffective. 3. Remote Control Crane Motions: Hook raise and lower, trolley movement, bridge movement, and crane power up and power. Furnish an EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton station which will disconnect main line power via a remote switch, and manual reset function to activate all motions after an EMERGENCY OFF event. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location. Mounted on separate components of each crane assembly, to facilitate assembly in the field. B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 -9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2.11 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, System No. 5. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels and equipment for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function. B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: No-load run test on all equipment furnished. C. Factory test report shall include Test Data Sheets PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Provide lubrication and lubrication fittings. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING - NOT APPLICABLE 3.03 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. Facility startup specifies order and prerequisites for the following tests of equipment: 1. ORT 1 testing. 2. Field functional testing. 3. ORT 2 testing. 4. Performance testing. 5. Demonstration testing. B. Field testing and facility startup shall be performed using qualified representative provided by the manufacturer as specified in Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services, and as specified herein. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Test: Conduct on each crane. 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment, connection, and quiet operation. OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 - 10 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY B. Field Performance Test Procedures: 1. Proposed load test procedures shall be developed by crane supplier and submitted to Owner's Representative for review, comment, and approval. 2. Submit test procedures at least 30 days in advance of specific crane testing. 3. Testing shall not begin until test procedures have been approved by the Owner's Representative. C. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each crane. 2. Load tests conducted by crane supplier in compliance with OSHA, ASME B30.17, and ASME B30.16. D. Submit completed Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Refer to Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded. 1. 1/2 person -days per crane for installation assistance. 2. 1/2 person -days per crane for performance testing and facility startup. 3.06 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification: 1. Crane Dimension Sheets: a. PTU b. MBR/RAS C. OPERATIONS BUILDING d. UV e. BNR f. SOLIDS 1 g. SOLIDS 2 2. Crane Data Sheets: a. PTU b. MBR/RAS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF c. OPERATIONS BUILDING d. UV e. BNR f. SOLIDS 1 g. SOLIDS 2 END OF SECTION OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 - 12 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: PTU Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: PTU01 COO TRC01 G H (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) TYP.)) DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) F E TOP OF RUNWAY (TYP') D RAIL Z tz rG A: 66'-8" D (MAX): 2'-7" G (MIN): 2" B (MIN): 66' E (MAX): 2-2" 2'-10" H (MIN): 6" C (MAX): 6'-6" Notes: F (MAX): 1' 1. Runway Length: 136.58' 2. Provide access platform attached to the bridge crane. Access platform shall be on the north side of the bridge crane. Provide railing safety gate for accessing bridge crane platform. Coordinate location of the safety gate with the plans in the contract documents. Maximum service platform width shall be 2'-6" unless approved by Engineer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: MBR/RAS Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: MEMO 1 TOO BRCO 1 H I (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) YP•) DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE ---------------------------------------------------------- A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) D (TMP ) E TOP OF RUNWAY RAIL I - w 2 l7 Z H LL J rw B (MIN): 60' C (MAX): 6'-3" D (MAX): 5'-11" E (MAX): 3'8" F (MAX): 2'-11" G:1' H (MIN): 2" I (MIN): 6" Notes: Crane will be installed on prefabricated building not designed by engineer. Contractor to coordinate required span, dimension A, with building/canopy fabricator. 1. Runway Length: 220' OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: OPERATIONS BUILDING Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: OPS01 TOO BRC01 H I (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) (r DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) D C G4. F TOP OF RUNWAY (NP') I E RAIL w w 2 l7 Z I- LL J A: 62'-3" B (MIN): 15' C (MAX): 6'-l" D (MAX): 4'5" E (MAX): 3'5" F (MAX): 3'-2" G: See Notes H (MIN): 2" I (MIN): 6" Notes: Dimension G: 1'-0" on plant south side. 1'-4" on plant north side. 1. Runway Length: 91.75' PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: UV Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: UV01 BOO BRC0 1 H I (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) (Ni ) DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE --------------------------------------------------------- A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) C G (TYP.) w 2 l7 Z H LL J A: 36'-3" D (MAX): 3' B (MIN): 25' E (MAX): ' " 2'-10" C (MAX): 2'-11" F (MAX): 2-2' G:1' H (MIN): 2" I (MIN): • TOP OF RUNWAY RAIL Notes: Crane will be installed on prefabricated building not designed by engineer. Contractor to coordinate required span, dimension A, with building/canopy fabricator. 1. Runway Length: 52.17' OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 4 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: BNR Building Clearances for Under -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: BNR01 COO BRC01 & BNRO1 COO BRCO2 TOP OF RUNWAY BEAM I LU L9 z I- LL J 1! A: 12'-9" D (MAX): 1'-7" B (MIN): 35' C (MAX): 5'-3" Notes: 1. Runway Length: 247.25' E (MAX): 14-n 1'- F (MAX): 2" G: 1'-4" PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: SOLIDS 1 Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: SHB01 F00 TRC01 H I (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) (_TMP.) DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) D C E x w w 2 l7 Z I- LL J A: 35'-8" B (MIN): 39' C (MAX): 4' Notes: 1. Runway Length: 100'-0" D (MAX): 2'-2" E (MAX): 2'-2" F (MAX): 1' F G (MIN): 2" H (MIN): 4" TOP OF RUN\ RAIL OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 6 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DIMENSION SHEET: SOLIDS 2 Building Clearances for Top -Running Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equip. Tag No.: SHB01 F00 TRCO2 H I (MEASURED FROM THE HIGHEST POINT ON CRANE STRUCTURE) DOTTED LINE INDICATES LOWEST OBSTRUCTION OVER CRANE A (SPAN - CENTERLINE TO CENTERLINE OF RUNWAYS) D re TOP OF RUN\ E I RAIL x w z I- LL J m A: 85' B (MIN):25' C (MAX): 4'-7" Notes: 1. Runway Length: 156' D (MAX): 2'-2" E (MAX): 2'-2" F (MAX):I' G (MIN): 2" H (MIN): 4" PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DATA SHEET PTU CRANE Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): PTU01 COO BRC01 Equipment Capacity: 7.5 tons Equipment Location: ®Indoors ❑Outdoors ❑Outdoor with Canopy GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance Number of Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply Voltage: 46 Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 Hz I BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ❑Single Girder ®Double Girder ®Top Running ElUnderhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) NC (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) OF (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 NConstant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 1.50 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar NFestoon Type: ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) NC (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 NConstant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑H1 (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard NH4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 32 to 20 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed NVariable Speed Motors hp:1.0 Motor hp:15 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar NFestoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Accessories: Heat Requirements: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Heat Protection ❑Extended Grease Fittings ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. NClass 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 8 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DATA SHEET MBR/RAS CRANE Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Number of Units: 1 Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): MEM01 TOO BRC01 Rev/Date/By: / / GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Equipment Capacity: 5 tons Factory Testing: Power Supply: Equipment Location: ®Required ❑Not Required Voltage: 460 ❑Indoors ❑Outdoors Field Testing: ❑Not required Phase: 3 ®Outdoor with Canopy ®Required, functional and Performance Frequency: 60 Hz II BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ®Single Girder ❑Double Girder ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) OF (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp:1.0 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon Type: ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑ D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑Hl (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 65 to 40 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed ®Variable Speed Motors hp: 1.0 Motor hp:15 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Accessories: Heat Requirements: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Heat Protection ❑Extended Grease Fittings ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. ®Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DATA SHEET OPERATIONS BUILDING CRANE Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): OPS01 TOO BRC01 Equipment Capacity: 7.5 tons Equipment Location: ®Indoors ❑Outdoors ❑Outdoor with Canopy BRIDGE Type: ®Single Girder ❑Double Girder ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) OF (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 1.50 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance TROLLEY Type: ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) E (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Number of Units: I Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply: Voltage: 460 V Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 HOIST Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑H1 (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 3.2 to 20 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed ®Variable Speed Motors hp: 1.0 Motor hp: 15 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Accessories: Heat Requirements: ❑Central Lubrication System ®Heat Protection ❑Extended Grease Fittings ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 10 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DATA SHEET UV CRANE Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): UV01 BOO BRC01 Equipment Capacity: 1 tons Equipment Location: ❑Indoors ❑Outdoors ®Outdoor with Canopy GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance Number of Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply: Voltage: 461 Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 Hz II BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ®Single Girder ❑Double Girder ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp:0.50 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon Accessories: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Extended Grease Fittings Type: ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑ D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 0.50 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Heat Requirements: ❑Heat Protection ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): Urn (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 6.5 to 40 ❑Constant Speed []Two Speed ®Variable Speed Motor hp:7.50 ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DATA SHEET BNR CRANES Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): BRB01 COO BRC01 & BRB01 COO BRC02 Equipment Capacity: 5 tons Equipment Location: ❑Indoors ®Outdoors ❑Outdoor with Canopy GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance Number of Units: Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply: Voltage: 461 Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 Hz I BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ®Single Girder ❑Double Girder ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) EC (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) OF (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp:0.50 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon Accessories: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Extended Grease Fittings Type: ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) E (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 1.00 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Heat Requirements: ❑Heat Protection ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑H1 (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 3.2 to 20 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed ®Variable Speed Motor hp:7.50 ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 12 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY CRANE DATA SHEET SOLIDS 1 Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): SHB01 F00 TRC01 Equipment Capacity: 7.5 tons Equipment Location: ®Indoors []Outdoors ❑Outdoor with Canopy GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance Number of Units: Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply: Voltage: 461 Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 Hz I BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ❑Single Girder ®Double Girder ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ❑Constant Speed ®Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp:0.5 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon Accessories: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Extended Grease Fittings ®Operator Platform Type: ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) ®C (moderate) ❑ D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ❑Constant Speed ®Variable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 0.75 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Heat Requirements: ❑Heat Protection ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑Hl (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 3.2 to 20 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed ®Variable Speed Motor hp:7.5 ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD CRANES JULY 30, 2026 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE DATA SHEET SOLIDS 2 Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Equip. Tag Number(s): SHB01 F00 TRC01 Equipment Capacity: 5 tons Equipment Location: ®Indoors ❑Outdoors ❑Outdoor with Canopy GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing: ®Required ❑Not Required Field Testing: ❑Not required ®Required, functional and Performance Number of Units: Rev/Date/By: / / Power Supply: Voltage: 461 Phase: 3 Frequency: 60 Hz I BRIDGE I TROLLEY I HOIST II Type: ❑Single Girder ®Double Girder ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) NC (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) OF (continuous) Speed (fpm): 100 ❑Constant Speed NVariable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp:0.5 Main Runway Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar NFestoon Accessories: ❑Central Lubrication System ❑Extended Grease Fittings NOperator Platform Type: ®Top Running ❑Underhung Service Class (CMAA): ❑A (standby) ❑B (light) NC (moderate) ❑D (heavy) ❑E (severe) ❑F (continuous) Speed (fpm): 65 ❑Constant Speed NVariable Speed ❑Hand Operated Motors hp: 0.75 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar NFestoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Heat Requirements: ❑Heat Protection ❑Heater Required See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain Service Class (ANSI): ❑HI (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard NH4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) Speed (fpm): 3.2 to 20 ❑Constant Speed ❑Two Speed NVariable Speed Motor hp:7.5 ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Special Electrical Requirements: OVERHEAD CRANES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 22 13.13 SUPPLEMENT - 14 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 4122 23.16 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Portable hoist capable of providing the required reach to lift the equipment. Hoists shall be furnished with all accessories to provide a complete and functional system. a. Portable hoists shall break down into portable components with no single components weighing more than 53 pounds (24 kg). Carrying handles shall be welded to mast and boom. 2. Pedestal mount or flush mount for each crane, as shown on the Drawings. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 91 14 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Division 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS -NOT USED 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products in accordance with Paragraph 1.07. JULY 30, 2026 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 41 2223.16- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. B. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of the proposed product for a minimum of 5 years with a satisfactory performance record. C. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of Section 00-00 01 61 00"Product 6 Requirements." 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Them, Inc., model Commander 2000 lb; 2. Halliday Products; 3. Vestil Manufacturing; 2.02 SYSTEMS COMPONENTS A. Crane 1. Cranes shall have a variable lift capacity based on boom length. Boom shall telescope up to 4 different lengths with a minimum hook reach, measured from mast center to hook center. PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH JULY 30, 2026 41 2223.16-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Hook height shall be adjustable by moving the boom up or down between horizontal and 45 degrees from vertical, with a minimum hook height differential. 3. Boom angle shall be adjustable with a hand operated screw jack acting to raise or lower the boom between horizontal and 45 degrees from vertical. 4. Boom Sheave: a. Wire rope shall pass over a sheave at the end of the boom. b. Sheave shall have a bronze bearing and shall be supported by a D - shaped machined clevis pin which shall be keyed to the boom to keep the pin from rotating. 5. Mast and boom shall rotate 360 degrees in the base on a pin bearing in the bottom of the base, with a rotational handle attached to the mast to facilitate rotation. Crane shall include a Nylatron (or equivalent) bearing sleeve to support the mast at the top of the base. 6. Crane shall be equipped with a winch mounting bracket that connects to the boom with a quick connect pin allowing the winch to be attached or removed without tools. Winch shall attach to the bracket using standard fasteners. 7. Crane shall be constructed of welded constructed structural steel pipe and tubing. B. Winch 1. Winch shall have a quick disconnect cable anchor and a positive load holding automatic brake able to stop and hold the load automatically when operation is halted. 2. Winch shall be a zinc -plated, worm gear hand winch. 3. Type 316 stainless steel fasteners shall be furnished to mount winch to crane. 4. Lifting winch shall be located such that the center point of the drive shaft is behind the centerline of the mast. C. Mounted Base 1. Provide pedestal mounted bases and flush mounted bases as shown on the drawings. D. Wire Rope 1. Provide wire rope with swivel hook and swaged ball fitting. Wire rope shall be sized by the equipment SUPPLIER. 2. Wire rope material shall be 1/4" galvanized steel 3. Wire rope shall be able to meet the requirements as specified in the Crane Spec Sheet 2.03 FINISHES A. All equipment items shall be galvanized or stainless steel. JULY 30, 2026 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 41 2223.16-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.04 MOTORS - NOT USED 2.05 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS -NOT USED 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Rotational Roller Bearing and Positional Lock: Crane shall be provided with a rotational roller bearing and multi -position lock to keep the crane from rotating B. Wire Rope Keeper: Provide a wire rope keeper compatible with the swaged ball fitting onthe wire rope. The swaged ball fitting on the wire rope can be inserted into the slot on the wire rope keeper to allow the wire rope to remain attached to the load when the crane is moved to another base location. C. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners in accordance with Section 05 05 20 "Anchor Bolts and Concrete Inserts," as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the equipment SUPPLIER. Size and locations as required by SUPPLIER. SUPPLIER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of/z-inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the equipment supplier's installation instructions. D. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish a 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. E. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs F. Base Extender: Provide three (3) base extenders for mixer cranes, capable of adding 14 inches to hook height of cranes 2.07 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Provide lubricants of types, quantities, and brands of oil and grease necessary for startup and initial operation. Install the recommended lubricants and comply with SUPPLIER -recommended procedures. B. Supply one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. C. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH JULY 30, 2026 41 2223.16-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 3.02 PREPARATION - NOT USED 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment per this Section and the SUPPLIER's installation instructions. 3.04 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests 1. Field Testing: The portable lifting units shall be field-tested with a verified load equal to their rated capacity. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 41 2223.16-5 MARYS CREEK WRF CRANE SPEC SHEET Parameter Mixer Internal Recycle Fermenter mixer & Pumps pump Total Quantity 28 8 4 Equipment Weight 150-500 600-800 100-250 Range (lbs) Lift Height Below 24.0 21.0 24.0 Floor (ft) Shortest Boom Lifting Capacity 1000 2000 300 (lbs) Longest Boom Lifting Capacity 550 1100 550 (lbs) Min Hook Reach (inches), CL mast to 36 46 3tt6 CL hook Max Hook Reach (inches), CL mast to 66 82 66 CL hook Mount Type Pedestal Pedestal Flush PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE AND WINCH JULY 30, 2026 41 2223.16-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 4122 23.19 MONORAIL HOISTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup, and test the following: 1. Motorized hoist and trolley monorail system (OPS01-T001-MOR01). B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Division 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): MH27. 1, Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B30.10, Hooks. b. B30.16, Overhead Underhung and Stationary Hoists. c. B30.17, Cranes and Monorails (with Underhung Trolley or Bridge. d. HST 1M, Performance Standard for Electric Chain Hoists. e. HST 2M, Performance Standard for Hand Chain Manually Operated Chain Hoists. f. HST 4M, Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MONORAIL HOISTS MARCH 27, 2026 412223.19-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 674, Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Monorail System: Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems, ANSI MH27.1 and ASME B30.17. B. Hoist: ASME B30.17, Hoist Manufacturers' Institute. C. Trolley: ANSI MH27.1. D. Wire Rope Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 4M. E. Chain Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 1M. F. Hook: ASME 30.10. G. Stress and Safety Factors: ANSI MH27.1 and ASME B30.17. Properly select materials of construction for stresses to which subjected. H. Safety of Operation, Accessibility, Interchangeability, and Durability of Parts: ASME B30.17 and OSHA requirements. I. Provide system, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorages, designed in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of construction, and specifications on hoist, wheels, gears and bearing, trolley drive system, hoist motor and assemblies, hook, brakes, starting system, variable speed drive system, conductors (bus bar, festoon, cable reel), controls, remote control system, and accessories. c. Dimensioned crane system drawings to indicate the following: 1) Monorail extents and end stops. MONORAIL HOISTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 2223.19-2 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2) Monorail electrification and connection point. 3) Pendant connection point and cable length, as applicable. 4) Hoist hook high and low travel limits relative to trolley runway surface. 5) Hoist and trolley dimensions and recommended clearances, and dimensions of electrification system to define clearance to structure. 2. Detail Shop Drawings of monorail track, brackets, hangers, and their attachments to building structural steel. 3. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 4. Motor nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and include any motor modifications. 5. Factory fmish system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Factory functional test report. 2. Structural design calculations for runway beams and support system, and calculations of deflection and loads on building steel stamped by a registered professional engineer. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 5. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance that the factory finish system is identical to the requirements specified herein. 6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 7. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 9. Field performance test procedures for load testing. 10. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 11. Field functional and performance test reports and log. 12. Load test report and certification for crane use for each crane. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Indoor Applications: 1. Temperature: Maximum 110 degrees F; minimum 10 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 100 percent. 3. Atmosphere: Mildly corrosive and moist. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MONORAIL HOISTS 412223.19-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Ventilation: Atmospheric B. Outdoor Applications: 1. Temperature: Maximum 120 degrees F; minimum 10 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 100 percent. 3. Atmosphere: Mildly corrosive 4. Ventilation: Atmospheric. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish for each remote -control crane: 1. One transmitter. 2. One battery. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Hoist and trolley manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with steel structures, drive motor, hoisting cable or chain, hook, track, stops, and electrical equipment controls. B. Where adjustable speed drives or remote -control systems are required, crane manufacturer to furnish a coordinated operating system. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. American Crane and Equipment Corporation. 2. ProservAnchor Crane Group. 3. ACE Industries, Inc. MONORAIL HOISTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 2223.19-4 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Konecranes USA. 5. P&H Morris Material Handling. 6. Anchor Crane and Hoist 7. FIM 2.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. See supplements to this section for additional requirements. 2.04 TRACK A. Furnish monorail track in accordance with Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. B. Track Design Criteria: 1. Cross -Section: Design for stresses not exceeding 60 percent of material's yield strength and deflection not to exceed 1/800 of span. 2. Span: Not to exceed 45 feet with one load per span used in computing total capacity of track. Lower load -carrying flange minimum of 3 -1/4 -inch width and have raised running or wear tread. 3. Couplings: Web type at track joints with maximum gap at track ends of load -carrying flange of 1/16 inch and 3/16 inch at turntable, switch, or free ends. 4. Stops: Furnish stops and impact -absorbing bumpers at open track ends. 5. Design for vertical force increased by 25 percent for impact. 6. Design for longitudinal force of 10 percent of vertical force. 7. Design for torsional forces caused by eccentric loading, lateral forces, or offset connections. 8. Consider fatigue and stress on bottom flange due to wheel loading. C. Track Suspension: 1. Furnish clamps, hanger rods, and fittings to support live and dead load of hoist, trolley, controls, motors, and track. 2. Hanger Rods: High carbon, cold -rolled alloy steel with unified national fine, Class 2 screw thread ends. 3. Vertical Adjustment: 1 inch adjustable. 4. Lubricant: Permanent factory prelubricated joints. 2.05 TROLLEY A. Frame: Welded steel, cast steel, or ductile iron construction, or a combination thereof. Construct to control deflection of trolley assembly while transmitting the carrying load to running surface. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MONORAIL HOISTS 412223.19-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Drive shall consist of trolley drive shaft, driven by an electric motor through a gear reduction unit. C. Drive shall consist of chain sprocket mounted on shaft. Furnish chain to within 5 feet of operating floor level. Drive shaft shall drive the trolley wheels through a gear and pinion or spur gear arrangement. D. Furnish roller assembly stabilizers on single -girder trolley units to prevent tipping during load pickup. E. Wheels: Rolled or forged steel, accurately machined and ground to receive inner bearing races. Furnish fixed alloy steel axles. Minimum tread hardness 210 Brinell. F. Drive Gears: Helical, spur or herringbone type, rolled or cast steel, with machine cut teeth. G. Bearings: Combination radial and thrust type, double row, angular contact ball bearings or single row tapered roller bearings. Bearings prelubricated and sealed or fitted for pressure lubrication. Locate pressure lubrication fittings for accessibility during maintenance. H. Brakes: Suitable for service class and rated torque capacities as specified in ASME B30.17. 2.06 WIRE ROPE HOIST A. Hoisting machinery shall consist of rope drum driven through gear reductions, load blocks, hook, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking. Drum size and length sufficient for minimum two turns of cable remaining on drum when hook is at lowest position. Furnish reeving as specified on Supplements at end of section. Provide right and left-hand grooved drum when two-part double reeving is specified. B. Rope drum and surrounding members constructed to minimize abrasion, crushing, or jamming of hoist rope. Load blocks enclosed type. Hoisting rope extra flexible, improved plow steel wire rope, made especially for hoist service. C. Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure, equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load and positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other devices. D. Brakes: Mechanical and electric load brake and controls, designed in accordance with ASME 4M, and adjustable to compensate for wear. MONORAIL HOISTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 2223.19-6 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.07 CHAIN HOIST A. Hoisting Machinery: Load chain wheel driven through gear reductions, an electric motor, load blocks, sheaves, chain, hook, and hoist braking. B. Chain: Non jamming alloy type. Chain hoists shall have chain storage adequate for storing full lift length of chain and shall be designed and located to avoid interference while hoisting. C. Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure, equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load, and positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other devices. D. Brakes: In accordance with ASME HST 1M and ASME HST 2M, adjustable to compensate for wear, spring set, electric release load brake system, which releases load when drive motor is energized and holds load when the drive motor is de -energized. E. ELECTRICAL F. Furnish electrical equipment including motors, motor starters, control systems, wire, and conduit. G. Electrical: In accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 610. H. Provide 120V ac rated space heater for outdoor motors that shall be activated when motor is not running. I. Furnish motors compatible with adjustable frequency, variable speed, drive system, 40 to 1 speed range, suitable for hoist, trolley, and bridge drive applications. Controls with 120V ac, microprocessor based, pulsed width modulation design, withstand 45 degree C temperatures, housed in NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, and supplied with 200 percent overcurrent protection. Monorail conductor voltage drops from monorail track supply taps shall permit the hoist and trolley motors to operate within voltage tolerances of plus or minus 10 percent, when building supply voltage is at plus or minus 5 percent of design voltage. K. Enclosed Bus Bar Conductors: Galvanized Steel strip enclosed in insulation. Collector sliding shoe type, with adjustable spring tension arms for contact between bus bar and controls. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MONORAIL HOISTS 412223.19-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF L. Enclosed Bus Bar Conductors: hard copper enclosed in insulation. Collector sliding shoe type, with adjustable spring tension arms for contact between bus bar and controls. Collector mechanism components aluminum, stainless steel, plastic, or other noncorrosive materials. M. Festooned Flat Cable Conductors: Flexible cable, carried by heavy-duty roller, permanently lubricated roller bearings, with monorail support system that will dispense and retrieve flexible cable without twisting or tangling, and 20 percent spare conductor in each cable assembly. N. Cable Reel Conductors: Flexible cable, housed on a circular wheel, counter - torque spring to dispense and retrieve cable, with sag not more than 3 feet below connection point on hoist or trolley at maximum travel. O. Grounding: External in accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 250. 2.08 CONTROLS A. Hoist and Trolley: Momentary contact pushbuttons with a device which will disconnect motors from line on failure of power. Device shall not permit any motor to be restarted until controller handle is brought to the OFF position, or a reset switch or button is operated. Furnish with undervoltage protection as a function of each motor controller, or by magnetic main line contactor. B. Pushbuttons: Fully magnetic, plain reversing type, housed in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure, with contactors of sufficient size and quantity for starting, accelerating, reversing, and stopping duty for specified hoist service class. C. Trolley Drives: Soft start controls, 460/230V ac series device, installed between drive motor and motor starter with torque and acceleration rate adjustable, suitable for trolley drive service, and work in conjunction with crane control remote system. D. Remote Control System: Infrared, line -of -sight system, handheld and capable of operating all crane functions. E. Control motions indicate direction of resultant monorail motion. Furnish spring -loaded switch motions, with return to OFF position when switch is released and designed to prevent runaway monorail situations. F. Monorail motions shall stop automatically when monorail can no longer receive remote signals and designed to stop when control signal for any motion becomes ineffective. G. Remote Control Monorail Motions: Hook raise and lower, trolley movement, and monorail power up and power down. Furnish an EMERGENCY OFF MONORAIL HOISTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 2223.19- 8 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF pushbutton station which will disconnect main line power via a remote switch, and manual reset function to activate all motions after an EMERGENCY OFF event. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die - stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location. B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. 2.10 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, System No. 5. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels and equipment for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function. B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: No-load run test on all equipment furnished. C. Factory test report shall include Test Data Sheets PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Provide lubrication and lubrication fittings. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. Finish coat equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, System No. 5. 3.03 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. Equipment testing and facility startup shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Facility startup specifies order and prerequisites for the following tests of equipment: 1. ORT 1 testing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MONORAIL HOISTS MARCH 27, 2026 412223.19-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Field functional testing. 3. ORT 2 testing. 4. Performance testing. 5. Demonstration testing. C. Field testing and facility startup shall be performed using a qualified representative provided by manufacturer as specified in Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services, and as specified herein. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each hoist and monorail system. 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. B. Field Performance Test Procedures: 1. Proposed load test procedures shall be developed by hoist supplier and submitted to Owner's Representative for review, comment, and approval. 2. Submit test procedures at least 30 days in advance of specific hoist testing. 3. Testing shall not begin until test procedures have been approved by the Owner's Representative. C. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each hoist and monorail system. 2. Load tests in compliance with OSHA, ASME B30.17, and ANSI MH27.1 D. Submit completed Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Refer to Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded. 1. 1/2 person -days per crane for installation assistance. 2. 1/2 person -days per crane for performance testing and facility startup. MONORAIL HOISTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 41 2223.19- 10 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.06 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification. 1. Hoist/Monorail Data Sheet. 2. Hoist/Monorail Dimension Sheet. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MONORAIL HOISTS MARCH 27, 2026 412223.19-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MONORAIL HOISTS 412223.19-12 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF HOIST/MONORAIL DATA SHEET [A: , System No. 11 Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Manufacturer.: Owner: City of Fort Worth Model No.: Service: Wastewater Treatment Plant Number of Units: Equip. Tag Number(s): TBD Rev/Date/By: / / GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Equipment Capacity:5 tons Factory Testing: Power Supply: Equipment Location: ®Required ❑Not Required Voltage 460 ®Indoors ❑Outdoors Field Testing: ❑Not required Phase: 3 ❑Outdoor with Canopy ®Required, functional and Frequency: 60 Hz performance HOIST TROLLEY Type: Type: ®Electric, Wire Rope ❑Hand Operated, Chain ❑Top Running ®Underhung Service Class (ANSI): Service Class (ANSI): ❑HI (standby) ❑H2 (light) ❑H3 (standard) ❑Al (standby) ❑A2 (infrequent) ❑B (light) ®H4 (heavy) ❑H5 (severe) ®C (moderate) ❑D (heavy) Speed (fpm): 6.5 to 40 Speed (fpm): 65 Li Constant Speed ❑Two Speed ®Variable Speed ®Constant Speed ❑Variable Speed Li Hand Operated Motor hp: 15 Motor hp: 0.5 Electric Conductors: ❑Bus Bar ®Festoon ❑ ❑Cable Reel SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Accessories: Heat Requirements: ❑Class 1 Division 2 Equipment Li Central Lubrication System ❑Heat Protection ❑Extended Grease Fittings ❑Heater Required Special Electrical Requirements: See Hoist/Monorail Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MONORAIL HOISTS MARCH 27, 2026 41 22 23.19 SUPPLEMENT 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF HOIST/MONORAIL DIMENSION SHEET [A: , System No. 11 Building Clearances for Monorail Cranes Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equipment Tag Number(s): TBD G: See Drawings A: 28' B: 38' C (MAX): 5' Notes: 1. Monorail Track Length: 28' D (MAX): 1'-6" E (MAX): 1'-6" F: See Drawings PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MONORAIL HOISTS MARCH 27, 2026 41 22 23.19 SUPPLEMENT -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 43 11 12 BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. High speed turbo blowers with integral variable frequency drives in sound attenuation enclosures to supply process air to the bioreactors. Four (4) high speed turbo blowers shall be provided. During max day conditions the fourth blower shall be used and during all other flow conditions the fourth blower shall be the online spare. Refer to Paragraph 1.03 of this Section for a more detailed description of the blower system. The blowers shall operate at the conditions specified in the table at the end of this Section. 2. An integrated local control panel for each blower unit, consisting of a disconnect switch, operator interface screen, variable frequency drive or inverter, Ethernet based PLC control system, alarms, indicator lights, push- buttons, and related controls. In lieu of an Ethernet based PLC control system, an Ethernet based CPU microprocessor installed in each blower unit that functions with the PLC based master control panel may be used. If the controls are CPU microprocessor controller based, the blower manufacturer shall provide one (1) spare pre -loaded controller in lieu of program software backup. 3. Equipment, accessories, and controls supplied by the blower manufacturer shall include the following for each blower unit: a. High speed turbo blower with direct connected drive motor. b. Inlet filter with noise suppression cover. c. Blow -off valve. d. Blow -off silencer. e. Flexible connectors. f. Discharge check valve. g. Butterfly outlet valves. h. Local control panels (LCP) to control and monitor each blower unit. LCP shall be capable of transferring data to and communicating with the master control panel (MCP). The manufacturer will provide an MCP as part of the scope. i. Variable frequency drive or inverter to vary the speed of the blower motor. j. Instrumentation for pressure, temperature, vibration, and flow monitoring. k. Accessories, consisting of gauges (if applicable), and related items necessary for a complete and operable system. 1. Provide external or internal harmonic filter, if required to meet the requirements of IEEE 519. m. Sound attenuation enclosure. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF n. Installation assistance, equipment startup, performance testing, and placing in service. o. Training of Owner's Personnel. 4. Refer to P&ID's, Drawings, and Division 40 Sections regarding the control logic and description for additional equipment monitoring and control information as applicable. C. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing E. 1.02 REFERENCES A. References: Following is a list of standards, which might be referenced in this Section: 1. ASME International (ASME): a. PTC-13 Performance Test Code on Compressors and Exhausters b. PTC-19.2 Pressure Measurement c. PTC-19.3 Temperature Measurement d. PTC-19.5 Flow Measurement 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHREA): a. 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air -Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C423 — Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method b. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials c. E90 — Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements d. E162 - Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source e. E662 - Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.(IEEE): a. 519 — Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems 5. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG -1, Motors and Generators. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electric Code. I� 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description Summary 1. The SUPPLIER shall supply high speed turbo blowers in sound attenuation enclosures. 2. The blowers will be installed in the operations building. The operations building is a new building (refer to the Drawings for details on the structure). The blower area will be air conditioned. Blowers shall not draw in blower building air to be used for process air, instead outside air shall be used for process air. 3. Blowers shall not exhaust any heated air inside the air-conditioned blower room. Piping shall convey heat either outside or into the plenum and all discharge piping in the room shall be insulated per the drawings and specifications. Contractor shall coordinate any air balance in the room with louvers (as indicated in the drawings) based on the blower system selected to eliminate any vacuum conditions in the sealed blower room. 4. The blower units will supply air to the bioreactors. The piping configuration and controls will allow the blower units to operate simultaneously while supplying air to a common header which splits air between the membrane tanks. 5. The blower units will be controlled by a master control panel. The master control panel shall be connected to the blower local control panels. 6. The blower units shall be able to operate simultaneously. The blowers shall be able to turn on and off individually when other blowers are operating without going into surge or shutting down. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Operation: a. All equipment, including controls and drives specified herein, shall be specifically designed for the service and the environment to be encountered. b. Designed and capable of continuous and intermittent operation. c. Operate without surge, vibration, hunting, abnormal noise, or excessive heat throughout the entire range of operating conditions. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 3 MARY'S CREEK WRF PLC or CPU microprocessor must have the capability to dynamically adjust the blowers speed to prevent these possible conditions. d. Blower's head -capacity curve shall slope downward continuously (but not necessarily at the same slope) with increasing capacity and decreasing head. e. Blowers with curves that reflect two possible capacities for a given pressure (head) will not be acceptable. f. Blower shall be designed to handle air for the rated conditions listed in the table at the end of this Section. 2. Blower manufacturer shall inform Contractor and Engineer regarding any additional requirements, such as piping changes, external wiring and conduit requirements, and related work required to accomplish the arrangement shown on the Drawings. All coordination work for a fully functioning system shall be accomplished at no change in the Contract Price. B. Noise Requirement: After reaching operational speed, noise emission from the blower system shall not exceed 80 dBA at a distance of five (5) feet from the equipment in any direction under free field conditions. C. Structural Performance: All equipment, supports, anchors and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with starting, turbulence, thrusts, thermal expansion and contraction, and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. Anchor bolts shall be provided by the General Contractor. General Contractor to coordinate with blower supplier on anchor bolt details. D. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described are based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this Section. Arrangements other than those shown on Drawings shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Provide plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Complete Bill of materials clearly identifying Model number, Description, Quantity of each item and identifying label used inside the panel and on panel drawings, including motor, VFD, and harmonic filters. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Specific design parameters for this project as specified herein. 4. Layout, sizes, types and materials of construction for equipment to be furnished. 5. Power Guarantee: Submit guaranteed power draw values in accordance with the table at the end of this Section. 6. Preliminary Factory Test. Submit results of past performance testing to certify that the proposed model and size has been previously tested. Preliminary performance testing shall meet the requirements described in Paragraph 2.08 of this Section. Failure to meet these requirements will result in immediate rejection. 7. Provide performance curves indicating pressure, speed, capacity (as scfm), horsepower, input kW, and efficiency, over the range of operation. Curves shall show entire operating range of the blower. The curve shall show the surge boundary, operation limits of the blower, and air flow corresponding to a rise -to -surge of 0.5 psi. Provide curves for the minimum and maximum temperatures in the table at the end of this Section. 8. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. a. Labels on the control schematic for control relays, instrumentation switches, indication lights, etc., shall correspond to the equipment tags/labels indicated on the control schematic Drawings included in the plans. Include a label above each timing relay indicating the range and setpoint of the timing relay. b. Detail wiring diagrams and differentiate between instrumentation suppliers and field -installed customer wiring. Show both power and control wiring. Show terminal strip information identifying all customer field terminations. Provide project specific wiring diagrams. Generic wiring diagrams are not acceptable. c. Terminal strip layout shall also include a label next to each connection indicating a signal description. Handwritten terminal numbers are not acceptable. d. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely -mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. e. Provide calculations showing scope of supply meets the requirements of IEEE 519. 9. Complete motor nameplate data, motor manufacturer, and in accordance with the motor specification section. 10. Equipment weights and lifting points. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 11. Warranties and service agreements. 12. P&ID diagram of the blower with VFD and control system. C. Controls Submittal The submittal shall include a complete instrument list or Bill of Materials (BOM) including all instruments to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. Instrument tagging shall adhere to the loop numbering and tagging scheme shown within the Drawings and Specifications. Controller/Transmitter details shall include, at a minimum: a. Physical: Size and dimensions of equipment, Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts. b. Ratings: NEMA rating, hazardous area classification, and temperature ratings for the equipment. c. Electrical Requirements: Note Voltage, power requirements (two -wire or four -wire) and power consumption data, conduit entry size and terminal details (location, wire range and maximum torque). d. Input/Outputs: Input and output characteristics and types. e. Installation Details: Mountain detail in sufficient detail to determine compliance with requirements of the contract documents. f. Internal Features: Communication protocols, control functions, programming parameters, jumper settings, software features and licensing requirements. g. Range, size and graduation in engineering units. h. Accuracy and repeatability. i. Complete manufacturer/model number. 2. Panel assembly and elevation drawings shall be drawn to scale and detail all equipment in or on the panel. Panel drawings shall be at least 1 lxl 7 (inch) print size. As a minimum, the panel drawings shall include interior and exterior panel elevation drawings to scale, nameplate schedule, conduit access locations, and panel construction details. 3. Panel control schematics and interconnection diagrams detailing the electrical connections of all equipment in and on the panel. Diagrams shall include power and signal connections, UPS and normal power sources, all panel ancillary equipment, protective devices, wiring and wire numbers, and terminal blocks and numbering. 4. Point to point 11O wiring diagrams depicting wiring within the panel as well as connections to external devices. The diagram shall identify all device terminal points that the system connects to, including terminal points of equipment provided by others. Wiring labeling used on the drawings shall match that shown on the Contract Documents or as developed by the manufacturer and approved by the Owner/Engineer. Field device wiring shall include the device ISA-tag and a unique numeric identifier. PLC I/O wiring shall be numbered with rack number, slot number, and point number. Two -wire and four -wire equipment shall be clearly identified and power sources noted. Submit final wire numbering scheme for approval by the BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF Owner/Engineer. Point -to -Point drawings shall be 11x17 (inch) minimum in size. 5. Submit construction details, NEMA ratings, intrinsically safe barrier information, gas sealing recommendations, purging system details, etc. for panels located in hazardous locations or interfacing to equipment located in hazardous areas. 6. Submit evidence that all control panels shall be constructed in conformance with UL 508 and bear the UL seal confirming the construction. Specify if UL compliance and seal application shall be accomplished at the fabrication location or by field inspection by UL inspectors. All costs associated with obtaining the UL seal and any inspections shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the contract. 7. Testing Plan. a. Test Procedure Submittals: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed for each test. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests. Include sign -off forms for each testing phase or loop with sign - off areas for the Supplier, Engineer, and Owner. Refer to Section 3 for specific testing requirements, and submit separate procedures for each specified test phase. b. Test Documentation: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed -off test procedures. Testing shall not be considered complete until the signed - off test procedures have been submitted and favorably reviewed. Submittals of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring diagrams with field technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the formal test documentation. c. Each loop shall have a Loop Status sign -off form to organize and track its inspection, adjustment and calibration. d. Each active analog subsystem element shall have a Component Calibration form. 8. Programming a. Submit color copies of all graphic screens developed for this project for the Blower Local Control Panel touchscreen panels. Graphics will be reviewed for approval by the Owner/Engineer. b. Submit input/output lists for all controllers provided for this project. c. Each input/output point shall have a dedicated tag and descriptor. d. Requirements Documents format per Section 40 61 93 and 40 68 00. e. Submit preliminary and final OIT graphics per Section 40 68 00 Requirements. f. Submit control descriptions per Section 40 68 00 Requirements. g. Submit Modbus TCP/IP memory maps and input/output lists for all PLCs provided for this project. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO 431112-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF a. Provide in accordance with Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." b. Software Maintenance Manuals shall comply with Section 40 68 00 requirements, and also include native copies of all OTT and PLC program file backups. E. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's technician, if applicable. 6. Location of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 7. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of five years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 8. Factory Test Reports: a. Submit factory Testing Documentation per section 01 45 23 and section 40 61 21 requirements. b. Submit Operational Readiness Testing Documentation per Section 40 61 21 Requirements. c. Submit Functional Demonstration Testing Documentation per Section 40 61 21 Requirements. 9. Source quality -control reports. 10. Field quality -control reports. 11. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: a. PLC Based Control System: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. b. CPU Based Control System: One (1) spare CPU 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least twenty (20) U.S. installations of the type being proposed, with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 2. Testing and manufacturing facility located in North America. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. 4. Certified to ISO 9001 by an accredited certification agency. B. Manufacturer's Technician Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Equipment units of each type specified in this Section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This does not require that all equipment be manufactured by a single manufacturer, but does require that the manufacturer of the system shall be responsible for the complete system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the requirements within A Section 00-00 01 61 00 "Product Requirements." B. The enclosure space heaters shall be connected and energized by the Contractor upon receipt of the blower assembly at the j obsite. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. System Arrangement: 1. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this Section are typically based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The equipment MANUFACTURER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this Section. 2. Modifications to structural design due to a manufacturer's varying space requirements, foundation requirements, floor slope requirements, or dimension changes to fit manufacturer specific requirements shall be coordinated by Contractor and included in the Bid. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the piping, electrical, structural, and mechanical layouts to accommodate the system supplied by the blower manufacturer. B. Environmental Conditions: The blowers will be installed in an air-conditioned and heated building. See Division 23 sections for temperature ranges in the building. Furnish heating, July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO 431112-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF cooling, and insulating elements as required. Note that a space heater in the enclosure is required for each blower unit. 2. The environment could be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. Blower impellers shall be anodized. 3. Designed and capable of operation at the operating conditions listed in the table at the end of this Section. 4. If specific blower manufacturer requires a maximum operating temperature lower than that specified, then that blower manufacturer shall provide additional HVAC improvements to be included in their blower package to maintain their required maximum operating temperature. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements as modified below. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of five (5) years after the date of Final Completion. The cost of removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty and correction of defective work. C. Warranty Period for Special Equipment Warranty: Each turbo blower shall be provided with a ten (10) year / 50,000 start/stop bearing guarantee. Blower supplier shall replace bearings or core if a failure of the bearings occur. 2. Typical replacement parts of filters or sensors shall be available for shipment within 24 hours or the parts are free of charge from the manufacturer. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish spare parts, packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings, which shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. B. Provide the following spare parts: Spare parts shall include, but not be limited to: a. Two (2) air pre -filter per blower or two additional final air filters if the blower does not have pre -filters. b. Two (2) fmal air filter per blower. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF c. One (1) CPU microprocessor controllers for systems without PLC based control systems. 2. Special tools necessary to maintain the equipment. 3. Other parts recommended by the manufacturer as typically needed in the first two (2) years of operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. APG-Neuros 2. Sulzer 3. Kaeser 2.02 BLOWER A. General Description: Blower shall be magnetic bearing type turbo blower; not requiring oils or lubricants for operation; and capable of variable speed and output selection. B. Components: 1. Casing Design: a. Maximum continuous duty design temperature of 400°F. b. Design pressure of 50 psig. 2. Impellers: a. Type: Backswept three dimensional high efficiency configuration. b. Material: Forged or cast aluminum alloy; or cast stainless steel. c. First Lateral Critical Speed: At least 120 percent of maximum operating speed. d. Mounting: Directly to motor shaft and statically and dynamically balanced. Axial gap between impeller and casing shall be adjusted by shims. 3. Bearings: Designed for a minimum of 50,000 on/off cycles. 2.03 MOTORS A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Each blower shall be equipped with a 460 -volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase, induction type synchronous motor or permanent magnet. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Refer to the table at the end of this Section for the motor horsepower. D. The blower manufacturer shall be responsible for the coordination of the starting torque requirement of the blower and the motor. E. The motor shall be capable of operation at the rated voltage with a variance of +/- 5 percent of the nameplate frequency. F. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated frequency with a voltage variance of +/- 10 percent of the nameplate voltage. G. Motor Accessories: 1. Provide thermal protectors and transmitters for temperature sensing and alarm. Transmitters shall interface with blower local control system. 2. Motor shall be rated for VFD operation. H. If a motor horsepower rating larger than specified is offered as a substitute and accepted, provide required changes in conductors, motor controllers, overload relays, fuses, switches and other related items with no change in the Contract Price. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL A. All furnished control panels provided under this Section shall conform to the drawings and applicable requirements of Division 40. There shall be a total of one (1) control panel furnished for each system. The panel shall be freestanding and conform to the requirements of Division 26 with regard to construction, wiring, switches, lights, and other devices that require operator interface. The panel shall be witness factory tested by the panel fabricator before shipment B. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this Section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Division 26 and 40 Sections. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Panels: A Power Panel Material Rating Name Supply 316SS Powder 3D%D Local Control Panel, Blower VPLC-771 Coated Mild Steel NEMA 12 No. 1 Note 1 21�Powder 2v%33D Local Control Panel, Blower VPLC-772 Coated Mild Steel NEMA 12 No. 2 Note 1 Powder 3 /�2VIP33D Local Control Panel, Blower VPLC-773Note Coated Mild Steel NEMA 12 No. 3 1 346SS-Powder 3P%T�D Local Control Panel, Blower VPLC-774 Coated Mild Steel NEMA 12 No. 4 Note 1 Note 1: Power Supply: 120 V, Single -Phase, 60 Hz D. Controls: Provide control system for equipment system, but not limited to, for monitoring the following instruments and controls. This list is not intended to completely depict all the functional requirements of the control system provided under this Section. The system supplier shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. 1. Controls mounted on panel face. 2. UL/ULC/TUV certified, with certification label shown on nameplate, at point of manufacturing. E. Local Control Panel: I. Each Local Control Panel shall contain a PLC or CPU Based Control System with Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet interface with the Master Blower PLC (Modicon Premium) to start and shut down the blower in a permissive sequence, receive input, monitor and control operating variables. 2. The control panel shall contain the necessary equipment, instruments, ancillary control devices, and programmable logic controller (PLC) to perform the automation functions of the system. PLCs shall use non- volatile flash memory or other EEPROM memory that does not depend upon a battery to retain memory on a panel power outage. a. PLC shall be either Modicon (Schneider Electric Modicon M340H or M580H series) and shall include a Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet connection. b. PLC shall utilize function block programming. Refer to Section 40 61 96 for general programming requirements including the accumulate run time, device starts, and analog input alarms. c. Refer to 40 61 93, Process Control System — Input/Output List Specification for input/output submittal requirements for system supplier. d. Provide Managed Ethernet Switch in the Control Panel for connecting to the Ethernet Process Control System Network. Switches shall be July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO 43 11 12- 13 MARY'S CREEK WRF industrial harsh environment DIN rail type by Hirschman RSP30 or RSP35 series, or Extreme Networks. No others approved. e. Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to backup control power and instrumentation for the LCP. The UPS shall be sized for 30 minutes of runtime at connected load. For the MCP, a UPS circuit shall be provided. f. A Schneider Electric Harmony HMIDT635XFH operator interface terminal (OIT) shall be provided on the face of each panel to provide the control and monitoring functions as outlined in the section. 3. All controls, alarms, monitoring, and related blower control functions shall be accomplished by a touch screen control system integrated into the local blower controller. Provide the following minimum controls for each blower. a. HAND/OFF/AUTOMATIC 1) AUTO allows the unit to be started, stopped, or speed adjusted from the SCADA, master PLC control panel, or remote HMI control system. 2) HAND allows the unit to be started, stopped, or speed adjusted from the Local Control Panel operator interface. b. RUN, ALARM, and OFF indicating lights (if applicable). c. ALARM reset. d. Sensors, transmitters, and alarm for monitoring the following parameters: 1) Inlet air temperature 2) Outlet air temperature 3) Inlet air pressure 4) Outlet air pressure 5) Air flow rate reported in icfm, acfm, and sc$n 6) Bearing temperature 7) Vibration 4. RTD Monitoring System: a. A motor high temperature (as determined by the blower manufacturer) shuts down the blower and gives an alarm. The PLC shall receive the alarm and the operator interface shall graphically display the RTO signals. b. The alarm/shutdown shall be displayed until reset. c. Provide necessary hardware for direct communication between RTD's, PLC, and Operator Interface. 5. Local Control Panel interface with Master Control Panel and SCADA system: BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 14 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF a. Port shall be configured and tested at the factory prior to shipment to the site, with a memory map of the blower PLC data provided. At a minimum, provide the following signals to the Blower Master PLC Control Panel: 1) Blower ready for start. 2) Blower on. 3) Blower off 4) Speed setpoint. 5) Maximum air flow. 6) Minimum air flow. 7) Common alarm. 8) Blower in local/remote/auto. 9) Communication Heartbeat status b. At a minimum, receive the following signals from the Blower Master PLC Control Panel: 1) Blower start/stop signal 2) Speed setpoint 3) Alarm reset signal c. The PCS shall connect to the Blower Master PLC control panel via Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet for remote monitoring and any available high level control interfaces. d. Manufacturer shall assist in the coordination and field testing of the data link between the Local Blower Control Panels, Master Blower Control Panel and the plant SCADA system. 6. Provide the following discrete outputs: a. Operation status of equipment. 7. Provide the following analog outputs a. Pressure, temperature, flow, flow set point, speed, VFD Hz and other parameters. 8. Provide the following discrete inputs: a. Operation control of equipment. 9. Provide the following analog inputs a. Flow b. Speed c. VFD Hz 10. Memory Map a. TBD July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Local Control Panel shall also include all required transformers, controls, starters, breakers, variable frequency drives or inverters, and related electrical components required for electric motors and blower controls. G. Variable Frequency Drive: 1. Harmonics shall be in full compliance with IEEE 519. 2. VFD shall be UL Certified as manufactured by VACON/KEB/Yaskawa. 3. VFD manufacturer must have demonstrated full factory support in US market and have been established in the market for 10 years or longer. H. Harmonic Filter: 1. Provide she harmonic filters to comply with IEEE 519. 2. Harmonic filter shall filter harmonic noise generated by the VFD on the incoming AC power supply. 3. The harmonic filter shall be supplied in a NEMA 1 enclosure to be installed in the electrical room or internal to the blower enclosure. 4. Installation and wiring shall be performed by the Contractor. 2.05 SOUND ATTENUATION ENCLOSURE A. Design Requirements: 1. Space Heater a. Provide space heater if required to prevent condensation. 2. Flanged intake connection a. Provide each enclosure with a flanged intake with ANSI 150# drilling. 3. Flanged exhaust connection a. Provide each enclosure with a flanged connection, if needed, to c exhaust motor cooling air. Ingesting the motor cooling air exhaust into the compressor will not be accepted. Motor cooling air exhaust shall be piped out of the room. 4. UL/ULC/TUV certified standard sound attenuation enclosure covering the entire blower package. 5. Enclosure shall allow access to the internal components of the blower without having to relocate, reorient, or move the blower in any way. The enclosure shall allow access without having to make changes to the space surrounding the blower. Blower systems that do not allow full and complete access to internal components for the layout and dimensions shown in the drawings will be immediately rejected during submittal review. 6. Joint Construction: Bolted panels, snap -lock joint, or a tongue and groove joint construction. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 16 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF a. Panels with snap -lock joint construction shall be such that adjacent panels are held together rigidly with an integral continuous self- locking joint on both inside and outside panel surfaces. b. Panels with tongue and groove joint construction will be held together with fasteners such as screws. c. Neither panel types should require H -connectors, tape, or any other type of additional connectors. 7. Enclosure Construction: a. Galvanized steel exterior shell, and a solid or perforated interior galvanized steel shell, welded to perimeter and internal longitudinal steel channels and box -end internal closures. b. Outer Shell: Minimum 20 -gauge thickness. c. Inner Shell: Minimum 22 -gauge thickness. d. Perforated material shall have a 23 percent open area. e. Channel Members: ASTM Type A-653 galvanized steel, minimum 18 -gauge thickness. f. Panel Surfaces, Internal Channels, and Trim Items: fabricated from zinc -coated steel with a dipped galvanized coating (minimum G-60 coating class as determined by ASTM A-924), complying with requirements of ASTM A-653 for commercial -quality galvanized carbon steel. g. Enclosure skid shall be heavy duty steel beam construction with fork lift access ports. h. Panel Insulation: 1) Acoustical/thermal insulating material that is noncombustible, inert, mildew -resistant, and vermin -proof. Insulation shall not settle within the enclosure panel. 2) Insulation shall be fire resistant. B. Acoustical Performance: 1. Sound level shall be less than 80 dBa at 5 feet from the blower enclosure under free field conditions. 2. Provide certified testing data obtained from an acoustical laboratory, listing sound absorption and transmission loss characteristics of the enclosure. When requested by the Engineer, the manufacturer shall arrange to have a copy of all pertinent acoustical laboratory reports forwarded directly from the laboratory to the Engineer. 3. When tested according to ASTM C423, the enclosure shall have minimum sound absorption coefficients, as shown in Table 1, in the 1/3 octave band center frequencies. The coefficients used shall be those reported by the acoustical laboratory. July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO 43 11 12-17 MARY'S CREEK WRF TABLE 1 Sound Absorption Coefficients Octave Band (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 4 -inch Panel Construction 0.63 1.09 1.17 1.08 1.03 .97 1.09 2 -inch Panel Construction 0.22 0.64 1.06 1.06 0.98 0.87 0.91 When tested according to ASTM E-90, the enclosure panel shall have minimum airborne sound transmission losses in the combined full octave band center frequencies as listed in Table 2. TABLE 2 Sound Transmission Losses Octave Band (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 STC 4 -inch Panel Construction 16 24 95 45 53 58 37 2 -inch Panel Construction 18 21 29 98 49 55 33 C. Thermal Performance: Insulating materials used in all prefabricated enclosure panels shall have the following maximum thermal conductance at a mean temperature of 75°F: 1. 4 -Inch Panels: 0.06 BTU per hour per square foot per °F. 2. 2 -Inch Panels: 0.12 BTU per hour per square foot per °F. 2.06 FINISHES A. Enclosure: Zinc primer with two layers of powder coating for a total thickness of 4.0 mils. B. Clean all stainless steel surfaces and provide glass bead blast or chemically treat all external non -wetted stainless steel to a uniform finish. C. Machined, polished, and non-ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion prevention compound. 2.07 ACCESSORIES Each blower shall be provided with the following accessories: A. Inlet Filter: 1. Since the blowers will be in a temperature conditioned blower room, the blower intake will be piped to an air plenum that will convey outdoors. 2. Each blower will need a duct connection to the air plenum as shown in the drawings. 3. At the blower enclosure, supply a final filter that is accessible from the side of the enclosure. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 11 12 - 18 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. The final filter media shall have an efficiency of 90 percent by weight per ASHREA 52.2 with synthetic dust equivalent to separation greater than 95 percent at 10 microns. 5. Maximum clean pressure loss across the filter shall be less than 3 inches water column. 6. Suitable for indoor installation and shall be integrally mounted directly to the blower enclosure. B. Flexible Connector: 1. Provide Type 304 stainless steel discharge inlet and motor exhaust expansion joints capable of withstanding the vacuum, pressure, and temperature under all operating conditions. 2. Provide control rods and carbon steel flanges drilled for ASME / ANSI B 16.5, Class 150 bolt pattern. C. Blow -Off Valve: 1. Provide self -powered, electric actuated or pneumatic actuated blow off valve specified in Div 10 27 02 to allow unloaded start-up and stop. 2. Powered by the single point electrical supply by the discharge pressure of the blower. No external power shall be required for the operation of the valve. 3. Blow off valve shall be integral to the packaged blower as a self-contained unit. D. Discharge Cone (if required by Turbo Blower Manufacturer's Equipment Design): 1. Provide a flanged discharge cone, constructed from carbon steel and having a minimum outlet size as the connecting air pipe shown in the Drawing in a configuration that allows piping connection shown on the drawings, at the elevation shown without additional fittings. The discharge cone shall have a flanged side -out for direct bolting to the blow -off valve. The discharge cone shall be located within the sound enclosure. Mounting of the „e outside of the o e Gure will not be accepted. E. Discharge Butterfly Valve: Discharge butterfly valves shall be provided by the Manufacturer. Provide one (1) discharge butterfly valve per blower unit. Refer to Division 40 Section 40 27 02 "Process Valves and Operators", Type V511 for discharge butterfly valve requirements. 2. Contractor shall provide a chain -wheel operator for each discharge butterfly valve. The chain -wheel operator shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the discharge butterfly valve. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 11 12 - 19 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Check Valve: 1. Provide a wafer type discharge check valve of the dual, flat plate type with center hinge, spring closure, Viton B seals, and Type 316 stainless steel plates, stainless steel springs and trims. 2. Valve body must be 316 stainless steel. 3. Rated for temperatures up to 400°Fahrenheit. 4. Provide flat surfaces with resilient seat facing on the body. 5. Suitable for installation in the horizontal or vertical position as indicated on the drawings. 6. Acceptable manufacturers: DeZurik, Keystone, Titan, or Technocheck. G. Blow -Off Valve Silencer: 1. Provide a carbon steel blow off silencer as an integral unit, fitted with a flange for direct bolting to the blow -off valve. 2. Silencer sound attenuation shall not be less than 20 dB. H. Miscellaneous: 1. Equipment Identification Plates: A 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. 2. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. 3. Anchor Bolts: Provide template for anchors in accordance with Division 5 Section 05 05 20 "Anchor Bolts and Concrete Inserts" and as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall furnish and install anchor bolts. 4. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Manufacturer shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. Contractor shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and inspection of the factory assembled equipment shall be accomplished by manufacturer prior to shipment. The entire blower system shall be tested as an operation system for a minimum of four (4) hours at the factory. B. Blower assembly factory performance test shall verify the design points and wire - to -air input power at each design point. Conduct a factory performance test to measure the surge line, noise, and vibration. Comply with the tolerances, instrumentation, data recording/analysis, and quality control guidelines in ASME A-13 (change the power tolerance to zero). BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-20 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. Test equipment shall be calibrated and certified by an independent test agency no more than 12 months prior to the test date. Certificates shall show the stability of calibration over a period of at least one year per ISO 9001. 2. Air flow shall be measured on the discharge side of the compressor at 0 percent tolerance. 3. Calibrated wattmeter shall measure the electrical shaft power to the blower system. Measured power shall include wire -to -air; all losses associated with electrical shaft power, including but not limited to the motor, VFD or inverter, job filter and cooling system. 4. Net delivered flow rate and discharge pressure shall be guaranteed with no negative tolerance. 5. Velocity vibration versus frequency levels shall be recorded within 10- 1,000 and 10-10,000 Hz frequency. C. Test Report: Present computations in exact accordance with ASME PTC-13, with performance curves showing capacity, pressure, and horsepower inputs for each of the flow and pressure conditions guaranteed and provided in the table at the end of this Section. 2. Test results of the motors and blowers shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. D. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, the units will be disassembled into subcomponent assemblies for shipment and installation. At the manufacturer's option, the units may also be shipped to the site as complete units, providing said units can be installed as a complete assembly. E. All control panels shall be factory tested under simulated operating conditions verifying all devices function. F. Complete factory performance assurance testing shall be required prior to shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Prior to plant startup, the Contractor, with the assistance of the manufacturer's technician, shall inspect all equipment for proper assembly and alignment, quiet operation, and proper operation. The systems tested shall include the Local Blower Control Panel PLC and touchscreen for verification of all controls interface and operational requirements prior to shipment to the field. B. Performance Test: The manufacturer's technician shall conduct performance tests on the equipment. The manufacturer shall run the blowers along the full range of July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 1112-21 MARY'S CREEK WRF the speeds indicated in the shop drawing for each blower to verify operation at each design point listed in the table at the end of this Section. I. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for eight consecutive hours to be considered ready for facility startup. 2. Operate the equipment through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system operate within the design conditions. Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. C. Harmonic Mitigation Testing: Contractor shall provide third party electrical harmonic mitigation testing of all VFD's associated with the blower system. The harmonic mitigation test shall be performed at the point of common coupling (PCC) and will be conducted as described below. 1. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that there is no harmonic distortion to the electrical system per IEEE 519. 2. Perform for each blower system for a duration of not less than 24 hours. D. Noise Test: Sound level measurement shall be made at a distance of five (5) feet from the equipment. E. A copy of all information from functional tests, including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the testing program. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Technician: Present at Project site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-22 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF No. Person Days Work Description 1 Installation assistance and inspection. 3 Functional and performance testing. 1/2 Pre -startup classroom or site training. 1 Facility startup. 1 Post -startup training of Owner's personnel. B. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. C. Manufacturer's services and training shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Startup." 3.04 FACILITY STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Startup." After initial startup under the supervision of a qualified representative of the manufacturer, a preliminary "running -in" period will be provided for the Contractor, per the Contract Documents, to make field tests and necessary adjustments. B. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for thirty (30) consecutive days to be considered started up. C. Operate the equipment through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system operate within the design conditions. Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. D. Prepare manufacturer's installation report and submit within 30 days after completion of field testing. Including the following information: 1. Field testing results. 2. Descriptions of installation deficiencies not resolved to the manufacturer's satisfaction. 3. Description of problems or potential problems. July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 1112-23 MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Names of the Owner's personnel who attended operations and maintenance training sessions. 5. Record copy of materials used for training session including outlined summary of course. 6. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Performance. E. At the end of the specified period of operation, the equipment system will be accepted if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the system has operated satisfactorily without excessive power input, wear, lubrication, or undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise and the desired performance has been obtained. END OF SECTION BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-24 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF Table 3: Blower Performance Requirements Parameter Value Barometric Pressure 14.39 psia Blower Room Finish Floor Elevation 784.08 feet Site Elevation 770.00 feet Ambient Temperature and Humidity Control Blowers will be located in an air conditioned blower room. See Division 23 sections for room temperature design Temperature Maximum Operational/Design Inlet/Ambient 110°F Minimum Operational Inlet/Ambient 10°F Relative Humidity at Maximum Temperature 60% Relative Humidity at Minimum Temperature 10% Design Conditions Inlet Filter Clean Pressure Loss 0.2 psi Minimum Discharge Pressure 10.93 psig Blower Turndown from Rated Maximum 40% Design flow BLR01_T01_BL01 BLR01TO1_BL02 Tag Nos. BLR01TO1BL03 BLR01 T01 BL04 Quantity 4 Location Operations Building Capacity at Full Speed and Design Discharge 5,012 scfm Pressure er Blower Capacity at Maximum Turndown and Design 3,263 scfm Discharge Pressure Motor, hp, Minimum 150 Wire -to -Air Power Efficiency at Design 115 kW Condition, Minimum Wire -to -Air Power Efficiency at Design Condition, Maximum Maximum Power Draw of Entire Blower 83 kW per Unit Assembly at Upper Operating Capacity, Design Discharge Pressure, Maximum Inlet Temperature, and Maximum Relative Humidity (3) July 30, 2026 BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 43 1112-25 MARY'S CREEK WRF Notes: (1) Blowers must be capable of operating over the entire air flow range between the lower and upper operating requirement capacities at the design discharge pressure. The capacity requirements must be met at both the "Minimum Design Inlet" and "Maximum Operational/Design Inlet/Ambient" temperatures. (2) Motor shall be non -overloading at the minimum and maximum ambient temperatures at all speeds and operating points along the blower curve. (3) Power draw of the blower unit must include the motor, VFD or inverter, and cooling system. The power draw shall not be more than specified as measured by the factory performance test. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-26 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF APPENDIX A PROCESS AND FLUID COMPONENTS AND ELECTRICAL POWER RELATED COMPONENTS -- FACTORY TESTING CHECKLISTS 1. PROCESS AND FLUID COMPONENTS Included in Performance Boundary No. Component Included in Determine by Not Applicable Test Calculation 1 Inlet filter/silencer X ... ... 2 Inlet silencer ... ... X 3 Discharge cone/silencer X ... ... 4 Inlet isolation valve ... ... X 5 Throttling valve ... ... X 6 After cooler ... ... X 7 Misc. pipe and fittings ... X ... 8 Inlet air cooler ... ... X 9 Discharge check valve X ... .. . 10 Discharge isolation valve X ... ... 11 Enclosure doors or panel openings X 12 Estimated system inlet press. drop X 13 Blow -off valve X ... .. . 14 Blow -off silencer X ... ... 15 Additional components not listed shall be included as forming the blower package. ... ... X July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER BLOWER, HIGH-SPEED TURBO 431112-27 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. ELECTRIC POWER RELATED COMPONENTS Included in Performance Boundary No. Component Included in Determine by Test Calculation Not Applicable 1 Drive Motor X ... ... 2 Motor Cooling Fan(s) ... ... X 3 Magnetic Bearing and ... ... X Controller 4 Bearing cooling fan(s) ... ... X 5 Coolant Pumps ... ... X 6 Lubrication Valve and ... ... X Accessories 7 Heat Exchanger Fans ... ... X 8 Package Cooling Fan ... ... X 9 VFD X ... ... 10 VFD Line Side Power X ... ... Conditioning Equipment 11 VFD Load Side Power X ... ... Conditioning Equipment 12 Eddy Current or Variable ... ... X Speed Clutch 13 Operation Control Panel(s) X ... ... Power/Isolation X ... .. . 14 Transformers and Power Supplies 15 Power Conditioner X ... ... 16 Blower and Motor Cooling X ... ... 17 VFD Cooling X ... .. . 18 Electronics compartment ... ... X A/C Additional components not ... ... ... 19 listed shall be included as forming the blower package. BLOWER, HIGH SPEED TURBO July 30, 2026 43 1112-28 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 43 11 19 FOUL AIR FANS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER of the of the Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System (Section 44 31 11) shall be responsible for providing all equipment listed in this specification section. 2. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLER shall furnish, provide installation guidance, startup, and test two (2) foul air fans for each of the three (3) odor control systems, as shown in the Drawings, and as specified herein for a complete and operable system. Each foul air fan unit shall include all equipment components, materials, accessories, wiring, control system (compatible with the Plant Control System (PCS)), variable frequency drive, and incidentals as required for functional equipment, excluding ducts or dampers. a. Foul air flow to the odor control systems will be controlled by adjustment of the speed of the VFD. 3. To ensure system compatibility, a single supplier is responsible for providing a complete odor control system, the successful operation of each item of equipment in the package, and for the integrated system which also includes Biological Tower -Type Odor Control Systems (Section 44 31 11), and Carbon Adsorbers (44 31 16), as shown on the Drawings. The responsibility of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall include the approval of installation, system optimization, and warranties for the components and performance of the complete Odor Control System. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 — Finishes 4. Section 26 — Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 05 36.13 - Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 7. Section 40 05 64.43 - Fiberglass Dampers PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMIVR MARYS CREEK WRF 8. Section 40 27 02 - Process Valves and Operators 9. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation 10. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 11. Section 44 31 11 - Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 12. Section 44 31 16 - Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 13. Section 44 31 83 - Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Reference Standards: 1. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: a. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. b. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. c. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. d. AMCA 211 - Certified Ratings Program — Air Performance e. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. f. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: a. ASHRAE 51 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: a. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials: a. ASTM C 582, Specification for Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic Laminates for Corrosion Resistant Equipment. b. ASTM D 2563, Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts. c. ASTM D 2563, Visual Acceptance Level II for visual inspection d. ASTM D4167-97 (2002), Standard Specifications for fiber - Reinforced Plastic Fans and Fans. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: a. IEEE 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 7. National Electric Code (NEC) FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-2 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: a. NEMA, MG1 - Motors and Generators. b. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 9. SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council C. Listing, labeling or marking, as conforming to the standards of AMCA, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., American National Standards Institute, Inc., or other nationally recognized testing organization approved by Code, on various pieces of equipment furnished shall be prima facie evidence of conformity with the approved standards for safety to life and property. D. Definitions 1. BHP: Break horsepower. 2. CFM:Cubic feet per minute. 3. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. 4. HDPE: High -density polyethylene. 5. MSL:Mean sea level. 6. rpm: Revolutions per minute. 7. w.c.: Water column. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall submit for review to OWNER or OWNER'S representative, sufficient literature, detailed specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, fabricator or manufacturer, speed, model, size, type, horsepower, service factors, efficiency, materials used, design features, internal construction, weights, and any other information required by OWNER or OWNER'S representative for review of odor control fans and all appurtenances. No odor control fan equipment shall be accepted, and installation shall not be allowed until such review has been completed. 2. Additional requirements for information to be included with Shop Drawings are specified below: a. Submittal for the odor control fans shall include as a minimum the following: 1) Manufacturer's certified rating data. 2) Certified Shop Drawings providing all important materials and details of construction, dimension, and anchor bolt locations. (w/ FINAL PRINTS AFTER APPROVAL). 3) Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF 4) The total weight of the equipment. 5) A complete bill of materials. 6) A list of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's recommended spare parts. Include gaskets, packing, etc., on list. 7) Data on noise in accordance with AMCA #300. 8) Description of surface preparation and shop primer and shop finish coating as specified in this Section. 9) Inlet and outlet connection bolt hole patterns. 10) Results of factory dynamic balance of fan and field check of dynamic balance of fan. 11) Specific design parameters for this project including flow rates and pressure losses for normal conditions. Include AMCA certified fan curves showing efficiency, cfm, outlet velocity, static pressure, brake motor horsepower, and decibel level ratings. 12) Motors: a) Complete submittal per Section 26 20 00 "Low - Voltage AC Induction Motors." b) Letter of Certification the motor is compatible with a variable frequency drive when specified as adjustable speed operation. 13) Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 14) Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. 3. Shop Test Results: a. Submit results of routine factory motor tests. b. Submit results of material tests. 4. Field Test Results: Submit a written report providing the results of the required field tests. 5. Manufacturer's Reports: Submit a written report of the results of each visit by a manufacturer's service person, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed and results obtained. 6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information. 7. Lubricant Specification: Furnish a lubricant specification for the type and grade necessary to meet the requirements of the equipment. 8. Partial or incomplete submittals shall not be reviewed. Any exceptions from this specification shall be itemized in an exceptions table. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF B. Information Submittals: 1. Field Representative Resume 2. Qualifications Statement 3. Previous Installations List 4. Pre -Installation, Special Shipping, Delivery, Storage and Protection, and Handling Instructions 5. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 6. Recommended Equipment Lubricants 7. Samples 8. Certificates 9. Software 10. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 11. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 12. Location and contact information of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 13. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance, with current pricing information. 14. Welding certificates. 15. Startup and test schedule. 16. Source quality -control reports. 17. Field quality -control reports. C. Closeout Submittals 1. Paint 2. Lubricants 3. Spare Parts 4. Operation and Maintenance Data 5. Warranty Documentation 6. Record Data Documentation 7. Extra Stock Materials 8. Tools and Software 9. Project Record Documents: Record action locations of installed dimensions on As-Builts. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF B. Field Representative: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a qualified field representative for the time indicated in Paragraph 3.05.A of this Section. Field representatives shall be factory -employed personnel and have a minimum of two (2) years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have three (3) years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. For each training event two separate pre -startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. Two separate post -startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and startup assistance with OWNER'S personnel. A typed outline shall be handed out at each training session and, at a minimum, will include normal operating parameters, alarms, and maintenance. C. Manufacturer shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas or shall have next business day delivery of spare parts not exceeding 50 pounds in weight. D. All parts exceeding 50 pounds in weight shall be available within 500 miles or able to be delivered within 48 hours of parts request. E. Qualifications: Equipment shall be the product of an EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER having at least twenty (20) similar system installations experience in the United States of the type proposed, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. F. Previous Installations List: A list of similar installations demonstrating the experience requirement shall be furnished. List shall include EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER name. Each installation shall include project State, project City, project name, project date, equipment model number, client name(s), and client phone number(s). G. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish all equipment with a stainless steel nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the equipment ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer name, and other pertinent nameplate data. H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended location and application. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-6 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF I. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide an installation report prior to final acceptance. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures", the equipment installation report shall state that the treatment system is achieving the specified removal efficiencies. Test data on the installed system shall be included in the report. Materials Testing: Materials employed in items fabricated of fiberglass reinforced plastic shall be capable of withstanding maximum calculated stresses that may occur during fabrication, installation and continuous operation, with allowance for an adequate safety factor. To confirm materials properties, tests shall be conducted by an independent, qualified testing laboratory on representative material samples in accordance with the latest revision of Standards referenced in Paragraph 1.02.B, above. K. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation report is required prior to fmal acceptance. L. Excessive vibration of equipment while operating shall be cause for rejection. This is based upon "IN" readings on the fan bearings at installation fan rpm per the requirements of Fan Application Category BV -3 of AMCA ANSI Standard 204-96. If Final Trim Balancing is required, it is the responsibility of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER to have this done by a manufacturer approved Vibration Specialist. M. If the equipment being offered differs from these specifications, all revisions in the design and construction of the structure, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc. required to accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the OWNER. N. Factory Test Reports with curves, vibration, sound, pressure, and bearing analyses shall be provided by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER (AMCA 210 and 300). O. A power consumption test will be used to verify the bid power consumption. Refer to specification Section 00 90 00 "Special Conditions" for additional information. P. Where indicated in the Drawings and this Section, all Type 316 stainless steel materials shall include the following composition: 1. Molybdenum: 2-3% 2. Chromium: 16-18% 3. Nickel: 10-14% PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's written Pre -Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 01 61 00 "Common Product Requirements." B. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for safe transportation, storage, and handling of the equipment. C. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall protect all flange faces and the more fragile appurtenances of the sub -assemblies, with padding between pieces in order to prevent one piece from impacting with another, and by crating or other means for shipment. D. Handling: Handle and lift fans in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Follow all safety warnings posted by the MANUFACTURER. E. Large sub -assemblies shall be supported during unloading to prevent excessive deflection and overstressing. F. Suction and discharge ports shall be protected against entry of foreign objects. G. Motors shall be stored as indicated in Section 26 20 00 "Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors." 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10°F to 110°F. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-8 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Equipment shall be compatible with heat tracing and insulation, which will be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. If additional freeze protection beyond heat tracing and insulation is required it shall be furnished by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall coordinate with the CONTRACTOR to provide direction on where heat tracing is required, and shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has provided adequate heat tracing and insulation during startup activities. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS A. A thorough inspection of each piece of equipment shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR upon arrival at construction site to inspect for damage incurred in transit. Any damage shall be immediately repaired by respective equipment fabricator's personnel, not a sales representative, or the equipment shall be returned to the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. 1.09 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION A. FRP equipment and accessories shall be fabricated in a heated and well - ventilated structure protected from weather and temperature extremes. Entire fabrication, curing and assembly process of any piece of FRP equipment shall be indoors. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall submit an affidavit certifying that all FRP equipment shall be fabricated, cured and assembled as described in this Section and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.10 EQUIPMENT DEFECTS A. Equipment that has mechanical defects and does not meet EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's vibration requirements shall be rejected and shall be replaced at EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's full expense for furnishing, installing, removal, and replacement. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF B. Mechanical defects shall include excessive vibration, improper balancing of rotative parts, improper tolerances, binding, excessive bearing heating, defective materials, improper fitting of parts, and any other defect which shall in time damage the equipment or impair its operation. C. Requirements must be met concerning minimum and maximum dimensions and the specifications for materials. If it is found upon delivery that materials do not agree with the requirements of these Specifications as to materials, size, type, quality, or metallurgy, they shall be rejected as unfit for use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Hartzell. 2. Howden. 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Base Condition: Project elevation as shown on the Drawings. B. Airflow Rate: As indicated in schedule following END OF SECTION. C. Static Pressure: As indicated in schedule following END OF SECTION. D. Speed: As indicated in schedule following END OF SECTION. E. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). F. Static and Dynamic Balancing: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. G. Housing: Designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cutoff. 2.03 ODOR CONTROL FANS A. General: Refer to schedule at end of this specification for specific fan requirements. Provide each odor control fan complete with motor, drive, guard, and baseplate. The fan shall be constructed such that all surfaces in contact with the corrosive gas stream are to be made of solid, corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) for the fan housing and FRP for the fan wheel. All nuts, bolts and fasteners in contact with the gas stream shall FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-10 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF be type 316 SST and encapsulated in FRP. AMCA Arrangement 4, which places the motor shaft in the corrosive gas stream, is unacceptable. B. All FRP surfaces are ground smooth prior to top coating to ensure there are no exposed glass fibers. All hardware located within the airstream will be made of Type 316 stainless steel and encapsulated in FRP. No exposed metal parts in the airstream will be allowed. C. Type: Single width, single inlet, backward curved type impeller, minimum Class II centrifugal fan with fixed discharge. Each fan shall be tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE 51-75, AMCA Standard 210 and shall be licensed to bear the AMCA 211 Certified Ratings Seal for air performance and be guaranteed by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER to deliver rated performance. D. Performance: Fan ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance. Fans not licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for performance shall be tested, at EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's expense, in an AMCA Registered Laboratory. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extending throughout the operating range to assure quiet and stable operation. Fan brake horsepower shall be equal to or less than the BHP specified in the schedule at the listed static pressure and CFM. E. Sound: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide a sound power level rating for fans tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards 300 and 301. Sound power ratings shall be in decibels (reference 10-12 watts) in eight octave bands. The maximum sound level shall be at or below 85 decibels at 5 feet. F. Construction: Fan shall be constructed in accordance with the ASTM D-4167 standard specification for fiber -reinforced plastic fans and fans to ensure structural integrity. All parts exposed to the gas stream shall be constructed of, or encapsulated in, an FRP laminate capable of resisting continuous airstream temperatures of 250°F. Fan housing must be fabricated of polyester resins; and "C" grade or better surface veil; To prevent premature deterioration of airstream components a Hartkoate abrasive/erosive resistant coating of 50-60 mils thickness shall be applied or an equivalent coating. 1. Housing: a. Fan housing shall be designed so that air leakage through joints and seals is negated. b. All bolted pieces shall be EPDM gasketed for air tightness. c. Fan housing shall be made of FRP construction and electrically grounded. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 43 11 19 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF d. Housing shall have flanged discharge and inlet drilled connection and companion flanges (ANSI dimensions). Fan shall be separated from ductwork at inlet and outlet by flanged flexible connections. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate flange drilling with duct. 2. Fan Wheel: a. Fiberglass construction, backward curved wheel, non -loading, high efficiency, one-piece, resin transfer mold. b. An assembly of component -type wheel is not acceptable. Utilize Dow Derakane 510-A vinyl ester resin. 3. Fan Shaft: a. Shaft shall be Type 316 stainless steel or fiberglass designed to operate 25% below first critical speed. b. Shaft and impeller shall be electromechanically, statically and dynamically balanced to the requirements of Fan Application Category BV -3, AMCA 204 and shall receive an operational test prior to shipment. c. Provide Teflon or equivalent double lip seal with Type 316 stainless steel mounting plate between shaft and housing. Seal shall positively prevent liquid and gas leakage. 4. Fan Bearing Base: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fan bearing base. 5. Fan Bearings: a. Each fan shaft shall be supported by approved, grease lubricated, self -aligning ball or roller bearings made of vacuum degassed 52100 steel. b. Ball or roller bearings shall be made by manufacturers who are members of the American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) and shall be selected for a minimum rating life (L- 10) of 100,000 hours at the fans maximum rated speed and based on Basic Dynamic Load Ratings calculated from ABMA formulas (ABMA Standards, Section No. 9, and Section No. 11, Latest Revisions). Material factors used in formula calculations shall be based on values assuming a conventional good quality, hardened bearing steel without benefit of vacuum degassing. Specifically, for pound and inch units, factor "f' shall be as given in the tables of ABMA Standards cited above. c. The operating internal temperature of ball bearings with ambient temperature of 80°F shall not exceed 200°F. Temperature measurements shall be made with a thermal imaging thermometer. (Thermometers shall have an accuracy at 130°F of ±2°F). Where thermometer wells are not provided or required, the surface temperature of the bearing housing shall be measured by a thermometer pressed firmly against the surface and sealed with a suitable plastic putty. d. Temperature readings during inspection and start-up after 3 hours of run time that exceed 140°F as measured by the thermometer - FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-12 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF surface method, shall be deemed presumptive evidence that the operating internal temperature of the bearings exceed 200°F, unless EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER can conclusively prove otherwise with a bearing temperature analysis to the satisfaction of the OWNER or OWNER'S representative. In the absence of such proof, it shall be incumbent to reduce the temperature at or below 140°F with no additional cost to the OWNER. e. Bearing temperature shall not exceed 225°F at the fan's maximum rated speed. f. Computations on bearing selection shall be submitted for approval and shall show complete details of loading. A dynamic factor of 2.0 shall be applied to loading. Ball and roller bearings shall be enclosed in oil -tight housings equipped with approved shaft seal rings and shall be suitably arranged for high pressure grease lubrication. g. The bearing supports for the shaft shall be of rigid design and shall be securely fastened to the base to ensure the proper alignment of the main shaft bearings. Bearings located in the corrosive gas stream are not acceptable. h. Bearings shall be factory lubricated with a premium quality NLGI 2 or 3 -grade multi -purpose ball bearing grease having corrosion inhibitors, anti -oxidant additives and mechanical stability for high speed operation. Bearing grease shall be multi -purpose lithium soap grease. The grease shall also have a minimum base oil viscosity of 500 SUS at 100°F and shall be suitable to operate continuously at 225°F. Heavy, long fibered greased will not be acceptable for use in bearings. i. Product and Manufacturer: Provide bearings as manufactured by one of the following: 1) Link Belt 6. Fan impeller and driving pulley shall be secured to shaft with keys and set screws. 7. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, rated capacity in cfm, head in inches of water (gage), fan in rpm, and any other pertinent data shall be permanently affixed to each fan with stainless steel hardware. 8. Fan Motors: a. Fan motor and variable frequency drive shall be in accordance with applicable electrical specifications. b. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in 26 20 00 "Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors" for motors, 600 volts and lower, and 250 HP and smaller. Requirements of this Section supersede any conflicting requirements of Section 26 20 00. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMIVR MARYS CREEK WRF c. Motors shall be inverter rated duty, when indicated in the performance tables at the end of the section. When inverter rated duty is required, provide statement of compliance that the motors are capable of operation with variable frequency drives. d. Motor Sizes: Properly size so that enough driven loads will not require the motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0 along the complete operating range. Motor sizes listed in equipment data sheets at the end of the Section shall be confirmed for compliance with this requirement. e. If a motor horsepower rating larger than specified is offered as a substitute and accepted, provided required changes in conductors, motor controllers, variable frequency drives, overload relays, fuses, switches and other related items with no change in the Contract price." f. Refer to the equipment data sheets at the end of the Section for detail motor requirements. g. Motors shall be rated for Class I, Division II locations. h. Motors shall be in accordance with all current applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, AFBMA, NEC, ANSI and NFPA 820. i. Motors shall be normal starting torque, normal slip, squirrel cage induction type. j. Motor thrust bearings shall be adequate to carry continuous thrust loads under all conditions of fan operation. k. Motor efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.53a and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Nominal and guaranteed efficiencies shall be included on motor nameplates in compliance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.53.b. 1. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the MANUFACTURER, serial number and all data shall be permanently attached to each motor. m. Refer to Division 26 for additional requirements. 9. Variable Frequency Drive: a. Harmonics shall be in full compliance with IEEE 519. b. VFD shall be UL certified. c. VFD manufacturer must have demonstrated full factory support in US market and have been established in the market for 10 years or longer. d. Shall be selected and sized for proper operation with blower motor. e. All adjustments and settings shall be performed by the manufacturer. f. Refer to Section 26 29 23 "Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives" for additional requirements. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-14 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF G. Access Doors: Raised, bolted type, held in place with Type 316 stainless steel bolts with gaskets. Bolts shall be embedded and encapsulated in FRP housing. H. Odor control fan mounting shall be AMCA standard Arrangement 10 up to 15 horsepower, 20 horsepower and above shall be Arrangement 1 with fabricated Type 316 Stainless Steel Channel Sub -base and slide rail type motor mounting. Fan base shall be bolted directly to equipment slab and shop painted with an epoxy coating for outside/corrosive application. I. Drains: The fan shall be properly sealed to prevent condensate leaks and shall be provided with a condensate drain. Provide drains at low point of scroll, minimum 1 -inch pipe coupling welded to housing with threaded corrosion resistant plug. CONTRACTOR shall install a trap in the drain of necessary length to prevent foul air from blowing into the drain system. Drive: Matched V -belts and adjustable sheave pulleys shall be cast steel or cast iron, sized for 1.5 service factor. K. Belt and Shaft Guard: Type 316 stainless steel construction epoxy painted with tachometer hole, OSHA approved. Provide shaft and bearing guard. L. The field installed and operating fan inboard and outboard bearing motions shall not exceed the in -situ operation levels for Fan Application Category BV - 3 of ANSI/AMCA 204-96. The instrument system used must have a flat response down to 120 rpm. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall measure the vibrations after start-up in the presence of the OWNER'S representative. M. Fan vibrations that exceed the ANSI/AMCA 204-96 in -situ operation levels, as described above, during operation in the warranty period shall be reduced by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative can choose to dynamically balance the fan in place using a recognized specialist, replace bearings or make structural modifications to reduce the vibrations, as approved by the OWNER. N. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish and install a sticker identifying the fan maximum operating speed. Speed changes that exceed this value are not permitted. O. Inlet Vane Damper 1. Furnish and install a Type 316 stainless steel manually operated multiple blade inlet vane damper on the suction side of each odor control exhaust fan. 2. Rated for air velocities up to 6,000 fpm. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Materials of Construction: a. Frame: Type 316 stainless steel min. 10 ga. channel. b. Blades: Type 316 stainless steel min. 10 ga. c. Bearings: Relubricable ball, mounted externally with stainless steel sleeve bearings and stainless steel thrust washers at hub and frame. d. Axles: Type 316 stainless steel full length rod. e. Swivels: Type 316 stainless steel. Swivels and bearings are epoxy coated steel. f. Hub: 316 stainless steel flat panel. g. Operating Lever: Lever arm with locking manual quadrant type 316 stainless steel construction. 4. Ends: Flanged with bolt holes drilled to match fan inlet. a. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate alignment of connections. 5. Manually operated with quadrant locking mechanism. 6. Provide Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts and washers for flanged connections to fan and fan inlet box or flexible connector flange as required. 7. Mill Finish — No painting.Provide damper open limit switch for fan starter logic. The switch shall be minimum 2A dry contactor. 8. Confirm submitted MANUFACTURERs and product models are valid and acceptable for this Project. 9. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Swartout, Model 851 FG. b. Ruskin, Model HD -WD. c. Or approved equivalent. P. Flanges shall be glass fiber reinforced, compatible with connecting duct material provided, and have a chemical resistance greater than or equal to the duct material. Flanges shall comply with PS 15-69, Table 5, at a design pressure of 25 psi, and have a minimum ANSUASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter and drilling. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate drilling patterns of flanges at connections. Q. Coatings: 1. Baked epoxy phenolic or "cold set" epoxy -phenolic amine cured, brush or spray coats in accordance with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's specifications. R. Operation and Controls: The operation and controls shall be provided as required to furnish the complete OCS specified in Section 44 31 11, "Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System." FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-16 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF S. Contractor shall provide bubble -tight damper at foul air fan outlet, as shown on the Drawings. Bubble -tight dampers at the foul air fan outlet shall be equipped with an open limit switch for fan start logic. The switch shall be minimum 2A dry contactor. T. All fasteners (nuts, bolts and washers) used for Odor Control Fans shall be Type 316 stainless steel. U. Odor Control Fans shall be located in outdoor and corrosive areas. All mechanical and electrical equipment and material shall conform to NEMA 4X, non-metallic requirements. Provide panels with a three-point latch door system. Mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel including fasteners and Unistrut. 2.04 FINISHES A. All gears, bearing surfaces, machined surfaces and other surfaces which are to remain unpainted shall receive a heavy application of grease or other rust/corrosion resistant coating. The coating shall be maintained during storage and until the equipment is placed into operation. B. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall certify, in writing, that the shop primer and shop finish coating system is compatible with intended outside / corrosive application as shown on the Contract Drawings. A corrosive atmosphere of hydrogen sulfide and sulfuric acid are expected to be present. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners in accordance with Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications", as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Size and locations as required by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of 1/z -inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation instructions. B. Equipment Identification Plates: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a 16 - gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER recommended procedures. E. All equipment shall be installed with Type 316 stainless fasteners. 2.06 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. General: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish all special tools that are required to assemble, disassemble, repair, and maintain any item of mechanical equipment, with respective equipment. Special tools shall include any type of tool that has been specifically made for use on an item of equipment for assembly, disassembly, repair, and maintenance. When special tools are provided, they shall be marked or tagged, and a list of such tools shall be included with maintenance and operation instructions describing use of each marked tool. Additional requirements shall be included with individual items of equipment. B. Furnish and deliver the following spare parts for each fan size. 1. Two (2) sets of spare belts for each size fan supplied. 2. Two (2) sets of bearings for each size fan supplied. 3. Two (2) replacement Teflon seals for each size fan supplied. 4. Initial supply of lubricants. 5. One gallon of touchup paint. C. Furnish list of solvents for cleaning dirt, grease and oil from surface of non- metallic parts. D. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings, referencing the equipment that they are intended for, and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Provide complete ordering information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for each part to be used. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLER A. CONTRACTOR. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-18 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 3.03 PREPARATION A. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall assure that all equipment furnished under this Section is suitable for installation as specified. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER is responsible for determining the necessary clearances and headroom required to move all equipment to its final location. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's Representative. B. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall verify installation and test all odor control fan equipment. C. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation report shall be required prior to final acceptance. D. Odor control fan equipment shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on Drawings, and in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's recommendations and instructions. Equipment shall be installed in such a manner that connecting piping shall not impose any strain whatsoever on any equipment. Equipment shall be set upon grouted foundations, level or perpendicular, as the case may be, so that connecting flanges, screwed connections, or flexible connections shall meet without strain or distortion. Base leveling nuts shall be blocked out during grouting of foundations, the grout allowed to set for not less than three days, leveling nuts loosened and followed by grouting of block -outs, with non -shrink grout. E. In every case where a drive motor is connected to a driven piece of equipment by a flexible coupling, the coupling halves shall be disconnected and alignment between motor and equipment checked and corrected. Machinery shall first be perfectly aligned and leveled by means of Type 316 stainless steel wedges and shims near anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall be tightened against shims on wedges and equipment shall again be checked for level and alignment before placing grout. F. Equipment bases shall not be grouted nor foundation bolts finally tightened until all piping connections are complete and in satisfactory alignment with no strain transmitted to the equipment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMIVR MARYS CREEK WRF G. Examine pads or supports to receive odor control fans for: 1. Proper anchor bolt locations. 2. Unevenness, irregularities and incorrect dimensions. H. Unevenness, irregularities and incorrect dimensions. I. Supervise installation in accordance with odor control fan manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. J. Provide flanged flexible connections at air inlet and discharge of odor control fans. K. All equipment shall be installed on concrete bases and secured with anchor bolts in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall accurately shim base to grade and spaces between shims filled with an approved non -shrink grout. After grout has reached its initial set, exposed edges shall be cut back 1/2 -inch and edges neatly finished with 1:2 cement mortar. L. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended by the respective manufacturer. M. Connect all piping, valves, and accessories as necessary to complete the installation. N. Install all conduit and wiring and complete all connections. 3.05 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Ensure that fans and appurtenances have been installed correctly and that there is no objectionable heat or vibration. 2. Ensure that bearings are adequately lubricated. Do not permit operation of fans until bearings are lubricated and fans have been inspected and testing by running them under observation. 3. OWNER or OWNER'S representative reserves right to reject any and all items of equipment found to have following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, dry cracks, burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter, or entrapped air at the laminate surfaces which does not satisfy the tolerances specified in ASTM D 2563 Table 1, Acceptance Level II for inside and outside surfaces or meet the specified requirements. 4. Refer to Section 01 42 33 "Manufacturers Field Services" for additional requirements. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-20 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF B. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Services 1. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's service person for areas where the odor control fans are installed to assist in the installation of the equipment, check the installation before it is placed into operation, assist in the performance of field vibration tests, supervise initial operations, and instruct the plant operators in the care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Service person shall verify that lubrication systems are complete, clean and filled with the proper grade of lubricants. 3. Reports: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall submit a report by service person of each visit to the site. Reports shall provide complete information on time, schedule, tasks performed, persons contacted, problems corrected, test results, training, instruction and all other pertinent information. 4. Training: In addition to above requirements, furnish services to instruct and train plant operators in the proper care, operation and maintenance of equipment. 5. Additional Inspections - Twelve (12) months after acceptance of the odor control fans, the manufacturer's factory trained service person shall perform an inspection of the system and submit an inspection report to OWNER. Table 1: Manufacturer Field Services Work Description No. Person No. Trips (Per Odor Days Control System) Installation assistance and inspection 1 1 Functional and performance testing 1 1* Pre -startup classroom or site training 1 1 Total Facility startup and field vibration testing 1 1* Follow up visit 12 months after substantial completion for inspection ection and training 1 1 * Trip can be combined with training. C. INSPECTION AND START-UP ADJUSTMENTS 1. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall perform the following inspection of equipment with the Owner's Representative. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF a. b. C. d. e. f. h. i. J. k. m. Verify proper equipment mounting and setting. Verify that control, interlock and power wiring is complete. Verify alignment of each motor and drive. Verify proper piping connections and accessories. Verify that lubrication is completed. Verify direction of rotation. Verify setting of safety controls. Monitor heat buildup in bearings. Check motor loads against nameplate data. Verify proper starter overload heater sizes. Verify function of safety and operating controls. Verify proper operation of equipment. Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of ducts and fans. n. Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation. 2. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall conduct the following Start-up Adjustments: a. Adjust fan for proper alignment and flow. b. Set volume control devices for approximate positions in preparation for final testing and balancing. c. Balance system for CFM provided on the Drawings and in accordance with this Section. d. Adjust and balance fans to accommodate load requirements. e. Check control functions and adjust as required. D. FIELD TETS 1. After EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER and OWNER'S representative have mutually agreed that the equipment installation is complete and ready for continuous operation, EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall conduct an operating test of the equipment and controls in the presence of OWNER or OWNER'S representative to demonstrate that the equipment and its controls shall function correctly. 2. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall perform standard AMCA tests 210 and 300, as a minimum. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITES A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 77 "Closeout Procedures" and Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." B. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. FOUL AIR FANS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 431119-22 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF C. Demonstration: 1. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, alarm condition responses, and emergency repair procedures to OWNER 's personnel. 2. Perform continuous operation to demonstrate reliable performance per specifications. D. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER 's representative. 3. Furnish installation certificate from EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. E. CLEANUP 1. CONTRACTOR shall clean up the site, material storage area, etc. before final payment. 3.07 SUPPLEMENTS A. The following table is included after "End of Section" and is considered part of this Section: 1. Table 2 — Foul Air Fan Design Details END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR FANS APRIL 24, 2026 431119-23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMlVR MARYS CREEK WRF TABLE 2— Foul Air Fan Details Odor Control Odor Control Odor Control System 1 System 2 System 3 Quantity Provided 2 2 2 Tag Number(s) ODC01-T01-FAB01, ODC02-T01-FAB01, ODC03-T01-FAB01, ODC0 1 -TO 1-FAB02 ODC02-TO 1-FAB02 ODC03-TO 1-FAB02 Elevation, MSL 784.0 ft 776.33 ft 776.25 ft Service Foul Air Ambient Temperature 33 -120°F Range Present Capacity Design Flow Rate 16,000 cfm 16,000 cfm 16,000 cfm Static Pressure* 16.0 in w.c. 16.0 in w.c. 16.0 in w.c. Maximum Speed 2,000 rpm 2,000 rpm 2,000 rpm Maximum Outlet 2,600 fpm 2,600 fpm 2,600 fpm Velocity Motor 75 HP 75 HP 75 HP Horsepower Voltage/Phase/Hz 480/3/60 480/3/60 480/3/60 Type Class I, Div II, Class I, Div II, Class I, Div II, Severe Duty Severe Duty Severe Duty Wheel Diameter 33 in 33 in 33 in Arrangement Note 1 and as shown in the Drawings Rotation As shown on the Drawings Discharge Clockwise Up Blast Note 1: As determined by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER * STATIC PRESSURE INCLUDES 4.4" W.C. FOR THE DUCTWORK (INLET AND INTERCONNECTING), 5.6" W.C. FOR THE BIOTOWER FOUL AIR FANS 431119-24 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 43 21 39 DRY -PIT SUMBERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Five (5) vertical dry -pit non -clog submersible centrifugal pumps having semi -open multi -vane back swept, screw -shaped impellers for return activated sludge (RS) pumping service. 2. Two (2) vertical dry -pit non -clog submersible centrifugal pumps having semi -open multi -vane back swept, screw -shaped impellers for waste activated sludge (WS) pumping service. 3. Each pump shall be complete with electric motor, pump protection and monitoring control panel, and power/control cables, base elbow, anchors, accessories for lifting pump, and other incidental items required for a complete and operational installation. 4. Equipment Manufacturer shall be responsible to coordinate the testing and installation of the pumping units and for the adequacy and compatibility of the pump, motor and CONTRACTOR furnished VFD. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Section 05 05 23 - Metal Fastenings and Anchor Bolts 4. Division 9 - Finishes 5. Division 26 - Electrical 6. Division 40 — Instrumentation 7. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 8. Section 43 22 10 - Common Requirements for Pumps 1.02 REFERENCES A. References: Following is a list of standards, which might be referenced in this Section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturer's Association (ABMA) a. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings b. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10 "Common Requirements for Pumps" Part 1.03. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating ranges of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. 3. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 4. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and include any motor specifications. 5. Documentation demonstrating factory finish is equivalent to finish system specified in this Section. C. Information Submittals: 1. Factory functional and performance test reports and logs. 2. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 6. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative. 7. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 8. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 9. Warranties and service agreements. 10. Preinstallation conference minutes. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide for each pumping system in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10 "Common Requirements for Pumps" Part 1.05. B. Field Representative: The MANUFACTURER shall furnish a qualified field representative for the time indicated in Paragraph 3.7.A of this Section. Field representatives shall be factory -employed personnel and have a minimum of two (2) years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have three (3) years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the MANUFACTURER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the MANUFACTURER. The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. For each training event two separate pre -startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. Two separate post -startup training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and startup assistance with OWNER'S personnel. A typed outline shall be handed out at each training session and, at a minimum, will include normal operating parameters, alarms, and maintenance. C. Qualifications: Equipment shall be the product of a MANUFACTURER having at least twenty (20) similar system installations experience in the United States of the type proposed, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10 "Common Requirements for Pumps" Part 1.06. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to specification Section 43 22 10 "Common Requirements for Pumps" Part 1.07. 1.08 WARRANTY B. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. C. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years. APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39-3 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. KSB Dry Pit Submersible 2. Flygt Dry Pit Submersible 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed for wastewater sludge pump station service and the environment encountered in this installation. B. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. Pumps will be located outdoors and shall be designed and capable of operation at ambient temperature of 10°F to 110°F. C. Equipment shall be designed and capable of either continuous or intermittent operation receiving raw wastewater or wastewater sludge. 1. Grit and other abrasive materials should be expected to be present as should rags, large solids, and stringy material. The presence of these items will not be considered as abnormal, unanticipated or abusive with regard to the equipment operation and warranty. 2. The equipment must operate over the specified flow range without rags and stringy material accumulating in the pump and clogging it. D. All equipment, supports, anchors and fasteners shall be type 316 stainless steel and be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with starting, turbulence, thrusts from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. E. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this specification section are based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. Arrangements other than those shown on plans shall be subject to ENGINEER's approval. F. The general arrangement of the piping and pumps are shown on the plans. Pump design parameters are listed in the Pump Data Sheets at the end of this section. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Design: 1. Pump Type: vertical dry pit submersible as indicated on the Drawings and the Pump Data Sheet. 2. Basic Design: Single passage, clog free pump, utilizing a semi -open multi - vane impeller as indicated, intended for services requiring reliable solids handlings, combined with high efficiency, low required NPSH, a large solid passage, and the ability to handle rags or other fibrous material without plugging. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced, capable of passing a minimum solid size of 2.4 inches. 3. Semi -open non -clogging multi -vane impeller, for high efficiency pumping of municipal wastewater. 4. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of up to 5% sludge and rag -laden wastewater. B. Casing: 1. Pump Volute and Suction Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B. 2. The pump volute shall incorporate a suction cover insert ring or alternatively, a wear plate. If an insert ring is used, the volute shall have a replaceable suction cover insert ring in which are cast spiral -shaped, sharp - edged groove(s). The spiral groove(s) shall provide trash release pathways and sharp edge(s) across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. Alternatively, if a wear plate is employed the wear plate shall incorporate cutting grooves and an outward spiral V-shaped groove on the side facing the impeller, to shred and force stringy solids outward from the impeller and through the pump discharge. 3. The insert ring shall be of ASTM A-48, Class 35B grey iron and provide effective sealing between the multi -vane semi -open impeller and the volute housing. 4. The wear plate shall be mounted to the volute with four stainless steel securing screws and four stainless steel adjusting screws to permit close tolerance adjustment between the wear plate and impeller for maximum pump efficiency. Adjustment to allow for wear and restore peak pumping performance shall be accomplished using standard tools, and without requiring disassembly of the pump. C. Cooling Jacket: Each unit shall be provided with an integral motor cooling system. A stainless steel motor cooling jacket shall encircle the stator housing, providing for dissipation of motor heat regardless of the type of pump installation. An impeller, integral to the cooling system and driven by the pump shaft, shall provide the necessary circulation of the cooling liquid through the jacket. The cooling liquid shall pass about the stator housing in APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39-5 MARYS CREEK WRY the closed loop system in turbulent flow providing for superior heat transfer. The cooling system shall have one fill port and one drain port integral to the cooling jacket. The cooling system shall provide for continuous pump operation in liquid or ambient temperatures of up to 104°F (40°C). Fans, blowers or auxiliary cooling systems that are mounted external to the pump motor are not acceptable. D. Impeller: Flygt: a. Material: High Chrome Iron, minimum 450 BHN, ASTM A532. b. Statically and dynamically balanced. c. The impeller to volute clearance shall be readily adjustable by the means of a single trim screw. The impeller shall: 1) Be locked to the shaft, held by an impeller bolt; or, 2) Have a slip fit onto the motor shaft and drive key and be securely fastened to the shaft by a stainless steel bolt which is mechanically prevented from loosening by a positively engaged ratcheting washer assembly. d. The hydraulic design of the multi -channel impeller shall provide a minimum of 2.4 inches of non -compressible solids handling and superior hydraulic efficiency. 2. KSB: a. The non -clog impeller design shall combine the action of a centrifugal, open, single vane and the capabilities of a positive displacement screw pump. The impeller shall provide gradual acceleration along with a gentle change in flow direction resulting in low shear stress of the pumped media. The impeller shall be suited for high efficiency pumping of both municipal and industrial wastewater. b. It shall be capable of handling coarse textile type solids with a maximum 3 -inch solids passage, as well as sludge up to a 13% dry weight solids content. The impeller leading edges shall pass across a helical groove, located on the wear ring, to provide a self-cleaning action to free the surface of solids and fibers with each rotation of the impeller. c. The impeller shall be a one-piece casting of duplex stainless steel. It shall be smooth, well finished, free from blowholes and imperfections, and be balanced for the duty point. d. The impeller leading edges shall be hardened to a minimum 450 Brinell hardness (Rc 47). e. The impeller shall be securely fitted to the pump shaft in such a manner that it does not loosen or become detached if the pump is operated in the wrong direction as may happen by reversed flow or reversed motor connections. f. A hard metal suction wear ring shall be provided that is externally adjustable to compensate for wear, of the material specified. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF E. Shaft: Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A479 S43100 -Type 420. a. Diameter: Sufficient to carry maximum load and prevent vibration and fatigue. F. Bearing Assembly: Bearings: a. The integral pump/motor shaft shall rotate on two bearings. The motor bearings shall be sealed and permanently grease lubricated with high temperature grease. b. The upper motor bearing shall be a two -row angular contact ball bearing to handle radial loads. The lower bearing shall be a two row angular contact ball bearing to handle the thrust and radial forces. c. Rating Life: Minimum L-10 life 50,000 hours as defined by ABMA Standards. G. The pump shaft and motor shaft shall be an integral, one-piece unit adequately designed to meet the maximum torque required at any normal start-up condition or operating point in the system. H. Shaft Sealing: Each pump shall be provided with a positively driven dual, tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two seal sets, each having an independent spring. a. The lower primary seal, located between the pump and seal chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion and abrasion resistant tungsten -carbide ring. b. The upper secondary seal, located between the seal chamber and the seal inspection chamber shall be a leakage -free seal. The upper seal shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion and abrasion resistant tungsten -carbide seal ring. c. The rotating seal ring shall have small back -swept grooves laser inscribed upon its face to act as a pump as it rotates, returning any fluid that should enter the dry motor chamber back into the lubricant chamber. d. All seal rings shall be individual solid sintered rings. e. Each seal interface shall be held in place by its own spring system. The seals shall not depend upon direction of rotation for sealing. f. Mounting of the lower seal on the impeller hub is not acceptable. g. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces are not acceptable. APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39-7 MARYS CREEK WRF h. The seal springs shall be isolated from the pumped media to prevent materials from packing around them, limiting their performance. 2. Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and shall provide capacity for lubricant expansion. The seal lubricant chamber shall have one drain and one inspection plug that are accessible from the exterior of the motor unit. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication. 3. The area about the exterior of the lower mechanical seal in the cast iron housing shall have cast in an integral concentric spiral groove. This groove shall protect the seals by causing abrasive particulate entering the seal cavity to be forced out away from the seal due to centrifugal action. 4. A separate seal leakage chamber shall be provided so that any leakage that may occur past the upper, secondary mechanical seal will be captured prior to entry into the motor stator housing. Such seal leakage shall not contaminate the motor lower bearing. The leakage chamber shall be equipped with a float type switch that will signal if the chamber should reach 50% capacity. 2.04 FINISHES A. All equipment items except stainless steel shall receive surface preparation, prime coating and finish coating in the factory in accordance with Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings". Finish coating colors shall be selected by the OWNER from finish color charts to be provided in shop drawing submittals. Furnish one gallon of touch up paint for installation CONTRACTOR to apply. B. All stainless -steel surfaces shall be cleaned and welds shall be brushed with Type 316 stainless steel brushes. Electro bead blast or chemically treat all external non - welded stainless steel to a uniform finish. C. Motors and hydraulic units shall have a factory finish. D. Machined, polished, and non-ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion prevention compound. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all pumping units and control panels to be furnished. 1. Include test data sheets, curve test results, performance test logs, certified by a factory test engineer. 2. Functional Test: Perform motor test on equipment. Include a vibration test, as follows: a. Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit before final assembly. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39-8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF b. Limits: 1) Complete rotating assembly, including drive unit and motor, shall not be less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 3. Performance Test: a. Perform on each pump in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. b. Tests shall be sufficient to determine the curves of head, input horsepower, and efficiency relative to capacity from shutoff to 150% of design flow. A minimum of five points, including shutoff, shall be taken for each test. c. At least one point shall be obtained as near as possible to each specified condition. d. Results of the performance test shall be certified by a Registered Professional Engineer and submitted for approval prior to shipment. 4. Hydrostatic Test: Pump casing tested at 150 percent of shutoff head. Test pressure maintained for not less than five minutes. 2.06 MOTORS A. Motor and Cable 1. See Table 1 at the end of this Section for motor data. 2. Motor shall be induction type with a squirrel -cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, water tight chamber. 3. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty while handling pumped media. 4. The stator shall be press fitted or heat -shrink fitted into the stator housing. The use of fastening devices that penetrate the stator housing are not acceptable. 5. The motor stator shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation. 6. Motor shaft shall be one-piece, solid, stainless steel. Carbon steel shafts or shaft sleeves are not acceptable. Shaft shall be sufficient to transmit full driver output with a maximum deflection of 0.002 inches measured at the lower mechanical seal. Rotor is to be dynamically balanced to meet NEMA vibration limits; all external hardware is to be stainless steel. 7. The power cable shall be suitable for a continuous submersible application and sized in accordance with NEC requirements. Cable leads are to enter at the top of the motor, and are to allow the cable -to -motor connection to be accomplished in the field with by the manufacturer or pump service company, or the use of an epoxy sealed entry system. Motor power lead wires shall be permanently and thermally connected to the stator for structural strength. Motor lead wires shall be connected to the power cable in a watertight chamber and appropriate watertight seal cable entrance. Pump motor power cable shall be oil and watertight, rated for continuous submerged service. Cable conductors shall be copper, sized and rated per APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39-9 MARYS CREEK WRF NEC. Cable shall be sized using 125 % of motor nameplate. Motor control conductors for thermal and moisture leak sensory shall be rated for continuous submerged service and shall be run in a separate jacketed cable and conduit from the power cable. Power cable shall include a dedicated ground conductor. All conductors shall be permanently identified at both ends. Power/control cable shall be a minimum of 130 feet in length to allow required power and control termination. 8. Power and control leads shall be O-ring sealed. 9. All O -rings shall be Nitrile rubber O -rings. 10. Pump(s) shall be provided with a mechanical seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies. The seal shall be a double mechanical seal in a cast iron seal housing constructed in two sections with a registered fit. The seal shall be constructed of tungsten carbide or silicon carbide. The upper and lower seal assemblies shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. 11. A mechanical seal leakage system shall be included in each motor. Mechanical seal system shall be monitored for leaking during pump operation and standby time. If sufficient water enters the motor the mechanical seal leakage system shall send a signal to the control panel and shut down the pump. 12. The motors shall be provided with motor thermal switches embedded in the windings to protect the motor from burnout due to excessive heating. 13. Inrush on starting shall be no more than allowed by NEC Code Letter G (5.6 KVA/HP) 14. The motor and cable on each pump shall be tested for moisture content or insulation defects. After the test, the pump cable end shall be fitted with a shrink -fit rubber boot to protect it from moisture or water. 15. Motor Protection Devices: a. Winding Temperature Sensors: Provide a minimum of two thermistor temperature detectors embedded in the end coils of the stator, spaced directly across from each other. Thermal sensors shall automatically de -energize the motor when its temperature exceeds a preset limit recommended by the manufacturer. b. Provide moisture sensor to sense seal failure; mounted in the seal chamber; of the conductive type; sensing moisture above the lower seal. c. Provide moisture sensing to detect liquid intrusion in the power cable termination chamber and into the motor space. d. Provide motor protection relay and required power supply to the CONTRACTOR for mounting the VFD. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners in accordance with Section 05 05 23 "Metal Fastenings and Anchor Bolts", as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the MANUFACTURER. Size and locations as required by MANUFACTURER. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39- 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF MANUFACTURER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of 1/2 -inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the equipment supplier's installation instructions. B. Equipment Identification Plates: MANUFACTURER shall furnish a 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: MANUFACTURER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all equipment supplier recommended procedures. 2.08 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. One (1) set of the following spare parts shall be furnished for each size of pump provided under this specification: a. Mechanical seals. b. Suction cover insert ring, or alternatively, wear plate. c. Bearings, each size and type. d. Special tools required for maintenance or adjustment. 2. Other parts as recommended by manufacturer as typically needed in the first two years of operation. 2.09 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Guaranteed Performance: Transfer the product at the operating conditions as listed in the Pump Data Sheet. B. Pumping Unit System: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing assemblies representing those indicated for this Project. Specific Performance Requirements: Refer to attached Pump Data Sheet after End of Section. APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 11 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLER A. General: 1. Contractor shall install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the MANUFACTURER's instructions. Equipment shall not be operated until the installation is approved by the MANUFACTURER's representative. 2. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup" 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 3.03 PREPARATION - NOT USED 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Support all piping independently of the pump. B. Level rail assembly by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater the 1/4 -inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface. Accomplish wedging so that there is no change of level or springing of the pump assembly when anchor bolts are tightened. C. Adjust pump assemblies such that the pump assembly is properly aligned, plumb, and level. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. D. After the pump assembly has been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the rail assembly and the concrete foundation with a poured, non -shrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 60 00 "Grouting." Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. E. Complete equipment installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. Turn rotating equipment by hand to check. Complete cleaning and testing of piping systems. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, piping, and structures of debris and foreign material. F. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. G. Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39- 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF H. Flush, fill, and grease lubricated systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment, and other materials and equipment necessary to conduct testing and startup. J. Equipment 1. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 2. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. Adjust clearances and torques. 3. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. K. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump as described below and in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Vibration Test: a. Test units installed and in normal operation and discharging to the connected piping systems at rates between the low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified, and with the actual facility structures and foundations provided, shall not develop at any frequency or in any plane, peak -to -peak vibration amplitudes exceeding the limits specified. b. If units exhibit vibration in excess of the limits specified adjust or modify as necessary. Units which cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced. c. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. B. Performance Test: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for eight consecutive hours to be considered started up. APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 13 MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Operate the equipment through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system operate within the design conditions. Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. C. A copy of all information from functional tests, including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. 3.06 3.07 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." After initial startup under the supervision of a qualified representative of the pump manufacturer, a preliminary "running -in" period will be provided for the CONTRACTOR, per the Contract Documents, to make field tests and necessary adjustments. At the end of the specified period of operation, the pumps will be accepted if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the pumps has operated satisfactorily without excessive power input, wear, lubrication, or undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise at any operating speed and head, including shutoff. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: No. Person Work Description Days 1 Installation assistance and inspection. ection. 1 Functional and performance testing. 1/2 Pre -startup classroom or site training. 1/2 Facility startup. 1/2 Post -startup training of OWNER'S personnel. DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39- 14 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF B. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of OWNER'S personnel at such times requested by OWNER C. Manufacturer's services and training shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 75 25, "Equipment Testing and Startup." 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES —NOT USED 3.09 SUPPLEMENT A. The Pump Data Sheets included after "END OF SECTION" shall be part of this Section. END OF SECTION APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 15 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39- 16 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE (RS) PUMP DATA SHEET Equipment Tag Number(s) RS01_B01_PMP11 RS01_B01_PMP21 RS01_B01_PMP31 RS01_B01_PMP41 RS01 B01 PMP51 Quantity Service Conditions Liquid Pumped 5 Activated Sludge Liquid Temperature, °F Max: 86 Min: 50 Largest Diameter Solid Pump shall be Capable of Passing, inches 3.0 Abrasive (Y/N) Y Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N) N Explosion -proof (Y/N) Y Continuous Duty (Y/N) Y Performance RequirementcrerTnrnp Full Speed Design Point Capacity, gpm, 12,361 Full Speed Design Point Total Head, FT 26.00 Pump Hydraulic Efficiency, % 65 Low Speed Design Point Capacity, gpm 8,333 Low Speed Design Point Total Head, FT 8.70 Maximum Net Positive Suction Head Required at Full Speed, FT 15 Maximum Shutoff Head at Full Speed, FT 70 Minimum Runout Head at Low Speed Design Point, FT 4 Pump Speed, Maximum, rpm Pump Construction Details Suction (Size) 720 24" minimum Discharge (Size) 20" Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig) 1.5 Times Shutoff Head Field Testing (Required/Not Required) Required Impeller Diameter (in), minimum 20 Vent and drain connections tapped and plugged Y Shaft sealing Mechanical Seals Motor Information HP, Maximum 125 Speed, RPM 720 Max. Starts per hour, evenly spaced 10 Power 460V/3PH/60Hz Constant Speed (Y/N) N Adjustable Speed (Y/N) Y Inverter Duty Rated, Minimum Turndown % Yes, 50% APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 17 MARYS CREEK WRF PLUMMER 60.0 0 0'! 50.0 .-I W C. LL C in 40.0 30.0 20.0 0, 14.12 - 10.0 0, 6.53 0.0 0 10,000 10 MGD Design Return Sludge (RS) System Curve - 4 mumps running z - Typical Static Head, C=120 20,000 30,000 Flow Rate (gpm) • Low Static Head, C=140 40.000 FORT WORTH Flow (gpm), TDH (ft) a 1 w N c 1 T � a � E LL 1 49,444, 26.00 50,000 — High Static Head, C=100 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39- 18 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE (WS) PUMP DATA SHEET Equipment Tag Number(s) WS01_B01_PMP11 WS01 B01 PMP21 Quantity Service Conditions Liquid Pumped 2 Activated Sludge Liquid Temperature, °F Max: 86 Min: 50 Largest Diameter Solid Pump shall be Capable of Passing, inches 3.0 Abrasive (Y/N) Y Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N) N Explosion -proof (YIN) Y Continuous Duty (Y/N) Y Performance Requirements Per Pump Full Speed Design Point Capacity, gpm 300 Full Speed Design Point Total Head, FT 47.80 Pump Hydraulic Efficiency, % 65 Low Speed Design Point Capacity, gpm 200 Low Speed Design Point Total Head, FT 33.71 Maximum Net Positive Suction Head Required at Full Speed, FT 16 Minimum Shutoff Head at Full Speed, FT 69 Minimum Runout Head at Low Speed Design Point, FT 5 Pump Speed, Maximum, rpm p Suction (Size) 1780 4" Discharge (Size) 4" Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig) 1.5 Times Shutoff Head Field Testing (Required/Not Required) Required Impeller Diameter (in), minimum 3" Vent and drain connections tapped and plugged Y Shaft sealing Mechanical Seals Motor HP, Maximum 10 Speed, RPM 1780 Max. Starts per hour, evenly spaced 30 Power 460V/3PH/60Hz Constant Speed (Y/N) N Adjustable Speed (Y/N) Y Inverter Duty Rated, Minimum Turndown % Yes, 50% APRIL 23, 2026 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4321 39- 19 MARYS CREEK WRF PLUMMER 70.0 60.0 50.0 40.0 r-, 30.0 20.0 10.0 0.0 0 50 100 Typical Static Head, C=120 — High Static Head, C=100 Waste Sludge (WS) System Curve 150 200 250 Flow Rate (gpm) — — — DutyPoint 300 gpm ••••••DutyPoint@200 gpm FORT WORTH 300 350 400 — • Low Static Head, C=140 DRY -PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL APRIL 23, 2026 43 21 39-20 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER SECTION 43 22 10 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This Section provides requirements common to the pumping unit specification sections of Division 43 and 46. In addition to the specific requirements of the individual pumping unit specification sections. The Manufacturer and CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring all pumping units comply with the requirements of this Section. The detailed equipment specifications shall govern where this section conflicts with detailed sections. 2. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary for the installation, testing, and placing into operation of all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contact. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 91 14 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 05 93 - Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment 7. Section 40 05 91 - Common Control Panel Requirements for Process Equipment 8. Section 40 05 05 - Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods 9. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process Valves 10. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Specifications, Standards, Codes, and Regulations: 1. Various Project sections contain references to specifications, standards, codes, regulations, and other documentation and shall be considered a part of those sections as specified and modified. JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10- 1 2. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this Section as if referenced directly. 3. In the event of conflict between the requirements of the Project specification sections and those of the listed documents, the requirements of the Project specification sections shall prevail. 4. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Opening of Bid. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. B. Commercial Standards: All equipment, products, and their installation shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable, and as specified in each Section of these specifications. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American Public Health Association (APHA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. American Welding Society (AWS). 8. Federal Specifications (FS). 9. Rubber Manufacturers of America (RMA). 10. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 11. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA). C. The following standards are referred to in the various Project specification sections: 1. American National standards Institute (ANSI): a. B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. b. B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.3 Process Piping Code. b. B73.1 Specifications for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process. c. B73.2 Specifications for Vertical In -Line Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. E101 Deep Well Vertical Turbine Pumps -Line Shaft and Submersible Types. 4. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): a. A 48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10-2 b. A108 —Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -Finished c. A 470 Specification for Vacuum -Treated Carbon and Alloy Forgings for Turbine Rotors and Shafts. d. A519 — Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing e. A532 — Specification for Abrasion -Resistance Cast Irons f. A 536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. g. A582 — Specification for Free -Machining Stainless Steel Bars h. E 448 Recommended Practice for Scleroscope Hardness Testing of Metallic Materials. i. B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal j. Castings. 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary, and Reciprocating Pumps. 6. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG -1, Motors and Generators. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electric Code. 8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): NSF 61, Drinking Water Components — Health Effects. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS - NOT USED 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve, from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA, ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated horsepower or service factor of the motor or engine. JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10-3 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections; 1. All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer which has been in the design, fabrication, assembly, testing, start-up and service of full scale pumping units with at least fifteen (15) North American installations of the type, model, and size specified for a period of not less than five (5) years prior to the bid date of this Contract. All equipment of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections; CONTRACTOR shall provide a manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 2. Manufacturer's representative shall be provide for each pumping unit, 2 HP and larger for the periods indicated in the individual specification section. D. Source Limitations: Pumping units of each type specified as specified in the individual specification sections shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This does not require that all equipment be manufactured by a single manufacturer but does require that the manufacturer of the system shall be responsible for the complete system. E. All equipment shall have a 316 stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer and other pertinent nameplate data. F. Manufacturer shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas, or spare parts shall be made available within 48 hours of notification. G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended location and application. H. Previous Installations List: A list of similar installations demonstrating the experience requirement shall be furnished. List shall include Manufacturer name. Each installation shall include project State, project City, project name, project date, equipment model number, owner (end user) name(s), and owner phone number(s). JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 432210-4 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the requirements of Section 0-1- 60 00 01 61 00 "Product Requirements". Special requirements for the storage and handling of pumping units will be provided in the specified pumping unit section. B. Motors shall be stored as indicated in Section 40 05 93 "Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendation by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. B. Environmental Conditions: 2. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 3. The environment will be moist and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 4. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10°F to 110°F. 5. Furnish heat tracing and insulation as required. Insulation alone shall not be sufficient to fulfill freeze protection provisions of this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Final Completion. JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 432210-5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install only such equipment as the designated single manufacturer certifies is suitable for use with its equipment and the service conditions. B. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products; such manufacturers shall have had previous experience in such manufacture and shall, upon request of the ENGINEER, furnish the names of not less than five (5) successful installations of its equipment of comparable nature to that offered under this Contract. C. All combinations of manufactured equipment which are provided under these specifications shall be entirely compatible, and the CONTRACTOR and the designated single manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of the units conforming to specified requirements. Each unit of equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, coupling, electric motor or engine drive and unit mounting. All necessary mountings and appurtenances shall be included. D. Where two or more units of the same type and/or size of equipment are required, such units shall all be produced by the same manufacturer. E. Tolerance: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the shop drawings and shall be closely adhered to. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. F. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro -inches in accordance with ANSI B46. 1. The following minimum finishes shall be used: Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro -inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact. 2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro -inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. 3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro -inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro - inches. G. Noise Level: 1. When the equipment is in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed the JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 432210-6 OSHA noise level requirements for a one hour exposure, and the regulatory agency having jurisdiction where the Project is located. 2. The maximum allowable noise level shall correspond to the type of occupancy and area classification as specified and shown on the Drawings. H. For additional products requirements, refer to Section 00-00 01 61 00 "Product 6 Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. 2.02 PUMPING UNIT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: All materials furnished as part of the pumping equipment shall be suitable for its intended use and service. Materials not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and, unless otherwise specified in the individual specification section, shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of close -grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48, or equal. 2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B 62. 3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be of Type 400, Series. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 316. 4. All anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. 5. Buried or submerged bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Bearings: Unless otherwise specified, bearings shall comply with the requirements listed below. 1. Be oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. 2. Rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings of Ball and Roller Bearings. 3. Have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life shall be determined using the maximum equipment operating speed. 4. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic alemite type. 5. Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 60°C and equipped with a filler pipe and an external level indicator gage. JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10-7 C. Couplings: 1. General: Pumps with a driver greater than 1/2 HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling. 2. Requirements: a. Accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and cushions shock loads and dampens torsion vibrations. b. Consist of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber; flexible member attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws; and flanges attached to the stub shaft by means of taperlock bushings which provide the equivalent of a shrunk -on fit. c. There shall be no metal -to -metal contact between the driver and the driven unit. Each coupling shall be sized and provided as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. d. Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded, provide Thomas -Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or equal couplings will be acceptable. D. V -Belt Drives: V -belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI and RMA Standards. 2. Unless otherwise specified, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. 3. Sheaves shall be statically balanced. For high speed application, where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at high belt speeds may be required to be constructed of special materials. 4. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be furnished complete with taper lock or QD bushings as required. 5. Finish bored sheaves shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. 6. Sliding motor bases shall be provided to adjust the tension of V -belts. E. Flanges: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI standard B16.1 or B 16.5 dimensions. F. Lubrication: 1. Vertical pump shafts shall be product water -lubricated, unless otherwise specified. Deep -well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water- or oil -lubricated bearings and seals. 2. For all vertical propeller, mixed -flow, and turbine pumps, other than deep well pumps, of bowl sizes 10 -inch and larger, the Contractor shall provide a stainless steel tube attached to the column for grease lubrication of bottom bearing. JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10-8 G. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage. H. Vortex Suppressors: Vertical pumps with insufficient submergence shall be furnished with vortex suppressors. I. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, and cooling water drains shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain, with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets. J. Seals: Seals for water and wastewater pump shafts shall be either stuffing box or mechanical seals. Unless specified otherwise, stuffing boxes and mechanical seals shall be selected for highest reliability and for rugged service, conforming to the requirements set forth in this paragraph. I. Stuffing Boxes: Where stuffing boxes are specified for the pump seal, they shall be of the best quality, using the manufacturer's suggested materials best suited for the specific application. a. For sewage, sludge, drainage, and liquids containing sediments, the seals shall be fresh -water flushed, using lantern rings. b. Description: Stuffing boxes shall be tapped to permit introduction of seal liquid and shall hold a minimum of five rows of packing. c. Stuffing boxes shall be face attached. d. Stuffing box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation, without machining or other modifications, of the mechanical seal specified above for the applicable pump and operating conditions. e. Lantern Rings: Bronze or Teflon, two-piece construction, and provided with tapped holes to facilitate removal. f. Packing: Unless otherwise specified, the packing material shall be die -molded packing rings of interlaced Teflon braiding, containing 50 percent ultrafine graphite impregnation to satisfy the following specification: 1) Shaft speeds - up to 2500 fpm 2) Temperature - up to 500 degrees F 3) pH range - 0-14 g. Glands: Bronze, two piece split construction. h. Impeller end of the packing on all but line -shaft pumps with external source water lubricated bearings shall be fitted with a SpiralTrac, Version P packing protection system as manufactured by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. 2. Mechanical Seals: a. Description: Mechanical seal shall be of a nondestructive (nonfretting) type requiring no wearing sleeve for the shaft. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished with no reduction in size through the seal area. b. Mechanical seals shall be the split cartridge type, requiring no field assembly, other than assembly around the shaft and insertion into the JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10-9 pump. Metal parts shall be Type 316 or 316L stainless steel. Springs shall be Hastalloy C. c. Rotary Faces: Ceramic or silicon carbide. d. Stationary Faces: Ceramic, tungsten carbide, or silicon carbide. e. Elastomers: Ethylene propylene or fluorocarbon. f. Service Operation: Full vacuum to 200 percent of the maximum specified operating pressure, but in any event not less than 200 psig. g. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals for pumping equipment shall be self -aligning, self -centering, single, Chesterton 442, AES or equivalent. h. Mechanical seals for all pumps (except lineshaft pumps where the seal barrier fluid is used for lineshaft bearing lubrication) shall be fitted with SpiralTrac Version F, N or D, as recommended by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. i. Unless the pump manufacturer recommends a better seal for a specific application, the following mechanical seals shall be furnished with the pumps: Sewage, Sludge, or Double seals: Wastewater Pumps: Abrasives, Grit, Double seals: Lime Slurry Pumps: Chemicals, and Single seals: Corrosive Liquid Pumps: Clean Water Pumps, Single seals: Hot and Cold: j. For all seal arrangements, a buffer fluid must be circulated a minimum 20 psi above suction pressure, or as required by manufacturer, in order to maintain reliable seal performance. 3. Shaft Sleeve: k. Section of shaft or impeller hub extending through or into the stuffing box shall be fitted with a replaceable stainless steel sleeve, having a Brinell hardness of not less than 500. 1. Sleeve held to the shaft to prevent rotation and gasketed to prevent leakage between the shaft and the sleeve. m. Minimum shaft sleeve thickness shall be 3/8 inch. 2.03 PUMP APPURTENANCES A. Manufacturer Nameplate: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, manufacturer's name and model number, and other appurtenant information. B. Equipment Identification Plates: A 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10- 10 shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 80 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs D. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors in accordance with Section 05 05 23 "Metal Fastenings and Anchor Bolts" and as shown on the Drawings. Size as required by manufacturer. E. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Manufacturer shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. Contractor shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. F. Solenoid Valves: The pump manufacturer shall furnish and install solenoid valves on the water or oil lubrication lines and on all cooling water lines. Solenoid valve electrical rating shall be compatible with the motor control voltage and shall be furnished complete with all necessary conduit and wiring installation from motor control panel to solenoid. Solenoid valve voltage shall be 120VAC, unless noted otherwise. G. Pressure Gages: Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of pumps (except sample pumps, sump pumps, and hot water circulating pumps) and shall be equipped with pressure gages installed at pump suction and discharge lines. Pressure gauges, when shown, shall be provided by the Contractor, unless specifically stated otherwise in the pump specification. 1. Pressure gages shall be located in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. 2. Pressure gages shall be furnished in conformance with 40 73 99 "Pressure Gauges and Thermometers." 3. Pump suctions shall be equipped with compound gages. Where subject to shock or vibrations, provide a snubber, which is wall -mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors. H. Guards: Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards which meet the requirements of OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of minimum 14 -gage galvanized steel or fiberglass; designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. I. Safety Signs: Provide the following safety signs in accordance with: 1. Equipment with guarded moving parts which operates automatically or by remote control shall be identified signs reading "CAUTION - EQUIPMENT STARTS AND STOPS AUTOMATICALLY." 2. Place a caution sign on the guard reading "CAUTION- KEEP GUARD IN JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10- 11 PLACE." 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the coordination of the following tests of each of each pump, motor controller, and motor: B. General: Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps of the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Inc. Tests shall be performed on the actual assembled unit from shut-off head condition to 150 percent of the required maximum design capacity. Prototype model tests will not be acceptable. C. Factory Tests of Pumps: 1. All pumps and motors of sizes 10 to 125 hp (inclusive) shall be factory -tested in accordance with the above specifications. Submit the Certified test data to the Engineer. This data shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Hydrostatic test with data recorded. b. Hydraulic test with a minimum of 5 readings between shutoff head and 125 percent of the maximum design capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute, signed, dated, and certified. c. Certification that the pump HP demand will not exceed the rated motor hp beyond the 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. 2. Vibration Test: Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit before final assembly. Limits; Complete rotating assembly, including drive unit and motor, shall be less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. D. Factory Tests of Motors: Motors shall be factory tested as indicated in Section 40 05 93 "Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". E. Factory Witnessed Tests: All pumps, and motors, 150 hp and larger, shall be factory -tested as complete, assembled units, as specified above, and witnessed by the Engineer and the Owner. 1. Manufacturer shall provide the Engineer a minimum of two (2) weeks notification prior to the test. 2. All costs for Owner and Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the bid price. Such costs shall include travel and subsistence for two people but shall exclude any salaries. Provide copies of the test results to the Engineer and no equipment shall be shipped until the test data have been approved. F. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the individual section requirements or efficiencies, the Contractor shall make all necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re -tested at no additional compensation, until found satisfactory. JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 43 22 10-12 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 70 00 "Execution Requirements". 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following: 1. Support all piping independently of the pump. 2. Level baseplate by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater the 1/4 -inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface. Accomplish wedging so that there is no change of level or springing of the base elbow when anchor bolts are tightened. 3. Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. 4. After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and the concrete foundation with a poured, non -shrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in 0 "Grout, Non -Shrink." Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. 5. Complete equipment installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. Turn rotating equipment by hand to check. Complete cleaning and testing of piping systems. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, piping, and structures of debris and foreign material. 6. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. 7. Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. 8. Flush, fill, and grease lubricated systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Seal Water Connections: Provide seal water ping, valves, flow indicator, pressure and flow control devices, to pump packing for units handling slurries, grit, water containing sand or solids, and as specified in the drawings in accordance with the Standard Details. C. Base Plate Drains: Provide drain line from pumping unit base to the floor drain. JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 43 22 10-13 D. Install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment, and other materials and equipment necessary to conduct testing and startup. E. Equipment 1. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 2. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. Adjust clearances and torques. 3. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. F. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 3.03 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Provide polyurethane, pigmented (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build epoxy) in accordance with Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings." Pump shall receive surface preparation, prime coat and finish coat in factory. B. Shop painted items which suffered damage to the shop coating shall be touched up as specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump as described below and in accordance with Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." Pumping units shall be field tested after installation, to demonstrate satisfactory operation, without causing excessive noise, vibration, cavitation, and overheating of the bearings. 2. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 3. Vibration Test: a. Test units installed and in normal operation, and discharging to the connected piping systems at rates between the low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified, and with the actual facility structures and foundations provided, shall not develop at any frequency or in any plane, peak -to -peak vibration amplitudes exceeding the limits specified. b. Any vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended in the Hydraulic Institute Standards and it shall be recorded at a minimum of four (4) pumping conditions defined by the ENGINEER. c. If units exhibit vibration in excess of the limits specified adjust, or modify as necessary. Units which cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced. JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10- 14 d. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. B. Performance Test: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for eight consecutive hours to be considered started up. 2. Operate the equipment through the design performance range. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the equipment, safety devices, controls, and process system operate within the design conditions. 3. Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. 4. Pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings, showing motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head, for at least four (4) pumping conditions at each pump rpm. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance. 5. Bearing temperatures shall be determined by a contact -type thermometer. A running time of at least 20 minutes shall be maintained for this test, unless liquid volume available is insufficient for a complete test. C. A copy of all information from functional tests, including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturers services shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 43 33 "Manufacturer's Field Services" and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training." 1. Manufacturer's representative shall be provided present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, and depending of the Construction Schedule, provide the number of trips required to provide the minimum person -days listed in the individual specification sections, travel time excluded. B. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that all equipment meets the specified performance requirements. CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment and shall visit the site of work to perform the following tasks. 1. Assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation of the equipment. 2. Inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation. 3. Start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. 4. Perform necessary field adjustments during the test period until the equipment JULY 30, 2026 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4322 10- 15 installation and operation are satisfactory to the ENGINEER. 5. Instruct OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction prior to system testing of the equipment shall include step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with all necessary equipment testing. C. Manufacture's Certificates: Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. 3.06 FACILITY STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." After initial startup under the supervision of a qualified representative of the pump manufacturer, a preliminary "running -in" period will be provided for the CONTRACTOR, per the Contract Documents, to make field tests and necessary adjustments. At the end of the specified period of operation, the pumps will be accepted if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the pumps has operated satisfactorily without excessive power input, wear, lubrication, or undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise at any operating speed and head, including shutoff. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 43 22 10-16 MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 43 22 56.01 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS AND INTERNAL RECYCLE PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Supply, delivery, site storage, installation, testing and placement into operation of submersible mixers and axial -flow pumps, including all appurtenances required to complete an operating system as specified. 2. Supply and installation of all components necessary to install a submersible mixer in the following locations: a. Anaerobic Zone Submersible Mixer per Bioreactor Basin 1) Two (2) submersible mixers in the anaerobic zones of each Bioreactor train, complete and operational with motor, retrieval frame, guiderail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 2) Mixers in the anaerobic zone shall be capable of VFD operation. Mixers utilize an NEMA rated induction motor and requires external VFDs, which shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. b. Fermenter, Pre Anoxic, and Post Anoxic Zone Submersible Mixers per Bioreactor Basin 1) Two (2) submersible mixers in the fermenter, two (2) submersible mixers in the pre anoxic zone, and two (2) submersible mixers in the post anoxic zone of each Bioreactor Basin, complete and operational with motor, retrieval frame, guiderail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 2) Mixers in the pre and post anoxic zones shall be single speed operation c. Return Sludge (RS) and Waste Sludge (WS) Submersible Mixers 1) Three (3) submersible mixers total in the RS and WS pump station, complete and operational with motor, retrieval frame, guiderail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 2) Mixers in the RS wet well shall be single speed operation 3. Supply and installation of all components necessary to install a submersible axial -flow pumps in pre anoxic zone 2 and aerobic zone 3. Section includes supply of one submersible axial -flow pump and installation where directed by the Engineer. a. Anoxic Internal Mixed Liquor Recycle (ARCY) Pumps: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 43 22 56.01 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1) Four (4) submersible horizontal propeller pumps in the pre anoxic zone of the bioreactors in basins 1, 2, 3, and 4 complete and operational with motor, retrieval frame, guiderail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and described herein. CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of the manufacturer of the supplied pump to certify the installation and operation of the internal recycle pumping system. b. Nitrate Internal Mixed Liquor Recycle (NRCY) Pumps: 1) Four (4) submersible horizontal propeller pumps in the pre anoxic zone of the bioreactors in basins 1, 2, 3, and 4 complete and operational with motor, retrieval frame, guiderail system, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and described herein. CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of the manufacturer of the supplied pump to certify the installation and operation of the internal recycle pumping system. c. Pump motors shall be capable of VFD operation. VFDs shall be provided by the CONTACTOR. 4. The composite cable that is supplied with each submersible mixer and pump will be connected to a termination cabinet under Division 26. Pump and mixers for VFD operation shall be provided with shielded submersible VFD rated cable by the manufacturer. 5. Motor starters, breakers, switchgear, external wiring and conduit for all equipment provided under this section will be done under Division 01. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 432256.01-2 MARYS CREEK WRY 4. Canadian Government Specification Board (CGSB). 5. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 6. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. General layout, mast, complete engineering description, and performance characteristics. 2. Size, details, and complete list of materials. 3. Details of control panel and wiring schematics. 4. Commissioning reports. 5. Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD) model of mixing in one fermenter zone, anaerobic zone, pre anoxic zone, post anoxic zone, and all RS Wetwell compartments, as designated in the drawings, to assist Engineer in exact location of mixer within the basin to provide optimal mixing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Installation Manuals. Submit installation manuals before shipment of any equipment. No payment will be made for equipment delivered before installation manuals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. Submit operation and maintenance manuals before requesting initial start-up. C. Submit all Drawings in US customary units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The wastewater will consist of mixed liquor activated sludge that can have a solids concentration as high as 10,000 mg/L in the bioreactors and 12,000 mg/L in the RS Wetwell. If field performance testing demonstrates that the mixer system does not satisfy the acceptance criteria specified in Part 3 — Field Performance Testing and Acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish additional mixers, larger mixers, alternative mixer configurations, or other modifications necessary to achieve compliance at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide a written guarantee that the gubmersible mixer will provide uniform mixing of Mixed Liquor in one Cell. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the unit fails to uniformly blend the fluid, replace the unit with a suitable mixer at no additional cost to the Owner. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 432256.01-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Flygt — Xylem, Inc. 2. KSB 3. Landia Inc. 2.02 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS A. Design the submersible mixers for continuous full load duty and guarantee the mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data sheet. Design and construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select all units to allow as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified details of design and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturer's standard. Zone Dimensions: a. Shown on the drawings 2. Number of Mixers: 8 per bioreactor basin. a. Location: Fermenter, anaerobic zone 1 & 2, pre anoxic zone 1 & 2, post anoxic zone 1 & 2. b. Service: Mixed Liquor. c. Velocity Jet Ring: No. d. Motor: 2.5-2.8 HP. e. Voltage: 460V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz f. Composite Cable: 30 feet long. g. Motor: With thermal and moisture switches. h. Materials: Standard. 3. Number of Mixers: 3 total for the RS wet well a. Location: as shown in the Drawings b. Service: Mixed Liquor. c. Velocity Jet Ring: No. d. Motor: 2.5-2.8 HP. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY e. Voltage: 460V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz f. Composite Cable: 30 feet long. g. Motor: With thermal and moisture switches. h. Materials: Standard. 2.03 MAST ASSEMBLY FOR SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS A. Mast: 316SS. B. Upper Support: 316SS. C. Intermediate Support: Wall mounted and 316SS. D. Lower Support: Wall mounted and 316SS. E. Quantity: Eight masts with all appurtenances. 2.04 SUBMERSIBLE AXIAL -FLOW PUMPS A. Design the submersible axial -flow pumps for continuous full load duty and guarantee the mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data sheet. Design and construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select all units to allow as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified details of design and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturer's standard. 1. Number of Pumps: 2 per basin 2. Location: Pre Anoxic Zone 2 and Aerobic Zone 3 3. Service: Mixed Liquor. 4. Motor: 15 HP. 5. Voltage: 460V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz 6. Composite Cable: 30 feet long. 7. Motor: With thermal and moisture switches. 8. Materials: Standard. 9. Bracket and Ring: Type 316L stainless steel 2.05 MAST ASSEMBLY FOR SUBMERSIBLE AXIAL -FLOW PUMPS A. Mast: 316SS. B. Upper Support: 316SS. C. Quantity: Two masts with all appurtenances. 2.06 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. The manufacturer shall supply the one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Submersible Mixers a. One (1) basic mixer repair kit per mixer; b. Other spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer 2. Submersible Axial Flow Pumps a. Three (3) complete sets of all bearings; b. Three (3) complete sets of o -rings, gaskets, and seals; c. Other spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Equipment Lubricants: The manufacturer shall indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. Contractor shall provide and install the recommended lubricants. C. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. Each part shall be labelled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data. 2.07 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM z A. A guide rail system shall be used to support each pump or mixer during operation and to guide the unit during installation and lubrication/preventative maintenance inspection. The system shall consist of a stop console, guide pipe, fixing brackets, and guide holder assembly. All components shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel (mast bearings may be constructed of Hostaform (POM)). They shall be used in connection with a minimum 2.5 - inch square (80 x 80 mm) guide pipe. Power/control cable holders shall be provided every 5 feet. B. The guiderail system shall be supplied with factory welded mounting brackets at the top, bottom, and intermediate levels as needed to provide support at a maximum of 10 foot intervals. C. The guide pipe shall be designed to absorb the pump or mixer thrust. D. A pump or mixer mounting tube shall be provided by the MANUFACTURER. The tube shall be a minimum 12 -inch in length with one end designed to support the pump and the other end terminating in a standard ANSI flange. E. A fabricated support frame shall support the entire weight of the pump or mixer at its horizontal center of gravity. F. The pump or mixer shall be furnished with a suspension bracket suitable for fixed or removable lifting wire installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY G. Provide Type 316 stainless steel cable grips for supporting cable at the top brackets without damage to the cable insulation or lowering the cables electrical resistance. H. The upper fixing bracket shall secure the system to the basin wall. The system shall provide lateral support for the guide pipe. The upper guide holder assembly shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel. The upper guide holder shall surround the guide pipe to effectively support the guide pipe in all directions in the horizontal plane. Support brackets that are only attached to the guide pipe on one side of the pipe shall not be accepted. The guide rail assembly shall contain a 316 stainless steel hook for the cable mesh and a self - tightening polypropylene cable mesh to secure the pump lower cable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. The final acceptance of the equipment requires a field test for handling the specified fluid under specified conditions. B. Furnish for each unit, certified performance curves that show efficiency, speed range, brake horsepower, at no extra charge. C. Make available to the Owner without charge, all test records, whether test witnessing is required or not on the Data Sheet. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide stainless steel mounting bolts, washers, and nuts and install the equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and typical installation detail included in this section. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer Services 1. Manufacturer's Field Representative: The Manufacturer's Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days and trips provided in the tables below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The Manufacturer's Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 432256.01-7 MARYS CREEK WRF Table 1— Manufacturer's Field Representative Schedule Bioreactor Submersible Mixers Work Description Number Person Number of Trips Days Installation assistance and 4 2* inspection Functional and performance testing 4 2* Pre -startup re -startup classroom training /2 1 (Coincide with "Facility startup" trip) Facility startup 4 2* Post -startup training of OWNER'S 1/2 1 personnel *Each trip will be dedicated to startup activities associated with a single bioreactor basin. Table 2 — Manufacturer's Field Representative Schedule RS and WS Pump Station Submersible Mixers Work Description Number Person Number of Trips Days Installation assistance and 1 1 inspection Functional and performance testing 1 1 Pre -startup classroom training 1/2 1 (Coincide with "Facility startup" trip) Facility startup 1 1 Post -startup training of OWNER'S 1/2 1 personnel Table 3 — Manufacturer's Field Representative Schedule Submersible Axial Flow Pum s Work Description Number Person Number of Trips Days Installation assistance and 2 2* inspection Functional and performance testing 2 2* Pre -startup classroom training 1/2 1 (Coincide with "Facility startup" trip) Facility startup 2 2* Post -startup training of OWNER'S 1/2 1 personnel *Each trip will be dedicated to startup activities associated with a single bioreactor basin. 2. Manufacturer's post -post startup training of Owner's personnel shall not be performed until after equipment has successfully completed the functional and performance tests. 3. Services Provided: a. Furnish test forms and procedures for field testing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY b. Furnish installation and startup services. c. Furnish training of OWNER'S personnel at such times requested by OWNER. d. Inspect the completed installation and note deficiencies. e. Be present and assist the CONTRACTOR during start-up, adjusting, and site testing of completed installation. Perform acceptance test and operate system to verify satisfactory operation of each unit. Check units for excessive noise, vibration, alignment and general operation. Verify conformance to requirements. f. Instruct OWNER personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. g. Prepare Equipment Supplier's installation report within 30 days after completion of field testing. Include the following information in the report: 1) Field testing results. 2) Descriptions of installation deficiencies not resolved to the manufacturer's satisfaction. 3) Description of problems or potential problems. 4) Names of OWNER personnel who attended operations and maintenance training sessions. 5) Record copy of materials used for training session including outlined summary of course. 6) Equipment Supplier's Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Performance. 4. Equipment Supplier's services shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup" and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training." /'\ B. Field Testing B. R 1. Proof of Performance by Demonstration shall included: b. Ability to thoroughly mix and keep solids suspended. c. The equipment's d. Control systems performance and repeatability (including 2. Obtain design Engineer's approval of test procedures prior to testing. B. Acceptance Criteria for Submersible Mixers The mixer system shall successfully complete a Performance Test under actual process conditions. The Performance Test shall demonstrate compliance with all of the following requirements: a. Mixing Performance PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1) The mixer system shall maintain all settleable solids in suspension throughout the active basin volume during normal operating conditions. 2) After a minimum of four (4) hours of continuous mixer operation with no aeration contribution to mixing, samples collected at a minimum of five (5) locations and three (3) depths within each zone, including near the floor, at the basin midpoint, and near the water surface, shall not vary by more than ten (10) percent from the arithmetic average Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS) concentration of all samples collected. 3) Visual observation using a Sludge Judge shall confirm the absence of persistent sludge deposits greater than 2 inches in depth on the basin floor. Any accumulation exceeding this limit shall constitute a failed test. 4) No dead zones based on observation of water/solids separation or areas exhibiting prolonged solids deposition as determined by the Engineer using a Sludge Judge shall be permitted. b. Hydraulic Performance 1) The installed mixer shall be the model submitted and approved. 2) Measured operating current at field conditions shall not exceed the manufacturer's published full -load current by more than ten (10) percent. c. Mechanical Performance 1) Mixers shall operate continuously for thirty (30) consecutive days without: a) Unscheduled shutdowns. b) Mechanical seal failures. c) Bearing failure. d) Excessive vibration. e) Excessive noise. f) Thermal overload trips. 2) Vibration measured at accessible mounting points shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended limits. d. Seal Integrity 1) Seal leakage detection devices shall remain in a non -alarm condition throughout the performance test period. 2) There shall be no visible oil leakage and no water intrusion into motor or seal chambers as verified by the manufacturer's inspection following completion of the performance test. 3) Activation of any moisture intrusion alarm shall constitute a failed performance test. Controls and Alarms PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1) Demonstrate proper operation of all controls, interlocks, status signals, and alarms. 2) Each alarm, shutdown, and restart function shall be successfully demonstrated three (3) consecutive times without malfunction. 3) Variable -frequency -drive -operated mixers shall successfully operate throughout the specified speed range, including minimum turndown conditions, without nuisance trips, instability, or overheating. f. Performance Test Failure 1) The mixer system shall be considered to have failed the Performance Test if any of the following occur: a) Failure to meet any acceptance criterion specified herein including mixing performance homogeneity, hydraulic performance, mechanical performance, seal integrity, or controls and alarms. b) Formation of solids accumulations exceeding the limits specified herein. c) Any equipment shutdown caused by mixer, motor, seal, bearing, controls, instrumentation, or VFD malfunction. d) Activation of moisture, seal -failure, overload, or thermal -protection alarms not attributed to operator error. e) Inability to successfully complete the required continuous operating period. 2) If the equipment fails the Performance Test, the Contractor shall modify, repair, or replace equipment as required and repeat the Performance Test at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Performance Test 1. Performance Test shall be run with wastewater under normal operating conditions. If equipment fails before 30 days, then MANUFACTURER shall correct problems at their own expense and restart the 30 -day Performance Test. MANUFACTURER and CONTRACTOR are responsible for equipment operation during the 30 -day Performance Test. MANUFACTURER shall perform initial training at the end of the 30 -day Performance Test for OWNER's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Upon completion of Performance Test and Training, the OWNER shall consider that equipment substantially complete and start the warranty period. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 432256.01-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.04 START-UP A. Before operating equipment, provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's service representative to inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment after installation. B. Submit the manufacturer's representative's signed report describing in detail the inspection, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report must verity that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract for the service intended and is ready for permanent operation. Provide copies of this report to be included in the installation, operation and maintenance manuals. C. Included in the Inspection: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness of installation as specified and as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts of system. D. Operate, test, and adjust equipment to prove that it is satisfactorily installed to operate under the intended conditions as specified. E. Equipment will only be accepted after receipt of the manufacturer's representative's report. F. Provide notice in writing at least 48 hours before manufacturer's representative is scheduled to perform these activities. G. Modify or replace equipment or materials failing required tests. H. Perform additional testing required due to changes of materials required by Supplier or as a result of failure of materials or construction to meet specifications. I. Unconditionally guarantee the equipment to meet or exceed the design criteria detailed in this specification. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARYS CREEK WRY Table 44: Submersible Mixer Design Parameters Fermenter, Pre Anoxic, Mixers Location Anaerobic Zone and Post Anoxic Zones RS and WS Pump (per Bioreactor Basin) of each Bioreactor Station Basin 2 per fermenter per basin 2 per pre anoxic zone per basin 1 per compartment (3 Number of Mixers 2 per basin (8 total) 2 per post anoxic zone total) per basin 24 total) BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)_FERM01 _MX0 1 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)_FERM01 _MX0 2 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)_AN01_MX01 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, RS01_B01_MX01 Tag Numbers BRB04)_AX01_MX01 RS01_B01_MX02 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, RS01_B01_MX03 BRB04)_AN02_MX01 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)_AX02_MX01 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)_AX03_MX01 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04)AX04 MX01 VFD Operation (supplied by CONTRACTOR), Yes, 50% No No Minimum Turndown (% of Full Speed) Basin Volume (ft3) Refer to Drawings Refer to Drawings Refer to Drawings Power Supply (V) 460 460 460 Motor Speed (RPM) 855-1150 855-1150 855-1150 Minimum Thrust (N) 351 333 333 Motor Size (HP) 2-8 2-8 2-8 VFD Rated Yes No No Propeller Diameter (in.) 12.0 - 19.7 12.0- 19.7 12.0— 19.7 Number of Blades Two (2) or Three (3) Two (2) or Three (3) Two (2) or Three (3) Propeller Material Polyurethane or Stainless Polyurethane or Stainless Polyurethane or Stainless Steel Steel Steel Propeller Speed (RPM) 855-1150 855-1150 855-1150 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 43 22 56.01 - 13 D MARYS CREEK WRF Table 25: Pump Design Parameter Recycle Stream ARCY NRCY Tag Numbers BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04) ARCY01 PMP01 BRB01(BRB02, BRB03, BRB04) NRCY01 PMP01 Pump Location 1 per pre anoxic zone per basin 4 total) 1 per aerobic zone per basin (4 total) Design TDH (ft) 3.25 4.42 Design Flow Rate (gpm) 9,264 9,264 Turndown TDH (Ft) 1.58 1.95 Turndown Flow Rate m 6,177 6,177 Free Passage Diameter, minimum 3 -inch 3 -inch Power Supply 460V/3PH/60HZ 460V/3PH/60HZ Motor HP, maximum 15 HP 15 HP Motor Speed, maximum 855-1165 RPM 855-1165 RPM Propeller Speed, maximum 855-1165 RPM 855-1165 RPM Operation, Minimum Turndown (% of Rated Capacity) VFD, 50% VFD, 50% PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 43 22 56.01 - 14 MARYS CREEK WRF PLUMMER 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 = 5.0 I- F 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 0 FORT WORTH. ARCY PUMP SYSTEM CURVE 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 Flow Rate (gpm) —Typical Static Head, C=120 ......Low Static Head, C=140 ...... High Static Head, C=100 - -2Q= 8.9 MGD - -3Q=13.35 MGD PLUMMER 10.0 9.0 - 8.0 - 7.0 - 6.0 - 5.0- c I 4.0 - 3.0 - 2.0 - 1.0 00 FORT WORTH, NRCY PUMP SYSTEM CURVE A-� _ __�_®D�-QQ�� -- iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii,iiUiiiI ____ ===ie===E= iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiriNINON ®E=i====iiiBiEiiiiiiiiiii'eiiiia=_iii !!■iii®iiiiii�li����iiiii®®ieiie�e�Je------------ 0 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 Flow Rate (gpm) —Typical Static Head, C=120 ...... Low Static Head, C=140 ......High Static Head, C=100 --- 2O = 8.9 MGD - -3Q = 13.35 MGD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS JULY 30, 2026 43 22 56.01 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 43 32 69 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Chemical feed skid package(s) including chemical metering/feed pump(S), piping, valves, instrumentation and electrical components, and all other appurtenances required and specified herein for a fully function system. 2. Assistance with installation, startup, testing, and placing the package(s) in operation. Training of Owner's personnel. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 91 14 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 05 01 - Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 7. Section 40 05 33 - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Piping 8. Section 40 05 31.11 - Piping System, Chemical Feed 9. Section 40 10 01 - Polyethylene Storage Tank 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D1784-11: Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 2. F 1970-19: Standard Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems 3. D1998-21 HDPE (High -Density Polyethylene) Chemical Storage Tanks PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS 43 32 69 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Summary: 1. The chemical feed skid package for each chemical system shown in the Equipment Schedule at the end of this Section shall include all components specified herein and will include at a minimum chemical feed pump(s), piping, valves, instrumentation, electrical components, and all other incidentals and accessories required to dose the specified chemical(s) at the location(s) shown in the Plans and in the Equipment Schedule. 2. The chemical feed skid package(s) shall be designed, coordinated, and supplied by a competent System Integrator. The System Integrator must be regularly engaged in designing and assembling chemical feed skid packages for water and/or wastewater treatment plants. The System Integrator shall confirm that a complete and functioning system is supplied for each chemical system specified in this Section. The System Integrator shall coordinate the mounting of all equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances for each chemical feed skid package as specified herein. Power shall be provided by a single 120VAC power connection. All devices are the skid are wired to a termination cabinet for single point external customer connection. 3. The System Integrator shall refer to the P&ID(s) listed in the Equipment Schedule for additional information as to the connection points, interconnections, vents, proposed valving, etc. While the proposed skid(s) may differ slightly from the P&ID, the system shall be designed and operate based on the intent of this Section and the P&ID(s). The System Integrator is advised to seek written confirmation from the Engineer that the proposed skid(s) is acceptably consistent with the P&ID(s). B. General: 1. NSF/ANSI-61-600 Certification: All surfaces and materials in contact with chemicals being added to water that is being treated for potable use shall comply with the requirements of NSF/ANSI-61-600. An accredited testing laboratory/facility shall certify the product. The chemical feed skid package itself will not be NSF/ANSI-61-600 certified; however, each package shall be constructed of components and materials that have each been certified as complying with NSF/ANSI-61-600. Pumps shall be NSF Certified. 2. System Arrangement: The System Integrator is responsible for the system arrangement based on the piping orientation provided in the Plans and as shown on the process and instrumentation diagrams. 3. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this Section are based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered the minimum limits of acceptability. The System CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 43 32 69 -2 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Integrator shall be responsible for the design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this Section 4. Arrangements other than those shown on the Plans shall require Owner's written approval. 5. Environmental Conditions: a. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed for the service environment encountered in this installation. b. The environment may be moist and corrosive; exhibiting corrosive liquids and/or gases typically encountered at water and wastewater treatment plants. c. The components and package shall be capable of operation at ambient temperatures of 0°F to 110°F. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements 1. Refer to the Equipment Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Performance Requirements: 1. All components and materials of each chemical feed skid package including equipment, components, valves, piping, and all other incidentals for a fully functional system shall be compatible for each package's intended chemical service. The intended chemical service, solution strength, and other information is provided in this in the Equipment Schedule and this end of this Section. 2. All components shall be capable of intermittent and continuous operation. C. Structural Performance: 1. All equipment, supports, anchors, and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with pump starting/stopping, turbulence, thrust from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction, and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. D. Operation: 1. Equipment shall be designed and capable of either continuous or intermittent operation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.05 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be prepared and submitted for review in accordance with Section 01 30 00 "Project Documentation". All deviations from Contract Documents shall be clearly identified and approved by the Engineer in writing. A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product indicated, include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components including rated capacities, operating characteristics, instrumentation and electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each chemical feed system, include plans, elevations, sections, process diagrams, details, and attachments to other work such as off - skid piping, etc. 1. Manufacturer and model number of all equipment within this specification and an itemized list of components being furnished. 2. Layout drawings including all proposed system components, dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Plans, sections, isometric views, and other drawings shall be provided to clearly show the configuration of the skid. 3. Design performance characteristics including, sizes, capacities, head, viscosity, and NPSH requirements over the specified operating ranges, and other appropriate information. 4. List of materials of construction, coatings, and chemical compatibility. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring including information on controls and monitoring devices furnished. 6. Complete information on all electric and instrumentation equipment and electric power requirements. C. Information Submittals: 1. Factory functional and performance test reports and log. 2. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 6. Location of nearest stocking distribution of spare parts. 7. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 43 32 69 -4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 8. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 9. Qualification Data: For System Integrator and components' manufacturer and representative. 10. Startup and test schedule and procedures in accordance with Division 1. 11. Field Quality - Control Reports. 12. Source Quality- Control Reports. 13. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data". 14. Any other information necessary for the Engineer to determine compliance with the specifications. 15. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed by the Engineer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. System Integrator Qualifications: The chemical feed skid package System Integrator shall have at least fifteen (15) installations of a similar size, type, and chemical process specified in this Section, each with a minimum of two (2) years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All equipment specified in Section shall be the product of manufacturers having a least fifteen (15) United States installations of a similar size, type, and chemical process specified in this Section, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. C. Source Limitations: 1. Equipment units of each type specified in this Section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer by the System Integrator. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Manufacturer's installation report is required prior to final acceptance. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY F. Manufacturer shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas or shall furnish spare parts within 48 hours of request. G. Each pump and motor shall be furnished with a stainless -steel nameplate securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the equipment number, manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed, and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors and reducers shall include the motor or reducer number, manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, reduction ratio, input voltage, amps, torque, number of revolutions per minute (RPMs or pulses), and power and service factors. H. The pumps shall not differ from the basic requirements specified herein. Pumps differing from minor specified requirements may be accepted in writing provided that each point of difference is clearly stated in the shop drawings. This requirement is set forth to facilitate review of the shop drawings and is not to be construed by the Contractor, System Integrator, or Equipment Manufacturer as waiving any of the specified requirements. L Pumps shall be given manufacturer's standard quality control inspections and test to confirm the quality of materials used in the manufacture of the units and workmanship conform to the specified requirements and highest industry practice, the units operate properly, and the units have been correctly and adequately prepared for shipment, long-term site storage, and initial operation. J. Assembled chemical feed skids shall be pressure and leak tested at the point of assembly. Testing shall be in accordance with Division 40. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship and deliver system components and complete packages in accordance with the System Integrator's written instructions. The General Contractor shall handle and store system components and complete packages in accordance with the System Integrator's written instructions and the requirements of Section 01 30 00 "Project Documentation". A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 433269-6 APRIL24,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CHEMICAL FEED SKID SYSTEM INTEGRATOR A. Chemical feed systems using peristaltic pumps shall be designed, coordinated, and supplied by a competent System Integrator. The System Integrator shall be regularly engaged in designing and assembling chemical feed systems for water and wastewater treatment plants. The System Integrator shall be responsible for a complete functioning system being supplied for each chemical feed system. The System Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating and skid mounting all equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances for each chemical feed system as specified herein. B. System Integrator: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Environmental Improvements, Inc. (EI2) — Lewisville, Texas. 2. Macaulay Controls Co. — Plano, Texas. 2.02 CHEMICAL FEED SKID A. The feed pump(s), piping, valves, instruments, and appurtenances shall be mounted to a skid assembly. The skid assembly shall be wall or floor mounted, as indicated in the Equipment Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Chemical System Skid: 1. General: a. Overall skid dimensions shall not exceed the maximum dimensions shown on the Drawings. b. Placement of commonly accessed or maintained pump accessories (valves, instruments, electrical, etc.) is not to exceed 6.5 feet in height above the finished floor. c. Provide front access for any normal replacement parts on skid, including ability to switch out replacement parts without disconnecting hard piping. d. End partitions shall extend at least 6 inches behind the edge of pump shelving. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS 433269-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Provide a wall or floor mounted pump and accessory support system for the pumps as shown generally on the Drawings and indicated in the Equipment Schedule. 3. Construction a. Skid Frame: Skid to be constructed of minimum Y2" thick corrosion resistant FRP (glass with vinyl ester resin) or fusion welded polypropylene with structural fiberglass reinforcement as required to minimize deflection and resin compatible with chemical specified. Skid shall be floor mounted with 3" minimum sidewall depth for chemical containment. Skid mounted assemblies are to include all accessories, pre -piped and gusseted vertical back panel to rigidly anchor and support controls, pump, and piping. The skid shall be able to withstand the weight of the mounted equipment including the chemical during operation and calibration. Pipe and equipment support on the skid shall be constructed of corrosion resistant non-metallic material. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. b. Skid Mounting Board: 1/2" thick HDPE panels or polypropylene panels, provide chamfered or rounded edge on all PE panels. c. The skid frame shall have forklift cutouts for installation. d. Skid Pump Shelf: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" Type 316 stainless steel or FRP square tubing, with 1/16" wall thickness and 1/2" thick HDPE panels or the equivalent with polypropylene panels providing adequate support for the equipment. All welded construction. All welds to be ground flush with the frame. Provide chamfered or rounded edge on all PE panels. e. Skid Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel f. Pipe Clamps: Non-metallic clamps that accommodate pipe thermal expansion and contraction. Pipe clamps with threaded closure systems will not be accepted. 4. Piping: a. Refer to Division 40. Where HDPE can be used, piping and fittings used for all on -skid piping shall meet the requirements of Section 40 05 33. In applications where HDPE does not meet the defmition for chemical compatibility, the chemical feed skid System Integrator shall use an approved material that meets the definition used in this Section. b. Each skid shall be provided with a vent piping system. The calibration column, degassing valves, air release valves, vent/stand- pipe assemblies on the suction side of the skid, etc. shall connect to CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 433269-8 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF a common vent header. The Contractor will connect to this common vent header and continue the vent system as shown on the Plans. c. Each skid shall be provided with drain and flush connections so that the skid can be taken out of service and flushed with fresh, potable water for maintenance. d. All components, including valve seals and seats, shall be compatible with the chemical service for which they will be used, as defined in this Section. The on -skid piping shall be sized based on Table 43 32 69-1. Table 43 32 69-1: On -Skid Piping Sizes Design Flow of Individual Pump (GPH) Suction Pipe Size (INCH) Discharge Pipe Size (INCH) 0-10 10-25 3/ 25-50 3/ 34 50-75 1 75-125 1 1 120 — 200 1-% 1-% 200-300 2 1-% 2.03 PERISTALIC POSITITVE DISPLACEMENT TUBING PUMP A. Pump Construction: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, wash-down/water-tight/dust-proof. 2. Drive Case: Die cast aluminum with fusion bonded polyester coating. 3. Drive Head: Hinged guard door or one-piece clear polycarbonate cover. 4. Drive Shaft: Nickel -plated carbon steel or stainless steel 440C. 5. Rollers, main/guide: the following roller configurations shall be permitted. a. Squeeze Rollers: Squeeze rollers with encapsulated ball bearings directly coupled to a one-piece thermoplastic rotor. Two squeeze rollers for tubing compression shall be located 180 degrees apart and two guide rollers that do not compress the tubing shall be located 180 degrees apart for a total of four rollers. The roller diameters and occlusion gap shall be factory set to provide the optimum tubing compression. b. Spring Loaded Rollers: Two stainless steel; spring loaded tube clamp mechanism and roller assembly. One roller engaged providing tubing compression, preventing backflow, or siphoning. 6. Safety Interlock: Render drive inoperable when cover is opened. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Speed Control: 2200:1 turndown (minimum), with 0.1 rpm resolution, 0.1% set speed accuracy. 8. Speed: The pump selected shall meet the requirements of the Equipment Schedule at the end of this Section. The maximum pump speed at the design dose provided in the Equipment Schedule shall not exceed 50 - percent of the maximum pump speed. 9. Leak Detection: Tube failure detection sensors shall be provided and trigger pump shutdown in the event of a tubing failure. Leak detection sensors shall be either wholly located in the pump head or mounted to the drain port of the pump head. Both float -type and non -float -type sensors shall be permitted. 10. Motor: Maintenance Free, Brushless DC motor. a. Integral gearbox. b. Power Supply: 120V, 1 -phase, 60 Hz. c. Motor shall include overload protection. B. Operating Requirements: 1. Self -priming when completely dry having suction lift capacity up to 30 feet of water. 2. Flow, Pressure, and Liquid: Refer to Pump Schedule at end of this Section for the type of liquid to be pumped, flows, and pressures. C. Tubing Elements: 1. Tubing shall be sized for the design flows and pressures, with material characteristics suitable for the liquids pumped. Sizing shall be based on average tube speeds of 30 RPM or less. 2. Materials: a. Shall be compatible with chemical pumped, causing no degradation to the material. b. NSF or FDA approved for use with drinking water. 3. Tubing shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head and without use of special tools. 4. Tube elements shall incorporate quick connect or threaded type fittings integral to the tubing elements. 5. Connection fittings shall be permanently clamped to the tubing with stainless steel clamps or over molded directly to the tubing. To prevent tubing misalignment and ensure accuracy, fittings shall insert into keyed slots located in the pump head and secured in place by the pump head cover. D. Control: CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 433269-10 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Keypad: For start, stop, speed increment, speed decrement, forward/reverse direction, rapid prime, and programming. 2. Pump Operation: Manual, remote, analog speed control, and digital network control. 3. Security: Dual operator/supervisor four -digit PIN code protection of pump settings. 4. Auto Control: Flow paced 4-20 mA signal from SCADA network. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Watson -Marlow Pumps; QDOS 60 2. Blue -White Industries: Flex Pro M3 F. Schedule: Refer to the schedule at the end of this section. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. Provide spare parts as recommended by System Integrator and the various components manufacturers including but not limited to the following: 1. One (1) complete spare pump assembly. 2. Five (5) quick connect or threaded tubing elements per pump. 3. One (1) spare pump head/rotor for each pump model supplied. 4. Special tools necessary to maintain the equipment. 5. Other parts recommended by the System Integrator as typically needed in the first two (2) years of operation. B. Furnish spare parts and materials that match the products furnished and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. Accessories listed below shall be furnished by the System Integrator. 2. Each chemical feed skid, unless otherwise indicated on the Schedule, and as shown on the P&ID(s), shall have the following accessories: a. Calibration column with true union ball shutoff valve. b. Pulsation dampener with true union ball shutoff valve. c. Pressure relief valve. d. Sight glass with streamers. e. Pressure gauge with protective seal diaphragm and true union ball shutoff valve. f. Anti -siphon valve/Back-pressure valve. g. True union ball valves. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF h. True union ball check valves. i. Basket and/or wye strainers. j. Automatic degassing valve. B. Calibration Chamber: 1. Provide with shutoff true union ball valve on suction piping to each peristaltic pump. 2. Chamber volume shall be sized to accommodate a 30 -second (minimum) draw -down at the maximum feed rate of the pumping system. The column shall be graduated in both mL and GPH. 3. The calibration column shall have threaded fittings on both the top and bottom, if applicable with the chemical service. The top fitting shall be routed to the vent connection of the skid. 4. The column shall be installed at the lowest possible elevation to facilitate gravity filling. In suction lift applications, valving on the pump's discharge shall be provided for calibration column filling. 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ACCU-DRAW PVC Calibration Cylinder by Primary Fluid Systems, Inc. b. Approved equal. C. Pulsation Dampener: 1. Single -diaphragm type pulsation dampener, with true union ball shutoff valve, shall be installed on the discharge lines of each pump. Materials of construction of diaphragm and body shall be corrosion resistant to the chemical fluid pumped. 2. Dampener shall be capable of arresting water hammer in the pump discharge lines created by the metering pumps. 3. Dampener shall be of the air -charged type with pressure gauge to indicate charge pressure and to indicate dampening effectiveness. Initial charge shall be set by the System Integrator and noted on the installation certificate. 4. Pulsation dampeners shall be sized appropriately for each pump to remove a minimum of 95% of the pulsations. The manufacturer shall provide calculations to verify sizing. 5. Size shall be as indicated in Table 43 32 69-2: Table 43 32 69-2: On -Skid Dampener Sizes Displacement per Dampener Revolution Size (gallon) (cubic inches) Up to 0.0058 10 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 433269-12 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 0.0058-0.022 36 0.022 - 0.079 85 0.079 - 0.76 175 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ACCU-PULSE Pulsation Dampener by Primary Fluid Systems,Inc. b. Approved equal. D. Pressure Relief Valve: 1. Install on each pump discharge line. The pressure relief valve shall be the same size as the pump's discharge piping. Connection reducers are not acceptable. 2. Set point shall be field adjustable between 5 and 150 psig and initially set by the System Integrator and noted on the installation certificate. Refer to the Equipment Schedule for the initial set -point. 3. The pressure relief knob shall be of the spring opposed diaphragm type with threaded adjustment knob and locknut. Plunger or piston type pressure relief valves are not acceptable. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. TOP VALVE Pressure Relief Valve by Primary Fluid Systems, Inc. b. Plast-O-Matric RVDT (in -line) or RVTX (angle -pattern). E. Sight Glasses: 1. Provide sight glass with streamers on each pump discharge line. Site glass shall be the same size as the pump's discharge piping. Connection reducers are not acceptable. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Series GX by Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc. b. Approved equal. F. Pressure Gauge: 1. Provide 316 stainless steel cased, liquid filled process type gauge with 316 stainless steel tube and socket on each pump discharge line, complete with true union ball isolation valve and diaphragm isolation. 2. Pressure Range: Refer to the Equipment Schedule for the range. 3. Dial: 4 -inch minimum. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Type 1209 or T6500. b. Wika Type 233.30. G. Pressure Instrument Diaphragm Isolator 1. Each pressure gauge and pressure transmitter provided and installed on the discharge of each pump shall include a diaphragm isolator. 2. The isolator and instrument shall be factory assembled together and tamper -proof sealed. Fill fluid shall be non -reactive with the chemical being pumped. 3. The lower housing shall be %2 -inch threaded connection minimum. 4. The lower housing and diaphragm materials shall be compatible with the chemical being pumped. 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Type 101. b. Approved equal by Wika. H. Equipment Identification Plates: A 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. I. Anti -Siphon Valve/Back-Pressure Valves 1. Install on the common discharge line when required in the Equipment Schedule. The back -pressure valves shall prevent siphoning or leakage of chemicals from the storage tank(s) through the pumps to the injection point. The back -pressure valve shall be the same size as the discharge piping. Connection reducers are not acceptable. 2. Set point shall be field adjustable from 5 to 150 psig and initially set by the System Integrator (based on the Equipment Schedule) and noted on the installation certificate. 3. The pressure relief knob shall be of the spring opposed diaphragm type with threaded adjustment knob and locknut. Plunger or piston -type pressure relief valves are not acceptable. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. TOP VALVE Back -Pressure / Anti -Siphon Valve by Primary Fluid Systems, Inc. b. Plast-O-mastic RVDT (in -line) or RVTX (angle -pattern) CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 433269-14 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PVC/CPVC Ball Valve, 2 -inches and Smaller. 1. True union type manufactured to ASTM F 1970-19 and constructed from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Type 1, ASTM D1784-11 Cell Classification 12454 or chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) Type IV, ASTM D1784- 11 Cell Classification 23447; O -rings shall be compatible with the chemical being pumped. Valves shall be of the solvent weld type rated at 150 psig at 73°F and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. 2. Valves shall be PVC or CPVC construction to match adjacent piping. All devices to be adapted to connect to HDPE pipe. Threaded adapters may be used. 3. Provide vented ball valves when specified in the Equipment Schedule. 4. Manufacturer: a. Georg Fischer Type 546. b. Approved equal by ASAHI-America. c. Approved equal by Hayward. K. PVC/CPVC Ball Check Valve, 4 inches and Smaller: 1. True union type manufactured to ASTM F 1970-19 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D1784-11 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV, ASTM D1784-11 Cell Classification 23447; O -rings shall be compatible with the chemical being pumped. Valves shall threaded type rated at 150 psig at 73°F and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. 2. Valves shall be PVC or CPVC construction to match adjacent piping. All devices to be adapted to connect to HDPE pipe. Threaded adapters may be used. 3. Manufacturer: a. Georg Fischer. b. Approved equal by ASAHI-America. c. Approved equal by Hayward. L. Basket Strainer 1. True union type manufactured from PVC or CPVC body matching the piping material; O -rings and seals shall be Viton® or other chemically compatible elastomer; basket material shall be non-metallic and compatible with the service environment. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hayward. b. Approved equal. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF M. Wye Strainer 1. True union type manufactured from clear PVC; O -rings and seals shall be Viton® or other chemically compatible elastomer; strainer screen material shall be non-metallic and compatible with the service environment. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hayward. b. Approved equal. N. Flow Meter 1. When specified in the Equipment Schedule, the System Integrator shall provide a chemical feed skid with a flow meter. 2. Magnetic flow meter compatible with the service environment and sized by the System Integrator. 3. Grounding rings for sodium hypochlorite and ferric sulfate shall be Hastelloy C. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the following: a. Endress Hauser, Promag W400. b. Approved equal. O. Automatic Degassing Valve (Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Skid Only) 1. The discharge of each pump shall be equipped with an automatic degassing valve designed to vent gases. 2. The vent from each degassing valve shall be connected to the vent connection of each skid. 3. Materials of construction compatible with sodium hypochlorite. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Series DGV by Plast-o-Mastic Valves, Inc. No Approved Equal. 2.06 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTATION A. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Division 26 and 40 Sections. B. Panels: All panels, wiring and raceways shall be done at the Factory. Provide a NEMA 4X terminal box with latching clips for all wiring terminations. Termination shall be done at a terminal strip. CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 43 32 69 - 16 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Unscheduled Devices: 1. Provide instrument manifolds for all static pressure, liquid level, and differential pressure application. 2. Provide an external weatherproof on -off switch for each instrument obtaining power from an external power source (non -loop powered). 3. Provide field surge protection on all 4-20 mA instrument signals. Protection device shall be NEMA 4X and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide sunshields on all instruments mounted outdoors. D. Commissioning: Commissioning of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, the product data and shop drawings and Division 01 specifications. 2.07 FINISHES A. All equipment items except stainless steel and HDPE shall receive surface preparation, prime coating, and finish coating in the factory in accordance with Section 09 90 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings". Finish coating colors shall be selected by the OWNER from finish color charts to be provided in shop drawing submittals. Furnish one gallon of touch up paint for installation CONTRACTOR to apply. B. All stainless -steel surfaces shall be cleaned, and welds shall be brushed with Type 316 stainless steel brushes. Electro bead blast or chemically treat all external non -welded stainless steel to a uniform finish. C. Motors and hydraulic units shall have a factory finish. D. Machined, polished, and non-ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion prevention compound. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The General Contractor will install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the manufacturer's representative approves the installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS 43 32 69 - 17 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.02 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL A. Each chemical feed skid package shall be pressure and leak tested. The factory testing shall be performed by the System Integrator prior to shipping. Proof of testing and results shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment of the skid(s). B. The factory pressure/leak testing of each skid shall be for a period of one (1) hour and shall be a pressure of 1.5 times the backpressure specified in the Equipment Schedule. The peristaltic positive -displacement tubing pump does not need to be installed or operated during this test; however, the System Integrator shall provide the necessary temporary piping and fittings necessary to connect the pump suction and discharge piping for a complete test of the package. C. Testing shall be considered satisfactory when no pressure loss is measured and there are no visible leaks. The System Integrator shall be responsible for making modifications or repairs as necessary to achieve this requirement. 3.03 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION (BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR) A. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. B. Secure pump base to skid with Type 316 stainless steel bolts sized as recommended by manufacturer and as required in Section 05 50 01, "Anchorages." C. Comply with requirements for piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified in applicable Division 40 Sections. Support all piping independently of pumps. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. D. Complete equipment installation with controls, safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. 1. Turn rotating equipment by hand to check. 2. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. Adjust clearances and torques. 3. Complete cleaning and testing of piping systems. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, piping, and structures of debris and foreign material. 4. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to manufacturer's instructions. CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 43 32 69 - 18 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF E. Install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment, and other materials and equipment necessary to conduct testing and startup. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Prior to plant startup, the Contractor, with the assistance of the System Integrator, shall inspect all equipment for proper assembly and alignment, quiet operation, and proper operation. B. Performance Tests: The System Integrator shall conduct performance test on the equipment to certify compliance with the performance requirements. 1. Place each chemical feed pumping system in operation. All components shall continue to operate without alarms or shutdowns, except as intended, for ten consecutive days to be considered operational. 2. Operate through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and verify that the pumping units, safety devices, controls, and control system operate within the design conditions. Each safety device shall be tested for proper setting and signal. Response shall be checked for each equipment item and alarm. Simulation signals may be used to check equipment and alarm responses. C. A copy of all information from functional tests, including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. 3.05 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR'S CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined in this Section. 3.06 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR'S SERVICES A. System integrator: Present at Project site of classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF No. Person Days Number of Trips Work Description 1 day/skid 3 Installation assistance and inspection. 1/2 day total 3 Pre -startup classroom or site training. 1/2 day/skid 3 Facility startup. B. Services provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. C. Refer to Division 01 for manufacturer's services and training requirements. D. Owner may videotape training session. 3.07 FACILITY STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Division 1. After initial startup under the supervision of the System Integrator, a preliminary "running -in" period will be provided for the Contractor, per the Contract Documents, to make field tests and necessary adjustments B. The "running -in" period shall be defined as 30 consecutive days with no interruptions due to equipment fault or failure. Should the system fault or have a failure, the period shall start over. Any visible leaks or chemical compatibility issues shall be addressed by the System Integrator at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Perform the Performance Test as previously defined in this Section. D. Prepare manufacturer's installation report and submit within 30 days after completion of field-testing. Including the following information: 1. Field-testing results 2. Descriptions of installation deficiencies not resolved to the manufacturer's satisfaction. 3. Description of problems or potential problems. CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 43 32 69 -20 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Names of the Owner's personnel who attended operations and maintenance training sessions. 5. Record copy of materials used for training session including outlined summary of course. 6. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Performance. E. At the end of the specified period of operation, the chemical feed pumping and control systems will be accepted if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the systems operate satisfactorily without excessive power input, wear, lubrication, or undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise and the desired chemical additions have been obtained. 3.08 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE The Equipment Schedule located after "END OF SECTION" is a part of this Section. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 433269-21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PHASE II EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE Skid Name Ferric Sulfate Feed Skid Supplemental Carbon (glycerin) Feed Skid Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Skid Number of Skids 2 5 2 Location Chemical Feed Room Chemical Feed Room Hypochlorite Feed Room Service Conditions (Indoor / Outdoor) Indoor Indoor Indoor Mounting Style (Floor / Wall) Wall Wall Wall P&ID Drawing No. 1-590 1-595 1-1300 Pump No. of Pumps on Skid 1 1 1 Pump Tag Number(s) FER01_T01_CFP01 FER01_T01_CFP02 CBN01_T01_CFP01 CBN01_T01_CFP02 CBN01_T01_CFP03 CBN01_T01_CFP04 CBN01 T01 CFP05 CST01_C02_CFP01 CST01_C02_CFP02 Total design flow, gph (Duty) 28.7 16.3 4.3 Pump Speed, rpm (min / max / design) TBD TBD TBD Design Pressure, psig 12.5 10 5 Maximum Suction Lift, ft 30 ft. water 30 ft. water 30 ft. water Constant Speed (Yes/No) No No No Adjustable Speed (Yes/No) Yes Yes Yes Process Fluid Properties Chemical / Solution Name Ferric Sulfate Glycerin Sodium Hypochlorite Solution Strength, w/w 50% Neat 10-12.5% Liquid Temperature, °F 32 - 120 32 -120 32-120 Specific Gravity 1.4 1.2 1.22 pH, Standard Units 1 6 12 Skid Accessories Pressure Relief Valve initial set- point (psig) 17.5 15 15 Pressure Gauge Range (psig) 0-20 0-20 0-20 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS 43 32 69 - 22 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Pressure Transmitter (Yes / No) No No No Pressure Transmitter Range (psig) N/A N/A N/A Pressure Switch (Yes / No) No No No Initial set -point to shutdown (psig) N/A N/A N/A Anti -siphon Valve/ Back Pressure 3 Valve initial set -point (psig) 3 3 Vented Ball Valves (Yes / No) No No Yes Flow Meter (Yes / No) Yes Yes Yes Pulsation Dampener? (Yes / No) Yes Yes Yes PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS APRIL 24, 2026 43 32 69 - 23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS 43 32 69 - 24 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 43 40 01 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Polyethylene storage tanks for chemical storage. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C177, Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot - Plate Apparatus. b. D638, Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. c. D648, Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load. d. D746, Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. e. D790, Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. f. D833, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics. g. D1505, Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density - Gradient Technique. h. D 1525, Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics. i. D1621, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. j. D1622, Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30, 2026 43 40 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF k. in. n. 0. 1.03 DEFINITIONS D 1623, Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. D 1693, Test Method for Environmental Stress -Cracking of Ethylene Plastics. D 1940, Method of Test for Porosity of Rigid Cellular Plastics. D1998, Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. A. XLHDPE: Cross -linked high -density polyethylene. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer shall design bulk chemical storage tanks, including wall thickness and methods and locations of support and anchorage. Design shall be prepared and sealed by designer meeting requirements of Article Quality Assurance. B. Tank manufacturer must be capable of providing NSF Certification of the tank. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Fabricator's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. Provide catalog cuts for all off -the -shelf items. b. Detailed fabrication drawings shall be scale drawings showing the relative size, configuration, location, materials of construction, and details of all equipment and materials to be furnished including the tanks, fittings, access ladders, supports, and tank hold-down and support systems. Both plan and elevation views shall be provided. All piping terminal points shall be clearly shown and fully dimensioned. c. Resin used for each tank and all supporting specifications for resins. d. Foundation and Anchor Bolt Drawings: Drawings shall be provided that show all data and details required for design of the tank foundations including locations and dimensions for knockouts and embedded items, and the size, type, location, embedment and projection of anchor bolts. Tank supplier shall tell the Contractor what size anchor bolts to use. POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 434001-2 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY e. Tank data indicating pressure rating, diameter, straight shell lengths, overall lengths, wall thickness, and details of nozzle designs. f. Tank capacity chart indicating gallons for each inch of depth and cumulative total from bottom. g. Certified test data on representative samples of standard materials which demonstrate compliance with the physical properties specified herein. h. Certified copy of all factory test results including gel tests, impact tests, and hydrostatic tests. Provide a listing of procedures used in testing. i. Installation instructions shall be completed, detailed, and sequenced instructions for original installation. Recommended methods for assembly and adjustment including all bolt torques shall be provided along with special precautions and the sequence of work. Rigging and lifting details shall also be included for all factory -fabricated assemblies and individual components weighing over 100 pounds. j. All exceptions and any proposed revisions to the requirements of the Specifications shall be included with the Submittals. 2. Samples: Representative Samples of the high density cross -linked polyethylene with anti -oxidant resistant linear low density polyethylene liner tank shall be provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Fabricator's Certificate of Compliance with fabrication requirements. 2. Quality Assurance Inspection: a. Initial QA Inspection Report. b. Certification of Factory Testing. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Fabricator's written/printed installation and tank support instructions. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 6. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator's Quality Assurance Supervisor: Minimum of 5 years' experience in the fabrication of polyethylene storage tanks of similar size and usage. B. Tanks shall be manufactured by a firm with a nationally accepted quality standard (such as, ISO9001). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30, 2026 43 40 01 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials fabricated to this specification must be packaged, crated, or protected in such manner so as to prevent damage in handling and while in transit. Details of these procedures shall be the responsibility of manufacturer. B. In addition, prepare and protect tanks for shipment as follows: 1. Mount tanks on padded cradles if shipped horizontally or on a suitable skid if shipped vertically. 2. Protect all flanged nozzles with wooden blinds bolted to the flange and having a diameter of 2 inches greater than the outside diameter of the flange. 3. Provide either rigid plugs inside the ends to prevent deflection or wooden boxes for all unflanged components. Brace the open ends of tanks with a suitable stiffening member to prevent deflection. 4. Do not ship components or other pieces loose inside the tanks. 5. Load tanks with at least 2 inches clearance between the tank (including fittings) and the bulkheads or bed of the vehicle. 6. Regardless of the mode of transportation, firmly fasten and pad all components to prevent shifting of the load or flexing of components while in transit. 7. Nozzles or other fittings shall not be used for lifting. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Final Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory fabricated and assembled to the maximum extent possible requiring a minimum of field assembly. Field installation shall be limited to anchoring the tanks and making external piping connections. POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 434001-4 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY B. All equipment specified herein shall be suitable for contact with the stored chemicals. C. Like items of materials and equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance operation, maintenance spare parts, and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Poly Processing Company. 2. Assmann. 2.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Location: Indoors. B. Ambient Air Temperature Range: 50 degrees F to 100 degrees F. C. Relative Humidity: Up to 100 percent. D. Operating Pressure: Atmospheric. E. Stored Materials: Stored Materials Equipment Chemical Specific Gravity Ferric Sulfate Tank 50% Fez SO4 3 1.4* Sodium Hypochiorite Tank 12 - 15% NaOCI 1.22 Micro C® 2000 Tank Micro C® 2000 1.2 Neat Polymer Bulk Storage Emulsion Neat 1.01 - 1.10 Tank Polymer *Wall thickness calculations shall be based on tank contents with a specific gravity of 1.9. 2.04 TANK DESIGN CRITERIA A. Seismic Load: Zone 1. B. Live Load: 200 pounds per square foot. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30, 2026 43 40 01 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Concentrated Load: 300 pounds. D. Special Loads: Design tanks for dead loads from all attached piping. E. Hydrostatic Load: For specific gravities of stored materials specified herein. Tanks shall be designed to withstand the hydrostatic pressure resulting from a full tank. 2.05 TANK CONSTRUCTION A. Tanks specified herein shall be cross linked high -density polyethylene construction with interior anti -oxidant resistant linear HDPE liner and integrally mounted flanged outlet (IMFO) and shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASTM D 1998. B. Tanks shall be vertical, flat bottom, dome top construction with translucent materials to allow observation of liquid level. C. The XLHDPE tanks shall be constructed using the rotational molding process. D. Tanks shall be fabricated to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and as listed in the Tank Schedule: H___________________________ Tank Schedule Number of Minimum Maximum Sidewall Equipment No. Units Capacity Diameter* Height* Ferric Sulfate Tank 2 8,000 gal 9'-2" 16'-9" (MS01_T01_TNK01, MS01 T01 TNK02, Sodium Hypochlorite Tank 1 6,500 gal 10'-0" 11'-8" CST01B01TNKO1 Sodium Hypochlorite Tank 1 300 gal 3'-0" 6'-0" CHLO1 T00 TKNO1 Micro Co 2000 Tank 2 6,500 gal 10'-0" 11'-8" (CBN0l_TO1_TNK01, CBNO1 T01 TNK02) Neat Polymer Bulk Storage 2 8,500 gal 10'-0" 16'-6" Tank (PST01-B01-TNK0 1, 1-TNK02) *Tank sizes are nominal sizes. E. Materials shall meet or exceed the following properties: POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 434001-6 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Parameter ASTM Test Requirement Density D1505 0.944 - 0.946 gmlcc Environmental Stress, Cracking Resistance (F50) D1693 1,000 hrs Ultimate Tensile Strength (2" min D638 2,600 - 3,000 psig Elongation at Break (2" min. D638 400% Vicat Softening Point D1525 240 degrees F Flexural Modulus D790 100,000 psig Brittleness Temperature D746 -130 degrees F Heat Distortion Temp D648 67 degrees C [Polyethylene Notch Test (PENT) F1473 >1,000 hours 2.06 TANK SUPPORT AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM A. Each tank and its associated attachments shall be structurally adequate for all tank design criteria specified herein. B. Provide a minimum of four Type 316 stainless steel holddown lugs, complete with plate, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers for proper anchoring of the tank. Actual number of holddown lugs shall be calculated with the tank full. C. All exposed metal surfaces not constructed of stainless steel shall be painted in accordance with and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.07 FITTINGS A. Tank fittings and openings shall be provided as listed in the Fitting/Opening Schedule and located as shown on Drawings. Fitting/Opening Schedule Service Type/Location Diameter Fill Flanged/TopFlanged/Top 3 inches Vent Flanged/TopFlanged/Top inches Overflow Flanged/6" below tank top 2 inches Discharge Flanged at tank bottom 2 inches B. Neat Polymer Bulk Storage Tank fittings and openings shall be provided as listed in the Fitting/ Opening Schedule and located as shown on Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30,2026 434001-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARYS CREEK WRF Fitting/Opening Schedule — Neat Polymer Bulk Storage Tank Service Type/Location Diameter Fill Flanged/Top 3 inches Discharge Flanged at tank bottom 3 inches U Vent Assembly Flanged/Center Top 3 inches Dessicant Dryer Connection Flanged/Top 2 inches Overflow Flanged/6" below tank top 3 inches Return from Recirculation Pump Flanged/Top 3 inches Recirculation Pump Suction Flanged at tank bottom 3 inches Sight Glass Flanged at tank top 3 inches Sight Glass Flanged at tank bottom 3 inches Ultra sonic Level Flanged at tank top 2 inches Drain Flanged at tank bottom 3 inches C. Provide fill pipe drop leg inside tank connecting to fill connection. Pipe drop leg shall extend down into tank interior and shall have a 45 -degree elbow installed on its end to discharge to interior sidewall of tank. Drop leg shall be supported internally by a pipe support. Pipe support shall be a bolted fitting at tank sidewall. D. Fittings shall be CPVC compressive type, with long shank, deep -cut, threaded with dual wide nut assembly. End type of fittings for connection to facility piping shall be as shown in the Fitting/Opening Schedule. E. All flanged fittings shall be gasketed with materials compatible with the chemical service. F. Bolted fittings shall use Hastelloy C bolts with polyethylene -encapsulated heads and CPVC external flanges. G. All materials used in tank fitting assemblies shall be resistant to the stored chemicals. No wetted fittings or appurtenances shall be of metallic construction. POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 434001-8 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 2.08 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES A. All tank accessories and appurtenances shall be chemically compatible with the stored materials and shall be designed to withstand the hydrostatic pressure resulting from a full tank. B. Calibration Tape: Calibration tape shall be self-adhesive, translucent tape calibrated in multiples of 50 gallons or less. Strips shall use black numerals and tick marks to denote gallonage. C. Gaskets: 1. Material is compatible with chemical service, low torque, full face, ASME B 16.1 dimensions, two concentric, convex, molded rings between center hole and bolt hole circle. 2. Type: 1/4 inch thick, low torque, full face, ASME B16.1 dimensions. D. Pipe Supports: 1. Provide pipe supports for the fill pipe, overflow pipe, and discharge pipe attached to the tank. 2. Spacing of pipe supports shall be as recommended by the fabricator, but shall not be greater than 5 feet on center. 3. Pipe supports shall allow removal of supported pipes. 4. Complete with Hastelloy C bolts, nuts, washers, and other necessary hardware for easy field assembly. Other materials for hardware will be considered if compatible with the chemical service as recommended by the Supplier. E. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for all tanks weighing over 100 pounds. Lifting lugs shall be bolted fittings in sidewall of tank. Bolted fittings shall be as specified herein. F. Anchor Bolts: Type 316, stainless steel bolts, sized by fabricator and at least 3/4 -inch diameter, or as shown and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: The tank fabricators shall have a quality control procedure adequate to ensure that all fabrication complies with these Specifications. B. Factory Tests: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30, 2026 43 40 01 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Impact Tests: A representative sample from each tank shall undergo a factory impact test. Impact test must meet the requirements of ASTM D1998. 2. Gel Tests: A representative sample from each tank provided shall undergo a factory gel test, as prescribed by ASTM D1998. 3. Hydrostatic Leak Tests: a. Perform on each tank. b. Fill to overflow nozzle; allow to stand for 24 hours with no visible leakage. 4. Wall Thickness: Each tank shall have an actual wall thickness measurement taken at every 90 degrees, at each one foot elevation, up to three feet from the bottom of the tank. 5. Reports: Certify, by signature, the results of the factory testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. B. Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, tools, construction equipment, incidental materials, and the necessary services required to complete the installation and testing of the equipment. C. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by the manufacturer or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. D. Tanks shall be installed so that no stresses shall be applied to flanged outlet as per manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Uniform and level surface contact shall be made between all tank bottoms and the support foundations. Contractor shall supply a neoprene or felt pad for placement under the storage tank (1/8 inch thick). F. Bolt torques on gaskets shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Hydrostatic Test: Storage tanks shall be filled with clean water to the overflow level after all connections have been made. There shall be no leakage, no signs of weeping, and no signs of capillary action over a period of 48 hours. POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 434001-10 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Quality control shall include a final inspection by Contractor and a written record of this final inspection. 3. After testing, the tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. A manufacturer's representative for the equipment specified herein shall be present at the Job Site and classroom designated by Owner for the minimum person -days listed for the services hereunder, travel time excluded: 1 person -day for inspection and certification of the installation. B. Manufacturer shall certify in writing: 1. Equipment has been provided in accordance with this specification. 2. Equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and inspected by a manufacturer's authorized representative. 3. Proper mechanical connections have been made. 4. Equipment is ready for startup and operation. 3.04 CHEMICALS SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR A. Fill storage tanks with 50 percent ferric sulfate, 15 percent sodium hypochlorite solution, Micro C® 2000 and neat emulsion polymer prior to functional and performance testing. Replace chemicals used during testing and provide Owner with full tanks of chemical prior to Contract Closeout. B. Coordinate with Owner to confirm that delivered ferric sulfate and sodium hypochlorite solution adheres to Owner's specifications for the chemicals. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK JULY 30, 2026 434001-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANK 43 40 01- 12 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 44 31 11 BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish, install, startup, and test a complete Odor Control System (OCS), including Section 43 11 19 "Foul Air Fans", biological tower -type odor control units (bioscrubbers or biotrickling filter system), Section 44 31 16 "Carbon Adsorbers", appurtenances, instrumentation, and controls as specified herein and referenced sections of the specifications and the Drawings. 2. The components of the OCS shall be furnished by a single supplier. 3. This section includes three (3) biological tower -type odor control systems. Each biological tower -type odor control system shall include the tower unit, irrigation system and mist eliminator(s), vessel(s) or container(s), inert inorganic media, valves, pumps, inlet air plenum, conduit, wiring, and control system (compatible with the Plant Control System (PCS)). 4. The proposed system shall treat odors from the following locations in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the Drawings: a. Odor Control System 1: Equalization basin, Peak Flow Storage basin, and Preliminary Treatment Unit b. Odor Control System 2: Aeration Basin trains 1-6 fermentation, anaerobic, and anoxic zones c. Odor Control System 3: Thickening equipment, dewatering equipment, and enclosed solids truck bay 5. To ensure system compatibility, a single supplier is responsible for providing a complete odor control system, the successful operation of each item of equipment in the package, and for the integrated system which also includes Carbon Adsorbers (44 31 16) and Foul Air Fans (43 11 19). The responsibility of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall include the approval of installation, system optimization, and warranties for the components and performance of the complete OCS. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR July 30, 2026 CONTROL SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 11 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 05 36.13 - Fiberglass Ductwork, Foul Air 7. Section 40 27 02 - Process Valves and Operators 8. Section 40 72 00, - Level Instrumentation 9. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation 10. Section 40 75 00 - Liquid Analytical Instrumentation 11. Section 43 11 19 - Foul Air Fans 12. Section 44 31 16 - Carbon Adsorbers 13. Section 44 31 83 - Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The following testing procedures shall be used to verify performance of the equipment, most current edition: 1. ASTM E679: Determination of Odor and Taste Threshold by a Forced - Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits. 2. EN 13725: Air Quality — Determination of Odor Concentration by Dynamic Olfactometry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Shop drawings specific to the project and applicable product data shall be bound neatly in a single package. The following information shall be submitted, as a minimum: a. Manufacturer and model number of equipment. b. Material Safety Data Sheets. c. Layout drawings including all proposed system components with dimensions, clearances required and sizes indicated, anchor locations and sizes, details of ductwork or piping connections, size and location of required electrical conduits and conduit openings, and total weights of the product. Layout drawings shall be to scale in English units, provided on 11"x17" bond paper and on compact disk in AutoCAD format. d. Include flow directions, process information, loading rates, empty bed residence time (EBRT), water requirements, etc., descriptions and BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY provisions for adjustments and alarms on operating components. Indicate extent of shop fabrication and field joint types and locations. e. Detailed specifications and data describing the materials of construction, material thickness, linings, and coatings for all components. f. Submit data that verifies the system is capable of uniformly distributing flow throughout the system without short-circuiting and will meet the specified treatment requirements. g. SUPPLIER shall provide a list of similar installations with reference and contact information for operating systems. SUPPLIER shall have a minimum of five (5) successful installations of similar size for acceptance and shall have at least five (5) similar systems in continuous operation in similar applications for three (3) years. Submittals received without current names and phone numbers for reference contacts may be deemed non -responsive. h. Descriptions and characteristics of media, anticipated media life at design conditions and current replacement cost (material supply only) of media. i. Nutrients required for startup and operation, including concentrations and dosage rates, and range of operation. j. Empty bed residence times for range of operating flows. k. Headloss (inches of water column) through the bioscrubber media, distribution plenum, and complete unit and odor control system over range of flows. 1. All required utility connection points and supply requirements including power and plant water (quality, quantity, and pressure). m. Location and telephone number of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. n. Startup and test schedule with test procedures. o. Equipment installation report with field test data and test records in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" (submit as record data after startup). p. Warranties and service agreements. q. All structural design calculations, drawings, and associated items shall be EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's responsibilities, and shall be including all scrubber vessels items, deflection of the vessel at the point of connection with the ductwork, thickness, anchor bolt size and location, hold-down lugs, lifting hooks, and loads imposed by appurtenances such as inlet and outlet ducting and internal media. The OWNER or OWNER'S Representative shall review the structural drawings and calculations for completeness only. All structural drawings and calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer (registered in the State of Texas) prior to submittal to the OWNER. r. Design of system shall be in accordance with applicable local, state, and national standards and codes. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 443111-3 MARYS CREEK WRF s. A certificate from the vessel manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin or other plastics shall be supplied with the submittal data, as well as vessel and support calculations as specified if fiberglass is used for the scrubber vessel. t. Calculations for irrigation requirements, including recirculation rates. u. Any other information necessary for the OWNER or OWNER'S representative to determine compliance with the specifications. v. Motors: 1) Complete submittal per Section 26 20 00 "Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors." 2) Letter of Certification the motor is compatible with a variable frequency drive when specified as adjustable speed operation. w. Panels: Complete submittal per Division 26 and Section 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components." x. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. y. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 3. Instrumentation and Control Submittals: a. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed. b. Drawings showing instrumentation, control panels, control panel components, software, software licenses, accessories, panel layout drawings, panel wiring diagrams, and PLC input/output card drawings. c. Control Panel drawing submittals shall be complete, fully demonstrating compliance with all specification requirements and features. Control Panel drawings shall include, but not be limited to, panel layout and bill of materials, panel power wiring schematics, and panel input/output wiring diagrams for each panel supplied. 1) The submittal shall include a complete instrument list or Bill of Materials (BOM) including all instruments to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. Instrument tagging shall adhere to the loop numbering and tagging scheme shown within the Drawings and Specifications. Controller/Transmitter details shall include, at a minimum: a) Physical: Size and dimensions of equipment, Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts. b) Ratings: NEMA rating, hazardous area classification, and temperature ratings for the equipment. c) Electrical Requirements: Note voltage, power requirements (two -wire or four -wire) and power consumption data, conduit entry size and terminal details (location, wire range, maximum torque). BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 -4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY d) Inputs/Outputs: Input and output characteristics and types. e) Installation Details: Mounting details in sufficient detail to determine compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. f) Internal Features: Communication protocols, control functions, programming parameters, jumper settings, software features, and licensing requirements. g) Range, size, and graduations in engineering units. h) Accuracy and repeatability. i) Complete manufacturer/model number. d. Control Panel assembly and elevation drawings shall be drawn to scale and detail all equipment in or on the panel. Panel drawings shall be at least 11x17 (inch) print size. As a minimum, the panel drawings shall include interior and exterior panel elevation drawings to scale, nameplate schedule, conduit access locations, and panel construction details. e. Control Panel control schematics and interconnection diagrams detailing the electrical connections of all equipment in and on the panel. Diagrams shall include power and signal connections, UPS and normal power sources, all panel ancillary equipment, protective devices, wiring and wire numbers, and terminal blocks and numbering. f. Point to point I/O wiring diagrams depicting wiring within the panel as well as connections to external devices. The diagram shall identify all device terminal points that the system connects to, including terminal points of equipment provided by others, Wiring labeling used on the drawings shall match that shown on the Contract Documents or as developed by the manufacturer and approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER. Field device wiring shall include the device ISA-tag and a unique numeric identifier. PLC I/O wiring shall be numbered with rack number, slot number, and point number. Two - wire and four -wire equipment shall be clearly identified, and power sources noted. Submit final wire numbering scheme for approval by the OWNER/ENGINEER. Point -to -Point drawings shall be 1117 (inch) minimum in size. g. Submit construction details, NEMA ratings, intrinsically safe barrier information, gas sealing recommendations, purging system details, etc. for panels located in hazardous locations or interfacing to equipment located in hazardous areas. h. Submit evidence that all control panels shall be constructed in conformance with UL 508 and bear the UL seal confirming the construction. Specify if UL compliance and seal application shall be accomplished at the fabrication location or by field inspection by UL inspectors. All costs associated with obtaining the UL seal and any inspections shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and included in the contract. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 443111-5 MARYS CREEK WRF i. P&IDs and Process Flow Diagrams. j. Instrument specifications in ISA Format with catalogue cut sheets. k. Instrument list with tag names, ranges, alarm set points, and manufacturer contact information. 1. Description of control system in written form including functions monitored, controlled, and alarmed. Include sequence of operation and interface requirements. m. For all subsystems that communicate with the Plant Control System, the system supplier shall coordinate with the Plant Control System Integrator data registers and protocol required for transmitting monitoring information and required control. 4. PLC Network Submittals: In conformance with Division 26 and 40 63 00 "PLC Hardware and Software." 5. Controller Program Submittal a. Submit memory maps and input/output lists for all controllers provided for this project. b. Each input/output point shall have a dedicated tag and descriptor. c. Submit input/output lists in Owner's Programming Requirements Documents format per Section 40 61 93 and 40 68 00. d. Submit preliminary and final OIT graphics per Section 40 68 00 Requirements. e. Submit control descriptions per Section 40 68 00 Requirements. 6. Testing Plan Submittal. a. Submit Factory Testing Documentation per Section 01 45 23 and Section 40 61 21 Requirements. b. Submit Operational Readiness Testing Documentation per Section 40 61 21 Requirements. c. Submit Functional Demonstration Testing Documentation per Section 40 61 21 Requirements. d. Field functional test reports. 7. Operation and Maintenance data. 8. Complete Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be provided per Division 1 Section 01 78 23 requirements and shall include complete O&M information for all components of the system. O&M Manuals shall be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to final acceptance of the system. In addition to standard information, the O&M manuals shall include: a. Scrubber media handling information and safety data sheet, including replacement procedures. b. Certification statement from manufacturer verifying that the media is nonhazardous. c. Blower sizing calculations. These shall include calculations of pressure loss through the proposed synthetic media, and losses through the system. d. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams. Complete component bill of material with manufacturers catalog cut sheets marked to show components provided. BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY e. Submit copies of final PLC and OIT program versions in native format. B. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed. Any exceptions from this specification shall be itemized in an exceptions table. C. Information Submittals: 1. Field Representative Resume 2. Qualifications Statement 3. Previous Installations List 4. Pre -Installation, Special Shipping, Delivery, Storage and Protection, and Handling Instructions 5. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 6. Recommended Equipment Lubricants 7. Samples 8. Certificates 9. Software 10. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 11. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 12. Location and contact information of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 13. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance, with current pricing information. 14. Welding certificates. 15. Startup and test schedule. 16. Source quality -control reports. 17. Field quality -control reports. D. Closeout Submittals 1. Paint 2. Lubricants 3. Spare Parts 4. Operation and Maintenance Data 5. Warranty Documentation 6. Record Data Documentation 7. Extra Stock Materials 8. Tools and Software 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The biological tower -type odor control system Manufacturer/ EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be one recognized and established in the design, production, and manufacturing of biological odor control systems. The biological odor control Manufacturer/ EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall have PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR July 30, 2026 CONTROL SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 11 - 7 MARYS CREEK WRF experience in design and fabrication of similar systems operating in similar applications as demonstrated by a list of at least 5 successful installations in continuous operation for at least 5 years, with at least 99 -percent hydrogen sulfide removal efficiency. References must include valid names and phone contact numbers that can be verified. B. The Manufacturer/ EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide an installation report prior to final acceptance. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, the equipment installation report shall state that biological treatment system is achieving the specified removal efficiencies. Test data on the installed system shall be included in the report. C. All equipment of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single OCS Supplier and shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of biological odor scrubbing equipment. The OCS SUPPLIER, in coordination with the Foul Air Blowers manufacturer shall be responsible for supplying a complete, functioning system. D. MANUFACTURER shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within 500 miles or shall be able to deliver the spare parts within 48 hours of notification. E. All pieces of equipment shall have a stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer and other pertinent nameplate data. F. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and the system shall be tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc. All equipment must be adjusted and checked, for misalignment, clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards. Excessive vibration or noise from equipment while operating will be cause for rejection of equipment. G. Performance testing shall be conducted as specified herein, and per Section 01 91 14 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." H. Post installation Inspection: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide a field representative to inspect the system eleven (11) months after substantial completion of the entire project and shall submit an inspection report within seven (7) calendar days of each inspection. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in full accordance with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S instructions. Fabricated assemblies shall be shipped in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, properly match -marked for ease of field erection. BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 -8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY B. Motors shall be stored as indicated Section 26 20 00 "Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors." C. Control Panels shall be stored as indicated in Section 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components." 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10°F to 120°F. 4. Equipment shall be compatible with heat tracing and insulation, which will be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall design piping systems with ample clearances and material compatibility to accept required heat tracing and insulation. If additional freeze protection beyond heat tracing and insulation is required, it shall be furnished by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall coordinate with the CONTRACTOR to provide direction on where heat tracing is required and shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has provided adequate heat tracing and insulation during startup activities. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Final Completion. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR July 30, 2026 CONTROL SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 11 - 9 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Media: Special media warranty shall be for ten (10) years from final acceptance of the odor control equipment and shall provide for complete replacement of the media, including equipment, materials, labor, freight, and any and all costs associated with washing, replacing or regenerating the media as needed. Media failure includes increase in pressure drop through the media such that the specified airflow rates are not achievable with the installed equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 D A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. BioAir Solutions, LLC 2. Daniel Mechanical Company 3. Evoqua Water Technologie 4. BIOREM PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Source Characteristics 1. Expected odorant composition is given in Table 1. BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4431 11-10 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY D Table 1: Performance and Design Requirements Foul Air Parameters OCS 1 OCS 2 OCS 3 Tag No. ODC01-T01- ODC02-TO I - ODC03-T01- BIS01 BIS01 BIS01 Foul Air Flow Rate 16,000 cfm 16,000 cfm 16,000 cfm Average Inlet Hydrogen 160 ppm 160 ppm 160 ppm Sulfide Concentration Range Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 900 ppm 900 ppm 900 ppm Concentration Transient Peak Other Inlet Odorants' Ammonia 5 ppm 5 ppm 1.4-9.3 ppm Mercaptans Negligible 0.15 ppm 5 ppm Other Organic Sulfide Negligible 0.3 ppm 0.01 - 0.4 ppm Compounds Amines, as trimethylamine Negligible 0.02 ppm 0.10 ppm Ambient Air Temperature 0-120°F Empty Bed Residence Time 15 seconds, minimum (EBRT) Maximum Pressure Drop 6 inches w.c., maximum (from inlet to outlet flanges) 1) For Other Inlet Odorants, typical municipal sludge odor concentrations associated with centrifuge dewatering for the parameters to be tested. B. Removal requirements: 1. Refer to Paragraph 3.3 of this Section for additional performance testing requirements. 2. Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System Guarantee (at the Typical Operating Condition): a. Average H2S Removal: Minimum ninety-nine percent (≥99%) of inlet hydrogen sulfide, or the outlet concentration shall be less than 0.5 ppm, whichever is higher. b. Average Odor Removal: For inlet dilution -to -threshold (D/T) concentrations, minimum ninety percent (≥90%) odor removal at the outlet is required, or the outlet D/T shall be less than 1,500 DT, whichever is greater. For influent odors with D/T concentrations equal to or greater than the laboratory's maximum value of 60,000 DT, the sample may be diluted with nitrogen gas (per laboratory recommended procedures) to obtain measurable values. 2.03 BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM A. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 443111-11 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Supply all materials and equipment exposed to the airstream, condensate, or leachate with protection from corrosion damage. Corrosion resistant materials and equipment are required unless specifically permitted in this Section. 2. Obtain approval from the OWNER or OWNER's representative for all coatings to be used in the completed installation. 3. Provide an odor control system that operates using biological processes and does not rely ocarbon either integrated within the media oras apolishing A stage for meeting the specified performance for the biological tower type odor control system. Provide biological tower -type vessels that operates using biological processes and do not utilize carbon within the biological vessels for meeting the specified H2S and odor unit removal performance. 4. Provide sampling ports (minimum 1 -inch diameter) for the inlet, exhaust and a minimum of one (1) intermediate stage to measure airflows and airstream constituents. Ports shall be easily accessible by OWNER'S personnel and shall be routed to ground level. Provide a pressure gauge to measure the pressure in the distribution plenum at the base of the scrubber unit. The pressure gauge model shall be series 2000 Magnehelic differential pressure gauge or approved equivalent. Sample ports routed to ground level shall include a drip leg with ball valve. Provide a ball valve on the end of the sample line. 5. Provide sample ports with ball valves on condensate and leachate drains to measure pH. Ports shall be easily accessible by OWNER's personnel. Provide pH probes in the locations as designated on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. 6. Supply a neoprene or felt pad for placement under the bioscrubber vessel (minimum 1/8" thick), if required by the manufacturer. B. CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Provide all hardware, anchors, embedded anchors, and miscellaneous metals that are Type 316 stainless steel. 2. CONTRACTOR shall heat trace, insulate, and aluminum jacket all exposed water and drain lines. Valves and appurtenances shall also be insulated and heat traced. Air sample lines are not required to be insulated or heat traced. 3. Provide field connections between instruments and panels, as necessary. 4. All drains from a pressure area shall include a trap with cleanout to be provided by CONTRACTOR. Trap shall contain a depth of water sufficient to prevent escape of foul air from the system, as per the standard details. C. Vessel Requirements 1. All materials used in the vessel shall be inherently corrosion resistant or shall have a corrosion -resistant coating. Design drawings for vessel(s) shall be sealed by a licensed engineer registered in the State of Texas. 2. Acceptable materials include: BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY a. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) vinyl ester resin in accordance with ASME RTP-1. 1) Provide a gel coat on all surfaces and UV inhibitor on all external surfaces. 2) Submit certificate from the vessel manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin, as well as vessel and support calculations. 3) Minimum Properties of Resin(s): The 1/8 -inch thick unfilled clear casting strength properties of the resin used will affect the total laminate strength and service life. The following are minimum acceptable room temperature (77°F) properties for vinyl ester resin: a) Property Vinyl Ester Resin b) Tensile Strength 11,000 psi c) Tensile Modulus 490,000 psi d) Elongation 5% e) Flexural Strength 160,000 psi f) Flexural Modulus 450,000 psi g) Heat Distortion Temperature 210°F h) Barcol Hardness 35 b. Grade 316L stainless steel. c. Hastelloy C. d. Other materials may be utilized on a case -by -case basis subject to approval by OWNER and its ENGINEER. 3. Design of system shall be in accordance with applicable local, state, and national standards and codes. Provide an aluminum or FRP ladder with cage and landings fastened to each scrubber used to access the exhaust stack. 4. Tank shall meet the following loading criteria: a. Wind load limit when anchored: 115 mph. b. Concentrated top load limit: 250 lb. on a 16 square inch area. c. Seismic zone: 0. 5. Vessel design shall include reinforcement as required for equipment, CONTRACTOR furnished pipe supports, accessories, and hose station anchor locations, per support manufacturer requirements, and as shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate reinforcement locations with Manufacturer/EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. D. Irrigation system: Each bioscrubber system shall include an irrigation system. 1. Irrigation system shall provide water for biological activity. Irrigation shall be monitored and controlled by the PLC, as appropriate for the Manufacturer's process. The PLC shall be capable of remote adjustment of irrigation flow. 2. All exposed irrigation piping shall have insulation and heat tracing provided and installed by CONTRACTOR to protect against freezing weather conditions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 44 31 11-13 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Indicate in the submittal what the water requirements are for operation, including water type (potable/non-potable) and maximum instantaneous flow rate in gallons per minute (gpm). Provide an in -line filter or strainer on the water supply line(s). 4. At the discharge stack of the tower, provide a mist eliminator to minimize carryover of water particles into the discharge stream. 5. At the discharge stack of the tower, provide a tee with removable blind flange, as shown on the Drawings, for access. E. Nutrient system: Each OCS shall include a nutrient system, as specified herein, for each bioscrubber system installed. I . The nutrient system shall supply nutrients to the irrigation water to promote biological activity. 2. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER, except where indicated, shall furnish all components necessary to provide nutrients to the irrigation water, including but not limited to: a. One (1) nutrient tank. 1) The nutrient tank shall have a volume of 55 -gallons. Nutrient tank shall be HDPE, Open -Top with removable gasketed lid and lever -lock closure ring. 2) The nutrient tank shall have a level indicator that is tied to the plant control system. The level indicator will allow plant personnel to monitor the nutrient level in the tank. b. One (1) nutrient feed pump. The pump shall be capable of manual or remote operation through the plant control system. c. Nutrient supply. d. Piping, provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR, to connect the nutrient tank to the nutrient feed pump and to the irrigation system. 3. The nutrient feed tank and piping shall have insulation and heat tracing, provided, and installed by the CONTRACTOR, to protect against freezing weather conditions. 4. Nutrient barrel will be installed inside an FRP Shelter, coordinate disciplines. F. Recirculation system: Each OCS shall include an irrigation system as required by the manufacturer and specified herein. 1. The recirculation system shall take irrigation water that has passed through the biotrickling filter, and pump this water back to the top of the unit to be passed through the system again. The recirculation system shall consist of the following components at a minimum: a. One (1) recirculation pump. The recirculation pump shall be sized to pump the drain water from the system back to the top of the system and maintain the required water pressure. The pump shall be connected to the plant control system, so that manual and remote operations are possible. A wye strainer shall be provided for the pump. BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER D MARYS CREEK WRY b. Piping to collect the drain water, connect to the recirculation pump, and convey the recirculated water to the top of the system. All piping shall have insulation and heat tracing to protect against freezing temperatures. Piping, insulation, heat tracing shall be provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR. G. Water panel: Each bioscrubber system shall include a water panel provided by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. D 2.04 1. The water panel shall serve to connect the irrigation system with the nutrient system and recirculation system, if applicable. 2. Where the irrigation system line enters the water panel, a check valve and wye strainer shall be provided. 3. Valves and controls shall be provided to allow for only recirculated or non - recirculated water to pass through the water panel to the top of the ytem and shall be valved and controlled as required by the Manufacturer. Equipment Supplier/Manufacturer shall coordinate with CONTRACTOR regarding irrigation system requirements that go beyond the minimum requirements reflected herein and on the drawings. 4. A drain line shall be provided for emergency cases. 5. A motor operated valve shall be supplied for the irrigation line. This valve shall be connected to the plant control system. 6. All piping in the water panel shall have insulation and heat tracing to protect against freezing weather conditions, which shall be provided and installed by the CONTRACTOR. 7. Power to the water panel shall be 120VAC. 8. Water panel will be installed inside an FRP Shelter, coordinate disciplines. H. Particulate removal: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's design shall consider particulates such as wind-blown dust that may be present in the airstream and shall provide for their removal if equipment performance shall be hampered by their presence. I. Comply with the requirements of Section 09 90 00, "Painting and Coating." Finish colors shall be selected by OWNER from finish color charts to be provided in shop drawing submittals. CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. Control Panels 1. General Requirements a. Refer to Section 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components" for general requirements of control panels requirements. Control Panel shall be provided for each odor control system. Control panels shall be provided with main circuit breaker, PLC, OTT, starters, control power transformer, lights, switches, relays, terminal strips, etc. for a PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 44 31 11-15 MARYS CREEK WRF complete and operational system. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. b. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Divisions 26 and 40. c. Control Panel shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel with a white powder coating oversized enclosure, with a three-point latching handle and rated for 480 V, 3 -Phase, 60 hz. d. Control panel shall include an uninterruptible power supply manufactured by APC, Tripp Lite, Phoenix Contact, or approved equivalent to protect the PLC and operator interface. Battery life shall be a 15 -minute minimum. e. Provide thermostatically and humidity -controlled heaters and close loop air conditioning in the panel if required to maintain proper operating temperature range for the equipment to minimize condensation. f. All internal components shall be mounted and secured to the removable back plane assembly. g. Furnish one (1) control panel for each Odor Control System, as referenced on the Drawings. Panel shall be provided with one (1) PLC based control system with operator interface terminal furnished by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Odor control systems shall be furnished, configured and completely commissioned by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. h. A Schneider Electric Harmony HMIDT635XFH operator interface terminal (OIT) shall be provided on the face of each panel to provide the following control and monitoring functions: 1) Sequence initiation. 2) Out of service selection. 3) On -Off (red and green) indication for each motorized piece of equipment. 4) Alarm indication for failure of each piece of driven equipment, high level, and high differential level. 5) Hand -Off -Auto selection for the filter and Start -Stop selection for each piece of motorized equipment and Open -Close selection for each valve, where applicable. 6) Running forward and backward indication. 7) Level and differential level indication where applicable. 8) Elapsed time since screening cycle. 9) Setpoint entry and display. 10) In service/out of service selection. When out of service is selected, the screen functions shall be inhibited. 11) Timer settings and analog values shall be retained when power fails. i. Each control panel shall be provided with a sunshade constructed of a minimum 12 gauge stainless steel. The sunshade shall have a sloped BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY roof and shall extend 6 inches beyond the front of the panel and either side of the panel. 1) OIT sunshade shall be by Shade Aide for any outdoor mounted enclosures. j. Plant Control System (SCADA) Interface: 1) The odor control system PLC shall be capable of communicating all instrument readings and system alarms to the plant control system via Modbus TCP/IP multimode fiber optic connection. 2) All odor control system PLC registers shall be made available to the plant control system integrator. 3) The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide complete electronic copies of all PLC, I/O and configuration program data before shipment of the equipment for use in configuring the plant control system and shall provide updated versions of this information during the field commissioning start up and testing, if necessary, including final version before acceptance of the system. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall supply the software program and all necessary software components compatible with the PLC to provide the Owner with the capability to troubleshoot PLC. 2. Odor Control Panel (one per system location) a. Provide control system for equipment system, but not limited to the odor control fans, recirculation pump, nutrient feed pump and required valves. This list is not intended to completely depict all of the functional requirements of the control system provided under this Section. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. b. Panel shall have the following controls mounted on the panel face: 1) ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC for each piece of equipment a) ON allows the equipment to be started from the panel b) OFF allows the equipment to be stopped from the panel c) AUTO allows the equipment to be started, stopped, from the described sequence of operation 2) OPEN/CLOSE/AUTOMATIC for each valve a) OPEN allows the valve to be opened from the panel b) CLOSE allows the valve to be closed from the panel c) AUTO allows the valve to be opened, closed, from the described sequence of operation 3) RUN, FAIL, and OFF push -to -test LED indicating lights for each piece of equipment. 4) Fail reset button for each piece of equipment c. The minimum shall be provided with the panel. 1) Main circuit protective device PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 44 31 11-17 MARYS CREEK WRF 2) PLC with Ethernet/IP communications, over multimode fiber optic. 3) NEMA rated contractors for each piece of equipment 4) Fused sealed oversized control power transformer. 5) Combined sounder and LED beacon for annunciating of failure. Beacon/horn shall be mounted separately from enclosure by CONTRACTOR. 6) Ambient temperature controlled. 7) Condensate drain. 8) Provide engraved nameplates for each function. 9) Provide terminal strips in enclosure for termination of device, no direct termination to relays, starters, etc. allowed. 3. Sequence of Operation a. General 1) The Odor Control System is a stand-alone control system monitored by the Plant PCS System. The control panel provides monitoring and manual control through the panel's OIT and is used by the Plant Operators to make adjustments to foul air blower and bioscrubber controls. All monitoring and control shall be from the OIT. 2) Blowers shall restart upon power restoration after delay. The PLC shall monitor normal power source and shall restart blowers upon delay. 3) All control actions at the Odor Control System control panel are performed using the Odor Control PLC. B. Field Instrumentation General Requirements a. Section includes field instruments, unscheduled devices, auxiliary equipment and installation components required for installation and operational devices. As part of this system, the instruments specified in this Section shall be provided by the system supplier. b. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. c. Unscheduled Devices 1) Provide stainless steel 1/2" ball valves when indicated in P&IDs. 2) Provide diaphragm pressure seals when indicated in P&IDs. 3) Provide instrument manifolds for all static pressure, liquid level and differential pressure application. a) The pressure gauge model shall be series 2000 Magnehelic differential pressure gauge or approved equivalent. BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY 4) Provide an external weatherproof on -off switch for each instrument obtaining power from an external power source (non -loop powered). 5) Provide field surge protection on all 4-20ma instrument signals. Protection device shall be NEMA 4X and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6) Provide sun -shields on all instruments mounted outdoors. d. Commissioning: 1) Commissioning of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, the product data and shop drawings and Division 01 specifications. 2. Instrumentation a. Paddlewheel Flow Meter 1) Description: Flow sensor shall be paddlewheel with open collector signal, polypropylene/black PVDF/Titanium material wet -tap sensor. Transmitter shall be constructed of PBT, with a 4 -button keypad, and LCD display. Transmitter shall be 120 VAC with a 4-20 mA output. 2) Manufacturer and model: Signet 2536 sensor with 3-9950-2 transmitter. 3) Quantity: 3 a) ODC01-T0l-FITO1, ODC02-T01-FIT01, ODC03 -TO 1- FIT0 1 b. Differential Pressure Transmitter 1) Description: Transmitter shall be housed NEMA 4X enclosure with LCD display that can be programmed to read in pressure, velocity or flow. Transmitter shall be rated Classification I, Division I. Transmitter shall be 10-35 VDC with a 4-20 mA output. 2) Manufacturer and model: Dwyer, ISDP Series or Rosemount 30515. 3) Quantity: 3 a) ODC01-T0l-PDITO1, ODC02-T01-PDIT01, ODC03- TO1-PDITOI c. Side Mount Level Switch 1) Description: Horizontally mounted level switch rated NEMA 6. Switch shall be SPST, rated at 50 VA. Switch shall be constructed of CPVC. 2) Manufacturer and model: Omega, LVN-90. 3) Quantity: 6 a) ODCO1-TO1-LSL01, ODC01-TO1-LSL02, ODC02-T01- LSLO 1, ODC02-TO 1-LSL02, ODC03-TO 1-LSL0 I, ODC03-T01-LSL02 d. pH/ORP Sensor/Transmitter 1) Description: Submersible pH sensor with field mounted transmitter. Sensor shall be of CPVC material, scale 0-14 pH. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 44 31 11-19 MARYS CREEK WRF Transmitter shall be housed NEMA 4X enclosure with LCD display. Transmitters shall be 120 VAC with a 4-20 mA output. 2) Manufacturer and model: Georg -Fisher, Sensor Signet 2750, Transmitter 8900. 3) Quantity: 3 a) ODC0l-T0l-AE01, ODC02-T01-AE01, ODC03-T01- AE0 l b) ODCO1-TO1-AITO1, ODC02-T01-AITO1, ODC03 -TO 1- AIT01 e. Pressure Sensor/Indicating Transmitter 1) Description: Transmitter shall be constructed on die cast aluminum, with a LCD, 4-20 mA (Hart) output signal, 24 VDC loop powered, and ceramic diaphragm. Manufacturer and model, Endress+Hauser PMC71. 2) Quantity: 3 a) ODC0 1 -TO 1-PIT0 1, ODC02-T01-PITO1, ODC03 -TO 1- PIT0I b) ODCO1-T0l-PI01, ODC02-T0l-PI01, ODC03-T01-PI01 2.05 FINISHES A. All equipment except stainless steel, galvanized steel, PVC, or non-ferrous items identified as non -corrosive by Manufacturer shall receive surface preparation, prime coat and finish coat to the Supplier's specifications, in the factory. Provide 1 gallon of touch up paint. B. Paint shall comply with the requirements described in Specification Section 09 90 00 "Painting and Coating." C. Furnish equipment with corrosion protection compounds for unfinished items. D. All panels containing heat sensitive equipment shall be factory painted white. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners in accordance with Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications", as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Size and locations as required by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of/z-inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the equipment supplier's installation instructions. B. Equipment Identification Plates: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a 16 - gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all equipment supplier recommended procedures. 2.07 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Initial Supply of Consumables 1. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish and indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, nutrient solutions, biological seeding material, etc. necessary to startup equipment. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. 2. If nutrients are required for operation, EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide a one-year supply (beginning at acceptance of the odor control unit) of nutrients in addition to supplies for startup and testing. Refer to the Effluent Water Quality Data table, provided after the "END OF SECTION." B. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall supply one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. 1. One (1) set of special tools required for maintenance or adjustment. 2. Two (2) sets of fuses of each type used. 3. Two (2) spare relays of each type used. 4. One (1) spare bulb of each type used on panel fronts. 5. Other items as recommended by the Manufacturer and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. C. Equipment Lubricants: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants. D. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4431 11-21 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLER A. CONTRACTOR. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 3.03 PREPARATION - NOT USED 3.04 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR to install equipment per this Section and the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation instructions. 3.05 FIELD / SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's Representative: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall be present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies: Table 2: Equipment Supplier's Services Work Description No. Person No. Trips Days (Per OCS System) Installation assistance and inspection 2 1 Functional and performance testing I Can be combined with training Pre -startup classroom or site training 1 1 Facility startup 2 Can be combined with training Post -startup training of OWNER's 1 1 personnel B. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's services shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup" BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY C. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a qualified startup engineer or field representative to provide guidance with installation. The field representative shall also inspect all equipment described herein after installation, assist in troubleshooting, advise the CONTRACTOR during startup and testing, and instruct OWNER's personnel in routine maintenance and troubleshooting procedures. Working days shall consist of eight -hour (8 -hr) days, exclusive of travel time. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and startup assistance with OWNER'S personnel. OWNER may videotape training session. D. Two training sessions shall be performed, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and start-up assistance with the OWNER's personnel. OWNER may videotape training session. A typed outline shall be handed out at the training sessions and, at a minimum, will include normal operating parameters, alarms, and maintenance. 3.06 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the odor control system shall be done in accordance with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S recommendations and as specified in Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." B. Each portion of the OCS shall be tested as specified herein and as indicated in Section 44 31 83 "Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." The OCS shall be sampled at the intake and discharge of the bioscrubber. C. In the presence of the OWNER and the OWNER's engineer, CONTRACTOR shall test the operation of the odor control system. Final acceptance shall not be made until after successful completion of the performance testing and receipt of the final installation report. D. Testing Equipment: CONTRACTOR shall supply the equipment listed below for the duration of the performance testing. Equipment shall remain on site until performance testing has been accepted by the OWNER or OWNER'S representative. Submit current calibration certificates for each piece of equipment used along with test results. CONTRACTOR shall comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations for equipment use. 1. Jerome 631-X (or newer model) Hydrogen Sulfide Analyzer by Arizona Instruments. Range 0.003-50 ppm (intended for in -field grab sampling analysis only). 2. Acrulog Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Logger by Detection Instruments. One each Range 0-1000 ppm or 0-200 ppm (adequate range to monitor inlet concentration), and 0-50 ppm Acrulog; two low -range 0.001-2.0 ppm PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4431 11-23 MARYS CREEK WRF Acrulogs; one Low -Range Sampling System (LRSS-2), each with sufficient PVC or Teflon hose for testing. 3. Alnor AXD 540 Micromanometer by TSI Incorporated, Range 250-15,500 fpm, with 18 -inch pitot tube and hoses, or equal. 4. Accuro gas detector pump by Drager Safety. Include 10 tubes for Hydrogen Sulfide 0-200 ppm. 5. Odor sampling shall commence one hour after the H2S monitoring equipment has been installed and is determined to be stable. Two (2) sample sets, each consisting of the bioscrubber inlet and outlet. Each sample set shall be taken one hour apart. The inlet and outlet samples shall be taken concurrently and the sampling time and inlet and outlet H2S levels logged in the field prior to shipment. The four (4) samples shall be shipped to the laboratories for analysis to be received within 24 hours. The analyses and respective laboratories shall include: ODOR UNITS TESTING: St. Croix Sensory 1150 Stillwater Blvd. North Stillwater, MN 55082 1-800-879-9231 REDUCED SULFIDES TESTING: ALS Environmental (formerly Columbia Analytical Services, Inc.) 2655 Park Center Drive, Suite A Simi Valley, CA 93065 805-526-7161 E. Testing Procedure: 1. The OCS shall be balanced per Section 44 31 83 "Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" prior to testing. 2. Measure the airflow velocity (feet per minute (fpm)), static pressure (inches water column (in. wc)), and velocity pressure (in. wc) into each odor scrubber/adsorption unit. Airflows shall be within five percent (5%) of the specified value before testing may commence. 3. Measure the airflows into each individual scrubber/adsorption unit. Airflows shall be within 5% of equal or specified distribution before testing may commence. 4. Using the Draeger pump and H2S tubes, verify the inlet H2S concentration is less than 1,000 ppm. 5. Connect the low range Acrulog LRSS-2 tube to the exhaust of each scrubber/ adsorption unit being tested. Connect the high range (0-200 or 0- 1000 ppm as appropriate) Acrulog LRSS-2 tube to the foul air collection system at the inlet of the bioscrubber(s) being tested. Coordinate sampling locations with the OWNER or OWNER'S Representative. Odalogs shall be set to log time, temperature (°F) and H2S concentration at two -minute intervals for high -range Acrulogs and ten-minute intervals for low -range BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY Acrulogs. Log data continuously for a minimum of two weeks for each pair of scrubber/adsorption units. Comply with the Acrulog manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for use. Acrulogs must be logging data during the duration of the tests. Testing shall comply with Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup," and Section 44 31 83 "Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 6. Using the Jerome 631-X meter or low -range Acrulogs, to measure grab samples of bioscrubber exhaust H2S concentrations in the field prior to sending the samples to the lab. F. Testing Report: CONTRACTOR shall submit the following: 1. Electronic PDF submittal containing the original Acrulog data files and files exported into Microsoft Excel format. Written report shall include graphs of Acrulog data. 2. Dimensioned drawing showing locations and identification of samples taken. 3. Date, time, sample and results of each sample taken. 4. Airflow rate, static and velocity pressures at the time of sampling. 5. Any deviations from the test procedure with an explanation. 6. Original log of sample information including but not limited to duration of each sampling event and overall performance test, equipment type used for each sampling event, type of constituent measured in each sampling event. G. Acceptance: Determination of satisfactory performance will be made by the OWNER or OWNER'S representative based on the above performance testing or additional testing as needed. Acceptable H2S removal will be determined by averaging the continuously logged inlet H2S concentrations and averaging the continuously logged outlet concentrations measured by the Jerome meter and Odalogs, as appropriate. Odor sampling shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E679 and EN 13729. If the sampling results do not meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.2, Item B of this Section, the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will be given four weeks to make necessary modifications to the odor control system before a retest is conducted at no expense to the OWNER. The OWNER may withhold the cost of any retest from the CONTRACTOR's final payment. If the system fails two retests, the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall remove and replace the odor control system with one that meets the requirements, at its sole cost. H. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER may conduct concurrent testing at their option at no cost to the OWNER. Concurrent testing by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will not be used as a basis for acceptance of the unit. I. All warranty and guarantee periods shall be in accordance with Paragraph 1.8 of this Section. Performance testing may not begin until the system is connected to all the foul air sources listed in Paragraph 1.2, Item A.3 of this Section. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4431 11-25 MARYS CREEK WRF J. In the presence of the OWNER and the Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall test the operation of the odor control system. Final acceptance will not be made until after successful completion of the performance testing and receipt of the final installation report. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. END OF SECTION BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 - 26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY Table 3: Effluent Water Quality Data Effluent Sets Description AVG Flow CBOD5 NH3-N DO TP (MGD) (MG/L) (MG/L) (MG/L) (MG/L) Interim Phase 10 5 2 6 0.2 Permit Limits Final Phase 15 5 2 6 0.2 Permit Limits PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4431 11-27 MARYS CREEK WRF PA GE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK BIOLOGICAL TOWER -TYPE ODOR PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROL SYSTEM July 30, 2026 44 31 11 -28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 44 31 16 CARBON ABSORBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER of the Section 44 31 11 "Biological Tower - Type Odor Control System" shall be responsible for providing all equipment listed in this specification Section. 2. Three (3) carbon adsorber odor control units, with provisions for future expansion as shown in the Plans and as specified herein for a complete and operable system. The carbon adsorber odor control unit shall include the carbon media odor control unit, mist eliminator, rain caps, vessels or containers, activated carbon media, inlet air plenum, and instrumentation. 3. The proposed system shall treat odors from the following locations in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the Drawings: a. Odor Control System 1: Equalization basin, peak flow storage basin, and preliminary treatment unit b. Odor Control System 2: Aeration basin trains 1-6 fermentation, anaerobic, and anoxic zones c. Odor Control System 3: Thickening equipment, dewatering equipment, and enclosed solids truck bay 4. To ensure system compatibility, a single EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER is responsible for providing a complete system and the successful operation of each item of equipment in the package and for the integrated system which also includes Section 43 11 19 "Foul Air Fans" and Section 44 31 11 "Biological Tower -type Odor Control System." The responsibility of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will include the approval of installation, system optimization, and warranties for the components and performance of the complete Odor Control System. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 — Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 05 36.13 - Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 7. Section 40 66 00 - Network and Communication Equipment PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 16 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 8. Section 40 67 00 - Control Panels and Components 9. Section 40 27 02 - Process Valves and Operators 10. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 11. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation 12. Section 43 11 19 - Foul Air Fans 13. Section 44 31 11 - Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 14. Section 44 31 83 - Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The following testing procedures will be used to verify performance of the equipment, most current version: 1. ASTM E679: Determination of Odor and Taste Threshold by a Forced - Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits. 2. EN 13725: Air Quality — Determination of Odor Concentration by Dynamic Olfactometry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Shop drawings specific to the project and applicable product data will be bound neatly in a single package. The following information will be submitted following the award of contract and issuance of a notice to proceed, as a minimum: a. Manufacturer and model number of equipment. b. Material Safety Data Sheets. c. Drawings indicating the layout, size, and all proposed components of the odor control system, including dimensions, clearances, materials of construction, material thicknesses, coating, linings, and flow direction. d. Layout drawings including all proposed system components with dimensions, clearances required and sizes indicated, anchor locations and sizes, details of ductwork or piping connections, size and location of required electrical conduits and conduit openings, and total weights of the product. Include descriptions and provisions for adjustments and alarms on operating components. Indicate extent of shop fabrication and field joint types and locations. Layout drawings will CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 44 31 16 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY be to scale in English units, provided on 11"x17" bond paper and on compact disk in AutoCAD format. e. Detailed specifications and data describing the materials of construction, material thickness and coatings for all components. f. Submit data that verifies the system is capable of uniformly distributing flow throughout the system without short-circuiting and will meet the specified treatment requirements. g. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide a list of similar installations with reference and contact information for operating systems. List shall have a minimum of five (5) successful installations of similar size for acceptance and will have at least five (5) similar systems in continuous operation in similar applications for three (3) years. Submittals received without current names and phone numbers for reference contacts may be deemed non -responsive. h. Anticipated media life at design conditions and current replacement cost (material supply only) of media. i. Empty bed residence times for proposed and future flows. j. Headloss (inches of water column (in. w.c.)) through the adsorber media, distribution plenum, and complete unit and odor control system. k. All required utility connection points and supply requirements including power and control wiring. 1. Location and telephone number of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. m. Startup and test schedule with test procedures. n. Equipment installation report with field test data and test records in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures" (submit as record data after startup). o. Warranties and service agreements. p. All structural design calculations, drawings, and associated items shall include all adsorber vessels items, deflection of the vessel at the point of connection with the ductwork, thickness, anchor bolt size and location, hold-down lugs, lifting hooks, and loads imposed by appurtenances such as inlet ducting and internal media. The OWNER or OWNER'S Representative will review the structural drawings and calculations for completeness only. All structural drawings and calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer (registered in the State of Texas) prior to submittal to the OWNER. q. Any other information necessary for the OWNER or OWNER'S representative to determine compliance with the specifications. r. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. s. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 443116- 3 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Instrumentation and Control Submittals: a. P&IDs and Process Flow Diagrams b. Instrument specifications in ISA Format with catalogue cut sheets c. Instrument list with tag names, ranges, alarm set points, and manufacturer contact information. d. Description of control system in written form including functions monitored, controlled, and alarmed. Include sequence of operation and interface requirements. 4. Complete Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals will be provided per Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data" and Division 1 requirements and will include complete O&M information for all components of the system. O&M Manuals will be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to final acceptance of the system. In addition to standard information, the O&M manuals will include: a. Adsorber media handling information and safety data sheet, including replacement procedures. b. Certification statement from EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER verifying that the media is nonhazardous. c. Fan sizing calculations. These will include calculations of pressure loss through the proposed media, and losses through the system. d. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams. Complete component bill of material with manufacturers catalog cut sheets marked to show components provided. e. Submit copies of final PLC and OIT program versions in native format. f. Operations and Maintenance Data shall also be included with the Manuals in an electronic (PDF) format on a DVD-ROM for the Owner's use. Drawing files shall be in AutoCAD format. Spreadsheets shall be in Microsoft Excel Format, and shall be electronically indexed for ease of viewing and referencing. B. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed. Any exceptions from this specification will be itemized in an exceptions table. C. Information Submittals: 1. Field Representative Resume 2. Qualifications Statement 3. Previous Installations List 4. Pre -Installation, Special Shipping, Delivery, Storage and Protection, and Handling Instructions 5. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 6. Recommended Equipment Lubricants 7. Samples 8. Certificates 9. Software 10. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 443116-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY 11. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 12. Location and contact information of nearest stocking distributor of spare parts. 13. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance, with current pricing information. 14. Welding certificates. 15. Startup and test schedule. 16. Source quality -control reports. 17. Field quality -control reports. D. Closeout Submittals 1. Paint 2. Lubricants 3. Spare Parts 4. Operation and Maintenance Data 5. Warranty Documentation 6. Record Data Documentation 7. Extra Stock Materials 8. Tools and Software 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will provide an installation report prior to final acceptance. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures", the equipment installation report will state that the treatment system is achieving the specified removal efficiencies. Test data on the installed system will be included in the report. B. All equipment of each type specified in this section will be supplied by a single EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER and will be the product of suppliers regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of activated carbon odor control equipment. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER, in coordination with the Foul Air Fans and Duct/Damper manufacturer(s) shall be responsible for supplying a complete functioning system. C. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas or will have 48 -hour delivery of spare parts. D. All pieces of equipment will have a stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer and other pertinent nameplate data. E. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and the system will be tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 443116- 5 MARYS CREEK WRF overheating, etc. All equipment must be adjusted and checked, for misalignment, clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards. Excessive vibration or noise from equipment while operating will be cause for rejection of equipment. F. Performance testing will be conducted as specified herein, and per Section 01 91 14, "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." G. Post -Installation Inspection: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide a field representative to inspect the system eleven (11) months after substantial completion of the entire project and shall submit an inspection report within seven (7) calendar days of each inspection. H. Where indicated in the Drawings and this Section, all Type 316 stainless steel materials shall include the following components: 1. Molybdenum: 2-3% 2. Chromium: 16-18% 3. Nickel: 10-14% 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's written Pre -Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 01 61 00 "Common Product Requirements." Fabricated assemblies will be shipped in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, properly match -marked for ease of field erection. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10°F to 110°F. 4. Equipment shall be compatible with heat tracing and insulation, which will be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 443116-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY SUPPLIER shall design piping systems with ample clearances and material compatibility to accept required heat tracing and insulation. If additional freeze protection beyond heat tracing and insulation is required it shall be furnished by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall coordinate with the CONTRACTOR to provide direction on where heat tracing is required, and shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has provided adequate heat tracing and insulation during startup activities. f m1]I1 _�►� it A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Final Completion. C. Warranty shall include the repair or complete replacement of the fans, duct work, scrubber vessel, electrical wiring, and controls in the event of corrosion damage, including equipment, materials, labor, freight, and any and all costs associated with repairs and replacements (excluding the carbon media). PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following equipment suppliers are acceptable. 1. BioAir Technologies 2. Daniel Mechanical Company 3. Evoqua Water Technologies 4. BIOREM 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Source Characteristics This Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System will treat foul air exhaust from a biological tower -type odor control system (per Section 44 31 11 "Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System"). The biological tower -type system will treat foul air from the equalization tank, peak flow storage tank, preliminary treatment unit, splitter box, bioreactors, thickening equipment, dewatering equipment, and dumpster room. Expected odorant composition is given in Table 1. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 16 - 7 MARYS CREEK WRF s Table 1: Performance and Design Requirements $ Table 1: Performance and Design Requirements Foul Air Parameters OCS 1 OCS 2 OCS 3 Tag No. ODC01-T01- CSC01 ODC02-T01-CSC0I ODC03-T01-CSC01 Foul Air Flow Rate 16,000 16,000 cfm 16,000 cfm Average Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 1.2 ppm 1.2 ppm 0.2 ppm Concentration Ran e Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 3.6 ppm 3.6 ppm 1 ppm Concentration Transient Peak Other Inlet Odorants' Ammonia 5 ppm 5 ppm 1.4 — 9.3 ppm Mercaptans Negligible 0.15 ppm 5 ppm Other Organic Sulfide Compounds Negligible 0.30 ppm 0.01 — 0.40 ppm Amines Negligible Use typical industry Use typical industry values values Ambient Air Temperature 0-120°F Empty Bed Residence Time (EBRT) 3 seconds minimum Maximum Pressure Drop 4.0 inches w.c., maximum (from inlet to outlet flan es) 1) For Other Inlet Odorants, typical municipal sludge odor concentrations associated with centrifuge dewatering for the parameters to be tested. B. Removal requirements: 1. Refer to Section 44 3111 "Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System", Paragraph 3.3 for additional performance testing requirements. CARBON ADSORBERS 4431 16-8 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRF 2. Remove ninety-nine percent (99%) of inlet hydrogen sulfide based on continuous data logger results for inlet concentrations greater than 20 ppm. For inlet concentrations less than 0.2 ppm, the outlet concentration shall be less than 0.01 ppm average. 3. For inlet dilution -to -threshold (D/T) concentration equal to or above 600 D/T, ninety percent (90%) odor removal is required; for inlet D/T concentrations below 600, exhaust D/T concentrations to less than 60 D/T. For influent odors with D/T concentrations equal to or greater than the laboratory's maximum value of 60,000, the sample may be diluted with nitrogen gas (per laboratory recommended procedures) to obtain measurable values. 2.03 CARBON ADSORPTION SYSTEM A. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall: 1. Supply all materials and equipment exposed to the airstream, or condensate with protection from corrosion damage. Corrosion resistant materials and equipment are required unless specifically permitted in this section. 2. Provide all hardware, anchors, embedded anchors, and miscellaneous metals that are Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Obtain approval from the OWNER or OWNER's Representative for all coatings to be used in the completed installation. 4. Provide sampling ports (minimum 1/2 -inch diameter) for the inlet, exhaust and at least four intermediate stages to measure airflows and airstream constituents. Ports will be easily accessible by OWNER'S personnel and will be routed to ground level if a tower vessel is used. Sample ports routed to ground level shall include a drip leg with ball valve. Provide a ball valve on the end of the sample line. 5. All drains from a pressure area will include a trap with cleanout to be provided by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Trap will contain a depth of water sufficient to prevent escape of foul air from the system. B. Vessel Requirements 1. All materials used in the vessel will be inherently corrosion resistant or will have a corrosion resistant coating. Design drawings for vessel(s) shall be sealed by a licensed engineer registered in the State of Texas. 2. Acceptable materials include: a. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) vinyl ester resin in accordance with ASTM D3299 and ASME RTP-1. 1) Provide a gel coat on all surfaces and UV inhibitor on all external surfaces. 2) Submit certificate from the vessel manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin, as well as vessel and support calculations. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 16 - 9 MARYS CREEK WRF 3) Minimum Properties of Resin(s): The 1/8 -inch thick unfilled clear casting strength properties of the resin used will affect the total laminate strength and service life. The following are minimum acceptable room temperature (77°F) properties for vinyl ester resin: a) Property Vinyl Ester Resin b) Tensile Strength 11,000 psi c) Tensile Modulus 490,000 psi d) Elongation 5% e) Flexural Strength 160,000 psi f) Flexural Modulus 450,000 psi g) Heat Distortion Temperature 210°F h) Barcol Hardness 35 b. Grade 316L stainless steel. c. Hastelloy C. d. Other materials may be utilized on a case -by -case basis subject to approval by OWNER and its ENGINEER. 3. Design Criteria. The carbon absorber vessel should be designed for the criteria listed in Table 2. Table 2: Carbon Adsorber Vessel Design Criteria Parameter Value Vessel Diameter (maximum) 13 feet Internal Operating Pressure 12 in. we Maximum Ambient Temperature 120°F Nominal Carbon Bed Depth (minimum) 3.0 feet C D Each unit shall be provided with media support composed of FRP grating and polypropylene screen. The grating shall be removable and fully accessible. Design of system will be in accordance with applicable local, state, national, and international standards and codes. Provide an aluminum or FRP ladder with cage and landings fastened to each adsorber used to access the exhaust stack. 2. Tank shall meet the following loading criteria: a. Wind load limit when anchored: 100 mph. b. Concentrated top load limit: 250 lb. on a 16 square inch area. c. Seismic zone: 0. Media Requirements 1. shall be ell tized, single use, bituminous activated carbon Media �zrg�Ti� pelletized, , , 8 manufactured in the Uthted States, which will adsorb hydrogen sulfide and other odorants listed in Table 1 ofths Section Media shall be virgin, single -use, bituminous activated carbon or granular coconut shell -based CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 44 3116 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRF activated carbon, manufactured in the United States, which will adsorb hydrogen sulfide and other odorants listed in Table 1 of this Section. 2. The media shall be non-toxic, UL classified, and landfill disposable and shall comply with the requirements listed in Table 3. Table 3: Carbon Media Requirements Parameter Value Apparent Density 0.39 - 0.50 g/cc Hardness No. (minimum) 95 Hydrogen Sulfide Capacity 0.30 g-HZS/cc E. Particulate removal: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's design will consider particulates that may be present in the airstream and will provide for their removal if equipment performance will be hampered by their presence. F. At each discharge stack, provide a replaceable FRP rain cap to protect against moisture intrusion. G. Comply with the requirements of Section 09 90 00, "Painting and Coating." 2.04 MIST ELIMINATOR A. Mist eliminator unit shall consist of a Type 316 SS pad for grease filtration in front of a polypropylene mesh pad with Type 316 SS grids for mist elimination, housed inside an FRP enclosure. The pads shall be removable for cleaning and the housing shall have a drop -out flange to allow removal and replacement of the filter pads. The mist eliminator pads shall be style 7CA/8P by ACS Industries. The FRP housing shall be flanged and drilled per PS 15-69 and be ready for installation into the system ductwork. B. A Dwyer Series 2000 Magnehilic gauge or approved equivalent shall be installed on the housing to indicate pressure drop through the unit. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors and fasteners in accordance with Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications", as shown on the Drawings, and as recommended by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. Size and locations as required by EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall size all anchor bolts and fasteners required of ample size and strength for the intended purpose, minimum of/z-inch diameter. Fastener sizing calculations shall be provided as an informational submittal. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all anchor bolts and fasteners in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's installation instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 16 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Equipment Identification Plates: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish a 16 - gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. C. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 60 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER recommended procedures. 2.06 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall supply one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. 1. One (1) set of special tools required for maintenance or adjustment. 2. Two (2) filter pads for mist eliminator. 3. Other items as recommended by the manufacturer and supplier. B. Equipment Lubricants: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants. C. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLER A. CONTRACTOR 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify structures, pipes, and equipment are compatible. 3.03 PREPARATION -NOT USED 3.04 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR to install equipment per this Section and the equipment supplier's installation instructions. CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 44 31 16 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY 3.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S SERVICES A. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Services EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative: The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum person -days and trips provided in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Table 4: Equipment Supplier Field Representative Services Work Description No. Person No. Trips Days (Per OCS System) Installation assistance and inspection 2 1 Functional and performance testing 1 Can be combined with installation Pre -startup classroom or site training 1 1 Facility startup 2 Can be combined with training Follow up visit 11 months after substantial completion for inspection 1 1 and training 3.06 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." Installation Assistance and Inspection. After Equipment Installation and before start up, the contractor and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative shall inspect the installation of the equipment. A preliminary running period (as applicable) will be provided for the CONTRACTOR to make field adjustments with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative. CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER approval of equipment installation. B. Functional Test. CONTRACTOR to start up equipment with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative. Equipment shall be able to run in manual mode with all associated piping, electrical and equipment installed to show proper operation of the equipment. Functional Test shall be 5 days of uninterrupted service. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for equipment operation for the 5 -day period. Any delays or additional person days and trips required for EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative to perform Functional Testing beyond what is specified is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Functional Test can be run with clean water to demonstrate equipment operation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CARBON ADSORBERS July 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 16 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Performance Test and Initial Training. CONTRACTOR and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative to start up equipment in Automatic Mode (Normal Operation). Equipment shall run in two modes, normal operation and peak flow conditions. Contractor and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER Field Representative should demonstrate any alarms, lead lag conditions, or total auto mode or other conditions related to equipment operation. Performance Test shall run with uninterrupted service for 30 days. Performance Test shall be run with wastewater under normal operating conditions. If equipment fails before 30 days, then EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall correct problems at their own expense and restart the 30 -day Performance Test. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER and CONTRACTOR is responsible for equipment operation during the 30 -day Performance Test. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall perform initial training at the end of the 30 -day Performance Test for owner's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Upon completion of Performance Test and Training, The OWNER shall consider that equipment substantially complete and start the warranty period. D. Post -Startup Training. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER will perform additional training at a time mutually agreeable to the OWNER and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER to take place no earlier than 30 days after equipment substantial completion and no later than 90 days after substantial completion. 3.07 GENERAL A. Startup of the odor control system will be done in accordance with EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's recommendations and as specified in Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." B. Testing of the system will be performed as indicated in Section 44 31 11 "Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System." C. In the presence of the OWNER and the OWNER's engineer, CONTRACTOR will test the operation of the odor control system. Final acceptance will not be made until after successful completion of the performance testing and receipt of the final installation report. 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. END OF SECTION CARBON ADSORBERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 July 30, 2026 44 3116 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 44 3183 FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications and recording and reporting the results. 2. Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified balancing company to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals to perform the testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of the modified foul air collection system (FACS) as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 3. Test, adjust, and balance the FACS after successful startup and initial operation. 4. This Section does not include: a. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems. b. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements. c. Requirements and procedures for ductwork system leakage tests. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 12 16 - Sequence of Construction 2. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 3. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 4. Division 9 - Finishes 5. Division 26 - Electrical 6. Division 40 — Instrumentation 7. Section 40 05 36.13 - Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 8. Section 40 05 64.43 - Fiberglass Dampers 9. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 10. Section 43 11 19 - Foul Air Blowers 11. Section 44 31 11 - Biological Tower -Type Odor Control System PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, March 27, 2026 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 44 31 83 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Definitions Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all components of the indicated systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: a. The balance of air distribution. b. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities. c. Electrical measurement. d. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. e. Recording of adjustments, documenting fan speeds, and damper positions. 2. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. 3. Adjust: To regulate the specified air flow rates from the specified treatment units (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). 4. Balance: To proportion flows within the collection/distribution system (sub mains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. 5. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. 6. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. 7. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. For this system, terminals are considered to be the section of duct (or fans) located immediately upstream of the balancing dampers associated with the treatment units connected to the Foul Air Collection System. 8. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. 9. Sub Main: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. 10. Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. 11. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal. C. Related Documents — Comply with the following standards: 1. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2003 ASHRAE Handbook — HVAC Applications, Chapter 37, Testing Adjusting, and Balancing. FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING March 27, 2026 44 31 11 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Sheet Metals and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Systems — Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Agency Data: Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below. B. Engineer and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below. C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this Project. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the system. At a minimum, record all fan speeds, damper settings, flows, and pressures required for balancing. E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB are proposed. F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all fmal quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below: 1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be handwritten, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit two (2) complete sets of draft reports. Only one (1) complete set of draft reports will be returned. 2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit two (2) complete sets of final reports. 3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in a single PDF submittal. Divide the contents of the PDF into the below listed divisions, separated by bookmark tabs: a. General Information and Summary. b. Foul Air Fans. c. Foul Air Collection System Ductwork and Appurtenances. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, March 27, 2026 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 4431 83 -3 MARYS CREEK WRF G. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms, and data: 1. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, and Project. Include addresses, contact names, and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. 2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms, including at a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. At a minimum, record all fan speeds, damper settings, flows, and pressures. 3. A form shall be provided for each measurement taken. At a minimum, measurements shall be made on each duct branch or main at the following areas: a. At each air inlet and exhaust for wastewater treatment process units and structures, as close as feasible to that unit or structure. b. Before, after, and at each foul air fan. c. In duct branches and mains before and after each tee, wye, or other connection where two or more airstreams combine. d. At other locations sufficient to balance the system to design flows. 4. Provide schematic drawings of the FACS indicating locations of dampers, wyes, tees, branches, fans, and terminals. Indicate on the schematic drawings the locations where measurements were made. H. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Agency Qualifications: Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, so that design and treatment objectives are reached. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement, and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications and recording and reporting the results. FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING March 27, 2026 44 31 11 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by NEBB in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, certified by NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer. B. Pre -Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the ENGINEER, OWNER, and representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MISCELLANEOUS A. As part of the balancing service, CONTRACTOR shall install additional sheaves as required in order to make adjustments to fans to achieve design air flows and pressures. Sheaves would be purchased by the OWNER and installed by the CONTRACTOR. B. Sheaves shall be new and shall be of the type and material as recommended by the manufacturer of the fan. Adjustable sheaves are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING A. Before operating the system, perform these steps: 1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent. 2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all new and existing air handling equipment that is part of the Foul Air Collection System. 3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness. 6. Check dampers for correct and locked position for completeness of installation before starting fans. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 March 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 443183-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and affected treatment units. Prepare a summation of required treatment unit ventilation volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes. 8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. 9. Place balance dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as -built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 12. Check fan belt tension. 13. Check fan rotation. 3.02 MEASUREMENTS A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured. D. Apply instruments as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured. F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained (plus or minus 2 percent). G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings. I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 3.03 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. B. Cut insulation on ductwork or piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING March 27, 2026 44 31 11 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. D. Seal ducts and piping and test for and repair leaks. E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. F. Mark equipment settings, including concealed damper control locations, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials. G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. H. If required, change sheaves of fans with suitable size in order to properly balance system. Turn over all belts and sheaves removed from the blowers to the Owner. 3.04 RECORD AND REPORT DATA A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms. Particular emphasis should be given to recording damper positions within 5 percent, fan speeds, and pressures at fans and processes. Identify specific locations where measurements were made. B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Training: 1. Train the OWNER's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 2. Schedule training with Owner through the Engineer with at least 7 days prior notice. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 March 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 443183-7 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOUL AIR COLLECTION SYSTEM TESTING, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING March 27, 2026 44 31 11 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 44 42 19.04 ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup, and test the following: 1. Three (3) rotary (either lobe or screw type) PD blowers, complete with blower assembly, V -belt drive, motor, mounted on a common base furnished and placed in operation at the Solids Handling Building for the Sludge Holding Tanks. Each blower unit shall include all equipment components, materials, accessories, and incidentals as required for functional equipment. Blowers will be located inside a building. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Division 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY POSITIVE JULY 30, 2026 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 44 42 19.04 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Absolute Discharge Pressure: Pressure in pounds per square inch absolute (psia) at the blower discharge flange in relation to Job Site barometric pressure. B. Brake Horsepower (BHP): (Shaft) Standard curve horsepower required, corrected for pressure, temperature, and relative humidity at inlet conditions. C. CCS: Central Control System. D. Discharge Pressure: Pressure in pounds per square inch gauge (psig) at blower discharge flange at rated capacity. E. Inlet Cubic Feet per Minute (icfm): Volumetric rate of air at the inlet flange of the blower corrected to absolute pressure, temperature, and relative humidity. The pressure takes into account the inlet piping in filter pressure drops. F. Pressure Rise: Pressure developed within the blower between the inlet and outlet flanges. It is the discharge pressure less the inlet pressure measured at the discharge and inlet flanges, respectively. G. Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (scfm): Volumetric rate of air measured in standard cubic feet per minute at 68 degrees F, pressure of 14.2 psig, and relative humidity of 36 percent. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Blower system, featuring rotary positive displacement blower(s) to supply air for the Sludge Holding Tanks. B. Provide blower system, including, but not limited to, blowers, control panel, motors, drives, guards, drive couplings, baseplates, vibration isolators, supports, inlet silencers, discharge silencers, bypass silencers, relief valves, flexible connectors, noise enclosures, spare parts, outside air filter, and miscellaneous appurtenances as necessary. C. Air flow to each SHT will be controlled by adjustment of the speed of the CONTRACTOR supplied VFD. Refer to Section 26 29 23 for additional information. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design equipment with due regard to safety of operation, accessibility, and durability of parts, and complying with applicable OSHA, state, and local safety regulations. ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 444219.04-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY B. Each blower will receive outside air from a dedicated filter and discharge into a separate discharge line. C. Intermittent and continuous operation in an indoor environment. D. Blower(s) shall start no more than four times per hour when operating in intermittent service. E. Blowers shall meet rated performance and sound level when operating at a maximum gear tip speed of 3,750 feet per minute. Operating speed shall not exceed 80 percent of rated speed. F G Maximum Sound Pressure Level: 80 dBA, factory calculated, with inlet and discharge silencers, measured with a sound enclosure. Performance Requirements: Design Conditions Quantity of Blowers 3 (2 duty, 1 standby) Equipment Tags SBL01_B01_BLO1 SBL01B01BL02 SBLO1 B01 BL03 Design Capacity, scfm 1,800 2,069 Design Capacity, icfin 2,107 2,422 Secondary Operating Point 300 scfm Altitude, ft 770.00 Barometric pressure, psia 14.39 Inlet pressure at compressor flange, psia 14.29 Inlet air temperature range, degrees F 10 min to 110 max Relative humidity, % (Guarantee Point) 10% min to 60% max Discharge pressure at compressor discharge flange, psig 12.6 Blower pressure rise required, psi 13 Pressure relief valve setting, psig 14.5 Shaft brake horsepower, BHP"2 44-3 142 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 44 42 19.04-3 D D MARYS CREEK WRF Conditions `Includes main oil pump, if specified, and all gear and bearing frictional losses. 2Not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower at 1.0 service factor at the inlet air temperatures, pressure relief valve setting and altitude listed above. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Complete list of system components to be provided. b. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. c. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. d. Standard and specialized equipment assembly cuts. e. System layout, installation, and placing drawings for equipment, drivers, and bases. f. Performance data for each type of equipment that will show compliance with specification requirements stated herein. g. Horsepower demand over the operating range of the blower. h. Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work. i. Motor: See requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. j. Monitoring System: 1) Catalog cuts of each blower control system component, including monitoring panel components. 2) Wiring diagrams, including baseplate-mounted terminal junction box and equipment monitoring panel. 3) Panel construction and face layout drawings. k. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 1. Sound Enclosure: 1) Provide catalog information, material specifications, assembly cuts, system layout and installation drawings, performance data, and detailed structural, mechanical, and acoustical drawings for the sound attenuation enclosure. 2) Calculated noise attenuation. m. Wiring diagram for interconnect wiring from VFD to LCP. ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 444219.04-4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Samples: Color samples for finish coating. If paint manufacturer of finish coat differs from manufacturer of prime coat, provide both manufacturers' written confirmation that materials are compatible. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section A: 01 60-00 Product Requirements. 3. Factory calculated sound levels (dBA) of blower unit with silencers and sound enclosure. 4. Identification of outside utility requirements for each component such as air, water, power, etc. Include operating parameters for required utilities. 5. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 6. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 7. List of special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 8. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 9. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. 10. Test Reports: a. Factory test reports for blower and motor. b. Field test procedures. 11. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 12. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and materials: Item Inlet Filters Flexible Coupling Drive V -Belts Special tools required to maintain or dismantle PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS Quantity Enough for 8 complete changes per unit One complete set per unit One complete set per unit One complete set for each unit ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 44 42 19.04-5 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 00-00 01 61 00, Product Requirements. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Aerzen 2. Gardner-Denver/Robuschi 3. Kaeser B. Where possible, provide end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, replacement, and manufacturer's service. C. Manufacture spare parts to United States standard sizes and gauges. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Blower: 1. Rotary positive displacement type, V -belt driven by horizontal electric motor. 2. Casing: One-piece construction, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B close - grain cast iron strongly ribbed to prevent distortion at the specified operating conditions. Separate headplates of cast iron. 3. Bearings: a. Support shaft and impeller assembly by double -row spherical roller bearings or ball bearings sized for a minimum L10 rating of 100,000 hours. ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 444219.04-6 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY b. Drive End Bearings: Fixed to control axial location of impeller assembly. c. Bearings: Pressure or splash lubricated. d. Gears: Pressure or splash oil lubricated. e. Provide bearings with a positive lip type oil seal designed to prevent lubricant from entering airstream and a labyrinth seal on each shaft designed to reduce air leakage at point where shaft extends through headplate of blower casing. f. Make further provision to vent area between the two sealing systems to atmosphere to relieve excessive pressure on seals. 4. Impellers: a. Provide impeller/shaft assemblies integrally cast from high - strength ASTM A395/A395M Type 60-45-15 ductile iron with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 pounds per square inch. b. Straight, two -lobe involute type, rotating in opposite directions in a common casing without rubbing, liquid seals, or lubrication. c. Positioned by timing gears to maintain proper clearances. d. Mount impellers and timing gears on shafts supported by antifriction bearings, fixed to control the axial location of impeller/shaft in the casing. e. Statically and dynamically balanced by removing metal from impeller body. f. Positively timed by a pair of accurately machined and carburized steel spur gears hardened to 58-62 Rockwell alloy timing gears manufactured to comply with AGMA. Gears mounted on shafts with tapered fit and secured by a locknuts. 5. Shafts: a. AISI 1043 steel or made from high -strength ASTM A395 ductile iron b. Machine labyrinth seals into shaft to minimize air leakage. 6. Belt Drive: a. V -belt drive with automatic belt tension device. b. Minimum service factor of 1.4. c. Designed not to exceed allowable overhung load limits of blower and motor. d. Provide belt guard with acoustical treatment. B. Motor: 1. Squirrel -cage ac induction type, meeting requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors, and as specified herein. 2. Motor Horsepower: 4-2S 150 HP 3. Nominal Speed: 1,790 rpm, variable. 4. Rated Voltage: 460 volt, three-phase, 60 Hz. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 44 42 19.04-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 5. Enclosure Type: TECF as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. 6. Inverter duty rated. 7. Drive: V -belt drive. 8. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. 9. Service Factor: 1.15. C. Blower Support: 1. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel mounted on concrete equipment pad as shown on Drawings. 2. Support Stand: Designed by manufacturer and reinforced to withstand anticipated loadings of blower, motor, inlet and discharge silencers, and associated piping. 3. Factory mount blower and motor as a package. 4. Provide vibration isolators to limit transmission of vibration to anchor points at floor. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Air Inlet Filter: 1. Provide individual filters for each blower. 2. Provide 98 percent removal efficiency on 10 micron and above. 3. Furnish with factory -mounted support legs. 4. Provide unit capable of withstanding wind loads in line with ASCE 7 guidance for "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures if installed outdoors. 5. Coordinate support leg height with Contractor on Site. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. [G: Universal; Model [H: ].] b. [I: Stoddard; Model [J: ].] c. [K: Endustra Filter Mfg.; Model [L: ].] B. Blower Inlet Filter: 1. Dry -type inlet air filter. 2. Filter Housing: a. Camfil Glide/Pack with hinged access doors. b. 48 inches by 48 inches by 24 inches deep to hold four 24 -inch by 24 -inch prefilters and four 24 -inch by 24 -inch final filters. 3. Prefilters: 2 inches thick with an efficiency rating of 25 percent to 30 percent, ASHRAE 52, arrestance is 90 percent to 92 percent, Camfil 30/30, UL Class 1. 4. Final Filters: ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 444219.04-8 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY a. 12 -inch -deep pleated filters with an efficiency rating of 80 percent to 85 percent, ASHRAE 52, with average arrestance efficiency of 98 percent based on Standardized Air Cleaner Test Dust Fine (SACTDF). b. Welded wire media support grid, corrosion -resistant contour stabilizers, galvanized steel enclosing frame and protective wire mesh screens on both the front and back to provide the rigidity to withstand 25 -inch WC pressure drop without noticeable distortion, Camfil; Riga -Flo. 5. Filter Housing: Furnish with two Dwyer magnehelic differential pressure gauges to indicate pressure drop across the prefilter and final filters. 6. Scale for the prefilter gauge shall be 0 -inch to 1 -inch WC. 7. Scale for the final filter bank shall be 0 -inch to 3 -inch WC. 8. Provide 30 feet of 1/4 -inch O.D. copper tubing for each gauge, static pressure taps, valves, and fittings as required. Ship gauges separate for field mounting. 9. Filters shall be furnished with the blowers and installed under Section 23 3113, Metal Ducts and Accessories. 10. Transitions from filter boxes to inlet piping shown shall be fabricated and installed under Section 23 31 13, Metal Ducts and Accessories. C. Inlet and Discharge Silencers: 1. Designed to reduce pulsation from rotary lobe blowers at blower operating timing gear speed. 2. For timing gear speeds below transition speeds, use a multi -chambered reactive type silencer, and for timing gear speeds at or above transition speed, use a multi -chambered reactive and absorptive type silencer packed with hair -felt packing. 3. Inlet/Outlet Air Velocity: 5,500 to 7,000 feet per minute, maximum. 4. Pressure Loss: 6 inches of WC maximum, through silencer at design flow rate. 5. Inlet and outlet flanges shall match the piping size shown on Drawings and blower flanges. a. Flange Drilling: 125 -pound ANSI standard. 6. Provide drain coupling and plug. 7. Mount as shown on Drawings. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Intake filter silencer shall be manufactured by the blower manufacturer or by Universal Silencer, Inc. Series U5, URB, or RIS; Burgess Manning Series CA, BMAI, BMSI, or equal. b. D. Flexible Connectors: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER 444219.04-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Pressure spool, single arch, expansion joint type with 125 -pound ANSI flanges, sized to match blower flanges. 2. Operating Temperature Rating: 350 degrees F. 3. Install on each blower at inlet and outlet flange. 4. Thrust restraint rods on discharge if not otherwise restrained. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Mercer; Style 500. b. General Rubber; Style 101. E. Check Valve: 1. Dual -plate, metal hinged wafer type for each blower; installed in blower discharge piping downstream of silencer and relief valve. 2. 304 stainless steel body, stainless steel pin and spring, and two semicircular bronze or stainless steel plates. 3. Seat: Viton or Silicone for high temperature operation. 4. Elastomeric hinges will not be allowed. 5. Manufacturer and Product: Cameron; TECHNO F. Safety Relief Valve: 1. Flanged, spring type. 2. Cast iron weighted nonvibrating type with flanged connection. 3. Sized to relieve entire discharge flow without overloading blower. 4. Furnish one for each blower. 5. Provide nozzle on discharge silencer to mount relief valve as shown. G. Temperature Sensor: 1. Provide HIGH discharge air temperature sensor, rated NEMA 4, for each blower. 2. Locate sensor directly after blower discharge. H. Noise Enclosure: Total Noise Enclosure: 80 dBA average noise level at 5 feet from enclosure. I. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. J. Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4 -inch -high die -stamped block type black enamel filled equipment identification number and letters indicated in this specification. ROTARY POSITIVE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER JULY 30, 2026 44 42 19.04 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY K. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2 -inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Anchor bolts to be sized by blower manufacturer, but furnished and installed by the Contractor. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Instrumentation and Controls: In accordance with Section 26 29 86, Mechanical Equipment Control. External signal interfaces are required to interface with facility's PCS. Provide items not specifically called out which are required to implement functions required for proper system operation. B. Blower Control Panel: I . Panel Power Requirements: 480V, 3 -Phase, 20 amp. 2. NEMA Rating: 316SS 3. Mounting: Per contract drawings. 4. Hand Switches: a. Disconnect switch. b. LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE. c. START/STOP. d. RESET for blower fail. 5. Indicating Lights: a. Blower FAIL. b. HIGH differential air pressure. c. Amber STOP. d. Blower ON. e. Blower OFF. 6. Miscellaneous: a. RUN time meter. b. High inlet vacuum shutdown. c. Discharge High Temperature Shutdown: 0 -degree to 350 -degree range, NEMA 4 mounted, field adjustable, as manufactured by Ashcroft. d. Discharge High Pressure Shutdown: 5 psig to 15 psig range, NEMA 4 mounted, field adjustable, as manufactured by Ashcroft. e. Inlet and Discharge Pressure Gauges: Liquid filled, 4.5 -inch face, as manufactured by Ashcroft. f. Inlet and Discharge Temperature Gauges: Minus 20 degrees F to 120 degrees F inlet, 50 degrees F to 400 degrees F discharge, 5 -inch -diameter dial every angle, as manufactured by Ashcroft. C. Blower Control Panel External Interfaces (monitored and read points listed below may not be all inclusive, refer to the contract drawings and specifications for additional data): PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY POSITIVE JULY 30, 2026 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 44 42 19.04 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Interface to PCS: a. Ethernet connection — Modbus TCP/IP b. Conditions to be monitored: 1) System FAULT 2) System in REMOTE 3) System RUNNING. c. Conditions to be read from PCS: 1) START/STOP 2) E -STOP 2. Discrete Outputs to VFD: a. Dry contacts rated for 10 amps at 120V ac for use in VFD circuit. b. START/STOP. c. Motor OVERTEMP 3. Analog Outputs to VFD: a. SPEED SETPOINT 4. Discrete Inputs from field: a. Contact Rating: 5 amps at 120V ac. b. Sensing Voltage: 120V ac. c. HIGH differential air pressure from field devices. 5. Discrete Inputs from VFD: a. Dry contacts rated for 10 amps at 120V ac for use in motor starter circuit. b. Sensing Voltage: 120V ac supplied by control panel. c. Blower VFD Running. 6. Signals that interface with PCS shall be wired to a terminal block in each panel. 7. Contacts: a. Material: Gold or silver. b. Minimum Rating: 5 amps, 28V dc. c. Discrete Outputs: 1) Alarm: Single -pole, double -throw (SPDT) dry type. 2) Other: Single -pole, single -throw (SPST) dry type. d. Wire each discrete alarm output relay contact to a terminal strip for interfacing to CCS. D. System Operation: 1. Functional Requirements: a. Provide at each panel: 1) RESET pushbutton and associated logic for the common FAIL alarms. When alarm condition occurs, indicate associated condition at panel. Local indication of alarm condition shall remain until condition has been corrected and RESET pushbutton pressed. ROTARY POSITIVE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER JULY 30, 2026 44 42 19.04 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 2) Control logic to monitor operation of blower and provide a contact closure output to motor control center when prestartup or operating conditions are normal. Open contact if a HIGH differential air pressure between blower inlet and outlet condition or HIGH discharge air temperature is detected. 3) Indicate blower shutdown and problem using latching relays. E. Shop/Factory Finishing: 1. Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Blower Performance Test: 1. Notify Engineer and Owner at least 21 days prior to performing test. 2. Perform on the blower actually furnished in accordance with manufacturer's established criteria. 3. Test each blower for a minimum of 1 hour after stabilization at conditions near the performance ratings for mechanical integrity and flow performance. a. Perform at or above specified performance pressure rise. b. Tolerance on Flow: Plus or minus 4 percent, after correction to rated conditions. 4. Perform Slip Test in accordance with manufacturer's established criteria. a. Describe the testing configuration. b. Document operating conditions, temperatures, pressures, blower speed, etc. c. Complete slip calculations at test conditions. 5. Measure power consumption using a calibrated wattmeter. 6. Test Report: Confirm capacity and power, complete with data and calculations used in the test. B. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY POSITIVE JULY 30, 2026 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 44 42 19.04 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Install one check valve in the blower discharge piping, downstream of the silencer and safety relief valve. C. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using templates furnished by manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. D. Install blower package on vibration isolators and anchor bolts in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Functional Test: Prior to facility startup, conduct on each Blower System, assisted by manufacturer's representative, for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, quiet operation, and satisfactory specified performance. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 2-person-day(s) for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 2-person-day(s) for functional testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1-person-day(s) for post -startup training and training on maintenance procedures of Owner's personnel. B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, and Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. END OF SECTION ROTARY POSITIVE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DISPLACEMENT BLOWER JULY 30, 2026 44 42 19.04 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 44 42 25.02 ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This specification covers requirements for aluminum flat panel covers for the Bioreactors as indicated on the plans. The cover system shall be furnished and installed complete with all required panels, structural components, hardware, and related appurtenances required for a function and structurally complaint installation. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Section 01 88 15 - Anchorage and Bracing 4. Division 9 - Finishes 5. Division 26 - Electrical 6. Division 40 — Instrumentation 7. Section 40 61 21— Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following codes and standards form a part of this section to the extent specified herein: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes. 3. International Building Code (IBC): 2021, 4. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual. 5. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): DAF45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 6. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. Dl .2/D 1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. JULY 30, 2026 ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 444225.02- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 7. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. d. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum - Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. e. B429/B429M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910, Code of Federal Regulations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings or catalog cuts required for the fabrication and installation of the covers, accurate in every detail and containing information necessary to relate to the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Drawings shall be submitted showing dimensions, sizes, thicknesses, gauges, materials, finishes, joint attachments, and erection procedures. 3. Certification that the specified material alloys, sizes, and quantities have been furnished shall be submitted with materials upon delivery. 4. Complete manufacturer's specifications, including material description. 5. Description of manufacturer's standard finish. 6. List of materials and supplies furnished with the equipment. 7. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 8. Samples: a. Flat Cover Panel: Full panel width, 12 inches long, male and female. b. Fasteners: Two of each type to be used, with a statement regarding intended use. c. Closures: One metal closure with gasket seal. d. Sealant: One sample of each sealant with a statement regarding intended use. B. Information Submittals: 1. A complete set of design calculations for the cover panel, post and beams, and connections shall be submitted and stamped by a Professional Engineer. These calculations shall be signed by a registered professional engineer. All work shall be fabricated and erected in accordance with the approved drawings. 2. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM JULY 30, 2026 444225.02-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 3. Statement of Qualifications 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 5. Approximate shipping weight of the equipment and, if shipped unassembled, the number of components and approximate weight of each. 6. Shipping method. 7. Recommended handling method. 8. Requirements for storage and protection prior to installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide project experience in design, fabrication, and erection of structures proposed. B. Designer: Professional engineer registered in the state where Project is to constructed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide suitable lugs or other devices for attachment of lifting lines. B. Provide spreaders as required to avoid damage to the cover. C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. The environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Final Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Performance test standards: Contractor shall provide flat cover including beams and columns and connections systems which have been pretested and JULY 30, 2026 ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 444225.02-3 MARYS CREEK WRF certified by the manufacturer to provide the indicated resistance to air and water infiltration and structural deflection failure when installed as indicated and when tested in accordance with test procedure described herein. B. All exposed aluminum including the underside of panel surface shall be finished with an integral color anodic coating with minimum thickness of 0.7 - mil and minimum weight of 27 milligrams per square inch. Color shall be selected by the Owner by list of available options. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. CST Industries. 2. Element 13. 3. Hallsten Corporation. 2.03 FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM A. Performance Requirements The cover shall be a clear -span panel structure supported by aluminum beams and aluminum or stainless steel columns and the specified basin concrete structures. 2. Individual panels shall alternately mate with adjacent panels and overlap the support structure. 3. No more than the adjacent panels shall need removal to remove any one panel. 4. Each panel assembly shall be comprised of a primary extrusion, extruded plank, stiffener, and an integrated bidirectional non-skid surface. 5. Handles, bolts, and hinges shall pose no tripping hazard once installed. 6. The Dead Load of individual removable panels shall not exceed 150 lbs. 7. All dissimilar surfaces shall be separated by gasket. 8. All mating and bearing surfaces shall be gasketed, forming a substantially air -tight system. 9. The cover shall be adequately sealed to allow the odor control system to function properly while allowing for air intake. A safety intake shall also be present. 10. No appreciable water ponding allowed to remain on the surface. 11. The cover shall possess an integral non-skid surface and no exposed area of the cover system wider than one inch shall be without knurling or a non-skid surface. The non-skid surface shall not be accomplished with the use of coatings, adhesive tapes, sandblasting, or any other means other than an extruded profile. 12. As -built field dimensions need to be provided and verified by the contractor or manufacturer prior to the issuance of the final "For ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM JULY 30, 2026 444225.02-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY Fabrication" drawing package. Any discrepancies between the "As - built" field dimensions and on the "For Construction" drawings shall be brought to the attention of MANUFACTURER and the OWNER. 13. No fabrication shall proceed until site conditions are remedied to the point that the cover will be fabricated correctly and in compliance with the approved drawing set. Any remedies deemed necessary are not the responsibility of the cover manufacturer. 14. All openings and holes indicated on the Drawings shall be shop -fabricated. Field -cut openings or holes in panels shall not be permitted unless prior written approval is obtained from the Engineer of Record. 15. Access hatches located on top of panels shown on the Drawings shall be an integral part of the flat panel cover system and shall be designed to support the same uniform and concentrated loads specified for the surrounding panel 16. Flat panel cover system shall allow for thermal expansion and contraction. 17. The flat cover system shall be designed to conform to the following criteria for water penetration and air infiltration: a. Water Penetration: No significant, uncontrolled leakage at 4 pounds per square foot pressure with spray test. b. Air Infiltration: 0.202 cubic feet per minute per square foot for gross roof areas, with 4 pounds per square foot differential pressure. 2.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Bioreactor Basin Opening Flat Panel Covers Systems: Design, fabricate, and install aluminum flat panel covers, aluminum beams, and aluminum or stainless columns to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load to produce maximum stress and deflection in system components. 1. Uniform Load: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Concentrated Load: Two concentrated loads of 250 pounds each, applied simultaneously at any two separate 1 square foot areas of the panel. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Wind Load: Service level 30 pounds per square foot static pressure against a vertical surface. Design for horizontal and uplift forces in accordance with ASCE 7. 5. Negative pressure static load from below equal to 2 inches water columns for flat covers. 6. Deflection: The maximum deflection of any component under these loads shall not exceed 1/240 of the span of that component JULY 30, 2026 ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 444225.02-5 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Conform to generally accepted engineering practice, and to the "Specifications for Aluminum Structures" published by the Aluminum Association. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Materials provided to meet the provisions of this section shall be new and shall comply with all the requirements listed above in "References." All aluminum alloys shall be as defined by the Aluminum Association and published in the Aluminum Standards and Data. 1. Bolts and Fasteners —Type 316 stainless steel as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Supply a sufficient quantity of adhesive anchor or anchor bolts of suitable size to avoid localized stresses in bolting. 2. Plates and Sheets - Plate and sheet material shall be aluminum alloy 6061-T6, with mill finish AA - M 10 as fabricated. 3. Structures - Aluminum structural shapes shall be alloy 6061-T6, 6005A - T61, 6005A -T5. 4. Miscellaneous Shapes (Vents, Hatches, etc.) - Miscellaneous aluminum shapes shall be alloy 6061-T6 or 5052-H32. 5. Gaskets - All gaskets shall be ozone resistant Silicone or Neoprene only. If Neoprene gaskets are utilized, they must not be exposed to ultraviolet light in application. The gaskets shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8". 6. Sealant - Type 1 as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 7. Other Penetration Seals — Any other seals penetrating the cover structures and parts shall be weatherproof rubber seals. B. Hatches: Hatch: Size and location are shown on Drawings. Each hatch must be able to fully open at an 180 -degree angle allowing hatch lid to rest to basin cover. C. Hatch Hardware: 1. Hinges: Heavy-duty brass or stainless steel with stainless steel pin through -bolted to cover plate with tamper -proof stainless steel bolts. 2. Snap Lock: Stainless steel snap lock mounted on bottom of door leaf with removable topside key wrench and inside fixed lever handle. Threaded plug for flush outside surface with key wrench removed. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bearing Pads: Teflon -coated Series 300 stainless steel bearing plates with a maximum 10 percent friction coefficient and with anchors in radially or laterally slotted holes so that no more than 10 percent of the maximum vertical reaction at the support can be transmitted in horizontal thrust to the support wall. ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM JULY 30, 2026 444225.02-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY B. Slide Plates: Series 300 stainless steel. 2.07 ENGRAVINGS A. Provide fabricated metal lettering engraving via laser etching or mechanical engraving of characters and numbers. B. Stamped, painted, or adhesive applied lettering will not be permitted. Etching process shall not compromise structural integrity of the cover. C. Engravements shall be on all access hatches situated on the aluminum plate cover system per bioreactor basin and zone. D. Letter finish shall be the same as the base metal, burr -free edges and smooth transitions. E. Engravement size and font shall be approved by the OWNER. F. Engravements shall be provided on the side of the cover plate facing the atmosphere and shall be located in the middle of the plate. G. Engravements to be provided include: 1. Bioreactor basin 1 to include the following: a. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 FERMENTER ZONE b. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 ANAEROBIC ZONE 1 c. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 ANAEROBIC ZONE 2 d. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 1 e. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 2 f. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 AEROBIC ZONE 1 g. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 AEROBIC ZONE 2 h. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 AEROBIC ZONE 3 i. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 POST ANOXIC ZONE 1 j. BIOREACTOR BASIN 1 POST ANOXIC ZONE 2 2. Bioreactor basin 2 to include the following: a. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 FERMENTER ZONE b. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 ANAEROBIC ZONE 1 c. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 ANAEROBIC ZONE 2 d. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 1 e. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 2 f. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 AEROBIC ZONE 1 g. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 AEROBIC ZONE 2 h. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 AEROBIC ZONE 3 i. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 POST ANOXIC ZONE 1 j. BIOREACTOR BASIN 2 POST ANOXIC ZONE 2 3. Bioreactor basin 3 to include the following: a. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 FERMENTER ZONE b. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 ANAEROBIC ZONE 1 c. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 ANAEROBIC ZONE 2 JULY 30, 2026 ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 444225.02-7 MARYS CREEK WRF d. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 1 e. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 2 f. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 AEROBIC ZONE 1 g. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 AEROBIC ZONE 2 h. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 AEROBIC ZONE 3 i. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 POST ANOXIC ZONE 1 j. BIOREACTOR BASIN 3 POST ANOXIC ZONE 2 4. Bioreactor basin 4 to include the following: a. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 FERMENTER ZONE b. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 ANAEROBIC ZONE 1 c. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 ANAEROBIC ZONE 2 d. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 1 e. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 PRE ANOXIC ZONE 2 f. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 AEROBIC ZONE 1 g. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 AEROBIC ZONE 2 h. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 AEROBIC ZONE 3 i. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 POST ANOXIC ZONE 1 j. BIOREACTOR BASIN 4 POST ANOXIC ZONE 2 PART 3 EXECUTION A. The quality of workmanship shall be equal to the best general practice in modern structural fabrication shops. Workmanship, fabrication, and shop connections shall be in accordance with the latest edition of ANSIIAWS "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum". B. Under no circumstances shall welding of structural components or main panel assemblies be allowed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Provide suitable equipment for assembly and installation of the covers. B. Erection shall be supervised by the cover manufacturer and performed by skilled and experience mechanics in accordance with the manufacturer's standard. C. Erect plumb and level and in proper alignment. D. Field cutting and patching will be permitted only with the Design Engineer's approval. E. Joint Sealers: Gaskets, joint fillers and sealants shall be installed where required for weatherproof and airtight performance of the flat panel system. Provide the types of gaskets and sealant for the covers in Facility 500 Bioreactor Basins. ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM JULY 30, 2026 444225.02- 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 3.03 TESTING A. Field testing: After installation, the cover structure shall be tested for conformance with the deflection limits. A load of 500 pounds will be placed as directed by the engineer and the maximum deflection created by the load will be measured. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM 444225.02-9 MARYS CREEK WRY PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM 444225.02-1 MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 44 42 56.03 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: a. Four (4) vertical turbine pumps for chlorinated effluent to service water distribution system complete with pumps and motors and all necessary elbows, couplings, motor support brackets, base mounting brackets, sole plates, lifting lugs, anchors bolts, and accessories, for wet well operation. 1) Line -shaft vertical turbine pumps. 2) Installation, startup, testing, and placing in service assistance. 2. Furnish, install, test and place in operation four vertical turbine pumps at Mary's Creek WRF Service Water Pump Station. Pumps, motors, and equipment shall be suitable for outdoor installation and operation under all weather conditions. 3. Equipment Manufacturer shall be responsible to coordinate the testing and installation of the pumping units and for the adequacy and compatibility of the pumps, motors and AFDs. 4. Pumping unit, including controls and drives specified herein, shall be specifically designed for the following conditions. CONTRACTOR shall provide controls and drives: a. Designed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation, capable of continuous operation. b. The motor shall be furnished with non -reverse ratchets to prevent the pump and motor from reverse rotation when water is flowing backward through the system at the rated discharge pressure. c. Designed to shut down automatically if any of the following conditions are sensed by the protective circuitry: 1) High motor winding temperature. 5. All equipment, supports, anchors, and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with starting, turbulence, thrusts from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction, and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. 6. Refer to Drawings regarding the control logic and descriptions for additional pump monitoring and control information, as applicable. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS 444256.03-1 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. E101 Vertical Turbine Pumps -Line Shaft and Submersible Types 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C50.10 — General Requirements for Synchronous Machines. 3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 4. American Petroleum Institute (API): a. 610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural Gas Industries. b. 670, Machinery Protection Systems. 5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. c. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 6. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS): a. 9.6.4, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors and Generators. 8. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 2 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. 3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions. 4. A: Calculations: a. Torsional analysis for complete rotating assembly. Analysis report shall include the specific items of API 610, Part 2.8, Dynamics. b. Lateral vibration analysis for discharge head motor assembly and for column pipe bowl assembly. 5. Reverse Runaway Speed: Pump manufacturer's estimated maximum reverse runaway speed for pump and motor assembly. Submit coincident reverse flow and pump head for speed estimates. 6. Pump maximum downthrust or upthrust in pounds. 7. Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of components. 8. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, parts nomenclature, and materials of construction lists. 9. Baseplate drawings with leveling jackscrew details, anchor bolt and sleeve details, and minimum foundation installation and leveling requirements. 10. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 11. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, including motor modifications. 12. Factory finish system. 13. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS 444256.03-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that factory finish system is identical to requirements specified herein. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 4. Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports and Log. Factory test data for each pump shall be submitted, reviewed, and approved by Engineer prior to shipment of equipment. 5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish for each pump: 1. Complete set packing. 2. Complete set bearings. 3. Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals. 4. Complete set of shaft sleeves. 5. Complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc. 6. Impeller wear ring. 7. Bowl wear ring. 8. One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements. B. Lateral and Torsional Vibrations: 1. Pump and motor assembly shall have no natural frequencies within 20 percent of operating speed range. 2. Fundamental critical speed of rotating assembly shall be no less than 50 percent above the rated speed. 3. Pump manufacturer shall conduct an analysis of the lateral and torsional vibration of pump and motor assembly. a. Excitation frequency range of the analysis shall include, but not be limited to, number of motor poles and number of impeller vanes. b. Perform detailed stress analysis for pump, coupling, motor system at each critical speed, and steady-state operating condition. c. Stress analysis shall demonstrate that in no case shall maximum stress on pump, coupling and motor component exceed endurance limits of pump, coupling and motor assembly components materials of construction. C. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. ITT -Goulds b. Peerless c. Pentair PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS 444256.03-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.03 SHAFT SEALS A. Sealing system for vertical turbine pump shafts shall be mechanical seal or packed stuffmg box as indicated in pump data sheet. B. Mechanical Seal Requirements: 1. Nonfretting type requiring no wearing sleeve for shaft. 2. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished with no reduction in size through seal area. 3. Split Type: a. Requiring no field assembly other than assembly around shaft and insertion into pump or balanced cartridge design in conjunction with a spool type spacer coupling as specified in pump data sheet. b. Nonshaft O -rings: Ball and socket type requiring no gluing. c. Initial seal installation at factory shall be with nonsplit seal faces; spare seals and spare kits to have split faces. d. Unless otherwise specified, capable of 400 psig service, be self - aligning, self -centering, and single. e. Manufacturer and Product: A.W. Chesterton Company; No. 442. 4. Arrangement shall allow removal of seal without disturbing pump or driver. 5. For clear water services and solids up to 5 percent by weight, face combination shall be hard/soft. Otherwise, hardlhard faces shall be used. 6. Design such that dynamic O-ring moves towards a clean surface as face wears and springs are not in pumped fluid. 7. Stationary seal face shall be spring loaded to provide self -aligning despite stuffmg box misalignment. 8. Where cartridge type mechanical seals are specified: a. Single, balanced, flexible stator design. b. Capable of 600 psig service. c. O-ring secondary seals and setscrew drive with three-point centering to ensure 0.003 -inch maximum perpendicularity of rotary face to shaft. d. Gland shall have flush port and be affixed to equipment with adjustable tabs to fit irregular bolt patterns. e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 155. 2) Crane; IB. 9. Seal Materials: a. Metals: 1) Loaded Parts Over 0.060 -inch Cross Section: Type 316 stainless steel minimum. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 6 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2) Thinner Parts (springs): Hastelloy-C, Alloy 20, AMS5876 Elgiloy, or other alloy that is not vulnerable to chloride stress corrosion. b. Elastomers: Fluorocarbon Viton preferred, unless seal manufacturer recommends ethylene propylene for service conditions. Faces: Homogeneous construction. Surface treatments and plated faces are unacceptable. 1) Acceptable hard faces include nickel bound tungsten carbide, self -sintered silicon carbide, reaction bonded silicon carbide, or graphitized silicon carbide. Silicon carbide is preferred because of its higher pressure -velocity capability. 2) Acceptable soft face is carbon -graphite, either Union Carbide 658RC or Purecarbon P8412. 10. Seal Environmental Controls: a. Pipe seal flush port drain to wetwell or hub drain as shown on Drawings with 1/8 -inch orifice plate in the line. Provide venting of seal chamber. b. Mechanical seals for anything other than clear water services shall be fitted with Enviroseal SpiralTrac Version F, N, or D, installation Type I as recommended by A.W. Chesterton Company. 1) Provide fluid circulation in seal chamber that removes frictional heat from mechanical seal. 2) Convey particulate matter and contaminants for removal by conveying them from bore to shaft by means of integral machined spiral. 3) Remove particulate matter from seal chamber, without seal flush water, through integral machined exit groove. c. Material of Construction: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Connect mechanical seal to water purge supply where indicated on Drawings. C. Packing Requirements: 1. Stuffing Box: a. Tap to permit introduction of seal liquid. b. Hold a minimum of five rows of packing and a lantern ring. c. Face attached. d. Box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation without machining or other modifications of mechanical seal specified herein for applicable pump and operating conditions. 2. Packing Rings: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS 444256.03-7 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Three asbestos free die -molded packing rings of braided graphite material free of PTFE. 1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 1400R for nonpotable water services. b. Three die -molded rings of braided PTFE material. 1) A.W. Chesterton Company; 1725 that is NSF/ANSI 61 acceptable for potable water services. c. Glands: 1) Two-piece split construction. 2) Fit impeller end of packing with A.W. Chesterton Company; Enviroseal SpiralTrac, Version P, packing protection. 3. Where pumped fluid is clear water: a. Pump discharge run through 1/8 -inch orifice for packing lubrication. Otherwise, provide seal water flow control and monitoring as detailed on Drawings. b. External Seal Water Flow: 5 gallons to 30 gallons per hour flow rate, plus or minus 10 percent accuracy. c. Manufacturer and Product: A.W. Chesterton Company; SingleFlow. 4. Shaft Sleeve: a. Fit section of shaft or impeller hub that extends through or into stuffing box with replaceable stainless steel sleeve with a Brinell hardness of not less than 500. b. Sleeve shall be held to shaft to prevent rotation. c. Gasketed to prevent leakage between shaft and sleeve. d. Thickness: 3/8 inch minimum. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die - stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location. B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. C. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2 -inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. D. Sole Plate as shown in drawings. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare and prime, and finish coat in accordance with Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 8 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function. B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment furnished. C. Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, performance test logs, certified correct by a registered professional engineer. D. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer's standard, test on equipment. Include vibration test, as follows: 1. Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit before final assembly. 2. Limits: a. Driving Unit Alone: Less than 80 percent of NEMA MG 1 limits. b. Complete Rotating Assembly Including Coupling, Drive Unit, and Motor: Less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. E. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each pump at rated speed. 2. Perform under simulated operating conditions. 3. Test for a continuous 3 -hour period without malfunction. 4. Test Log: Record the following: a. Total head. b. Capacity. c. Horsepower requirements. d. Flow measured by factory instrumentation and storage volumes. e. Average distance from suction well water surface to pump discharge centerline for duration of test. f. Pump discharge pressure converted to feet of liquid pumped and corrected to pump discharge centerline. g. Calculated velocity head at the discharge flange. h. Bowl head. i. Driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase. 5. Pump performance testing shall be conducted in accordance with the current version of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards Acceptance Grade 1U. F. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. G. Hydrostatic Tests: Pump casing(s) tested at 150 percent of shutoff head. Test pressure maintained for not less than 5 minutes. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS APRIL 24, 2026 44 42 56.03 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF H. Vibration Tests: 1. Vibration testing shall meet Hydraulic Institute Acceptance for the applicable pump type and operating conditions. 2. All vibration test results shall be included in the factory test documentation and certified by a registered professional engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened. C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. D. After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. E. Vibration and Temperature Transducers: Install in accordance with API 670. 2. Install two terminal junction boxes mounted on motor housing. 3. Install conduit and cable from motor bearing temperature transducers to one of the terminal junction boxes. Install conduit and cable from motor vibration transducers to the other junction box. F. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump flanges. G. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 10 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump. 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Vibration Test: a. Test with unit installed and in normal operation, and discharging to connected piping systems at rates between low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified, shall not develop vibration exceeding 80 percent of limits specified in HIS 9.6.4. b. If unit exhibits vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or modify as necessary. Unit that cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced. 3. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. 4. Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for abnormally high temperatures. 5. Test for continuous 3 -hour period. 6. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with HIS 14.6. B. Performance Test: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 4 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 4 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1 person -days for prestartup classroom or Site training. 4. 4 person -days for facility startup. 5. 1 person -days for post -startup training and training on maintenance procedures of Owner's personnel. Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner and Engineer. B. See 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification. 1. Pump Data Sheet. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS APRIL 24, 2026 444256.03-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF END OF SECTION VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 - 12 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP DATA SHEET, 444256.03 - Tag Numbers: SWSO1_T0l_PMP01, SWSO1_T01_PMP02, SWSO1_T01_PMP03 and SWSOl_TO1_PMP04. Pump Name: Service Water Pump 1, -2, -3, -4 Manufacturers and Product: (1) ITT Goulds Pumps (2) Peerless (3) SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Treated Effluent, Chlorinated Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal 65 Max 85 Min 35 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0 Viscosity Range: Abrasive (Y/N): N Caused by: Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): Ni Corrosive (Y/N): N Caused by: Caused by: Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 30 Altitude (Feet above Mean Sea Level): Area Classification: unclassified Ambient Temperature (degrees F.): Location: Indoor (Y/N): N Outdoor (Y/N): Y PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Sm for Small Pumps / Lg for Large Pumps) Primary Design Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 540 Sm, 1075 Lg Secondary Design Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 540 Sm, 1075 Lg Primary Design Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 205 Sm, 210 Lg PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS APRIL 24, 2026 44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Secondary Design Total Head (Ft): 165 Sm, 165 Lg Maximum HP : 40 HP max Sm, 75 HP max Lg Minimum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 330 Sm, 400 Lg Min. Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 80 Sm, 81 Lg Max. NPSH Required at Secondary Capacity (Ft. Absolute): 30 Min. Continuous Stable Flow (MCSF, in US gpm): <150 Sm <250 Lg Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 1800 Constant (YIN): N Ajustable (Y/N): Y Reverse Rotation: Pump shall be capable of operating at runaway speed in reverse rotation without damage. DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Open Line Shaft (Y/N) Y Enclosed Line Shaft (Y/N) N Bowl: _close grained cast iron Bowl Wear Rings: Bowl Lining: Epoxy Bowl Bearings: bronze Column: 8" Line Shafting: Column Lining: Epoxy Max. Bearing Span (Feet): 5 Line Shaft Bearings: Fluted synthetic rubber with bronze, ASTM B584 C90500, shells Discharge Head: Type: L Material: Fabricated Steel, ASTM A36/A36M Discharge Nozzle Size (inches): 8 Impeller: VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS 44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT -2 Flange Standard/Class: 150 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Type: Semi -Open or Closed Material: Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A743 CF 8M) Impeller Wear Rings: Head Shaft Material: N/A Shaft Sealing: Packing (YIN) Y Seal Lubrication: Product Shaft Sleeve Material: N/A Mechanical (Y/N) N Coupling: Falk (Y/N) Fast: (YIN) Spring -Grid (Y/N) Gear Type (Y/N) Spacer (Y/N) Manufacturer Standard (YIN) Y Baseplate Material: Carbon Steel Sole Plate (Y/N) Y Material Carbon Steel Soleplate: Provide for support of pump assembly, including thrust and dynamic loads, as indicated. Top of soleplate shall be faced, drilled, and tapped for pump baseplate. Motor Base Material: Carbon Steel DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors Horsepower: 40 Sm, 75 Lg Voltage: 480 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1800 Service Factor: 1.15 Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Enclosure: DIP CISD-TEFC Mounting Type: EXP ODP_ TEWAC WPI Vertical Hollow Shaft N Vertical Solid Shaft Y TEFC Y WPII Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N) Y ABMA 9 and ABMA 11, B-10 Motor Bearing Life (hrs): PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS APRIL 24, 2026 44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 40 Hz min to 60 Hz max. See Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems. REMARKS Provide 1/2 -inch pressure tap from discharge head for field installation of a pressure gauge. See Drawing detail. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT -4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 44 42 56.04 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This specification shall govern supplying submersible, non -clogging sewage pumps, including all associated equipment and incidentals for installation. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide installation guidance and assistance to the CONTRACTOR during equipment installation, check-out, startup, testing and commissioning of the submersible pumps. The pump supplier shall furnish each pump with motors, pump and motor protection relay(s), and VFD rated and shielded power/control cables; base elbows, anchors, guide rails and brackets, guide rail supports, lifting chains and accessories for raising and lowering pumps, and other incidental items required for a complete installation and operational pumping units. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this section. B. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 444256.04-1 MARYS CREEK WRF 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot - Wrought, Special Quality. 4. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS): a. 11.6, Submersible Pump Test. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code. b. 497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to ratings and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Copies of materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 10 "Supplier's Submittals". Submittals shall include the following: a. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, anchor bolt size and locations, and field connections. b. Include dimensions of pumps, bases, discharge connections, sizes, removal systems, clearance distances and other information. c. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment. d. Complete pump data including rotating speed, selected impeller size, maximum impeller size to fit proposed pump case, minimum impeller size to fit proposed pump case, and certified performance pump curves with brake horsepower throughout the full operating range of the pump. 1) The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall furnish certified pump curves for each pump supplied, and other information SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.04 - 2 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY required as part of Section 3.2 of this specification. Catalog curves are not acceptable. Pump curves shall show the 2) model, impeller, test date, and customer. 2. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 3. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction, including cable seal details and any appurtenances, seals, or connections to the pump. 4. Type and materials of pump bearings, wear rings (impeller and case), and mechanical seals. 5. Literature, data, dimensions for lifting chains, guide rails, guide brackets, and guide rail supports. 6. Nearest location of factory maintenance and service facilities that will be available to service the equipment offered. 7. Complete warranty information. 8. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at guarantee point. 9. For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every 50 rpm over the operational range. 10. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 11. Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. 12. Adjustable frequency drive data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. 13. Factory -finish system. 14. L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA. 15. If required, wiring for motor protection module. 16. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. 17. Shop Drawings: a. Complete motor data including: 1) Name of Associated Driven Equipment 2) Horsepower of Motor 3) Voltage 4) Phase 5) Efficiency at 1/2, 3/4, Full Load 6) Power Factor at 1/2, 3/4, Full Load 7) Speed (RPM) 8) Slip 9) NEMA Design Starting Torque 10) Full Load Current 11) Locked Rotor Current 12) Insulation Class PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 444256.04-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 13) Service Factor 14) Temperature Rise at 1.0 SF 15) Enclosure Rating 16) Bearing life design 17) Bearing Material and any bearing coatings used, ceramic or otherwise 18) Equipment Supplier shall provide a letter certifying that the motor is compatible with the variable frequency drive. 19) Motor Stator Winding Resistance b. Conductor cutsheets. c. Cut sheets of the following pump and motor monitoring devices 1) Equipment supplier provided pump leak/overtemperature relay 2) Stator temperature sensor 3) Leak detection sensor d. Overvoltage/undervoltage recommendation settings of motor. e. Overload recommendation setting. f. Auxiliary Instrumentation and Devices: Datasheets and mounting locations/details for auxiliary instrumentation and devices furnished with equipment. The information shall include associated mounting brackets and hardware. g. Wiring Diagrams: If applicable, for power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 18. Test Reports: Supplied per this specification. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 2. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3. Factory and Field Performance Test Reports and Log. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 00 72 00 13.03 (B) that factory finish system meets requirements specified herein. 5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section I: 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 444256.04-4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish for this set of pumps: 1. One set mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements as modified below. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of five (5) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements. B. Submersible, vertical shaft, centrifugal nonclog type, for pumping wastewater. C. Designed for continuous operation under submerged or partially submerged conditions, and intermittent operation when totally dry without damage to pump or motor. D. Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division location in accordance with NFPA 70. E. Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller. F. Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Flygt PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 44 42 56.04-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2. KSB 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Equipment consists of pump complete with motor, pump protection relay, guide rail, anchoring brackets, base elbow, power cable, pump lifting cable. B. Characteristics: 1. Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump. 2. Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O -rings. 3. Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to pass coarse solids and stringy materials. C. Lifting Arrangement: 1. Stainless steel chain, 2 feet minimum, and one "grip -eye." 2. Attach chain permanently to pump and access platform with 316 stainless steel chain and wire rope. 3. "Grip -eye" capable of being threaded over and engaging links of stainless steel chain so pump and motor may be lifted with "grip -eye" and independent hoist. D. Sliding Guide Bracket: 1. Integral part of pump unit. 2. Pump unit to be guided by no less than two 316 stainless steel guide bars and pressed tightly against discharge connection elbow with metal - to -metal contact or through use of profile -type gasket, provided gasket is attached to pump's flange and can be easily accessed for inspection when pump is lifted out of wetwell. 3. Pump metal parts that come into contact with guide rail or cable system shall be made of nonsparking materials. E. Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug. Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from outside. F. Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at any point on head - capacity curve from shutoff to runout. G. Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes without strain or splicing. . Motors specified for variable speed operation shall SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.04 - 6 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY be provided with shielded VFD rated submersible cable provided by the manufacturer. H. Motor Protection Module: Provide pump with a motor protection module for field mounting adjacent to pump location. Contract Drawings are based on first named submersible pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and motor protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided, provide revised wiring for the motor protection module. I. Cable Entry System: 1. Junction chamber and motor separated by stator lead sealing gland or terminal board that prevents foreign material entering through pump top. 2. Utilize cable with factory -installed sealing gland with nonshrink epoxy seal system. 3. O-ring compression seal between sealing gland and cable entry point shall also be acceptable. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die - stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location. B. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, provided by the contractor, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. C. Sidewalk Door: Size as shown on Drawing, or, minimum sized by equipment manufacturer. As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, with the following additional requirements: Gasketed and odor tight. 2. Channel drain is not required. 3. 300 pound per square foot minimum load rating D. Roof hatch: Aluminum of 316 SS. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. Manufacturer's standard epoxy system for continuous submergence in corrosive water. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 444256.04-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Pump: 1. Factory Performance Test: a. In accordance with HIS 11.6, Acceptance Level lU for submersible pump tests. b. Include test data sheets, curve test results and performance test logs. Allow negative tolerance (1B or 2B) on small pumps (less than 70 hp.Conduct on each pump. 2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. a. Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at 2/3, 1/3, and shutoff conditions. 3. Vibration Test: a. Test with units installed and in normal operation, and discharging to connected piping systems at rates between low discharge head and high discharge head conditions specified, shall not develop vibration exceeding limits specified in HIS 11.6. b. If units exhibit vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or modify as necessary. Units that cannot be adjusted or modified to conform as specified shall be replaced. c. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation, temporary meter, and storage volumes. B. Pump Test: 1. General: a. Conduct on each pump provided. b. Conduct in accordance with HIS 11.6. 2. Routine Production Tests: a. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for compliance to specification. b. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content and insulation defects. c. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. d. Conduct abbreviated three-point operational performance test. e. After operational performance test, perform insulation test again. 3. Factory Seven -Point Plotted, Performance Test: a. Level 1U for submersible pump tests. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 444256.04-8 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY b. Include test data sheets, curve test results and performance test logs. c. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 4. Vibration test. 5. Hydrostatic test. C. Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6. 2.07 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM A. A guide rail system shall be used to support each pump during operation and to guide the unit during installation and lubrication/preventative maintenance inspection. The system shall consist of a stop console, guide pipe, fixing brackets, and guide holder assembly. All components shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel (mast bearings may be constructed of Hostaform (POM)). They shall be used in connection with a minimum 2.5 -inch square (80 x 80 mm) guide pipe. Power/control cable holders shall be provided every 5 feet. B. The guiderail system shall be supplied with factory welded mounting brackets at the top, bottom, and intermediate levels as needed to provide support at a maximum of 10 foot intervals. C. The guide pipe shall be designed to absorb the pump thrust. D. A pump mounting tube shall be provided by the MANUFACTURER. The tube shall be a minimum 12 -inch in length with one end designed to support the pump and the other end terminating in a standard ANSI flange. E. A fabricated support frame shall support the entire weight of the pump at its horizontal center of gravity. F. The pump shall be furnished with a suspension bracket suitable for fixed or removable lifting wire installation. G. Provide Type 316 stainless steel cable grips for supporting cable at the top brackets without damage to the cable insulation or lowering the cables electrical resistance. H. The upper fixing bracket shall secure the system to the basin wall. The system shall provide lateral support for the guide pipe. The upper guide holder assembly shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel. The upper guide holder shall surround the guide pipe to effectively support the guide pipe in all directions in the horizontal plane. Support brackets that are only attached to the guide pipe on one side of the pipe shall not be accepted. The guide rail PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 44 42 56.04-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF assembly shall contain a 316 stainless steel hook for the cable mesh and a self - tightening polypropylene cable mesh to secure the pump lower cable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Mount the discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell floor with stainless steel bolts. C. Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges. D. No portion of pump shall bear directly on floor of sump. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. Equipment as specified in Division 09 , Painting and Coating. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Test: Conduct on each pump. 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. 3. Test for continuous 3 -hour period. 4. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards for submersible pump tests HIS 14.6 and 11.6. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 3 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 3 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1 person -days for prestartup classroom or Site training. 4. 3 person -days for facility startup. 5. 1 person -days for post -startup training of Owner's personnel. Training shall not commence until accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner and Engineer. B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.04 - 10 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are part of this Specification. 1. Data Sheets: Pump and Motor. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 444256.04-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY RETURN FLOW SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04 Tag Numbers: RPSO1TO1 PMP01, RPSO1TO1PMP02 and RPSO1TO1PMP03 Pump Name: Return Flow Pump 1, -2, -3 Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Flygt (2) KSB SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Plant Drained Material (all plant Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 75 Max 104 Min 60 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: Viscosity Range: Abrasive (Y/N) Y Posible Scale Buildup (Y/N): Y Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 3 Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 30 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 1120 Secondary: 1400 Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 123 Secondary: 90 Minimum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 200 Min. Rated Pump & Motor Combined Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 65 Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 1800 Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Heavy -Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Other: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Wear Rings Case (YIN): Y Material: Insert ring ASTM A 532 Class III Type A Wear Ring Impeller (Y/N): N Material: N/A Elastomers: Nitrile R Fasteners: 316 Stainless S Impeller: Type: Double -Shrouded Non -Clog Other: N/A Material: Cast Iron ASTM A532 Class III Type A Shaft Material: 400 series stainless steel. Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y Bearing Life (Hrs): 50,000 B-10) DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors.) Horsepower: 60 Voltage: 480 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1800 Enclosure: EXP CLASSIFICATION: Class 1, Group D, Division 1 Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 40 Hz min to 60 Hz max, See Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. Other Features: Glycol Cooling Jackets Required 316 SS Outer Jacket Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y REMARKS: SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SWS BIOREACTOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04 Tag Numbers: SWS01 B01 PMP01 & SWS01 B01 PMP02 Pump Name: SWS Pump 1 & SWS Pump 2 Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Flygt (2) KSB SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Scum Waste Sludge at 0.6% solids Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 75 Max 104 Min 60 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.00 Viscosity Range: 0.4 — 0.6% Abrasive (Y/N) Y Posible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 3 Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 35 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 215 Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 32.20 Minimum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 80 Secondary: 515 Secondary: 58.67 Min. Rated Pump & Motor Combined Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 65 Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 1750 Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Heavy -Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Wear Rings Case (Y/N): Y Material: Insert Other: ASTM A532 Class III Tvae A PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JULY 30, 2026 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Wear Ring Impeller (YIN): N Material: Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel Impeller: Type: Double -Shrouded Non -Clog Other: N/A Material: Cast Iron ASTM A532 Class III Type A Shaft Material: 400 series stainless steel. Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y Bearing Life (Hrs): 50,000 (B-10) DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors.) Horsepower: 60 Voltage: 480 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1800 Enclosure: EXP CLASSIFICATION: Class 1, Group D, Division 1 Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 40 Hz min to 60 Hz max, See Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. Other Features: Glvcol Cooline Jackets Reauired 316 SS Outer Jacket Moisture Detection Switches (YIN): Y Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (YIN): Y REMARKS: SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT -4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 44 42 56.13 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S) PSTO1_BO1_PMP01: Thickening and Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump 1. PST02_B02_PMP02: Thickening and Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump 2. RDTO1_T01_PMPO1: Thickening RDT Feed Pump 1. RDT02_T02_PMP02: Thickening RDT Feed Pump 2. RDT0 1 -TO 1 -TWO 1: Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump 1. RDT02-T02-TW02: Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump 2. SLPO1_COl_PMP01: Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump 1. SLP02_C02_PMP02: Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump 2. PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers' Association (ABMA). 2. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS). 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors and Generators. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals Procedures. B. Action Submittals -Shop Drawings: 1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 444256.13-1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the guarantee point. 4. Detailed mechanical, and electrical drawings showing the equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of associated equipment. 5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 6. Motor data in accordance with requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low - Voltage AC Induction Motors. 7. Variable frequency drive data in accordance with requirements of Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. 8. Factory finish system. 9. L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA. 10. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 4. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 5. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 6. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Equipment Operating and Maintenance Manual Information. 7. Equipment Startup and Checkout submittals in accordance with Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 8. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 9. Training submittals in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 10. Product and equipment warranties and warranty schedule in accordance with Section 01 78 36, Warranties. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 444256.13-2 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. The Pump Manufacturer shall supply one (1) set of spare parts for all components exposed to operational wear during normal equipment service. Mechanical Seal. 2. Bearings, each size and type. 3. Rotor and Stator. 4. Special tools required for maintenance or adjustment. 5. Other items as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Equipment lubricants: The Pump Manufacturer shall indicate and verify types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc., necessary to startup equipment. Contractor shall provide and install the recommended lubricants. C. Spare parts shall be packed in study containers with clear, indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the Owner at the conclusion of the Project. Each part shall be labeled with part numbers which correspond to the Operation and Maintenance Data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Pump Manufacturer shall coordinate pump requirements with motor and variable frequency drive manufacturer and be responsible for pump, motor, and drive requirements. B. Pumps furnished under this Section shall be provided by a single manufacturer. C. Unless specifically mentioned otherwise herein, materials such as mounting hardware materials, electrical framing channel, supports for electrical conduits and cable trays, electrical boxes and fittings, electrical conduit, and enclosure types used in specific areas shall be in accordance with the Material Classification Schedule on the Drawings. 2.02 SUPPLEMENTS A. Refer to pump data sheets attached to this section as supplements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 -3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Stator Thermal Protection: 1. Provide for pumps where indicated in supplements and as specified below: a. Stator thermal protection (run dry protection) shall shut pump down before stator damage occurs. b. Provide thermowell drilled and tapped into stator and thermocouple for measurement of temperature at pump stator to rotor interface. c. Provide temperature controller in NEMA 4X enclosure, with dual display for stator temperature and alarm set -point with adjustable hysteresis to prevent on/off cycling of pump when coming off an alarm. d. Provide thermocouple cable between thermocouple and temperature controller. e. Provide system operating with external 120 -volt power supply. f. High temperature alarm dry contact rating shall be 5 amps 120V ac. Contact and alarm shall automatically reset when temperature falls below the hysteresis value. g. Provide 4 mA to 20 mA output for stator temperature to be monitored by the plant control system. B. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location. C. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds. D. OSHA -approved coupling guard, fabricated from Type 316L stainless steel. E. Anchor Bolts: Refer to Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, and Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare, prime and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment furnished. B. Conduct Factory Acceptance Testing in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 -4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. D. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each sludge pump. 2. Conduct in accordance with HIS 3.6 Rotary Pump Tests. a. Type III test, Acceptance Level A for the Polymer pumps. b. Type IV test, Acceptance Level A for the Thickening RDT Feed Pump, Thickened Sludge Transfer pumps, the Sludge Transfer pumps and the Dewatering Centrifuge Feed pumps. 3. Perform under simulated operating conditions. 4. Test for a continuous 3 -hour period without malfunction. 5. Test Log: Record the following: a. Liquid temperature at the pump inlet. b. Pressure at the pump inlet. c. Pressure at the pump outlet. d. Flow rate measured by factory instrumentation. e. Calculated velocity head at the discharge flange. f. Average distance from suction well water surface to pump discharge centerline for duration of test. g. Pump speed. h. Pump input power (break horsepower) for Type IV test. i. Pump total input power (driver or motor power) for Type IV test. 6. Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards if necessary. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no change of level or springing of the baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened. C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 444256.13-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF D. After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured, non -shrinking non-metallic grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Grouting. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. E. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump flanges. F. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. G. Pipe pump drain(s) to equipment drain, hub drain or scupper. 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. Equipment testing and facility startup shall be in accordance with the requirements of Sections 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, and 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump. 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Test for a continuous 1 -hour period without malfunction. 3. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes. 4. Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for abnormally high temperatures. 5. Verify the stator temperature high setpoint is configured to proper value for pump provided. B. Field Testing: Perform Equipment Startup and Checkout in accordance with Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. C. Completed Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. D. Performance Test: 1. Conduct on each pump as part of Facility Startup. 2. Test for continuous 4 -hour period. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Operate across specified range of flows, pumping the specified media. 4. Record flow rate, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and motor amp draw at approximate 1/2 -hour intervals and as needed to record operation over the specified range of flows. 5. For sludge pump applications, take sludge samples at approximate 2 -hour intervals. Sludge samples to be tested by the Owner for total dry solids content. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative: The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days and trips provided in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Work Description No. of Person Days No. of Trips per Pum T e Installation Assistance 2 1 and Inspection Functional and 2 1 Performance Testing Pre -startup and 2 1 Performance Testing Facility Startup 2 1 Post -startup Training of 2 1 Owner's Personnel 2. This period shall consist of a minimum of 8 -hour days and travel to and from the project site shall not be included. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and start-up assistance with Owner's personnel. 3. Services Provided: a. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. b. Furnish startup services. c. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. 4. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's services necessary to provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 444256.13-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification: 1. Thickening and Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump Data Sheet. 2. Thickening and Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump Induction Motor Data Sheet. 3. Thickening RDT Feed Pump Data Sheet. 4. Thickening RDT Feed Pump Induction Motor Data Sheet. 5. Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump Data Sheet. 6. Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump Induction Motor Data Sheet. 7. Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump Data Sheet. 8. Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump Induction Motor Data Sheet. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING AND DEWATERING BULK POLYMER RECIRCULATION/TRANSFER PUMP DATA SHEET Service: Thickening/Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump A Mfr.: Seepex Pump Name: Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump Model No.: Pump Tag Number(s): PST01-B0l-PMP01, PST02-B02-PMP02 Pump B Mfr.: Netzsch No. Pumps Required: 2 Model No.: Pump C Mfr.: Model No.: Pump D Mfr.: "Or -equal" LIQUID PUMPED AND SERVICE CONDITIONS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Liquid Pumped: Bulk Neat Polymer Capacity Rated (U.S. gpm): 50 Pumping Temperature (°F): TDH Rated (ft): 92.2 Normal: 65 Max: 75 Min: 55 NPSH Required (fta): 6.5 Specific Gravity @ 60°F:1.0- 1.1 Speed Rated Capacity (rpm): 1750 Viscosity Range (CP) @ 60°F: 0 - 2,500 Liquid pH: 3.5-7 TSS (%): Max Diameter Solid Pump Can Pass (in): Min NPSH Available (fta): 16 Erosion/Abrasion/Corrosion: ❑Yes No Caused by: Scale Buildup: ❑Yes No Caused by: Ambient Temp (°F): Max: 100 Min: 50 Altitude (ft above MSL): 773' Location: ®Indoor: EHeated ❑Unheated ❑Outdoor Area Classification: Unclassified Remarks: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING AND DEWATERING BULK POLYMER RECIRCULATION/TRANSFER PUMP DATA SHEET (CONT.) PUMP DESIGN AND MATERIALS (manufacturer to supply missing data) Connections: Shaft Sleeve: ❑Yes No: Suction size (inches): 3 Material: ®Flanged Type: Shaft Seal: ❑Open -Throat ®Packing Material: Braided Teflon & Graphite ❑ Screwed Orientation: As shown on the Drawings ❑Lantern Ring Material: Discharge size (inches): 3 ❑Mechanical Type: ®Flanged Type: Material: ❑ Screwed Seal lubrication: Orientation: Front Bearing: Pump Body: ABMA B-10 Life (hrs): 100,000 Material: Type 304 stainless steel Lubrication: ®Grease ❑Oil Drive Housing: Coupling: ®Mfr Standard Material: Type 304 stainless steel ❑Falk Pump Stages: 1 ❑Fast Suction Port: ❑Gear Type Material: Baseplate: Stator: Design: Fabricated Material: FPM-Viton Material: Carbon Steel Thermal Protection: EYes ❑No Drive Type: ®Direct -Coupled Rotor: ❑Belt Material: 304 SST ❑Close -Coupled Gear Reducer Connecting Rod: ❑ Bearing -Frame Gear Reducer Drive Arrangement: ® In -Line Piggy Back ❑ Material: 304 SST ❑Horizontal Offset [1 Vertical "Z" Drive Shaft: Material: 304 SST Joint: ❑Gear Type Universal ®Pin Type Universal ❑Other Type: Remarks: PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 1 -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING AND DEWATERING BULK POLYMER RECIRCULATION/TRANSFER PUMP INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Pump Name: Thickening/Dewatering Bulk Polymer Recirculation/Transfer Pump Pump Tag Number(s): PST01-B01-PMP01, PST02-B02-PMP02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 5 Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 480 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ❑ 1.0 M 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP Z TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1750 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ❑Yes No ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: El Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: max ❑ Variable Torque ❑ Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: Z See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 2 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING RDT FEED PUMP DATA SHEET Service: Thickening Process (RDT) Feed Pump A Mfr.: Moyno Pump Name: Thickening RDT Feed Pump Model No.: Pump Tag Number(s): RDT01-T01-PMP01, RDT02-T02-PMP02 Pump B Mfr.: Seepex No. Pumps Required: 2 Model No.: Pump C Mfr.: Netzsch Model No.: Pump D Mfr.: "Or -equal" Model No.: LIQUID PUMPED AND SERVICE CONDITIONS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Liquid Pumped: WAS Capacity Rated (U.S. gpm): 400 Pumping Temperature (°F): TDH Rated (ft): 46 Normal: 80°F Max: 113°F Min: 60°F NPSH Required (ft): Specific Gravity @ 60°F:1.05 Speed Rated Capacity (rpm): 209 Liquid pH: 6.5 to 7.5 TSS (%): 0.3 to 1% Max Diameter Solid Pump Can Pass (in): Min NPSH Available (ft): 32 - 56 Erosion/Abrasion/Corrosion: ®Yes ❑No Caused by: Scale Buildup: ❑Yes No Caused by: Ambient Temp (°F): Max: 105 Min: 50 Altitude (ft above MSL): 774.30' Location: ®Indoor: ®Heated ❑Unheated ❑Outdoor Area Classification: Unclassified Remarks: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 3 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING RDT FEED PUMP DATA SHEET (CONT.) l PUMP DESIGN AND MATERIALS (manufacturer to supply missing data) Connections: Shaft Sleeve: EYes []No: Suction size (inches): 6 Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel ®Flanged Type: Shaft Seal: ❑Open -Throat ❑Packing Material: ❑Screwed ❑Lantern Ring Material: Orientation: Left when facing the motor ®Mechanical Type: GA- SINGLE ACTING Discharge size (inches): 6 SEAL ®Flanged Type: Material: fl Screwed Seal lubrication: water Orientation: Front Bearing: Pump Body: ABMA B-10 Life (hrs): 50,000 Material: Cast Iron Lubrication: EGrease ❑Oil Drive Housing: Coupling: ®Mfr Standard Material: Cast Iron ❑Falk Pump Stages: ❑Fast Suction Port: 11111 Gear Type Material: Baseplate: Stator: Design: Fabricated Material: Fluoroelastomer Material: Steel Thermal Protection: EYes ❑No Drive Type: ❑Direct -Coupled Rotor: ❑Belt Material: Alloy Steel ANSI 4150 or SAE 4140, ❑Close -Coupled Gear Reducer hard chrome plated ® Bearing -Frame Gear Reducer Drive Connecting Rod: Arrangement: ® In -Line ❑Piggy Back Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 Horizontal Offset ❑ ❑Vertical "Z" Drive Shaft: Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 Joint: ®Gear Type Universal ❑Pin Type Universal ❑Other Type: Remarks: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 4 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING RDT FEED PUMP INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Pump Name: Thickening RDT Feed Pump Pump Tag Number(s): RDT01-T0I-PMP01, RDT02-T02-PMP02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 25 hp Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 480 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ❑ 1.0 0 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP ® TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1770 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ®Yes ❑No ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ® Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: ❑ Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: max ❑ Variable Torque ® Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 29 00, Low -Voltage Controllers. Special Features: Provide motor with isolated bearings and shaft grounding. Service factor indicated is to provide a safe , factor between the calculated required power and the listed motor horsepower. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS APRIL 21, 2026 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 5 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENED WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE (TWS) TRANSFER PUMP DATA SHEET Service: Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer from RUT Pump A Mfr.: Moyno Pump Name: Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump Model No.: Pump Tag Number(s): RDT01-T01-TWP01, RDT02-T02-TWP02 Pump B Mfr.: Netzsch No. Pumps Required: 2 Model No.: Pump C Mfr.: Seepex Model No.: BTO 52 -12/B2 -J0 - L8 -F0 -GA Pump D Mfr.: "Or -equal" Model No.: LIQUID PUMPED AND SERVICE CONDITIONS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Liquid Pumped: TWAS Capacity Rated (U.S. gpm): 160 Pumping Temperature (°F): Secondary (U.S. gpm): 130 Normal: 80°F Max: 113°F Min: 60°F TDH Rated (ft): 69.2 Specific Gravity @ 60°F:1.04 Secondary (ft):67.5 Liquid pH: 6.5 to 7.5 NPSH Required (ft): TSS (%): 4-5% Speed Rated Capacity (rpm): 150-243 Max Diameter Solid Pump Can Pass (in): Min NPSH Available: 42.35 ft Erosion/Abrasion/Corrosion: ®Yes ❑No Caused by: Scale Buildup: ❑Yes No Caused by: Ambient Temp (°F): Max: 100 Min: 32 Altitude (ft above MSL): 774.3' Location: ®Indoor: ZHeated ❑Unheated ❑Outdoor Area Classification: Unclassified Remarks: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS MARCH 2025 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 6- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENED WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE (TWS) TRANSFER PUMP DATA SHEET (CONT.) PUMP DESIGN AND MATERIALS (manufacturer to supply missing data) Connections: Shaft Sleeve: EYes []No: Suction size (inches): 13" x 13" Material: Tyne 316 Stainless Steel ❑Flanged Type: Shaft Seal: ®Open -Throat ❑Packing Material: ❑Screwed ❑Lantern Ring Material: Orientation: Right when facing the motor for ®Mechanical Type: GA- SINGLE ACTING TWPO1/TWPO2 SEAL Discharge size (inches): 6 "or -equal" ®Flanged Type: Material: ❑Screwed Seal lubrication: water Orientation: Front Pump Body: Bearing: Material: Cast Iron ABMA B-10 Life (hrs): 50,000 Drive Housing: Lubrication: ®Grease ❑Oil Material: Cast Iron Coupling: ®Mfr Standard Pump Stages: two ❑Falk Suction Port: ElFast Material: ❑Gear Type Stator: Baseplate: Material: NBR Design: Fabricated Thermal Protection: EYes ❑No Material: Steel Rotor: Drive Type: ❑Direct -Coupled Material: Alloy Steel ANSI 4150 or SAE 4140, ❑Belt hard chrome plated ❑Close -Coupled Gear Reducer ® Bearing -Frame Gear Reducer Drive Connecting Rod: Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 Arrangement: ® In -Line ❑Piggy Back Drive Shaft: ❑Horizontal Offset ❑Vertical "Z" Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 Joint: ®Gear Type Universal ❑Pin Type Universal ❑Other Type: Remarks: PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 6 -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 2025 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENED WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE (TWS) TRANSFER PUMP INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Pump Name: Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) Transfer Pump Pump Tag Number(s): RDT01-T01-TWP01, RDT02-T02-TWP02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 20 hp Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ❑ 1.0 ® 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP ® TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1,770 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ®Yes ❑No ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: ❑ Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: max ❑ Variable Torque ® Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 29 00, Low -Voltage Controllers. Special Features: Provide motor with isolated bearings and shaft grounding. Service factor indicated is to provide a safe factor between the calculated required power and the listed motor horsepower. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS MARCH 2025 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 7- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE FEED PUMP DATA SHEET Service: Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump A Mfr.: Moyno Pump Name: Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump Model No.: Pump Tag Number(s): SLP0 I CO 1PMP01, SLP0 1 C02 PMP0 1 Pump B Mfr.: Netzsch No. Pumps Required: 2 (1 duty, 1 standby) Model No.: Pump C Mfr.: Seepex Model No.: Pump D Mfr.: "Or -equal" Model No.: LIQUID PUMPED AND SERVICE CONDITIONS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Liquid Pumped: Thickened sludge Capacity Rated (U.S. gpm): 243 Pumping Temperature (°F): Secondary (U.S. gpm): 158 Normal: 80 Max: 113 Min: 60 Tertiary (U.S. gpm): 81 Specific Gravity @ 60°F:1.0-1.1 TDH Rated (ft): 8.5 - 55.7 Liquid pH: 6 to 8 Secondary (ft): 8.3 — 55.1 TSS (%): 2% - 3% Tertiary (ft): 7.8 — 46.8 NPSH Required (fta): Max Diameter Solid Pump Can Pass (in): 3 Min NPSH Available (fta):24 - 57 Speed Rated Capacity (rpm): 300 Suction Pressure (psig): Max: 11-24 Rated: Erosion/Abrasion/Corrosion: EYes No Caused by: Scale Buildup: EYes ❑No Caused by: Struvite Ambient Temp (°F): Max: 100 Min: 50 Altitude (ft above MSL): 774.33 Location: ®Indoor: ®Heated ❑Unheated ❑Outdoor Area Classification: Unclassified Remarks: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS MARCH 2025 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 8 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE FEED PUMP DATA SHEET (CONT.) PUMP DESIGN AND MATERIALS (manufacturer to supply missing data) Connections: Shaft Sleeve: ❑Yes ❑No: Suction size (inches): 8 Material: ®Flanged Type: Shaft Seal: ❑Open -Throat ❑Packing Material: ❑Screwed ❑Lantern Ring Material: Orientation: Left side (when facing the motor) ®Mechanical Type: Chesterton seal 1810 or Discharge size (inches): 8 equal ®Flanged Type: Material: 316 SST ❑Screwed Seal lubrication: water Orientation: Front Bearing: Pump Body: ABMA B-10 Life (hrs): 50,000 Material: Cast Iron Lubrication: ❑Grease ❑Oil Drive Housing: Coupling: ®Mfr Standard Material: Cast Iron ❑Falk Pump Stages: 2 ❑Fast Suction Port: ❑Gear Type Material: Cast Iron Baseplate: Stator: Design: Fabricated Material: Buna Material: Carbon Steel Thermal Protection: ®Yes ❑No Drive Type: ®Direct -Coupled Rotor: ❑Belt Material: Alloy Steel AISI 4140/4150 or SAE ❑Close -Coupled Gear Reducer 4140, hard chrome plated ❑ Bearing -Frame Gear Reducer Drive Arrangement: 0 In -Line []Piggy Back Connecting Rod: Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 ❑Horizontal Offset ❑Vertical "Z" Drive Shaft: Material: Stainless Steel SAE 420 Joint: ❑Gear Type Universal ®Pin Type Universal ❑Other Type: Remarks: Drive shall be direct drive gear reducer with 1800 rpm motor or direct drive gear motor. Pumps shall be bearing frame type; close coupled pumps are not acceptable. PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 8 -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 2025 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE FEED PUMP INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Pump Name: Dewatering Centrifuge Feed Pump Pump Tag Number(s):): SLP01C01PMP01, SLP01C02PMP01 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 30 Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ® 1.0 ❑ 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP ® TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1,800 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ®Yes ❑No ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: ❑ Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: max ❑ Variable Torque ® Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 29 00, Low -Voltage Controllers. Special Features: Provide motor with isolated bearings and shaft grounding. Drive shall be direct drive gear reducer with 1800 rpm motor or direct drive gear motor. Pumps shall be bearing frame type; close coupled pumps are not acceptable. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS MARCH 2025 44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT 8 -3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 44 42 56.16 PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This specification shall govern supplying peristaltic hose pumps for transferring liquid sodium hypochlorite to the membrane CIP day tank, including all associated equipment and incidentals for installation. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide installation guidance and assistance to the CONTRACTOR during equipment installation, check- out, startup, testing and commissioning of the pumps. The pump supplier shall furnish each pump with motors, pump and motor protection relay(s), and other incidental items required for a complete installation and operational pumping units. Refer to the P&ID drawings for additional components to be furnished with the pump. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards. 6. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors and Generators. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP MARCH 27, 2026 444256.16-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction conforms to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. b. Detailed mechanical and electrical drawings showing equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of associated equipment. c. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. d. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, and horsepower demand over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate head, capacity, and horsepower demand required at guarantee point. e. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and including any motor modifications. f. Control panel elevation drawings showing construction and placement of operator interface devices and other elements. g. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. h. Listing of extra materials supplied for this section. i. Factory finish system. j. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer that equipment and factory - applied coating system(s) meet requirements specified herein. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 3. Factory test reports. 4. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 5. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup, and for future maintenance. PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP 444256.16-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 7. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 9. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and materials: Item Gasket Kit Hoses Hose Lubricant Refill Special tools required to maintain or dismantle 1.06 WARRANTY Quantity One complete set per pump One per pump One per pump One complete set A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Specific product requirements are attached to this section as supplements. B. Coordinate pump requirements with motor manufacturer and be responsible for pumps and motors. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP 444256.16-3 MARYS CREEK WRF C. Where adjustable speed drives are required, coordinate pump and motor requirements with adjustable speed drive manufacturer. D. Design Requirements: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Bredel, model 40 2. ProMinent 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. B. Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16 -gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location with 3/8 -inch high die -stamped block type black enamel filled equipment identification number indicated in this Specification. C. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. D. Leak Detection Switch: 1. Locate near top of pump to detect leakage of pumped product into pump housing. 2. Mount sensor on rear of pump housing. 3. Supply sensor Normally Closed with ability for field adjustment to Normally Open. 4. Float Switch Rating: Vmax equals 240V ac, Imax equals 1 amp, Pmax equals 50VA. E. Revolution Sensor: 1. Provide inductive type revolution sensor located to detect rotor revolutions. 2. Pump manufacturer to supply and mount sensor and triggering device. 3. Inductive Sensor Rating: Vmax equals 30V dc, Imax equals 150 mA, Pmax equals 4.5 VA. PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444256.16-4 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF F. Inlet Pulsation Accumulators and Discharge Pulsation Dampeners: I. Inlet size same as pump connecting pipe size. Provide ANSI Class 150 flanged inlet. 2. Housing: Epoxy coated steel. 3. Bladder: Hypalon. 4. Accessories: Pressure gauge, air fill valve, and cap. 5. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 6. Capacity: Sized by manufacturer. 7. Manufacturer and Product: Blacoh Fluid Control; Sentry Series. G. Controls: 1. General: Each metering pump shall be provided with a stainless steel NEMA 4X local panel complying with Division 26. 2. Each local control panel shall house controls and wiring for motor starters, drives, transformers, circuit breakers or other means of overload and fault protection, voltage barrier, panel mounted devices, relays, terminal strips, timers, and other appurtenances as necessary. Identified terminal strips shall be provided for the connection of external conductors to equipment -mounted junction boxes. All equipment shall be shipped from the factory ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, and local control panels. 3. Operational Description: Each local control panel shall be provided with an on/off pushbutton switch and an ON/OFF switch for each pump. In the "ON" position, the start/stop of the pump shall be controlled by the pushbutton switch. 4. Each local control panel shall be provided with the following panel - mounted devices: a. Main circuit switch b. Start and stop pushbuttons and starters for each pump. c. ON/OFF switch for each pump. d. Indicating lights for each pump. The pump status signals shall also be used for remote indication in the SCADA system. e. Provide a run contact and fail contact. f. Provide a leak alarm contact to be wired in parallel with the fail contact. g. Provide for local start/stop. 2.04 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare, and prime and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP MARCH27,2026 444256.16-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: 1. Pumps: Assemble, check, and shim all pumps for the specific application prior to shipment. 2. Control Panels: a. Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function. b. Test all control panels actually furnished. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Level base by means of steel wedges; steel plates and steel shims. 1. Wedge taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. 2. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for pump and driver base. 3. Accomplish wedging so there is no change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened. C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings. D. After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout. E. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump flanges. F. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444256.16-6 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform preoperational checks in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Functional Tests: Conduct on Each Pump: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper connections, and normal operational characteristics. C. Performance Tests: Conduct on Each Pump: a. Perform under simulated or actual operating conditions. b. Test for a continuous 30 -minute period for each pump. c. Test and Test Log: Record the following: 1) Pump suction head relative to suction flange centerline. 2) Pump discharge head relative to pump discharge flange centerline. 3) Pump flow using pump rpm and gallons per revolution. 4) Pump flow using plant flowmeter instrumentation, if available. 5) Motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 1 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1/2 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1/2 person -days for prestartup classroom or Site training. 4. 1/2 person -days for facility startup. 5. 1/2 person -days for post -startup training of Owner's personnel. Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner. B. See Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this Specification: 1. Peristaltic Hose Pump Data Sheet. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP MARCH 27, 2026 44 42 56.16-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF END OF SECTION PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444256.16- 8 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP DATA SHEET 444256.16 - Tag Numbers: CST01_C01_CFP01 and CST01_C01_CFP02 Pump Name: Chemical Transfer Pump 1 and Chemical Transfer Pump 2 Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Watson Marlow/Bredel Pumps (2) Verderflex SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): 10-12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite Solution Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 65°F Max 120°F Min 0°F, Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.22 pH: 12 Abrasive (Y/N): N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N Inlet Pressure at Pump (psig): 1— 6 depending on liquid level in storage tank Min. Net Positive Inlet Pressure Available (psia): 15 Area Classification: Unclassified PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Rated Capacity (gpm): 15 Rated Differential Pressure (psi): 10 Maximum Pump Speed at Rated Condition (rpm): 80 Constant Speed (Y/N): Y Adjustable Speed (Y/N): N. Speed Range: % to __% o of Rated Speed: DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Heavy-duty, horizontal, peristaltic hose pump Pump Configuration: Direct or close -coupled Pump Housing Material: Cast, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 25 Cover Material: Carbon steel or cast iron, with inspection window Cover Seal Material: EPDM or Buna N (NBR) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP MARCH 27, 2026 44 42 56.16 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Rotor Material: Cast iron Rotor Shoes: Epoxy No. of Rotor Shoes (Minimum): 2 Rotor Shoe Shim Material: Type 316 stainless steel Hose Size, Millimeters: Size by manufacturer as required for pump design flow rate Hose Material: EPDM Hose Pressure Rating (psig): 230 Hose Inserts Material: PVC Hose Lubricant: Manufacturer's standard Flange Rating and Material: ANSI Class 125/150Carbon steel Bearing Housing Material: Cast iron Bearing Type: Ball bearings, permanently lubricated Bearing Life (ABMA L-10) (hrs): 100,000 Gear Drive: Planetary type, AGMA Class II Baseplate: Factory -coated steel High Level Leak Detector (Y/N): N Pump Speed Sensor (YIN): N Revolution Sensor (Y/N): N Suction Pulsation Dampener (YIN): N Discharge Pulsation Dampener (Y/N): Y DRIVE MOTOR (see Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors) Horsepower: 5_ Voltage: 480 Phase: 3 Service Factor: 1.15 Enclosure: DIP TENV WPI Inverter Duty (Y/N): Y EXP ODP TEFC _x CISD-TEFC WPII SUBM PERISTALTIC HOSE PUMP PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 42 56.16 SUPPLEMENT -2 MARCH 27, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 44 44 63.01 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S) PTSO1-B0I-PMPO1: Thickening Polymer Blending Metering Pump PTS02-B02-PMP02: Dewatering Polymer Blending Metering Pump PTSO1-B0I-PMXO1: Thickening Polymer Blending Mixer PTS02-B02-PMX02: Dewatering Polymer Blending Mixer PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. WORK OF THIS SECTION This section covers the work necessary to provide two (2) thickening polymer blending unit and two (2) dewatering polymer blending unit, including metering pumps and blending mixer, dilution water assembly, electrical control panels, and all appurtenances as specified herein. B. Polymer Characteristics: 1. Emulsion Polymer: a. Concentration (Active): 38 percent to 45 percent. b. Specific Gravity: 1.01 to 1.10. c. Viscosity: Up to 2,500 centipoise. 2. Diluted Polymer (Polymer Solution) Characteristics: a. Emulsion Polymer: 1) Concentration (active): 0.20 percent to 0.40 percent by weight. 2) Specific Gravity: 1.01 to 1.10. 3) Viscosity: Up to 600 centipoise. C. The polymer feed system consists of the following: 1. Bulk polymer storage tanks (see Section 43 40 01, Polyethylene Storage Tanks). 2. Bulk polymer recirculation/transfer/mix pump (see Section 44 42 56.13, Progressing Cavity Pumps). 3. Polymer blending unit for sludge thickening (rotary drum thickener). 4. Polymer blending unit for sludge dewatering (centrifuge) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 444463.01-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. B. Make, model, and weight of equipment item. C. Schematic of piping layout showing all equipment, valves, and other accessories. D. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and materials of construction. E. Information on rotameters and mixer chamber shaft seals indicating pressure rating and service requirements specified herein. F. Retention time and Gt (mean velocity gradient multiplied by retention time) values for polymer mixing chamber. G. Dimensions for system components. H. Electrical control schematic and wiring diagrams that clearly show alarms, shutdowns, and contact closures for central control system. I. Installation requirements. J. Interconnection wiring diagrams showing 480 -volt power distribution, 120 -volt control interconnection, instrument connection, wire sizes and quantities, wire identification per control diagrams, and terminal block locations. K. Manufacturer's installation instructions. L. Detailed mechanical and electrical drawings showing equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size and locations of connections to other Work, and weights of associated equipment. Record Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. N. Manufacturer's Certificates for the following in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. O. Variable frequency drive data in accordance with requirements of Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Variable Frequency Drives. POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444463.01-2 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The polymer blending units shall be furnished, coordinated, and tested by one supplier. The system shall be completely shop assembled, skid mounted, and shop tested prior to shipment. B. Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. C. All components shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of required materials and equipment. D. All equipment and material shall be designed and constructed in accordance with applicable standards as indicated. 1.04 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Supplier shall provide full list of spare parts per requirements of Section 01 78 43, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish under this section a complete polymer system for sludge thickening and dewatering as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appurtenances necessary to install and place into successful operation a polymer system as shown and specified. C. The polymer blending units shall be skid mounted assemblies consisting of one metering pump, mixing chamber, and all piping, valves, and controls capable of delivering required minimum and maximum gallons per hour of polymer solution as shown on attached schedule. Included with each polymer blending unit shall be a pressure relief valve, back pressure valve, and calibration chamber. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 444463.01-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Polymer Blending unit: 1. General: a. Polymer blending unit shall consist of an integrated equipment package system which shall meter, dilute, activate, mix, and feed liquid polymer and water to hydraulically activate and dilute neat polymer. Polymer shall not be exposed to a rotating centrifugal pump turbine or other machinery that would cause excessive shear. b. Feed systems shall include a progressing cavity feed pump to provide the capability of pumping emulsion type liquid polymers, with maximum apparent viscosities of up to 40,000 centipoise. At no time shall liquid polymer or polymer solution be exposed to excessive shear, so as to degrade the effectiveness of the polymer molecular chains. c. Polymer blending unit shall be furnished with an integrally mounted control panel. d. Provide SCR drive or VFD for the metering pump to accept 4 mA to 20 mA signal. e. Each polymer blending unit shall be equipped with Type 304 stainless steel side frame and stainless steel base with nonskid feet. f. Progressing cavity pumps shall comply with requirements in Section 44 42 56.13, Progressing Cavity Pumps, polymer type. g. Valves and instrumentation shown inside of the dashed boundary of the Liquid Polymer Feed System/Blending Unit on Drawing No. I-1271 and I-1272 are to be provided. Valves and instrumentation outside of this boundary to be provided by others. 2. Mixing Requirements: a. Polymer mixing system shall be specifically designed to invert, disperse, and activate in solution emulsion polymers which may vary in specific gravity and vary in viscosity. See Section 1.01.B. General, Paragraph Polymer Characteristics for more information. b. Polymer and water shall be mixed in a chamber designed to create sufficient mixing energy. Solution shall undergo a tapered mixing intensity slope as it exits the initial sheer zone and pass through a second zone, isolated by a baffle. Polymer activation efficiency shall be consistent over the entire dilution water range. Mixing chamber shall be stainless steel. c. Mixing chamber shall have a pressure relief valve and drain. POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444463.01-4 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Neat Polymer Metering: a. General: Neat polymer metering shall consist of a calibration column, neat metering pump, pressure relief valve, ball valve, Coriolis (mass) meter, high pressure switch and gage, ball valve, tubing, check valve and miscellaneous appurtenances. b. Pump: 1) Unit shall have a neat polymer metering pump. Pump shall be progressing cavity type with hard chrome plated Type 316 stainless steel rotor and FPM stator. 2) The metering pump shall have an output range as scheduled herein. c. Flow Measurement: 1) Calibration column: a) Size: 60 second drawdown at maximum flow conditions in GPH and milliliters per second. b) Full port PVC ball valves with FPM O -rings and seals. 2) Mass Flow Meter: a) Coriolis type mass flow is measured by splitting the flow into two similarly curved conduits which oscillate. The relative velocity of the motion between the two conduits (flows) results in a phase shift between the two signals that is used to determine the flow rate. b) Performance Requirements: (1) Accuracy (liquids): Plus or minus 0.15 percent of maximum rate. (2) Repeatability: Less than 0.2 percent of rate. (3) Temperature Effect: Less than 0.25 percent per 100 degrees F. (4) Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than the applicable system test pressure as specified in the pipe schedule. c) Signal Output: 4 mA to 20 mA. d) Provide NEMA 4X rating for non -hazardous areas. e) Flowtube: (1) Fluid Wetted Parts: Type 316 stainless steel. (2) Enclosure: Stainless Steel. (3) Process Connection Size: As shown on the Instrument Schedule. (4) Process End Connections: ANSI Class 150 lbs flange suitable for mating with pipe specified. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 444463.01-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF f) Accessories: (1) Provide suitable length of manufacturers recommended cable for interconnection of transmitter and flowtube. (2) Provide a NEMA 4X (areas not classified as explosion hazard) rated 120V ac power ON -OFF switch. g) Product and Manufacturer: (1) Series FCM2000 as manufactured by ABB. (2) Series CF Flowtube and Model CFT50 Transmitter as manufactured by Invensys/Foxboro. d. Valves: 1) General: Ball, butterfly and pressure relief valves and operators: comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections, unless otherwise specified herein. 2) Check Valve: a) Provide manufactured supplied check valve at reaction chamber. b) Provide Y -type. (1) Socket weld or NPT connection with spring operated with no backflow. (2) FPM caps and seals. (3) Hayward or George Fischer. e. Provide tubing or hose with connections as necessary. f. General Instrumentation: Comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections. 4. Dilution Water System: a. Initial activation and dilution water system shall contain primary dilution assemblies. Dilution system shall have a motorized OPEN/CLOSE Ball valve, electromagnetic flow element and transmitter in compliance with Division 40, manual linear action adjustment valve, and miscellaneous instrumentation. Total water flow rate into unit shall be adjustable as specified herein. b. All components in the system shall be designed for 100 psig working pressure. Water supply pressure could be greater than 100 psig. Provide pressure reducing valve to ensure that the water pressure within the skid is at or below 100 psig. Comply with Section 40 27 02, Process Valves and Operators. c. Valves: 1) Pressure reducing valves shall be set to a desired operating pressure for activating and diluting neat polymer. Comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections. 2) Manual Ball Valves. Comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections. POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444463.01-6 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3) Motor Operated Plug Valves: Comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections. 4) Provide a manufacturer recommended manual linear action adjustment valve for dilution water velocity and flow fine tuning. d. Instrumentation: Dilution water pressure differential type flow element and gage, and Coriolis flow meter. Comply with Division 40, Process Interconnections. 5. Manufacturers: a. Velodyne Systems. b. UGSI Chemical Feed, Inc. 2.03 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. General: See Section 26 29 86-PS2, Mechanical Control Systems, for general instrumentation and control requirements. Instrumentation, control, and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with requirements of Section 40 99 90, Package Control Systems. Process Panel NEMA No. Name RatingMaterial RPBO1_ Liquid B01_P PLC- Polymer Stainless 4X MPO1 1200 Feed Steel System 1 RPB01_ Liquid BO1_P PLC- Polymer Stainless MP02 1200 Feed 4X Steel System 2 CPB01_ Liquid B01_P PLC- Polymer Stainless MP01 1200 Feed 4X Steel System 1 CPB01_ Liquid B01_P PLC- Polymer Stainless MP02 1200 Feed 4X Steel System 2 B. Panels: 1. Provide a skid mounted control panel. 2. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL21,2026 444463.01-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3. NEMA Rating: 4X. 4. Control panels shall meet the requirements of Section 26 29 86, Mechanical Equipment Control Panels. C. Operator Controls and Indicators: Provide the following panel mounted operator controls and indicators: a. ON/OFF/REMOTE hand switch or HMI touchscreen for manual control. b. Pump Speed Indicator (or display on HMI). c. Potentiometer (to adjust pump speed in Internal Mode) (or provide HMI screen interface for system setpoints). d. Provide "Power On" LED indicating light (white). e. Provide "System Alarm" LED indicating light (amber) — a single light if an HMI screen is included to indicate specific cause of the alarm, or individual fault/interlock lights if an HMI screen is not included. 2. Door -mounted devices shall be less than 65 inches from bottom of skid. D. External Interfaces: 1. Analog Input(s): Pump speed adjust. 2. Discrete Input(s): System RUN command. 3. Discrete Output(s): a. Fault. b. System ON status (IN SERVICE). C. In remote status. d. Polymer skid unit RUNNING status. e. Polymer skid unit LOW PRESSURE status (when provided). 4. Analog Output: Speed. E. Functional Requirements: 1. When in Remote, unit runs in response to external System RUN command. 2. When in Remote, pump speed is adjusted in response to external pump speed adjust signal. 3. Monitor for Low Flow of dilution water. If falling Low Flow is sensed, put the polymer pump in standby. Once dilution water flow resumes (rising Low Flow), restart the polymer pump. 4. Activate loss of water flow alarm if Low Flow of dilution water is sensed for a preset time (initial setting, 15 seconds). POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444463.01-8 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 ELECTRICAL A. Power supply to each pump and mixer motor: 460 -volt, three-phase, three -wire, 60 -Hz. B. Skid units such as polymer blend units shall be factory wired and tested. C. Wiring: 1. Provide wiring between pump controller's termination enclosure, valves, pressure switches, and the pumps for skid units. 2. Provide circuit breakers and controllers for each pump from skid control panels. 3. Wiring shall be in conduit. 4. Provide device fusing/circuit breakers as required. 5. Drives and solenoid valves shall be powered from the polymer blend unit. 6. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be housed in each respective control panel, which shall be NEMA 4X. D. Refer to Division 26, Electrical for electrical requirements and: 1. Section 26 29 86, Mechanical Equipment Control Panels. 2. Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Variable -Frequency Drives. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates: A 16 -gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4 -inch die -stamped equipment identification name indicated in this specification and/or as shown on the Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment over 100 pounds in weight shall be provided with lifting lugs. C. Graduated cylinder calibration kits complete with necessary control valves, connective tubing and fittings shall be furnished for each polymer blending unit. Calibration columns shall be sized (capacity) as recommended by the polymer feed equipment manufacturer. D. Pressure Relief Valve: Adjustable relief valve set at 100 psig for installation on polymer solution pipeline. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 444463.01-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Acceptance Testing: Conduct Factory Acceptance Testing in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer of polymer equipment shall furnish a qualified representative who shall supervise installation of equipment, check for proper mounting, assembly, mechanical adjustment, lubrication, proper control sequencing, general functioning of equipment, and quality of workmanship. Polymer feed equipment shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Polymer equipment shall meet the requirements of applicable industrial standards or specifications as to design, construction, and performance. C. Polymer system shall be installed to conform to general layout and alignment shown on the Drawings. 3.02 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be painted with manufacturer's standard painting system for corrosive service. 3.03 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative: The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days and trips provided in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Work Description No. of Person Days No. of Trips Installation Assistance 4 1 and Inspection Functional and 3 1 Performance Testing Pre -startup and 2 1 Performance Testing Facility Startup 3 1 Post -startup Training 1 1 of Owner's Personnel POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 44 63.01- 10 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. This period shall consist of a minimum of 8 -hour days and travel to and from the project site shall not be included. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and start-up assistance with Owner's personnel. C. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's services necessary to provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup and Section 01 79 00, Demonstration and Training. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: 1. Perform Equipment Startup and Checkout in accordance with Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 2. Preliminary Test: a. Demonstrate Valve Operation: 1) Check operation of OPEN/CLOSED indication lights at PLC. 2) Open and close valves through full range and verify valve operation in manual and automatic modes. In remote mode, demonstrate that valves open and close in response to a PLC signal. b. Check Electrical and Operator Controls: 1) HAND/OFF/COMPUTER selector switch. 2) Verify indicating lights. 3) Stroke length adjustment. 4) Unit responds to 4 mA to 20 mA signal. a) Test unit for a continuous 30 -minute period without malfunction under simulated operating conditions. During this operating period, the pumps shall obtain suction from the chemical (neat polymer) storage tanks, but the Contractor shall direct the discharge to a suitable clean container for collection of the chemical. Chemical shall then be returned to the chemical storage tanks or disposed of at the direction of City of Fort Worth. During the test, record the following: (1) Neat polymer flow rate. (2) Dilution water flow rate. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 444463.01-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Polymer Blending Unit: For Sludge Thickening (RDT): 1. Number of Units: Two (one duty plus one standby). 2. Type: Hydraulic or hydro -mechanical mixing. 3. Capacity: 9 gph at 0.20 percent by weight active basis. 4. Liquid Polymer Metering Pump Type: Progressing cavity. a. Suction: Flooded. B. Polymer Blending Unit: For Dewatering (Centrifuge). 1. Number of Units: Two (one duty plus one standby) 2. Type: Hydraulic or hydro -mechanical mixing. 3. Capacity: 30 gph at 0.40 percent by weight active basis. 4. Liquid Polymer Metering Pump Type: Progressing cavity. a. Suction: Flooded. 3.06 SUPPLEMENT A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this specification: 1. Thickening Polymer Blending Unit Package System Induction Motor Data Sheet. 2. Dewatering Polymer Blending Unit Package System Induction Motor Data Sheet. END OF SECTION POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 44 63.01- 12 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF THICKENING POLYMER BLENDING UNIT PACKAGE SYSTEM INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Name: Thickening Polymer Blending Unit Package System Tag Number(s): RPB0 1 B01PMX01, RPB01 B02PMX02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 3 hp (max) Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 480 V Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ® 1.0 ❑ 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP ® TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1,750 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ®Yes ❑No El Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: El Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: 1800 max ❑ Variable Torque ® Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID APRIL 21, 2026 44 44 63.01 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF DEWATERING POLYMER BLENDING UNIT PACKAGE SYSTEM INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Name: Dewatering Polymer Blending Unit Package System Tag Number(s): CPB01B01 PMX01, CPB01 B02 PMX02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on pump curve. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 3 hp (max) Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 480 V Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ® 1.0 ❑ 1.15 Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: ❑ DIP ❑ EXP ❑ ODP ® TEFC Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1,750 ❑ CISD-TEFC ❑ TENV ❑ WPI ❑ WPII ❑ SUBM Inverter Duty: ®Yes ❑No El Multispeed, Two -Speed: I rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two ❑ Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: El Horizontal ❑ Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Moisture Detection Switches ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ❑ Thermal Protection Embedded in ❑ Non -reverse Ratchet Windings ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Operating Speed Range: min to: 1800 max ❑ Variable Torque Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: POLYMER FEED SYSTEM, LIQUID 444463.01-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 44 4516.02 FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. FILL IN B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 91 14 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 40 — Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 2, Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B 16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. Al82/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High -Temperature Service. b. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and General Applications. c. A380/A380M, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. d. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM APRIL 6, 2026 44 45 16.02 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY e. D573, Standard Test Method for Rubber —Deterioration in an Air Oven. f. D1171, Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration —Surface Ozone Cracking Outdoors (Triangular Specimens). g. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. h. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness. i. D2241, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series). j. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. k. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 1. D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. m. F441/F441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. n. F442/F442M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). o. F438, Standard Specification for Socket -Type Chlorinated (Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. p. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Adequate Mixing: Variation in mixed liquor suspended solids (total residue) of less than 15 percent between mean value of samples taken at any two depths along any vertical line extending between water surface and elevation of the top of diffusers. B. Aeration System Backpressure: Air pressure at top of dropleg necessary to satisfy air supply and distribution requirements. Account for all pressure losses incurred by aeration system when new. C. (Bioreactor) Basin: Structure within which aeration occurs. Typically, multiple basins operate in parallel or in series. D. Bay: Portion of grid on each side of dropleg and manifold assembly. E. Cell: Portion of basin physically separated from other portions of basin. A cell may contain an aeration zone or a portion of an aeration zone. F. Diffuser Assembly: Flexible membrane or ceramic diffuser with an element holder and retaining device. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444516.02-2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF G. Diffuser Density: Ratio of diffuser area (AD) to tank floor area (AT). Diffuser area is the horizontal projection above the membrane disks through which compressed air is diffused. Diffuser density is the reciprocal of AT/AD. H. (Distribution) Header or Lateral: Piping between manifold and diffuser assemblies. I. Dropleg: Connection between air source to manifold. J. Dynamic Wet Pressure (DWP): Pressure differential across diffuser element, not including flow control orifice. K. Grid: Configuration of diffuser system in a zone. L. Manifold: Single run of piping that connects dropleg with header(s). M. Specific Permeability Rating: Number of cubic feet of air per minute at 70 degrees F (plus or minus 5 percent) and 10 percent to 50 percent relative humidity that will pass through 1 square foot of diffuser element materials, 1 -inch thick with a differential pressure of 2 -inch water column (ceramic only). N. Standard Conditions for Air: 68 degrees F, 14.7 pounds per square in absolute (psia), and 36 percent relative humidity. O. Standard Airflow: Airflow at standard conditions, expressed as standard cubic feet per minute (scfm). P. Standard Conditions for Oxygen Transfer: Tap water at 20 degrees C, zero residual dissolved oxygen (DO), 1,000 mg/L total dissolved solids (TDS), and barometric pressure of 760 millimeters mercury (mm Hg) (dry air). Q. Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency (SOTE): Fraction of oxygen in an injected air stream dissolved under standard conditions for oxygen transfer. R. Standard Oxygen Transfer Rate (SOTR): Mass of oxygen per unit time dissolved in a volume of water by an oxygen transfer system operating under standard conditions for oxygen transfer. S. Zone: Area within an aeration basin used to provide a type or level of treatment. One or more cells may be included in a zone. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Airflow Distribution: Shall not differ by more than 10 percent, at all specified conditions, for any two diffusers supplied from the same dropleg (based on diffuser with lower flow rate). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 44 45 16.02-3 MARYS CREEK WRY B. Air Distribution and Balancing: Control using orifices and proper header size selection only. Do not use flow distribution control devices requiring automatic or manual operation. C. Mixing: Adequate throughout each aerated zone of each bioreactor at mixed liquor suspended solids concentrations between 8,000 and 10,000 mg/L at stated minimum available airflow. D. System Aeration Requirements: 1. Diffuser Airflow: a. Minimum greater than or equal to 0.5 scfm. b. Annual Average less than or equal to 1.5 scfm. c. Maximum Month less than or equal to 2.5 scfm. d. Peak less than or equal to 3.5 scfm. E. System Zoned Aeration Requirements: 1. Normal Operation - Available Airflow per Basin (scfin) (4 total Bioreactor Basins): Annual Zone Max Day Min/Startup Average 1. Aerobic Zone 1 2,406 945 1,566 2. Aerobic Zone 2 1,604 630 1,044 3. Aerobic Zone 3 1,002 394 653 2 Swing Zone Operation - Available Airflow per Basin (scfm) (4 total Bioreactor Basins): Annual Zone Max Day Min /Startup Average 1. Aerobic Zone 1 1,704 670 1,109 2. Aerobic Zone 2 1,143 449 744 3. Aerobic Zone 3 722 284 470 4. Post Anoxic Zone 1 722 284 470 5. Post Anoxic Zone 1 722 284 470 FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 -4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Dimensions and Minimum Diffuser Counts Basin: Max Minimum SWD Width Length Diffuser Zone (ft) (ft) (ft) Quantity* 1. Aerobic Zone 1 22.62 24 35 570 2. Aerobic Zone 2 22.62 24 35 380 3. Aerobic Zone 3 22.62 24 35 228 4. Post Anoxic Zone 1 22.34 19 35 228 5. Post Anoxic Zone 1 22.07 19 35 228 *For diffuser diameters other than 9 inches, quantities shall be adjusted to provide the same total diffuser area. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish fixed header, fine bubble, diffused air aeration equipment system as a complete package including, but not necessarily limited to, dropleg(s); air manifold(s); distribution headers; diffusers; diffuser pressure monitoring system(s); supports; drain line, sump, and airlift purge; header joints; accessories; connections for gas cleaning system; and miscellaneous appurtenances. B. Furnish complete, engineered systems. Drawings indicate air manifold, header, and diffuser orientations only. Details such as air manifold sizes, air header sizes and spacing, air manifold and header supports and spacing, and diffuser spacing, shall be defined by and be responsibility of Contractor and shall be consistent with requirements in this section. C. Design aeration equipment so that upon completion of installation, diffusers are level to within plus or minus 3/8 inch of a common horizontal plane. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly. b. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. c. Detailed mechanical drawings showing equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 44 45 16.02-5 MARYS CREEK WRY d. A detailed drawing of proposed aeration equipment layout for each basin showing air line sizes and lengths, distances between air distribution headers (center to center), and location of diffusers, supports, and expansion joints. e. Diffuser, diffuser connector, balancing orifices, and system head loss curves covering range of airflow rates specified and required. Include graph showing dynamic wet pressure versus airflow per diffuser, with and without pressure drop through proposed flow control orifice. f. Clean water test results for a minimum of five designs with similar diffuser submergence, spacing, and airflow per diffuser demonstrating that the proposed design will meet specified requirements for standard oxygen transfer rate. Testing shall have been performed in accordance with ASCE 2 and shall be certified by a registered professional engineer. g. Provide, for Engineer's consideration, a credit to Owner for waiving clean water oxygen transfer tests specified under Source Quality Control. Decision to waive these tests will be at Engineer's sole discretion and will consider test results submitted under previous item. h. Calculations showing distribution and balancing of air to diffusers fed from each dropleg for minimum and peak airflow rates specified and required. i. Heat loss calculations and certification that design provides sufficient cooling between top of drop leg and first section of plastic pipe, given proposed air velocities and specified maximum air supply and water temperatures. j. Evidence of membrane diffuser longevity as specified under Source Quality Control. k. Shop and Field Painting Systems Proposed: Include manufacturer's descriptive technical catalog literature and specifications. 1. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Calculations by a registered professional engineer to demonstrate design complies with requirements of this section. 2. Calculations relating to proposed anchor spacing, diameter, and embedment. 3. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 4. Factory test results, reports, and certifications. Include oxygen transfer performance test. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02-6 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 6. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. a. Include manufacturer's printed installation instructions with erection drawings indicating, by piece marking, how entire assembly (for each basin service) is to be shipped and field assembled. b. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for functional testing. 8. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 9. Manufacturer's special guarantee. 10. Service records for maintenance performed during construction. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools: Item Flexible membrane diffuser elements Diffuser element retainers Element tighteners Diffuser element holders Air distribution pipe support assemblies Air distribution pipe expansion joints PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS Quantity Min. 5% of number installed Min. 5% of total number installed Min. 0.25% of number installed Min. 1% of each type and size installed Min. 1% of each type and size installed FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 44 45 16.02-7 MARYS CREEK WRF Item Tool sets, if required, for removal 2 and replacement of diffuser assemblies. uan B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Xylem Sanitaire. 2. Stamford Scientific International, Inc. (SSI). 3. Evoqua Water Technologies (Envirex). 4. Aquarius Technologies, Inc. 2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. System: 1. Plant influent is municipal wastewater.. 2. Material being aerated is mixed with return activated sludge. Ferric chloride may be added to mixed liquor for phosphorus removal. 3. Temperature in Mixed Liquor 50 to 86 degrees F. 4. pH of Mixed Liquor: 6.4 to 7.9 standard units. 5. Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration: 8,000 mg/L to 10,000 mg/L. 6. Sludge Volume Index (SVI): 50 mL/g to 150 mL/g. 7. Bioreactor Quantity: 4 basins 8. Basin Sidewater Depth: Varies. Refer to Performance Requirements for sidewater depth in each zone. 9. Allowable Diffuser Mounting Distance Above Basin Floor (Floor to Top of Diffuser Element): 9 to 12 inches. 10. Available Backpressure at Top of Dropleg 0.6 psig. 11. Maximum Compressed Air Temperature at Top of Dropleg 240 degrees F. 2.03 GENERAL A. Stainless Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Supports FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02-8 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Shop fabricate welded parts and assemblies from Type 316L stainless steel with a 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240/A240M. 2. Shop fabricate nonwelded parts and pieces from sheets, plates, or bars of Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M, unless specified otherwise. 3. After fabrication, pickle and passivate stainless steel assemblies and parts in accordance with ASTM A380. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: 1. Produce from PVC compounds with minimum tensile strength of 7,000 psi. 2. Four -inch diameter and smaller shall be SDR 33.5 or SDR 32.5, conforming to ASTM D3915, ASTM D3034, and Class 124524; or Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D1784, ASTM D1785, ASTM D2466, and Class 12454-B. 3. Six-inch diameter and larger shall be Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D1784, ASTM D1785, ASTM D2466, and Class 12454-B. 4. Design to withstand 130 degrees F (PVC) or 200 degrees F (CPVC) inside wall temperature, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for proposed pressures, whichever is lower. 5. Add two parts by weight of titanium dioxide per 100 parts of resin. 6. Factory solvent weld all joints and fittings. C. All fixed and expansion joint O-ring gaskets shall be natural rubber/SBR with a Shore A durometer of 45, plus or minus 5. D. Each aerated zone shall have a minimum of 1 manifold unless otherwise indicated. Each manifold shall extend to full nominal width of the basin. E. Manifold/Header Support Systems: Allow for expansion and contraction over a temperature range of 125 degrees F. 2.04 DROPLEGS, MANIFOLDS, DISTRIBUTION HEADERS, AND SADDLES A. Droplegs: 1. Provide Type 304L stainless steel dropleg from air supply (termination point shown on the Drawings) to the manifold. Connection of dropleg to air supply shall be a Van Stone flange with 150 -pound bolt pattern. 2. Provide support from its upper connection, with additional support at lower elbow and as needed to limit spacing between supports to maximum 20 feet. Supports shall prevent transmission of lateral loads from dropleg to its connection to air supply. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 44 45 16.02-9 MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Stainless steel drop leg shall transition to PVC pipe 2 feet above the manifold using a fully -encapsulating, bolted band clamp coupling of same material as drop leg and having an EPDM gasket. 4. Provide 1/2 -inch diameter stub 6 inches long with a 125 -pound PVC flange on PVC portion of dropleg for diffuser cleaning system connection. 5. Stainless steel cooling loop(s) of the same material as droplegs shall be provided as part of the diffuser system if required to meet temperature requirements. B. Manifolds: 1. Perpendicular to air distribution headers, same nominal pipe size as dropleg, and located above distribution headers. 2. Fabricate with minimum 4 -inch -diameter fixed joint connections to each header. Fabricate manifolds in sections up to 20 feet. 3. Construct from Schedule 80 PVC or Schedule 40 PVC if stub to distribution header is reinforced with a solvent welded saddle tee. C. Headers: 1. Header spacing shall be no less than 12 inches and no greater than 4 feet (center to center). For access to diffuser element holders, center of each holder shall be within 18 inches of a minimum 18 -inch wide walkway that is clear of equipment. 2. Fabricate in sections up to a maximum of 24 feet, with fixed joints or expansion joints as required. D. Saddles: 1. Saddle (diffuser) spacing on headers shall be no more than 4 feet (center to center). 2. Factory solvent welded to crown of header. 3. One-piece construction, high -strength PVC, glass -fiber reinforced polypropylene, or other suitable material. 4. Solvent welded saddles shall be threaded for mounting diffuser element holders. Mechanically attached saddles shall include an air inlet port, positive locking mechanism to locate and lock assembly to header, and an O-ring seal for air -tight connection to header. 5. Connections between diffuser element holders and saddles shall resist 150 foot-pounds applied torque about polar axis of holder and 100 foot- pounds about longitudinal axis. E. Include expansion/contraction system consisting of fixed or flanged joints and guide supports. Guide supports shall allow for longitudinal movement. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 - 10 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 2.05 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSER ASSEMBLIES A. Fine bubble, disk type with flexible perforated air release membrane. After 1 year of continuous operation without basin dewatering or diffuser cleaning, diffuser DWP at specified peak air flow rate shall not increase more than 1 psi. B. Backplate with central orifice to support membrane when air supply is off to prevent liquid from passing into diffuser assembly and air piping. C. Membrane Diffuser Elements: Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) with an ultraviolet inhibitor and compounds providing resistance to chemical attack, weathering, and aging, suitable for application to continuous aeration of activated sludge mixed liquor without significant increase in DWP. 1. Replaceable without use of any special tools. 2. Exterior surface shall be smooth to restrict biological film growth. 3. Inflate during aeration and deflate when airflow is discontinued, further restricting biological film growth. 4. Cleanable in -place with water from a hose. Acid or other chemical cleaning methods shall not be required to restore diffuser to like -new performance conditions. 5. Perforated over entire surface to release fine bubbles uniformly. 6. Nominal Diameter: 9 inches. 7. Physical Properties: a. Specific Gravity: 1.25 maximum. b. Durometer: 58 plus or minus 5 percent (ASTM D2240). c. Modulus of Elasticity: 500 psi (ASTM D412). d. Tensile Strength: 1,200 psi minimum (ASTM D412). e. Elongation at Failure: 350 percent minimum (ASTM D412). f. Ozone Resistance (72 hours, 40 degrees C, 50 parts per hundred million): No cracks at two times magnification (ASTM D1171, Test A) g. Heat Resistance (70 hours at 100 degrees C): Minus 25 percent maximum tensile strength (loss); minus 25 percent maximum acceptable elongation at failure (loss) (ASTM D573). D. Diffuser Element Holders: One-piece construction, UV -resistant, PVC, glass - filled polypropylene, or other suitable material. Threaded for connection to saddle on air distribution piping. 1. Air plenum chamber below diffuser element. 2. Mechanism to attach diffuser element to holder. 3. No special tool required to attach diffuser element holder to saddle. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 444516.02-11 MARYS CREEK WRY E. Each Basin consists of 5 zones with 3 grids in the aerobic zones and 1 grid in each post anoxic zone. Grids shall contain 1 header. First zone of each basin shall contain a minimum of 570 equally spaced diffuser assemblies. Second zone shall contain a minimum of 380 diffusers. Third zone shall contain a minimum of 228 diffusers for a tapered aeration system. The fourth and fifth zones shall contain a minimum of 228 diffusers. Spacing between diffuser assemblies shall provide for uniform mixing of contents. For diffuser diameters other than 9 inches, quantities shall be adjusted to provide the same total diffuser area. F. Furnish each basin with 5 grids. Number and spacing of diffuser assemblies shall provide uniform mixing of contents. For diffuser diameters other than 9 inches, quantities shall be adjusted to provide the same total diffuser area. 2.06 SUPPORTS A. Fabricate from 0.250 -inch minimum Type 316 stainless steel plate. Use Type 316L stainless steel for welded parts. B. Provide suitable supports in locations that diffused aeration equipment could be affected by mixers or other equipment, as shown on Drawings. C. Provide plus or minus 1/2 -inch lateral and plus or minus 2 -inch vertical adjustment of header. Adjustment shall be continuous and possible without removing air piping from support. Each air piping section shall have a minimum of two supports and additional supports as necessary to maintain level. Support height shall be sufficient to provide diffuser elevation shown on Drawings. Each support shall provide a bearing surface contoured to fit 360 degrees of air piping. D. Manifold Supports: 1. Maximum spacing between supports of 8 feet. 2. Resist thrust generated by expansion or contraction of headers. 3. Include manifold hold down, guide straps, anchor bolts, and supporting structure. Guide straps shall resist not less than 550 pounds uplift force per support without exceeding 24,000 psi design stress. 4. Bearing surface shall be a minimum of 2 inches wide. E. Header Supports: 1. Maximum spacing between supports of 7 feet 6 inches. 2. Allow longitudinal movement of header section to prevent stress buildup in header because of thermal expansion/contraction forces. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 - 12 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Guide supports shall consist of self-limiting hold down and sliding mechanism. Sliding mechanism shall provide minimum resistance to movement of header under full buoyant uplift load. Mechanism shall provide 1/8 -inch clearances around header and be self-limiting if mechanism is overtightened. Maximum horizontal thrust of 20 pounds shall initiate movement of header relative to mechanism under full buoyant uplift load. 4. Fixed supports shall consist of a hold down mechanism and self-limiting clamp device. Clamping shall positively grip header when tight and be self-limiting to prevent overstressing header if clamp is overtightened. 5. Bearing surface shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches wide. 2.07 DRAINLINE, SUMP, AND AIRLIFT PURGE A. PVC System to Drain Entire Submerged Aeration Piping System: Each grid with air supply from a raised manifold (centerline higher than laterals) shall have a 4 -inch diameter drain line terminating at a sump. Each grid with air supply from an in -line manifold (same centerline as laterals) shall have a sump that is integral to the manifold. B. Sump: 1. Bottom elevation shall be lower than invert of air distribution headers and drainline. 2. Connect to a 1 -inch -diameter airlift eductor line extending from drainline invert elevation to a point approximately 5 feet above basin water level and terminate with a PVC ball valve. 2.08 DIFFUSER PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM A. Capable of measuring diffuser DWP and airflow (using pressure differential across flow control orifice). B. Furnish each aeration grid with one pressure monitoring connecting box, bubbler tube, support brackets, polyethylene tubing and carrier pipe. 1. Connecting Box: Handrail mounted fiberglass box capable of containing three 1/2 -inch PVC ball valves, and quick coupling connectors, all of which are accessible through a front access door. 2. Mounting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Three ball valves connect to grid air distribution header and diffuser element holder plenum with 3/8 -inch diameter tubing and a 1/2 -inch bubbler tube (for submergence pressure at top of diffuser). C. Furnish one portable pressure monitoring panel with minimum dimensions 14 inches high by 10 inches wide. House panel in fiberglass NEMA 250, PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM APRIL 6, 2026 444516.02-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Type 4X enclosure, suitable for hand carrying and containing the following equipment components: 1. Orifice and diffuser differential pressure gauges (Dwyer; Series 2000, with accuracy plus or minus 2 percent of full scale, "Or -equal"). 2. Bubble pipe blowdown PVC ball valve and airflow rotameter. 3. Quick coupling connectors. 4. Polypropylene fittings. 5. Polyethylene tubing. 6. One set of pressure monitoring instructions complete with calibration curves specific to the diffuser orifice diameter. 7. Stainless steel hanger device mounted to enclosure of a design suitable to hang enclosure on handrail. 2.09 HEADER JOINTS A. Special Flanged Joints or Slip Joints between Sections of Air Distribution Header: 1. Individual header sections shall rotate independently of adjacent header sections for alignment. 2. Flanged Joints for Stainless Steel Piping: Face ring -follower flange type with through -bolts, capable of transmitting longitudinal forces caused by expansion and contraction in air distribution header. 3. Slip joints shall allow for expansion and contraction of air distribution header. B. Fixed Joints for PVC Piping: Spigot section solvent welded to one end of Distribution Header, threaded socket section welded to mating distribution header, and O-ring gasket and threaded screw -on retainer ring. 2.10 APPURTENANCES A. Couplings: Van Stone type flanges ASTM A182/A182M stainless steel (same material as pipe) drilled 150 -pound ASME B16.5 Standard. B. Face Rings: Type 304L stainless steel, ASTM A240/A240M, inside diameter (ID) drilled 1/16 -inch larger than pipe outside diameter (OD). C. Gaskets: Neoprene, 45 durometer to 55 durometer; locate at expansion joints and couplings to form an airtight connection at 20 psig minimum. D. Miscellaneous Nuts, Bolts, Washers, and Other Nonwelded Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A240/A240M. Threaded assemblies shall be chemically treated or lubricated prior to assembling to prevent galling. Provide double or self-locking nuts. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 - 14 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF E. Lifting Lugs: Suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. F. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Diffuser Longevity: 1. Longevity of proposed membrane diffusers shall have been demonstrated at no fewer than three full-scale municipal wastewater treatment plants operating continuously for a minimum of 3 years. No fewer than 10,000 diffusers (total) shall have been installed at these plants. At each plant, aeration power shall have increased no more than 10 percent between startup and year three. 2. For each installation, a test report by an independent testing agency shall indicate compliance with the following maximum allowed changes in membrane properties. A minimum of three diffusers shall have been tested at each installation. a. Durometer: Plus or minus 5 percent. b. Weight: Plus or minus 5 percent. c. Permanent Set: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. B. Shop Performance Validation Tests: 1. At least 2 weeks before beginning testing, furnish advance written notice to the Engineer. Testing shall be performed between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., shall begin on a Monday or Tuesday, and shall be performed on consecutive days. Engineer shall have option to witness testing. Engineer's attendance of initial tests will be at Owner's expense. Engineer's attendance at any subsequent tests will be at supplier's expense. 2. Provide all facilities needed for the tests including but not limited to a test tank, a calibrated process air supply system, chemicals and chemical mixing system, dissolved oxygen probes, and laboratory facilities and equipment necessary for dissolved oxygen and total dissolved solids measurements. 3. Perform tests on all aeration systems actually to those that furnished. 4. Oxygen Transfer Performance Testing Procedure: In accordance with ASCE 2. Engineer must approve specific details of test procedure and any deviation from requirements stated below. a. Nonsteady-state reaeration tests shall be performed for the diffuser configuration(s) in the 5 aerobic zone grids in at least one PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM APRIL 6, 2026 444516.02-15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY bioreactor basin. For each grid, perform a minimum of three reaeration test runs at the peak airflow condition, one test at the maximum month airflow condition, and one test at the minimum airflow condition. b. SOTR for each airflow condition shall be average of SOTRs obtained for multiple reaeration tests. c. Test Facilities: Provided by manufacturer, located in the contiguous United States, and subject to approval of Engineer. Test facility shall provide sidewater depths and diffuser submergences specified under Article Service Conditions. Test aeration tank shall be a minimum of 200 square feet. d. Diffuser density for each test shall be equal to or less than diffuser density proposed by manufacturer for aeration system being tested. e. Airflow control orifice used in the test shall match orifice used in proposed equipment. f. For each system being tested, test airflow rate per diffuser shall be less than or equal to airflow rate per diffuser proposed for manufacturer's system. 5. SOTR results shall be normalized to 1,000 mg/L TDS using the exponential equation in ASCE 2, Annex G, Commentary B. 6. Obtain approval of test reports from Engineer prior to fabrication of any equipment. 7. If proposed diffused aeration equipment fails to meet requirements, it shall be modified such that it meets all requirements. Such modifications include any structural or piping modifications necessary to accommodate the modified equipment. All modifications shall be made at no cost to Owner. After modification, diffused aeration equipment shall be retested at no cost to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by manufacturer and in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 3.02 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Atmospheric exposed plastic surfaces shall be field prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 - 16 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each aeration system following supplier's written instructions. B. Support Test: 1. Using a lever arm and calibrated load measuring device, test 10 percent of installed supports for pull out strength. 2. For each test that fails, repair failed support and add another 5 percent to number of supports that fails. C. Flow Distribution and Diffuser/Piping Integrity Test: 1. When system has been installed and visually inspected and support test has been successfully conducted, fill tank with clean water (in a manner that ensures diffusers are not damaged) to a level approximately equal to height of diffusers. 2. Inspect level of diffusers, and if any variations are evident beyond tolerances allowed in specification or by manufacturer, drain tank and make necessary adjustments. 3. When diffuser levels have been verified, fill tank with clean water (in a manner that ensures diffusers are not damaged) to a level approximately 1 foot above diffusers. 4. Ensure isolation valves on each aeration grid are closed. Arrange for process air system to be pressurized. 5. Slowly open isolation grid to allow air into diffuser grids, one at a time. Position isolation valve to obtain a near -constant flow of about 2 scfm per diffuser. 6. Visually check distribution system and diffusers to identify maldistribution and any failures in pipe joints or diffuser holders. 7. Where any failures are noted, drain tank, perform necessary repairs, and repeat test. D. Field Performance Validation Tests: 1. After support tests and flow distribution and diffuser/piping integrity test, arrange for and conduct tests to validate oxygen transfer efficiency in clean water. 2. At least 2 weeks before beginning testing, furnish advance written notice to the Engineer. Testing shall be performed between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., shall begin on a Monday or Tuesday, and shall be performed on consecutive days. Engineer shall witness the testing. 3. Owner will supply potable water for testing and dispose of water after testing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 444516.02-17 MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Provide all support services needed for the tests including but not limited to chemicals, chemical mixing system, and dissolved oxygen probes. Plant process air system and plant laboratory services will be used to support tests; however, provide all independent measurements and tests needed to validate the results obtained from those facilities. 5. Provide necessary temporary works required to complete testing including temporary walls or partitions in bioreactors to segregate tested zones. 6. Perform tests on all aeration systems. 7. Oxygen Transfer Performance Testing Procedure: In accordance with ASCE 2. Engineer must approve specific details of test procedure and any deviation from requirements stated below. a. Nonsteady-state reaeration tests shall be performed for the diffuser configuration(s) in the 3 aerobic zone grids. For each grid, perform a minimum of three reaeration test runs at the peak airflow condition, one test at the maximum month airflow condition, and one test at the minimum airflow condition. b. SOTR for each airflow condition shall be average of SOTRs obtained for multiple reaeration tests. c. For each system being tested, test airflow rate per diffuser shall be less than or equal to the airflow rate per diffuser proposed for manufacturer's system. 8. SOTR results shall be normalized to 1,000 mg/L TDS using the exponential equation in ASCE 2, Annex G, Commentary B. 9. If proposed diffused aeration equipment fails to meet requirements, it shall be modified such that it meets all requirements. Such modifications include any structural or piping modifications necessary to accommodate the modified equipment. All modifications shall be made at no cost to Owner. After modification, diffused aeration equipment shall be retested at no cost to Owner. E. Functional and Mixing Validation Test: 1. Conduct on each aeration system. 2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions after mixed liquor has been introduced. Airflow shall be as measured by plant instrumentation. Calibrate airflow instrumentation as part of testing procedure. 3. Test for a continuous 8 -hour period without malfunction. At least three times through test period, visually inspect and photograph basin surfaces and record airflow rates. Identify any obvious leaks or maldistribution. 4. Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest if necessary. 5. Test as follows: FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444516.02-18 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF a. Pressure Test: Measure air pressure immediately upstream of elbow located at top of each dropleg, and at specified peak airflows and submergences. b. Mixing Test: 1) Perform at specified minimum airflows. 2) Select three vertical lines and two depths in each basin (subject to Engineer approval). 3) Take three Samples at each of two depths along each vertical line using Van Dorn or Kemmerer sampler. 4) Independent testing laboratory approved by Engineer shall perform total suspended solids (TSS) test on each Sample. Mean value of TSS for three Samples at each depth will be used to determine conformance with requirements. 5) Testing and sampling shall conform to procedures established in latest edition of Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. 6) If proposed diffused aeration equipment fails to meet all requirements, it shall be modified such that it meets all requirements. Such modifications include any structural or piping modifications necessary to accommodate the modified equipment. All modifications shall be made at no cost to Owner. After modification, diffused aeration equipment shall be retested at no cost to Owner. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person - days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person -days to train installation staff on correct procedures. Provide certificate that staff understand procedures and are qualified to perform the installation. b. 5 person -days for installation assistance and inspection. c. 5 person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. d. 1 person -days for prestartup classroom or Site training. e. 5 person -days for facility startup. f. 1 person -day for post -startup training of Owner's personnel approximately 6 months after startup. [R: Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner. g. 1 person -days for aeration equipment inspection approximately 1 year after startup. Owner will drain and clean each basin to PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM 444516.02-19 MARYS CREEK WRY permit entry and inspection, adjustment, and repair of the equipment. B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. END OF SECTION FINE BUBBLE AIR DIFFUSER SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 45 16.02 - 20 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 44 46 13.02 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S) CCF01_T01_SC01: Dewatering Centrifuge 1 Cake Conveyor 1. CCF02_T02_SC02: Dewatering Centrifuge 2 Cake Conveyor 2. PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design two (2) horizontal screw conveyor (shaftless) system to collect dewatered sludge cake from the two dewatering centrifuges and transfer the dewatered cake to the dumpster conveyor system. System shall include all associated components, instruments, gates, piping and connecting chutes to the centrifuge discharge chute and to the dumpster conveyor system. Configuration of conveyors to be as shown on the Drawings. B. The horizontal shaftless screw conveyor system transfers dewatered cake to one of two dumpster conveyor system in two truck loadout bay area as shown on the Drawings. Conveyors will operate in forward and reverse motion to distribute dewatered cake along the dumpster from corresponding dewatering centrifuges as shown in the Drawings. C. Performance Requirements: Design conveyor system to meet performance listed in Section 2.03.C. Each conveyor drive unit shall be designed for 125 percent of rated capacity. D. Design conveyors without a center shaft for conveying material with minimal maintenance. Spiral flights shall be designed to be self -guiding and aligning in the trough. Guide bearings shall not be permitted. E. Provide supports for conveyors, spaced as specified herein, to support the conveyors from concrete platform above the conveyor and from the concrete floor as shown on the Drawings. F. Prior to fabricating the screw conveyors, determine the requirements for and furnish brackets, chutes, and fitments required. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 444613.02-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers' Association (ABMA): 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36A/36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. d. A385, Standard Practice for Providing High -Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip). e. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 5. Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (CEMA): 300, Screw Conveyor Dimensional Standards. 6. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2. Factory Acceptance Testing submittals in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Detail drawings and specifications for components of equipment showing all dimensions, parts, construction details, and materials. b. Trough diameter, flight diameter, flight pitch, percentage annular fill, and rotating speed of each screw conveyor. c. Equipment performance specifications. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 13.02 - 2 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF d. Equipment process schematics. e. Fabricated items, equipment structural supports, and associated items. f. Specific details of conveyor connection to gates. g. Design loadings, for load combinations, to be transmitted to foundations or supports. h. Size, length, and spacing of anchor bolts or attachments to the foundations or supports. i. Specific details of attachment of bracing members to concrete or steel structures. j. Instrumentation and control components catalog data and specifications. k. Power and control wiring diagrams including terminals and numbers. 1. Motor submittals in accordance with Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. m. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Design calculations for items covered by these Shop Drawings including but not limited to torsion on all elements in conveyors transmitting torque, conveyor drive components to demonstrate selection criteria, supports, and bearing life. Calculations shall show design stresses in structural members and connections for loading combinations. Design calculations shall be stamped by an Engineer registered in the State of Texas. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 5. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 6. Equipment Startup and Checkout submittals in accordance with Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 7. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation per Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 8. Training submittals in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 44 46 13.02-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty per Section 01 78 36, Warranties, with the City named as beneficiary, in writing, to warrant the supplied equipment to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 2 year, with the warranty period beginning upon successful completion of Demonstration Testing as specified in 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Provide an Extended Municipal Warranty for a period of 12 months beyond the 1 -year warranty specified above. Provide separate line item pricing for the Extended Municipal Warranty. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish special tools, materials, and supplies required to install, commission, and startup equipment. B. Submit list of recommended spare parts as part of the Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manual submittal as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM SUPPLIER EXPERIENCE A. System supplier shall have more than 10 years' experience in the design and supply of municipal wastewater sludge cake conveyance at a minimum of 10 separate North American facilities. Scope of work for the 10 reference facilities shall have included sole responsibility for the design, engineering, and manufacturing for all cake conveyors, other required system equipment. Proven operating experience of systems is defined as a nominal 365 -day per year operation basis (normal planned maintenance time and nominal repair requirements excepted). Installations completed by companies that are no longer in existence cannot be used to meet the system supplier's experience requirements. 2.02 SUPPLEMENTS A. See supplements to this section for additional product information. 2.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. The equipment shall be suitable for exposure to Fort Worth, Texas weather with continuous 95 percent relative humidity conditions, for operation in ambient air temperature from 40 degrees F to 110 degrees F, and for exposure to splash and spill conditions. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 13.02 -4 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. The material to be conveyed, stored, and discharged shall be dewatered cake of waste activated and primary sludges resulting from physical and biological treatment of municipal wastewater, with the following characteristics: 1. Dewatered Cake Total Dry Solids Concentration: 14 percent to 25 percent. 2. Temperature: 40 degrees F to 100 degrees F. 3. pH: 6 to 8. 4. Bulk Density: 55 pounds to 70 pounds per cubic foot. C. Hours of Operation: 24 hours per day. D. Environment: Indoors. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Screw Speed: Maximum of 20 rpm. B. Capacity: 1. The greater of the following: a. Volumetric capacity as specified below. b. Mass capacity based on volumetric capacity specified below conveying material with the maximum material density specified above. C. Each conveyor drive unit shall be designed for 125 percent of rated capacity. Design Maximum Nominal Nominal Performance Performance Incline, Horse - Conveyors Capacity, wet Capacity, wet Screw Conveyor degrees power Remarks lb/hr lb/hr Diameter, in Length2, ft CCF01_T01_S CO' 15,149 18,584 10-12 ±24 () 3-5 Reversible Cake Conve or l' CCF01_T02_S CO2 15,149 18,584 10-12 i24 0 3-5 Reversible Cake Conveyor 21 1. Cake Conveyor 1 and Cake Conveyor 2 shall be installed on the dedicated trough. Refer to Mechanical Drawings. 2.Confirm dimensions as shown on the Mechanical Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 44 46 13.02-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.05 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. JMS. 2. JDV. 3. Spirac. 4. Schwing Bioset. 5. No approved equal. 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Materials: 1. Steel Plate and Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Chutes, Troughs, End Plates, and Covers: ASTM A167, AISI 304 stainless steel. 3. Supports: AISI 304 stainless steel, minimum 1/4 -inch thick, structural shape. 4. Spiral Flights: Cold -formed spring steel, minimum hardness 200 Brinell with ability to transmit 32,000 inch -pounds of input torque. 5. Wear Liner: UHMW polyethylene, 4 -foot long sections 1. 6. Drive Shaft: 17-4 PH stainless steel of uniform diameter. 7. Fasteners for Conveyor Supports: Galvanized, Type 316 stainless steel. 8. Fasteners in Contact with Sludge: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel. B. Chute(s): 1. Provide all drop chutes required for connections between conveyors, and before and after slide gates as shown on the Drawings. Provide opening in chutes for plugged chute sensors. 2. Provide drop chutes from dewatering centrifuges as shown on the Drawings. 3. Dewatering Centrifuge drop chutes shall align with the centrifuge discharge flexible connector. 4. Minimum 1/4 inch thick ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Openings and connections shall be flanged, gasketed, and bolted. Flanges shall be 1/4 -inch by 2 -3/4 -inch. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 13.02 - 6 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Drop chutes longer than 5 feet between flanges shall be provided in multiple sections, with each section not to exceed 4 feet in length. Provide flanged, gasketed, and bolted connections. Each section shall include at least four handles to facilitate installation and removal. Handles shall be 1/2 -inch diameter O -rod, Type 304 stainless steel, formed and welded to the sides of the chute. 7. Provide inspection doors in the cake discharge chutes, 12 -inch square minimum, for visual inspection of the inside of the chutes. The inspection door shall be hinged on one side with latches on the opposite side, and shall be constructed of the same material as the chute. 8. Provide integral dewatered cake sample provisions as part of the discharge chutes. Sample connection shall be through minimum 2 -inch Type 316 stainless steel pipe welded to the discharge chute located to enable representative sampling. Dewatered cake sample connection shall have a hinged cap and plastic pipe insertion device. 9. Rigidly support following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Trough: 1. Fabricated from 1/4 inch, ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Four -inch drain pipe at each end of the cake conveyor trough. 3. Flange fittings for inlet and discharge chutes. 4. Blanked -off steel plate for emergency conveyor discharge connections. See Drawings for locations. 5. Troughs shall conform to the dimensional standards of CEMA 300 and enclosure Classification IIIE. 6. Interior troughs shall be flange joined when any section exceeds 12 feet in length. Exterior troughs shall be flange joined when any section exceeds 20 feet in length. 7. End plates shall be 3/8 -inch thick, Type 304 stainless steel continuous plate bolted across the ends of the trough. 8. Conveyor troughs shall be furnished with saddle -type supports shaped to the profile of the screw conveyor trough and extending from a common fixed distance to the centerline of the screw. Distance between supports shall not exceed 12 feet on center. D. Inlets: Provide detachable type, flanged inlets. Inlets shall be fabricated of minimum 1/4 -inch thick, Type 304 stainless steel plate and angles. Inlets shall be the same width as the trough. E. Discharges: Provide flanged and gasketed discharge points. Discharge points shall be fabricated of minimum 1/4 -inch thick, Type 304 stainless steel plate and angles. Discharges shall be the same width as the trough, with length the greater of the trough width or the trough width of the downstream receiving conveyor. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL21,2026 444613.02-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY F. Spiral Flighting: Design spiral flights with the stability to prevent distortion and jumping in the trough. 1. At its torsional rating, the stress in the spiral flighting shall not exceed 30 percent of the Fy value in the extreme fiber of the flight material. 2. Brake Horsepower: Produce less torque than the spiral flighting is rated for. 3. At 250 percent torque of the motor nameplate horsepower rating, the drive train shall not produce more torque than 250 percent of the spiral fighting's torsional rating. G. Replaceable Wear Liner: 1. Conveyor troughs shall be lined with ultra -high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMW-PE) based material, which has been specifically modified for the reduced friction and wear requirements of the application. The wear liner for a shaftless conveyor system is of primary importance to functionality and maintainability. Unmodified UHMW or material not specifically designed for the application shall not be considered. 2. Each section of liner shall be a single piece, formed and bonded with two layers of the same material, each of a different color, to provide a visible indication when the liner is nearing the end of its useful life. 3. Each layer shall have been modified to have the same properties for reduced friction and wear. Liners which bond a second layer of unmodified UHMW can be readily dislodged after the primary layer is worn through and shall not be acceptable. 4. The liner shall be held in place with stainless steel cleats, permanently welded to the inside of the trough. No fasteners or penetrations through the trough wall shall be allowed. 5. Liner thickness shall be 1/2 inch for spiral up to 14 -inch diameter, and 5/8 inch for larger spirals. On all sizes, the wear indicating color shall be at least 1/8 -inch thick, in order to provide the strength to be retained in the trough while showing wear. 6. Replacement liner shall be readily available and stocked in the United States by the shaftless spiral conveyor equipment manufacturer. H. Bearings: 1. ABMA 11, high -capacity roller bearings located in the reducing drive housing with an L- 10 life rating of 100,000 hours. 2. Designed to support thrust loads and provide angular alignment with the trough. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 13.02 - 8 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. When recommended by the manufacturer, furnish tail and end bearings. If deflection of the spiral flights in the vertical direction exceeds 1 inch, furnish end bearings. 4. End Bearings: Double pillow block or flange and pillow block type mounted outside the trough; completely serviceable from outside the conveyor; no intermediate bearings. I. Seals: Compression packing gland between the drive shaft and sleeve. Cover: 1. Provide quick release cover over trough for portions not covered by a filling chute to contain odors, to act as a protective guard, and prevent splashes. 2. Minimum 12 -gauge, ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel in sections no longer than 6 feet. 3. Gaskets between Trough and Cover: Neoprene, 50 Durometer, full -face gaskets shall be provided. Access covers shall be gasketed with the same materials as the trough covers. 4. Conform to Screw Conveyor Standards CEMA 300. 5. Provide inspection doors in the trough covers, 12 -inch square minimum, for visual inspection of the inside area of the conveyors. Each inspection door shall be hinged on one side with latches on the opposite side, provided with bolt -in expanded metal safety screen, and shall be constructed of the same material as the cover. Provide inspection doors in the following locations: a. Over discharge point. b. Adjacent to each inlet point. 6. Provide 1 -inch diameter flanged Type 304 stainless steel pipe nozzle welded to conveyor cover at points shown on the Drawings, to receive pipe flushing appurtenances (provided by others). 7. Provide 4 -inch diameter flanged Type 304 stainless steel pipe nozzle welded to conveyor cover, located as shown on the Drawings, for connection to foul air piping. K. Gear Reducing Drive: 1. Design for full thrust loads from spiral flights. 2. Bearings: Operating life of L-10 100,000 hours. 3. Air-cooled, no auxiliary cooling allowed. 4. Close coupled with drive motor. 5. Applied Torque: Adequate to start the screw conveyor when fully loaded. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 44 46 13.02-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Each screw drive shall consist of an in -line or right-angle geared speed reducer with integral motor and thrust bearing. The drive shall be separated from the conveyed material by a trough end seal. Drives shall be suitable for AGMA Class II operation with full rated torque and thrust capacity in forward and reverse rotation. 7. Reducer shall be parallel or concentric shaft type. Reducer selection shall be based on continuous operation with minimum 1.9 mechanical and 1.0 thermal service factors as applied to the motor nameplate horsepower. Thermal horsepower rating strength to be based on maximum ambient temperature specified herein. Gearing strength rating to catalog rating ratio shall be 1.75 minimum and based on all applicable AGMA standards. Bearings shall be oil lubricated antifriction type. Integral thrust bearing shall be tapered roller type capable of resisting the thrust developed by the fully loaded screw. Minimum L-10 bearing life of 100,000 hours shall be based on readily accepted bearing manufacturers rating practices. In the case of tapered roller bearings, they shall be selected per the Timken rating method. Reducer shall be capable of reversing operation where identified hereinbefore. 8. Reducer features shall include shielded grease purge seal cage to protect dual lip oil seals from the environment and accidental damage, breather assembly to prevent pressure build-up inside the unit, removable drive shaft assembly without removing unit from screw trough end, all steel fabricated drive mount which shall bolt directly to the screw drive reducer. Reduce housing shall be 30,000 psi cast iron. 9. Screw Drive Manufacturers: a. Flender Corporation. b. Eurodrive. c. Nord. L. Conveyor Supports: 1. Supports for the conveyor system, including slide gates, chutes, and appurtenance shall be designed and provided by the system supplier. Supports shall meet all specified design requirements and shall be coordinated for proper connection to the building structure and platforms. 2. No attempt has been made to show all required support locations. The absence of defined support locations or support details on any Drawings shall not relieve the system supplier and installing Contractor of the responsibility of providing all required conveyor system supports throughout the facility. 3. Minimum 1/4 inch rectangular ASTM A167 AISI 304 stainless steel shapes and plates. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444613.02-10 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Ratio of unbraced length to least radius of gyration shall not exceed 240 for tensile members and 120 for compression members. 5. Designed to not exceed one-third of AISC allowable stresses when loaded to twice the running torque of the motor. 6. Support Loads: Based on completely filled trough, weight of the conveyor, and dynamic loading when operating. 7. Coordinate support locations with facility structure and platforms. Supports shall not restrict access to other process systems. M. Motion Detector (Provided by Conveyor Manufacturer): 1. Detect under speed or zero speed. 2. Noncontacting motion sensing unit. 3. Adjustable time delay for startup. 4. Operate on 120V ac, 60 -Hz. 5. DPDT contacts rated 10 amps at 120V ac. 6. Remote mounted NEMA 250, Type 4X, electronics unit. Provide sensor cable to connect to electronics unit. Mount motor detector sensor on conveyor and adjust position as required for proper operation. 7. Manufacturer and Product: Siemens; Milltronics MFA-4P Switch with MSP series sensor. N. Plugged Chute Sensor: 1. Type: Capacitance Probe Type. 2. Function: Provide contact closure output when a conveyor system chute becomes clogged. 3. Performance Specifications: a. Power Requirements: 115V ac 15 percent, 60 Hz. b. Sensitivity: Adjustable to less than 1 picofarad. c. Output Contacts: DPDT rated 10 amps at 250V ac minimum. d. Calibration: Field Adjustable Potentiometers. e. Time Delay Output: Adjustable. f. Enclosure: NEMA 4X rated cast aluminum. g. Mounting: Flush mount, non-invasive. Mount to drop chute with stainless steel screws. Provide a full faced rubber gasket to seal between instrument mount and chute. h. Conduit Connection: 3/4 inch NPT. i. Local Status: LED indicating power failure and sensor status. 4. Diaphragm Material: Neoprene. 5. Manufacturer and Product: a. Binmaster, Inc./Capacitance Pro Flushmount. b. "Or -equal." PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 444613.02-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF O. Emergency Stop: 1. Provide pull cable emergency stops running the full length of all conveyors on both sides of conveyor. 2. Emergency stop shall disrupt power to the drive, and provide dry contact for alarming at the plant control system. 3. Cables shall be orange -colored, plastic -covered steel aircraft cable. 4. Provide all cable end fittings and intermediate cable support eyes. Maximum spacing for support eyes is 10 feet. 5. Switches shall require manual reset after actuation, and shall provide visual indication of operation. 6. Provide switches as required to limit the required actuating force to comply with OSHA guidelines, with the following minimum number of switches: a. Cake Conveyor 1: Two per conveyor section, one on each side. b. Cake Conveyor 2: Two per conveyor section, one on each side. P. Flexible Connectors: 1. Provide the following flexible connectors: Between each Cake Conveyor discharge gate and the associated drop chute to the downstream truck. 2. Flexible connector shall be flanged and fabricated from neoprene, 50-Durometer, with Type 304 stainless steel bolts and retainer plates at each end. 3. Final lengths to be coordinated with Engineer during Shop Drawing submission. Q. Electrically Actuated Slide Gates: 1. Slide gates shall be provided with weatherproof, electric motor operated, enclosed, geared type operators mounted on the slide gate frame. Operators shall be mounted for direct access to operator station and manual OPEN/CLOSE wheel. 2. Slide gate actuators shall be sized and installed by the slide gate manufacturer. 3. Slide gate actuators shall be provided with a fixed lift nut and rotating stem designed so the stem is nonrising and is keyed to the motor operator output shaft. Threads on rotating stem and lift nut shall be self-locking. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444613.02-12 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Operator components shall withstand a minimum of 250 percent of the design torque or thrust at extreme operator positions without damage. 5. Slide gate operators shall meet the requirements of Section 40 27 02, Process Valves and Operators. 6. Gears: Heat treated alloy steel, supported throughout by antifriction ball or roller bearings and grease lubricated. 7. Actuation Time: Maximum of 5 seconds per foot. 8. Automatic double-acting geared limit switches and double-acting torque switches: a. Gear directly to the operating gear train and shall be "in step" at all times, whether in motor or manual operation. b. Wire geared limit switches internally to stop the motor at the fully OPEN and fully CLOSED positions. c. Wire torque switches internally so that, in the event of a mechanical overload in either direction, the motor will be stopped. 9. Equip with side -mounted handwheel for manual operation. a. Include an automatic clutch to positively disengage the handwheel at any time the drive motor control is energized. b. Design handwheel operator so that failure of the motorized gearing will not prevent hand operation of the gate. 10. Drive Unit: a. Electric motor specifically designed for valve/gate actuator service in a totally enclosed nonventilated weather-proof enclosure. Motor shall be rated for operation from a 480 -volt, three-phase, 60 -Hz power supply. b. Furnish motor enclosure with drainage and breathing holes. c. Self-locking, with approximately 12 inches per minute gate travel speed, and a rating running torque equal to 20 percent of the motor starting torque at a rated running time of 5 minutes, without exceeding the allowable NEMA temperature rise for the insulation class used. 11. Electrical Enclosure: a. NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel weatherproof, constructed as an integral part of the operator, which houses the following: 1) 480 -volt power disconnect switch, lockable in the open position. 2) Weatherproof LOCAL/REMOTE switch. 3) OPEN/STOP/CLOSE pushbuttons. 4) Weatherproof OPEN/CLOSE indicating lights. 5) Reversing controller. 6) 480/120 -volt control power transformer. 7) Limit and torque switches. 8) Numbered terminal blocks to land external wiring. 9) Space heaters in control compartment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 444613.02-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 12. Controls: a. Local OPEN/STOP/CLOSE pushbuttons. b. Local Indication and Control: 1) Integral gate POSITION indication, 0 percent to 100 percent OPENED. 2) Integral OPENED and CLOSED indication lights. 3) Integral LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE (L -O -R). 4) Integral OPEN maintained switch which causes the gate to stroke full OPENED, even if OPEN switch is released, while L -O -R switch is in LOCAL. 5) Integral CLOSE maintained switch which causes gate to stroke full CLOSED, even if CLOSED switch is released, while L -O -R switch is in LOCAL. c. Remote Indication and Control: 1) Relay contact that closes when gate is capable of being controlled remotely (L -O -R switch in REMOTE) for connection to and monitoring by plant control system. 2) Limit switch that closes when gate is fully OPENED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system. 3) Limit switch that closes when gate is fully CLOSED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system. 13. External Interfaces: a. Dry contacts rated for 5 amps, 120V ac for each of the following: 1) End position limit switch OPEN. 2) End position limit switch CLOSED. 3) Selector switch in REMOTE position. 14. See Drawings for preferred operator orientation. 15. Manufacturer and Product: Coordinate with Engineer and match the manufacturer and product being supplied for Electric Motor Actuators in Section 40 27 02, Process Valves and Operators. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2 inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications or Section 05 05 19, Post -Installed Anchors. B. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. C. Furnish lubricants required for startup, initial operation, and testing of the equipment until final acceptance by the City. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 13.02 - 14 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Acceptance Testing: Conduct Factory Acceptance Testing in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using templates furnished by conveyor manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, or Section 05 05 19, Post -Installed Anchors. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Testing: 1. Prior to system startup, all equipment shall be inspected and certified for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfactory operation by means of a functional test conducted by the system supplier, assisted by the Contractor and the City, and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Functional testing shall be conducted after the installation of the cake loadout system and all appurtenances. 3. Proposed test procedures shall be developed by the system supplier and submitted to the Engineer for review, comment and approval. Testing shall not begin until the test procedures have been approved by the Engineer. 4. Complete and sign Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Complete successful functional testing prior to performance testing. 6. Submit completed Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. B. Performance Testing: 1. Conduct on: a. Each conveyor as part of facility startup prior to successful completion of the Demonstration Testing Period. b. Each cake transfer conveyor system with two centrifuges in operation for a period of 4 hours. 2. Test for continuous 4 -hour period. Proposed test procedures shall be developed by the system supplier and submitted to the Engineer for review, comment, and approval. Testing shall not begin until the test procedures have been approved by the Engineer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 444613.02-15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3. Operate at performance capacity or at a cubic feet per hour approved by Engineer, conveying the specified media. 4. Record flow in terms of cubic feet per hour. 5. Record motor amp draw at approximately 1/2 -hour intervals and as needed to record values operated over the specified range of flows. C. During system operation, examination for leakage shall be made at all seams, joints, and connections. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative: The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days and trips provided in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Work Description No. of Person Days No. of Trips Installation Assistance 2 1 and Inspection Functional and 2 1 Performance Testing Pre -startup and 1 1 Performance Testing Facility Startup 2 1 Post -startup Training 1 1 of Owner's Personnel 2. This period shall consist of a minimum of 8 -hour days and travel to and from the project site shall not be included. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and start-up assistance with Owner's personnel. 3. Services Provided: a. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. b. Furnish startup services. c. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. 4. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's services necessary to provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. Training: Provide training to operations and maintenance personnel per Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444613.02-16 APRIL 21, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 FIELD TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. Field Testing and Facility Startup shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Facility startup specifies the order and prerequisites for the following tests of the equipment: 1. Field functional testing. 2. ORT 1 testing. 3. ORT 2 testing. 4. Performance testing. 5. Demonstration testing. C. All field testing and facility startup shall be performed using a qualified representative provided by the manufacturer as specified in Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup; Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services, and as elaborated upon in this section. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification: Cake Conveyor Induction Motor Data Sheet. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 444613.02-17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF CAKE CONVEYOR INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equipment Name: Cake Solids Screw Conveyor Equipment Tag Number(s): CCF01-T01-SC01 and CCF02-T02-SC02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 3-5 Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percent Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percent Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ❑ 1.0 ® 1.15 Frequency: 60 Enclosure Type: TEFC Synchronous Speed: 1800 rpm ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: Winding: ❑ One El Two ❑ Space Heater: Mounting Type: ® Horizontal ❑ Vertical ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb.): Up Down ❑ Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Operating Speed Range: to % of Rated Speed ❑ Variable Torque ❑ Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM APRIL 21, 2026 44 46 13.02 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 44 46 26.03 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the Work necessary to detail, manufacture, deliver to the Job Site, and to startup and test, two (2) complete and ready for operation rotary drum thickeners (RDTs) including solids discharge hopper, flocculation tank, flocculation tank mixer, and all associated equipment, appurtenances, controls, and services as specified herein. B. RDT Manufacturer Responsibility: 1. The Work requires that the rotary drum thickener be provided with all accessories and appurtenances as described under this section and specifically called out for the manufacturer to provide as required. Additional accessories (not provided by the manufacturer) may be called out in this Specification for information purposes. 2. The manufacturer shall furnish components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance, features and functions. C. The intent of these Specifications is to indicate the level of quality required for this equipment and the specific equipment to be provided by the equipment manufacturer. Where the manufacturer offers their standard design they shall indicate in writing where their equipment differs from this Specification, and where technical exceptions are taken. D. All like items of equipment shall be the end product of one equipment manufacturer, who shall assume complete responsibility for conformance with these Specifications. 1.02 EQUIPMENT NUMBERS A. Rotary Drum Thickeners: RDTO1_TOl DT01, RDT02_T02_DT02. B. Flocculation Tanks: RDTO1 T01 FTNKO1, RDT02 T02 FTNK02. C. Flocculation Tank Mixers: RDTO1_TO1 MX01, RDT02_T02 MX02. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. RDT Washwater Booster Pumps: RDT01-T01-BP01, RDT02-T02-BP02. E. Control Panels: RDT01 T01 LCP01, RDT02 T02 LCP02. F. Adjustable Frequency Drives (AFDs): VFD RDT01_T01_DT01, VFD RDT T02 DT02, VFD RDTO1 T01 MX01, VFD RDT T02 MX02. 1.03 GENERAL A. Unit Responsibility: 1. Minimum responsibilities of experienced RDT manufacturer named in qualification submittal include: a. Supplying all equipment specified herein, complete with all accessories and appurtenances including, but not necessarily limited to, electric motors, adjustable speed drives, control panels, adjustable frequency drive (AFD) panels, shafting, safety guards, speed reducers, and spare parts. b. Design, assembly, delivery, installation supervision, startup, and testing of all equipment specified herein. c. Furnish all components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance, features, and functions. B. AC Induction Motors: As specified in Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. C. Adjustable Frequency Drives: As specified in Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. Include documentation of AFD compatibility with the motor and coordination of AFD sizing requirements with equipment submittals. D. Instrumentation, Control, and Electrical Components: As specified in Section 40 61 00, Package Control Systems General Provisions. E. The control functions contained and described herein provide minimum performance requirements. Each and every control function, connection, communications, or equipment to achieve the requirements may not be described. RDT manufacturer is responsible for complete system design and supply of required components and controls. F. Control panels must meet the requirements of Section 26 29 86, Mechanical Equipment Control Panels. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 2 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 REFERENCES A. The design, manufacture, and installation of this equipment shall meet or exceed the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following codes and standards authorities. 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. MO 11, AISC manual of Steel Construction — Allowable Stress Design, 9th Edition. 3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). a. B31.1, Power Piping. b. B31.3, Process Piping. c. B30.2, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist). 5. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature of High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A 194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy -Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. A320, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 8. National Electrical Code (NEC). 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 10. Nationally Recognized Testing laboratories (NRTL). 11. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 12. UL. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Polymer Dosage: Equivalent dosage of active polymer in pounds per dry ton of solids treated (lb/DT) applied. B. Solids Capture: 1. Percent of feed solids that remain in thickened end product on a weight basis where: % Capture: F x F -C T -C x 100 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS 444626.03-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF where: T = Thickened Sludge TSS (mg/L) F = Feed TSS (mg/L), excluding any dilution from polymer solution flow C = Filtrate TSS (mg/L), excluding any dilution from polymer solution and wash water flows 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. See Section 40 61 00, Package Control Systems General Provisions, for additional submittal requirements. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings and documentation of modifications to manufacturer's standard design to meet configuration, performance, features, functions, and materials of construction specified herein and shown on Drawings. b. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction for the RDT, drive motor, washing system, AFDs, control panel, AFD panel, power supply, lubrication system, and flexible connectors. Provide listing of materials of construction to match the listing in Article Materials. c. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. d. General arrangement drawings, approximate weights (including individual weights of components for handling), dimensions, sampling and instrument port locations, and space clearance requirements for proposed equipment. e. Details of flocculation tank support and structural design and anchorage calculations. f. Equipment Dimensions: Recommended length and width for housing equipment including minimum maintenance access requirements for system components specified herein. Provide dimensions for proposed skid -mounted rotary drum thickener units. g. Height Requirements: Recommended height, including allowance for appropriate lifting mechanism for removal of individual parts of the units. Entire units are not anticipated to be lifted as intact units. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 -4 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF h. Details of sludge/polymer mixer assemblies (polymer injection ring and in -line mixer). i. Requirements for storing equipment and accessories. j. Performance curve describing variation in thickened dry solids content in relation to variations in sludge feed characteristics and loading rate. k. Bill of materials listing major system components, special tools, and spare parts. 1. Detailed Drawings: 1) Mechanical drawings showing equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include: a) Dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of equipment associated therewith. b) Foundation drawings showing anchor bolt layouts and locations. c) Recommended anchor bolt sizes. d) Weights of individual pieces of equipment and live loads (dynamic loads) created by total weight of each RDT and ancillary equipment. e) Sizes and locations of space for incoming and outgoing conduits. f) Minimum clearance distances around equipment required to access equipment for service/repair/ removal and high hook elevation necessary for hoisting equipment. m. Calculated ABMA L- 10 bearing life and type of lubrication recommended for all equipment. n. Design data for the following: 1) Drive motor sizing. 2) Adjustable frequency drive sizing. 3) Main bearings. o. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, and drain for each component. p. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed. q. Control and AFD Panel interconnection diagrams showing wiring interconnections between all internal RDT system components and between RDT system components and remote components provided by others. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS 444626.03-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF S. t. U. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed. Sequential description of operation under various modes of control, describing complete control circuit and equipment operation and logic, including interlocks and permissives. Description of all automatic shutdown features and interfaces with plant instrumentation and control systems, in both word and schematic form. Use Standard Instrument Society of America symbols on all schematics. Shop and Field Painting Systems Proposed: Include manufacturer's descriptive technical catalog literature and specifications. Installation Instructions: 1) Furnish manufacturer's printed instruction for assembly, complete installation, connection, and adjustment of all equipment. 2) Format and outline requirements of a RDT Test Report for preparation by Contractor. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Provide Informational Submittals in accordance with Section 40 61 00, Package Control Systems General Provisions. 2. Factory Quality Control Submittals: a. Obtain Engineer's review and approval of the information listed below prior to equipment shipment. b. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. c. Factory test results, reports, and certifications. d. Functional Test Reports and Certificates. 1) Component Test Reports and Certificates. 2) For each AC motor, provide a certified copy of a test report for an identical motor tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.53a and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. The test report shall show full -load efficiency and power factor meeting or exceeding the specified minimum guaranteed values. Motors not as specified will be rejected. e. Test results of control panels and AFD panels for proper operation, construction, electrical connection, and function. f. Shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions, including weight and size of skids. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 6 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF g. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. h. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. i. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period of 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. j. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manual with Maintenance Summary Form in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Equipment Testing Procedure Submittals: a. Submit test procedures for the following tests for review, comment, and approval at least 30 days in advance of notice to conduct testing: 1) Functional Testing. 2) Preperformance Testing. 3) Performance Testing. 5. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Obtain Engineer's review and approval of the information listed below prior to Project completion. Submit test reports within 20 days after completing field testing. b. Include the following field test results, reports, and certifications: 1) Functional Test Report and Certificates. 2) Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3) Pre -Performance Test Report and Certificates. 4) Performance Test Reports, Certificates, and Logs. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish manufacturers recommended spare parts list, pricing, and lead time availability. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Design and manufacture equipment with due regard for safety of operation, accessibility, and durability of parts, and in compliance with all applicable Occupational Health and Safety Act, federal, state, and local safety regulations. 1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. RDT System Manufacturer/Supplier: Provide equipment free on board to the Project Site as noted in the Contract Documents. C. Contractor: 1. Responsible for receiving, unloading, and properly storing equipment in accordance with manufacturer/supplier's instructions. Equipment will not be accepted until after it is installed, tested, placed into operation, and found to comply with all specified requirements. 2. Responsible for supporting the solids discharge hopper. Solids discharge hopper shall be supported from the floor below the RDT unit, which is above the Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWS) pump, without support from the RDT unit. D. Manufacturer's Representative: Responsible for inspection of all deliveries before unloading. Receiving report shall be prepared noting any and all evidence of damage in transit. Equipment that is damaged or does not meet requirements of approved Shop Drawings shall be returned immediately for replacement. E. Label each skid, box, or package to show its net weight in addition to its content. F. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not required to be painted such as flange faces to prevent rust, corrosion, and damage. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer/Supplier shall guarantee that the equipment, materials, and performance shall be as specified herein and will be free of defects as a result of faulty design, materials, or workmanship for a period not less than 2 years from date of acceptance of equipment at the Job Site. Any conditions resulting in equipment failure or performance failure shall be considered a type of defect. B. Any type of equipment failure or defect discovered during the warranty period or testing, regardless of its magnitude, shall be addressed and corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner by manufacturer, at no cost to the Owner. Owner shall not be responsible for any cost resulting from equipment failure during the warranty period. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 8 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Parkson Corporation. 2. Andritz Separation Technologies. 2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. The rotary drum thickener shall be designed to continuously receive, flocculate, and thicken the feed sludge specified herein, and neatly discharge the thickened sludge through an enclosed chute to the sludge hopper located below the unit. The thickened sludge shall be pumped from the sludge hopper to the sludge holding tanks. The thickening process shall produce a finished sludge product based on the following design requirements in Section B. B. Material Handled: See table below for feed stream characteristics. Parameter Value Nominal Feed Composition, Total 100% Waste Activated Sludge (may Dry Solids Weight Basis also include secondary biological foam, scum, surface WAS, return activated sludge - RAS) Sludge Feed Concentration, % Total 0.3% to 1.0% Dry Solids Exclusive of Polymer Operating Cycle 24 hours per day, 7 days per week pH 5.5 to 8.0 C. Feed sludge will be conditioned with a polymer as specified herein. Polymer dosage rate in pounds of active polymer per dry ton of solids is a required performance parameter that will be tested. D. Provide equipment suitable for installation indoors, for exposure to continuous 100 percent relative humidity conditions, for operation in ambient air temperature from 40 degrees F to 110 degrees F, and for exposure to biological sludge, splash, spill, and washdown conditions. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Furnish units meeting performance and design requirements as specified below. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Performance Requirements: 1. Continuously or intermittently receive, thicken the material described under Service Conditions, and discharge to the TWS Pumps (RDT01-T01-PMP-0 1 and RDT02-T02-PMP-02) up to 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. 2. Each RDT shall conform to or exceed the following performance parameters: Parameters Normal Maximum Operation Capacity Hydraulic Capacity (gpm) 300 400 Feed Solids Concentration (percent dry solids) 0.3-1.0 0.3-1.0 Minimum Total Solids Capture (percent) 95% 9% Note 1 Minimum Thickened Sludge 4.0 4 Note 1 Concentration (percent dry solids) Maximum Polymer Consumption (active 10-15 Note I pounds per dry ton) Note 1- Performance parameters at maximum capacity are to be recorded for observation only. C. RDT system shall consist of a polymer injection ring, flocculation tank, flocculation tank mixer, rotary drum with filtration media, support frame, spray deflection covering, spray wash header, washwater booster pumps, filtrate connection to plant drain line, solids discharge hopper, and connection to TWS Pump. D. Provide skid -mounted system components, preassembled, and prepiped to the maximum extent practical. Installation constraints may require units to be disassembled at Site and reassembled in place. Provide manufacturer's representative to inspect reassembled equipment where disassembly is required. E. Design shown on Drawings is based on the manufacturer named as shown in Article Manufacturers, Paragraph 2.01.A.1. Any changes to the arrangement indicated on Drawings must be approved by Engineer, and Contractor shall be responsible for engineering costs for redesign by Engineer, if necessary. The cost of constructing any changes different from the configuration shown on Drawings to accommodate the alternate equipment manufacturer shall be borne by the Contractor. 0 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 10 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 EQUIPMENT AND/OR MATERIALS A. Fabricate all elements of the rotary drum thickener in contact with process liquids or solids from Type 316 stainless steel, except for welded components, including flocculation development tank, input connection, discharge assembly, structural frame and supports, driven impeller, rotary element composed of input assembly, single or multiple stages of rotary element, discharge assembly, filtration media covering various stages and all fasteners, shower deflection covering, washing header, and all fasteners as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall determine the type, opening or mesh size, and material of construction of the drum filter to meet minimum performance requirements. C. Sludge Supply System: 1. RDT Manufacturer Responsibility: Coordinate with influent valves, flow meters, polymer feed injection and mixing systems, and other components that will provide automated sludge supply system to the rotary drum thickeners. D. Flocculation Development System: 1. Flocculation Tank and Mixer: a. The flocculation tank shall be equipped with a 6 -inch flanged inlet and outlet. Where the size or configuration of the inlet flange differ from what is shown on Drawings, these changes shall be called out as deviations and will be reviewed by Engineer. b. Tank shall be Type 304L stainless steel, minimum 10 -gauge thick. c. Associated drain piping and control valves will be provided by others. d. The discharge assembly shall deliver conditioned sludge to the receiving surface of the rotary element. e. The flocculation tank shall include a cover which allows access to the flocculation tank mixer and a hatch for observing the interior of the tank. f. Size flocculation tank for a minimum hydraulic retention time of 30 seconds at the maximum Hydraulic Capacity flow rate if dosing polymer solution just upstream of the flocculation tank. g. All Metallic Components of Flocculation Tank Mixer: Type 316 stainless steel. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2. Sludge Conditioning Assembly: a. Provide a sludge conditioning assembly, including an inline manually adjustable mixer, polymer injection ring, and associated manifold, for installation on the WAS feed pipeline to each rotary drum thickener (RDT). b. The polymer injection rings shall consist of a four -port UHMW polyethylene body, flow splitting manifold with tubing, and stainless steel fittings between injection ring and manifold. 1) Each polymer injection ring shall inject polymer at a minimum of four ports located 90 degrees apart around circumference of the ring. 2) The inside diameter of the ring shall not be less than inside diameter of sludge feed piping. 3) Each polymer injection port shall be a 3/8 -inch NPT threaded connection connected with 1/2 -inch ID transparent tubes to each of the four ports located on flow splitting manifold. 4) Polymer piping to be provided with a union to facilitate coupling to each injection port (see Drawings). E. Flocculation Tank Mixer: 1. Provide tank complete with a mixer and mixer mounting bracket and hardware. Provide AFD-driven mixer gear motor. Mixer speed shall be adjusted in the RDT control panel. 2. The driven impeller of the flocculation tank mixer shall be composed of a shaft and a necessary blade attached to the shaft with a nylon steady bearing, or other configuration approved by Engineer. 3. The flocculation tank mixer motor shall conform to the requirements shown in the attached Motor Data Sheet "Rotary Drum Thickener Flocculation Mixers 1 and 2," at the end of this section. 4. Flocculation Tank Mixer Manufacturer: a. Philadelphia. b. Chemineer. c. Or approved equal. 5. Flocculation Tank Mixers: a. General: 1) Provide mixers as shown, as scheduled and as specified herein. 2) Mixers shall be mounted as shown on the Drawings and shall have no submerged bearings, seals or other rubbing parts below the mounting point. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 12 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3) All wetted parts, including impellers, shaft, shaft coupling and all appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4) Materials shall be the manufacturer's standard for the intended service unless otherwise specified herein. The gear drive and wetted parts shall be designed by and manufactured by the flocculation tank mixer manufacturer; commercially available gear drives (Nord, or equal) will be accepted. 6. Mixer impellers shall be designed by the mixer manufacturer. 7. Mixing velocity gradient shall be determined by the mixer manufacturer. 8. Service Factor: 2.0, minimum. 9. Critical Speed: Maximum critical speed shall be less than 75 percent of the first critical speed. 10. Design Condition: a. Flocculation Tanks: 1) Circular shaped tanks as shown on the Drawings. 2) One mixer shall be provided in each flocculation tank. 3) The mixers shall provide agitation such as to promote uniform sludge and polymer solution mixing without shearing. 11. Required Features of the Mixer Components: a. Impellers: 1) Impeller Type: High efficiency radial turbine, 2 per mixer shaft. 2) Diameters: Impeller diameters and location along shaft shall be per approved Shop Drawings. 3) Maximum speed (flocculation tank mixer gearmotor): 1750 RPM 4) Minimum speed: 5 RPM. 5) Stabilizing elements shall be provided as necessary. 6) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, including all impeller/shaft threaded components and hardware. 7) Impeller Blades shall be bolted to a hub, and the hub shall be fixed to the shaft with a hook key and set screw for maximum security. An extended keyway shall be provided which will allow vertical adjustment of the impeller up and down each key 12 inches in 3 inch increments. 8) Maximum combined stress in any impeller component shall not exceed 30 percent of the material's yield stress under maximum operating loads. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY b. Shaft: 1) Shaft shall be such that the maximum combined stress shall not exceed 8,000 psi under the maximum operating load, moment and torque. 2) Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 3) Shaft shall be overhung design. The use of underwater steady bearings is not permitted. 4) Lower portion of shaft shall include keyways to allow vertical adjustment of the impellers. 5) Shaft shall be coupled to the gear drive output shaft by means of a rigid, flanged coupling. 6) Shaft straightness and rigid coupling squareness shall be such that the maximum total indicated runout at the lower end of the shaft does not exceed 1/8 -inch for every 10 -feet of length, as measured when turning over by hand. 7) Shaft Orientation: Vertical. 8) Shaft Diameter: 2 inches, minimum. c. Drive Assembly: 1) Drive Configuration: Right angle or parallel shaft. 2) Drive assembly shall consist of drive motor, gear drive, baseplate, bearings, couplings, coupling guard and gear housing. 3) The entire drive assembly shall be suitable for continuous duty in a humid, corrosive environment. 4) Variable Frequency Drive: Comply with Section 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. 5) Drive Motor: a) Comply with Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. b) Electrical: 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz. c) Drive Motor Horsepower: 0.5 hp, minimum. Comply with approved Shop Drawings. 6) Motor Coupling: a) Easily accessible torsionally resilient flexible coupling. b) Includes OSHA approved coupling guard, fabricated from Type 316L stainless steel. d. Gear Drive: 1) Gearing shall be all helical or a combination of helical and spiral bevel. 2) Worm gearing is not acceptable. 3) Gearing shall be designed, built and rated in accordance with current AGMA standards, and based upon the mixer manufacturer's hydraulic and torsional loading data. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 14 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4) The AGMA calculated drive horsepower rating shall be stamped on drive nameplate. 5) Maximum reduction ratio of any gear set shall be 7:1. 6) All gearing shall be contained in a single housing and lubricated in a common oil bath. Each drive shall have a drywell feature to eliminate oil leakage down the output shaft. 7) The drive shall include an oil level dipstick or sight glass. 8) The gear drive's minimum AGMA service factor, based on motor nameplate horsepower, shall be 2.0. Provide documentation of gear rating with submittal information. 9) The gear drive shall be designed with an output shaft system suitable for the application and loadings imposed. 10) Output shaft shall be supported by a minimum of two anti -friction bearings to isolate shaft bending forces caused by fluid action on the mixing impeller. 11) All bearings within the drive, including output shaft bearings, shall have a minimum B-10 bearing life of 100,000 hours when operating at full motor nameplate horsepower at the design speed. e. Gear Housing: 1) Gear housing shall be heavy duty, cast iron suitable for outdoor application. 2) Housing shall include lifting lugs positioned for balanced lifting of the assembled drive and motor. 3) Provide integral cast iron baseplate suitable for mounting on a fabricated steel channel pedestal base such that the gear housing baseplate is a minimum of 10 inches above the liquid surface. 4) Housing bolts and mounting bolts and threaded fasteners shall be Type 316L stainless steel. 5) Housing shall include oil fill locations, oil level dip stick or sight gauge, and grease fittings all located so as to be readily and conveniently accessible in the mixer's installed location and position. Oil drain plug shall be located at least 8 inches above the tank surface. 6) Gear housing shall include a permanent stamped nameplate with all pertinent manufacturer's information and gearing information. f. Output Shaft Couplings: 1) Provide rigid flanged couplings. 2) Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 3) Mating coupling faces shall have a male and female piloted connection for accurate concentricity, and shall not require matchmarks for alignment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 12. Special Tools: Furnish all special tools required to maintain, adjust, service and to completely disassemble and assemble the mixers. 13. Mounting: a. Mixer drive housing shall be equipped with integral "feet" which allow the motor and drive assembly to be mounted on C -Channel risers to allow maintenance access into the drive shaft coupling area from the top of the tanks without any required modification to the drive. b. Pedestal Base: 1) Type 316L fabricated stainless steel channel construction. 2) Robust design to accommodate all operating loads and torsion of the mixer without twist or deflection. 3) Minimum 10 -inch height. 4) Top of pedestal base shall match bolt size and spacing of drive housing baseplate. Bottom of pedestal base shall attach to and match size and spacing of stud bolts welded to the tank support framing. 14. Anchor Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: a. Unless noted otherwise for specific components, supply AISI Type 304 stainless steel anchor bolts, screws, nuts, washer and fasteners for all equipment under this Section in conformance with 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. b. Furnish detail Drawings and/or templates for setting anchor bolts. F. RDT System: 1. Support Frame and Covers: a. The support frame shall be constructed of Type 304L stainless steel. b. Covers which completely enclose the rotating drum shall be mounted to the frame. The covers shall be sealed in a manner to contain all water and mist and prevent spray water from leaking out of equipment. c. Panels shall provide access to the screen for routine checks and maintenance. Panel dimensions shall be limited to facilitate removal. d. The rotary drum system shall be supported in three locations including both ends and in the middle. 2. The rotary drum system will have multiple dewatering stages for solids to pass through before being discharged from the end of the unit. a. A rotary system with multiple stages is acceptable. For the rotary system comprised of multiple stages, each stage, starting with the input stage, shall function in a distinct progression of the intended dewatering program. There shall be a minimum of four stages. Each stage wire mesh may vary with each of the other stages. Internal baffles/flights shall direct the flow from the inlet to the point of discharge. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 16 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. The drum may be equipped with internal baffles, roll bars, split augers, ports, closures and/or deflectors to influence shear, water release and drainage rate independent of flow. Delivery of output solids shall be by gravity resulting from a series of detention rings, progressively lower in the direction of delivery and influenced by the split augers. 4. The maximum drum speed shall be 10 rpm. 5. The drum shall be constructed of Type 304L stainless steel woven wire mesh, wedge wire, Type 304L stainless steel perforated screen (20 -gauge) or woven polyester filtration cloth. a. If the drum is constructed of wedge wire, the wedge wire shall consist of V-shaped wires continuous welded together with a teardrop wire support structure. The V-shaped wire shall form the inside of the cylinder and shall have a smooth cylindrical surface running the horizontal length. b. If the drum is constructed of woven wire meshes, the woven wire meshes covering each stage shall be easily changed with simple tools. The woven meshes shall be fastened as the outer covering of each stage and shall be flanged to the outer surface of the perforated metal housing surrounding each stage. 6. Drive equipment shall be as shown on the attached Motor Data Sheets. 7. Drum Drive: a. The drum drive will be accomplished by the engagement of the drive sprocket with NH78 plastic chain. The chain will be wrapped around the driven sprocket which is mounted on the inlet cylinder head of the rotary drum. The drive assembly will be mounted on a rigid base with provisions for adjustment of the drive, sprocket, and NH78 plastic chain interface. b. The NH78 chain allows bi-directional travel and requires no greasing or oiling. 8. Trunnion Wheels: Each screen assembly will be provided with six trunnion wheels and trunnion wheel mounting assemblies. Trunnion wheel assemblies will be accurately mounted to the base frame to provide positive horizontal placement of the rotary drum screen assembly. a. The trunnion wheels will be constructed of acetal copolymer with a minimum outside diameter of 8 inches. Flanged ball bearings will be bolted to each side of the trunnion wheel. The bearings will be designed to receive lubrication through the support shaft. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY b. The support shaft will be of Type 316L stainless steel having a minimum diameter of 1-3/16 inches. Each shaft will be accurately positioned and secured by the trunnion mounting bracket. The shaft will be designed to provide center lubrication to the bearing and trunnion wheel. Each shaft will be provided with an Alemite grease zerk fitting for ease of lubrication. c. The trunnion wheel support bracket will be fabricated of Type 304L stainless steel. The bracket assembly will be formed, stiffener reinforced, accurately fabricated and positioned on the drum frame to support the loads imposed by the rotary drum assembly. 9. Washing System: a. Each unit shall be provided with a single self-cleaning washing header oriented in a horizontal position the length of rotary system to maintain positive cleaning with each revolution of rotary system, forcing washed off solids to return to mass of solids tumbling inside the rotary element. b. Provide pressure boosting system complete with pumps, motors, controls, and appurtenances as specified in attached washwater booster pump data sheet. c. Total washwater requirements shall not exceed 60 gpm maximum per unit at 120 psi. 10. Filtrate Collection: Delivery of collected filtrate water shall be by gravity through an 8 -inch flanged pipe stub. G. Solids Discharge Hopper: 1. Each unit shall be provided with a Type 304L stainless steel solids discharge hopper to direct solids from the rotary drum thickener (RDT) to the TWS pump located below each thickener as shown on Drawings. 2. Each hopper shall be provided with a hinged access panel located at the top of the hopper for access to discharge hopper and for the purpose of collecting a sample of thickened solids while the RDT unit is in operation. 3. Size hopper and configure in accordance with dimensions shown on Drawings. 4. Each discharge hopper shall be provided with a 6 -inch flanged DI overflow piping with spool piece (5-6 inches length as shown on Drawing) routed to the filtrate drain as shown on Drawings. This overflow connection shall be located at a higher elevation than the level elements. The overflow connection shall have 2.5 -inch manual ball valve (as shown on Drawings) at top of the overflow line to dilute and sluice the TWS (provided by others). ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 18 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Each discharge hopper shall be pre tapped for the level instruments as indicated on Drawings. Instruments will be provided with thickener package and shall comply with the requirements of Section 4O 61 00, Process Control Systems General Provisions. Hopper level monitoring shall be by two e loop powered ultrasonic level monitor, Sitrans Probe LU, or pre approved equal. The sensor (transducer) shall be „lated in a chemical and corrosion resistant EFTE material suitable for operating in a temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to plus 110 degrees F and a relative humidit„ of 10 percent to 100 percent. A handheld programmer with an infrared signal shall be provided to program the Probe LU. Each discharge hopper shall be pre -tapped for the level instruments as indicated on Drawings or as necessary to facilitate installation. Instruments will be provided with thickener package and shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 61 00, Process Control Systems General Provisions and Section and 40 72 00, Level Instruments. Level instruments design shall be suitable for the intended service, fully accessible for maintenance, and controlled by RDT PLC. 6. Each solids discharge hopper shall be provided with a Type 304L stainless steel double door/ hatch for observing and cleaning the interior of the hopper. 7. Provide the following between the solids discharge hopper and the TWS pump: a. Slide Gate Valve: 1) Size: 13 -inch by 13 -inch. 2) The slide gate, support, appurtenances and clear opening shall be an isolation gate from the RDT discharge with a manual actuator electrically actuated with 480V integral actuator provided as shown on Drawings. Bolt size and pattern shall be coordinated with the connecting RDT solids discharge hopper. 3) Frame: Type 304 stainless steel. 4) Gate Blade: UHMWP. 5) Helical Gears: Alloy steel, hardened and ground. 6) Support and guide the gate blade by roller assemblies having anti -friction bearings. 7) Seal throat opening against the gate blade with replaceable UHMWP liners on all four sides. b. Provide a square flexible coupling between the slide gate and the TWS pump inlet flange. c. Provide a 13 -inch by 13 -inch by 12 -inch square flanged connection to the open throat of TWS Pump, which is positioned vertically. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 - 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D D MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.05 CONNECTION POINTS A. Provide connection points for each rotary drum thickener for the following: 1. Flocculation Tank Inlet: 6 -inch flanged. 2. Thickened Sludge Discharge Hopper Outlet: a. Provide slide gate between discharge hopper outlet and square flexible coupling. b. Provide square flexible coupling between slide gate and TWS pump inlet. c. Coordinate connection with 13 -inch by 13 -inch by 12 -inch square flanged TWS Pump inlet. 3. Filtrate Outlet: 8 -inch flanged. 4. Washwater Booster Pump Inlet: 1 -1/4 -inch flanged. 5. Washwater Booster Pump Outlet: 1 -1/4 -inch flanged. 6. Foul Air Take: 6 -inch flanged. B. Provide one single connection point for thickener system for the following, where applicable: 1. Electrical terminations. 2. Data highway connection to plant SCADA system. 2.06 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. All control components provided under this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements and component qualities specified in Section 40 61 00, Package Control Systems General Provisions, 40 63 00, PLC Hardware and Software, 40 66 00, Network Equipment, 40 67 00, Control Panels and Components, and 40 67 63, Uninterruptible Power Supplies. C Panels: Panel Number Material NEMA Rating DDT01 TO1 LCP01 FRY 4X 12 RDT02 T02 LCP02 FRY 4X 12 Operator Controls and Indicators: 1. Provide the following panel -mounted operator controls and indicators on each panel: a. Auto -Start Pushbutton. b. Auto -Stop Pushbutton. c. Alarm Reset Pushbutton. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 20 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARY'S CREEK WRF d. Alarm Silence Pushbutton. e. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. £ RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON/OFF indicator. g. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: FAIL indicator. h. Spray Wash Solenoid Valve: OPEN/CLOSE indication. i. Spray Wash: Low Pressure Alarm indication. j. Floc Tank Mixer: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. k. Floc Tank Mixer: ON/OFF indicator. 1. Floc Tank Mixer: FAIL indicator. m. Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED Control. n. Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED indicator. o. Rotary Drum Thickener: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. p. Rotary Drum Thickener: ON/OFF indicator. q. Rotary Drum Thickener: FAIL indicator. r. Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED Control. s. Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED indicator. t. Discharge Hopper: LEVEL indicator. D. Electrical Devices: 1. Interlock Switch or Pull Cord E -stops: Fitted on each side splash guard. Switches or pull cords shall be wired to the motor starter to cause the unit to completely stop rotation when activated. 2. Spray solenoid valves. 3. Spray water low pressure switch or flow switch. 4. Discharge hopper level indication. 5. VFDs and motor starters. E. External Interfaces for Each Panel: 1. Analog Inputs: a. Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED command. b. Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED command. 2. Analog Outputs: a. Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED feedback. b. Rotary Drum Thickener: AMP feedback. c. Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED feedback. d. Floc Tank Mixer: AMP feedback. e. Discharge Hopper Level Indication: LEVEL signal. 3. Discrete Inputs: a. Floc Tank Mixer: RUN command. b. Rotary Drum Thickener: RUN command. c. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: RUN command. d. Spray Wash Solenoid Valve: OPEN command. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 - 21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 4. Discrete Outputs: a. Floc Tank Mixer: In REMOTE. b. Floc Tank Mixer: ON. c. Floc Tank Mixer: FAIL. d. Rotary Drum Thickener: In REMOTE. e. Rotary Drum Thickener: ON. f. Rotary Drum Thickener: FAIL. g. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: In REMOTE. h. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON. i. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: FAIL. j. Interlock switch/E-Stop Pull Cord. 5. SCADA Interface Signals: a. RDT Feed Pump: REMOTE status (from SCADA). b. RDT Feed Pump: FAIL status (from SCADA). c. RDT Feed Pump: ON status (from SCADA). d. RDT Feed Pump: ON command (from SCADA). e. RDT Feed Pump: Speed SETPOINT (to SCADA). f. RDT Feed Pump: Speed FEEDBACK (from SCADA). g. Sludge Feed Meter: Flow gpm (from SCADA). h. Polymer Metering Pump: FAIL — High Temperature (from SCADA). i. Polymer Metering Pump: FAIL — High Pressure (from SCADA). j. Polymer System: REMOTE status (from SCADA). k. Polymer System: FAIL status (from SCADA). 1. Polymer System: ON status (from SCADA). m. Polymer System: ON command (to SCADA). n. Polymer System: Dose Setpoint (lbs/dry ton) (to SCADA). o. Polymer System: Actual Dose (lbs/dry ton) from SCADA. p. TWS Pump: REMOTE status (from SCADA). q. TWS Pump: FAIL status (from SCADA). r. TWS Pump: ON status (from SCADA). s. TWS Pump: ON command (to SCADA). t. TWS Pump: Speed SETPOINT (to SCADA). u. TWS Pump: Speed FEEDBACK (from SCADA). v. TWS Pump: AMP FEEDBACK (from SCADA). w. TWS Pump: SEAL WATER FLOW status (from SCADA). x. TWS Pump: FAIL - high temperature (from SCADA). y. TWS Pump: FAIL - high pressure (from SCADA). F. Special Requirements: Each control panel will receive one 40A, 480V, three-phase feeder to provide power to all equipment associated with the rotary drum thickener. Manufacturer shall provide a control power transformer in the panel for any 120V power needed for the system. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 22 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Motor starters and AFDs shall be provided in the control panel. Control panel will be installed inside. The manufacturer shall submit detailed heat gain calculations to verify that a side -mounted air conditioner is not required. The calculations shall include dissipation of heat from the equipment located within the panel as well as heat gain from direct and prolonged exposure of the panel to sunlight in the calculations. Panel shall be sized to properly dissipate heat from the AFDs. Cooling fans or cooling fins shall be provided as necessary. If fans are necessary, power for fans shall come from the same 480V feed to the panel. To maintain the integrity of the NEMA 4X panel, louver penetrations will not be permitted. G. Function Requirements: 1. Provide the following functions for each RDT unit: a. Auto Mode Control: Initiate the startup sequence when required selector switches are in remote, required setpoints are entered, and the push button start is activated. Initiate shutdown sequence when push button stop in activated. Utilize stored setpoints. b. Hand Mode Control: Start individual components when its selector switch is set to the ON position. Stop components when its selector switch is in the OFF position. Adjust motor speed of the individual components with their speed potentiometers. Configure AFD minimum speed setpoints appropriate for each motor. c. Emergency Mushroom E -Stop Push Button: Indicates that one of the emergency mushroom E -stop push button has been pressed. When activated, remove control power from the drives to prevent operation of the flocculating agitator, rotary drum motors, booster pump, and TWS Pump. Restore control power when the emergency mushroom E -stop push button has been reset on the local control panel by the operator. d. Common Alarm: Indicates if the flocculating agitator, rotary drive, booster pump, or TWS Pump is in a fault condition or if there is a low spray water pressure condition. When a fault or low pressure condition is detected, activate the alarm beacon, alarm horn and the alarm signal to the RDT PLC. Turn off the flocculating agitator, rotary drum, booster pump, TWS Pump, and spray water solenoid when a common alarm is active. When the operator presses the alarm silence pushbutton, deactivate the alarm horn. After the alarm has been cleared, deactivate the alarm signal and the alarm beacon when the operator presses the alarm reset pushbutton. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY e. Spray Water: Open the spray water solenoid when the rotary drum motor is on. Monitor the low spray water pressure switch and trip the common alarm if a low pressure condition is detected while the spray water solenoid is on. Provide a time delay to prevent a momentary low pressure condition from shutting down the rotary drum thickener. f. RDT Feed pump START/STOP and flow control loop will be controlled by the plant SCADA system. The RDT PLC shall communicate ENABLE (start) signal for sludge feed pump as specified for startup and shutdown functions and shall communicate the feed rate setpoint for use in the flow control loop. g. TWS Pump START/STOP and speed control will be controlled by the plant SCADA system. The RDT PLC shall communicate ENABLE (start) signal for TWS pump as specified for startup and shutdown functions and shall communicate the feed rate setpoint for use in the flow control loop. h. Polymer pump START/STOP and flow control will be controlled by the plant SCADA system. The RDT PLC shall communicate ENABLE (start) signal for polymer feed pump as specified for startup and shutdown functions and shall communicate the feed rate setpoint for use in the flow control loop. i. Booster pump status will be monitored by the RDT Control Panel. H. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT): Each RDT Control Panel shall be equipped with an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). Refer to Section 40 63 00, PLC Hardware and Software, for OIT manufacturer and products. Locate the OIT in a separate panel mounted on a pedestal with 2 degrees of movement near the RDT for mounting the OIT. The center of the OIT should be mounted approximately 54 -inches above the floor. The panel construction must be Type 316 stainless steel or aluminum NEMA Type 4X construction. The pedestal and mounting hardware must be Type 316 stainless steel or aluminum construction. A Schneider Electric Harmony HMIDT635XFH operator interface terminal (OIT) shall be provided that meets requirements of Section 40 62 00, Computer Hardware and Software and 40 63 00, Programmable Logic Controller Hardware and Software. 2. Functions: a. The OIT for each RDT shall provide the primary method for an operator to monitor the status of the RDT and to effect its operation by command or directive entry. The plant SCADA system shall provide the secondary method for an operator to monitor and control the RDT. The OIT shall provide the graphics - ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 24 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARY'S CREEK WRF based interface between the operator and the RDT controller. The graphics and their layout/presentation shall be manufacturer's standard. b. The OIT and Plant SCADA shall provide all displays and control screens needed to safely and efficiently monitor and control the RDT. c. The OIT s and Plant SCADA shall provide for selection of the following: 1) Auto -Start Pushbutton. 2) Auto -Stop Pushbutton. 3) Alarm Reset Pushbutton. 4) Alarm Silence Pushbutton. 5) RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. 6) RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON/OFF indicator. 7) RDT Washwater Booster Pump: FAIL indicator. 8) Spray Wash Solenoid Valve: OPEN/CLOSE indication. 9) Spray Wash: Low Pressure Alarm indication. 10) Floc Tank Mixer: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. 11) Floc Tank Mixer: ON/OFF indicator. 12) Floc Tank Mixer: FAIL indicator. 13) Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED Control. 14) Floc Tank Mixer: SPEED indicator. 15) Rotary Drum Thickener: ON/OFF/REMOTE switch. 16) Rotary Drum Thickener: ON/OFF indicator. 17) Rotary Drum Thickener: FAIL indicator. 18) Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED Control. 19) Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED indicator. Display (at a minimum): a. Alarms. b. Status and control of each system component. c. Drum speed Indicator: rpm. d. Rotary Drum Thickener: SPEED Control. e. Flocculation Tank Mixer Speed Indicator: rpm, %. f. Flocculation Tank Mixer Speed Control. g. Drive motor amperage (rms value). h. RDT Washwater Booster Pump: ON/OFF. i. Spray Wash Solenoid Valve: OPEN/CLOSE. j. RDT Control Mode: LOCAL/REMOTE. k. The specific shutdown condition. 1. Sludge and polymer flow rates. m. All inputs from and outputs to the plant SCADA System. n. Maintenance Functions. o. Polymer System: Dose Setpoint (lbs/dry ton). p. Polymer System: Actual Dose (lbs/dry ton). q. % Polymer Activity and flow rates, GPH. r. Feed sludge Concentration, % TS. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-25 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates: A 16 -gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate shall be provided and securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plates shall bear 1/4 -inch -high die -stamped block type equipment tag numbers indicated in this Specification. B. Lifting lugs shall be provided for equipment weighing over 100 pounds. C. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2 -inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrication. D. Odor Control Piping: One flanged Type 304L stainless steel pipe connection shall be provided on each RDT to facilitate connection to the vent system. Pipe/flange sizing and location as shown on Drawings. 2.08 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare, prime, and fmish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment for proper alignment, operation and intended function. B. Function Test: Perform manufacturer's standard motor test on equipment. 2.10 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements of Section 26 22 00, Low -Voltage Transformers. 2.11 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS A. RDT Manufacturer: Coordinate all motor characteristics (including, but not limited to voltage, rpm, and full -load current) with adjustable frequency drive manufacturer. B. Size drives for a minimum of 1.15 x the nameplate FLA of the motors provided. C. Provide drives in accordance with Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System. ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 44 46 26.03 - 26 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Base shall be installed level. C. All assemblies shall be adjusted such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with driven units and interconnections. D. Piping shall be connected without imposing strain. E. Anchor Bolts: Anchors shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrication. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Test: 1. Conduct on each equipment item: a. Prior to system startup, inspect components for proper alignment, connection, and satisfactory operation. b. Manufacturer's Representative Responsibilities: 1) Inspect installation. 2) Check for lubrication and minor adjustments. 3) Provide certification that system components have been installed correctly and are ready for operation. B. Performance Test: Conduct on each unit. 1. Test procedures and polymer recommendations shall be submitted to Engineer for review a minimum of 60 days prior to testing. 2. Prior to performance tests, RDT manufacturer shall perform testing as necessary to determine and recommend the polymer required to produce the specified performance. Additional tests shall be at the manufacturer's own expense if the test fails to meet the specified performance. 3. The Owner will provide sludge feed, water, electrical power, and sludge disposal necessary to conduct the performance tests. Polymer shall be provided by the Owner at the recommended dose of the equipment manufacturer. 4. Each unit shall be operated for a minimum of two 6 -hour test runs. Six rounds of sampling shall be required for each run. Of the 12 rounds of samples collected, a minimum of 11 must meet the performance parameters specified. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-27 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. Test Log: a. Record the following for each round of sampling: 1) WAS feed rate to RDT (gpm). 2) WAS feed solids concentration (percent dry solids). 3) Thickened sludge concentration (percent dry solids). 4) RDT total solids capture (percent). 5) Polymer consumption (active pounds per dry ton of sludge). 6) Level of thickened sludge in discharge hopper (feet). 7) TWS pump rate (gpm). 8) TWS pump head (feet). 9) TWS pump discharge pressure (feet). 10) TWS pump calculated velocity head at the discharge flange (fps). 11) TWS pump driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase (V and amp). 6. Performance test data and results shall be submitted to the Engineer in report format. 7. If, after performance testing, in the opinion of Engineer, the system meets the minimum performance requirements specified, Engineer will recommend by letter the official acceptance of the equipment. If, in the opinion of Engineer, the performance test results do not meet the requirements specified, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor of nonacceptable performance. 8. In the case of nonacceptable performance, the manufacturer shall then have 30 days in which to perform at its sole expense, any supplemental testing, equipment adjustments, changes or additions and to perform a retest of the nonacceptable system. 9. If, in the opinion of Engineer, a performance acceptance test or retest is successful and meets the requirements specified, Engineer will recommend, by letter, acceptance of equipment. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall be present at the Project Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person -days and trips provided in the table below. Each person -day shall be defined as eight (8) hours duration, exclusive of travel. The Equipment Manufacturer's Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Work Description No. of Person Days No. of Trips Installation Assistance 2 1 and Inspection Functional and 5 1 Performance Testing ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 444626.03-28 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Pre -startup and 2 1 Performance Testing Facility Startup 3 1 Post -startup Training 2 1 of Owner's Personnel B. This period shall consist of a minimum of 8 -hour days and travel to and from the project site shall not be included. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of such training and start-up assistance with Owner's personnel. C. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of Owner's personnel at such times requested by Owner. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's services necessary to provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services and training shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification. 1. Rotary Drum Thickener Flocculation Mixers 1 and 2 Induction Motor Data Sheet. 2. Rotary Drum Thickener Drum Motors 1 and 2 Drum Motor Induction Motor Data Sheet. 3. RDT Washwater Booster Pumps 1 and 2 Data Sheet. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 444626.03-29 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF ROTARY DRUM THICKENER FLOCCULATION MIXERS 1 AND 2 INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equipment Name: Rotary Drum Thickener Flocculation Mixers 1 and 2 Equipment Tag Number(s): RDTO 1 TO 1 MXO 1 and RDT02 T02 MX02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 1 (max) Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: (See Div. 26) Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: (See Div. 26) Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ® 1.0 ❑ 1.15 Frequency: 60 -Hz Enclosure Type: TEFC Synchronous Speed: 1,800 rpm ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: (See Div 26) Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two El Space Heater: (See Div 26), Mounting Type: ❑ Horizontal ® Vertical single-phase Vertical Shaft: ® Solid El Hollow ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Variable Frequency Drive System. Operating Speed Range: to % of Rated Speed ® Variable Torque El Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: Severe Duty PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF ROTARY DRUM THICKENER DRUM MOTORS 1 AND 2 INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET Project: Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Owner: City of Fort Worth Equipment Name: Rotary Drum Thickener Drum Motors 1 and 2 Equipment Tag Number(s): RDT01-T0I-DT01, RDT02-T02-DT02 Type: Squirrel -cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1 Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. Hazardous Location: ❑ Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. Motor Horsepower: 3 (max) Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: (See Div. 26) Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: (See Div. 26) Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): ® 1.0 ❑ 1.15 Frequency: 60 -Hz Enclosure Type: TEFC Synchronous Speed:1800 rpm ❑ Multispeed, Two -Speed: / rpm ❑ Thermal Protection: (See Div 26) Winding: ❑ One ❑ Two El Space Heater (See Div 26), Mounting Type: ® Horizontal El Vertical single-phase ❑ Vertical Shaft: ❑ Solid ❑ Hollow ❑ Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up Down ® Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Low -Voltage Variable Frequency Drive System. Operating Speed Range: to % of Rated Speed El Variable Torque El Constant Torque Additional Motor Requirements: ® See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. Special Features: Severe Duty PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 SUPPLEMENT 2 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF RDT WASHWATER BOOSTER PUMPS 1 AND 2 DATA SHEET Pump Name: RDT Washwater Booster Pumps 1 and 2 Tag Numbers: RDTO 1 -TO I -BPO 1, RDT02-T02-BP02 SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Plant Effluent with maximum chloride level of 200 mg/L. Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60 Max 75 Min 50 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0 Suction Pressure (psig): Min: 80; Max: 88 Hydraulic Capacity: 60 gpm (max) at pressure of 120 psig (max). Max. Pump Speed at Design Point (rpm): Constant (YIN): Y Adjustable (Y/N): N DESIGN AND MATERIALS ANSI (YIN) Y Shaft Material: Stainless steel Casing Materials: Cast iron Shaft Seal: Mechanical, single DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors.) Maximum Horsepower: 7.5 Voltage: 460 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 3,500 Service Factor: 1.15 Inverter Duty (Y/N) N Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head -capacity point on the pump curve. Enclosure: DIP EXP ODP TEFC Y CISD-TEFC TENV WPI WPII SUBM Mounting Type: Horizontal Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N) N REMARKS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS JULY 29, 2026 44 46 26.03 SUPPLEMENT 3 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 46 25 x-34 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. This specification shall govern supplying the FOG and scum mixing equipment, including all associated equipment and incidentals for installation. It shall consist of at least three major parts, with specific fitting hardware, for the purpose of aerating and vigorously agitating a pump station wet well on a continuous basis. 2. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide installation guidance and assistance to the CONTRACTOR during equipment installation, check-out, startup, testing and commissioning of the FOG and scum mixing equipment. 3. All equipment, material, parts, and accessories to be provided as part of this specification shall be new and free from any defects. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the inspection of all equipment prior to installation and shall be responsible for replacement at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 — Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 9 - Finishes 4. Div 26, Basic Electrical Requirements 5. Division 26 - Electrical 6. Division 40 — Instrumentation 7. Section 40 05 15 - Piping Support System 8. Section 43 22 10 - Common Requirements for Pumps 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene 2. ID: Inner Diameter 3. gpm: Gallons per Minute JULY 30, 2026 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4625 34- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications for each product. b. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and c. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Shop Drawings: a. The following items shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings: 1) Catalog data or illustrations showing principal parts and materials. 2) A complete set of all layout drawings and details including complete assembly and installation drawings including overall equipment layout and piping interconnection drawings. 3) Complete electrical schematics and field termination drawings. 4) Complete data for accessory items. 5) Detailed specifications and data including the following: a) Motors (1) Manufacturer (2) Type and model (3) Horsepower rating and service factor (4) Insulation class (5) Temperature rise full load (6) Rotative speed 6) List of recommended spare parts. 3. Test Reports a. Test results for odor control equipment as described in this specification. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 2. Supplier's instructions for installation. 3. Qualifications of field service engineer 4. Warranty Documentation 5. Location of nearest service center and spare parts stock distributor. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT JULY 30, 2026 4625 34-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF Complete operation and maintenance data for all equipment and controls in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and Section 01 78 23. Operation and maintenance data shall include a description of the modes of operation and limits of operation for each component. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EQUPMENT SUPPLIER shall have provided a minimum of two (2) individual systems of similar size for this Project in satisfactory operation for at least two (2) years. B. All SUPPLIER parts and components shall be engineered for long, continuous and uninterrupted service. Provisions shall be made for easy lubrication, adjustment, or replacement of all parts. C. Where like items are incorporated into equipment systems (i.e. motors, push buttons, etc.), such items must be identical to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and service. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. D. Assembly and wiring shall be to the point where only field interconnections to numbered terminal blocks are required. E. Parts and service shall be available within 50 miles of the project site for immediate repairs should service become necessary. Unless it can be demonstrated that parts are available at a service center through the same financially sound firm on a continuing basis. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S written Pre -Installation Delivery, Storage, and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 01 60-00-01 61 00. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. JULY 30, 2026 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4625 34-3 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Alternative A: Reliant Water Technologies Wet Well Wizard or Ixom Watercare GridBee AP Series 2. Alternative B: Risen Water FOG LOG Technology 2.02 PROCESS REQUIREMENTS A. Pump Station Design Details 1. The influent lift is 13.5 ft by 8 ft by 16.25 ft deep station a raw sewage wet well with ^ pumps „stalle . The SWS pump station is a 13.5 -ft by 8.0 -ft by 17.25 -ft wet well containing scum and waste sludge. 2. Surface Side Water Depth: a. Minimum: 4.25 ft b. Maximum: 9.25 ft 3. Flows: 215 gpm — 515 gpm 4. FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment a. Quantity of Aerators Required: 2 + 1 shelf spare 1) Each unit shall be provided with a minimum of 50 ft of 1 -inch ID EDPM air hose. 2) Tag Nos.: SWSO1_B01_MX01 and SWS01_B01_MX02 2 b. Quantity of Blowers Required: 1 + 1 shelf spare 1) Blower Motor Rating: 1.5 HP 2) Blower Motor Voltage/Cycle/Phase: 480/60/3 3) Tag Nos.: SWSO1 B01_PMP03- 2.03 EQUIPMENT ALTERNATIVE A - RELIANT WATER TECHNOLOGY WET WELL WIZARD OR IXOM WATERCARE GRIDBEE AP SERIES A. Aeration Ejector 1. An 18" long HDPE tube fitted to a stainless -steel support 6" atop a 5" diameter stainless steel base weighing no less than 10 lbs. The interior of the ejector tube will be fitted with no less than 4 circular bubble cleaving disks made of HDPE with 1 flat edge each, situated in an antipodal manner as to cleave and spin large bubbles as they rise through the tube. 2. The reinforced, double walled hose must enter the ejector from the dorsal end and pass through each cleaving disk, ending below the bottom disk in such a way as to terminate with a brass outlet nipple held in place with a stainless -steel clamp. FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT JULY 30, 2026 4625 34-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 3. All hardware holding the antipodal cleaving disks in place must be stainless steel and welded to the cleaving disks. 4. The ejector tube must be positioned in a vertical orientation in the wet well and there will be no holes in the tube other than at the dorsal and bottom ends of the tube. No air entering the tube can escape the bottom end of the tube near the intakes of pumps situated in the bottom of the wet well. No air escaping the ejector will be in a fine bubble configuration. The ejector is strictly a coarse bubble ejector. B. Air Supply Unit 1. For Reliant Water Technology, the air source shall be a side channel, two stage, low volume, high pressure regenerative blower with an air release valve, plumbing for one or more wet well aeration ejectors, and a weather- proof pressure gauge for the purpose of aerating and agitating the liquid in a sewer or lift station wet well. 2. For Ixom Watercare, the air source shall be driven by a 1/2 HP rated air pump capable of producing 6.0 cubic feet per minute at 4 psi consuming 1/2 HP power. Include weatherproof housing and the unit shall be 120 V 20 Amp. 3. The blower/pump motor and flywheel specifications must be sized to accommodate the necessary pressure and air volume to properly aerate and agitate the water in a specific wet well, taking into consideration the well surface area, altitude, and water depths, including low water and high-water depths. 4. The wet well water agitation must be aggressive enough to continuously cause wave surges across the entire wet well surface. 5. One blower/pump must be capable of supplying enough air volume and pressure for enough aeration ejectors to completely affect the entire surface of the wet well. It is important that no air from the air source can reach the intakes of underwater pumps in the wet well. C. Air Manifold 1. The air source will have a stainless -steel manifold with the necessary number of air outlet ports to supply air to the required number of aeration ejectors identified in this specification. 2. Each port will utilize stainless steel cam lock hose connectors to accommodate the required number of air feed hoses. 3. There will be a Water gauge located on the primary manifold feed pipe. D. Air Feed Hose 1. (1) 1.25" OD, 1" ID, reinforced, double walled, PVC and polyurethane hose of variable lengths for the connection of the regenerative blower to each ejector tube in the wet well. Each end of the air feed hose must terminate with a mating stainless steel cam lock fitting for the air source manifold and the aeration tube or tubes. E. Air Feed Hose Connecting Hardware JULY 30, 2026 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4625 34-5 MARYS CREEK WRF All nipples and cam lock fittings for the hose between the regenerative blower and the aeration ejector in the wet well are to be made of either stainless steel or brass. 2.04 EQUIPMENT ALTERNATIVE B - RISEN WATER FOG LOG TECHNOLOGY A. Aeration Bubble Diffuser 1. The mixing equipment frame, and all appurtenances, fasteners, fittings, chain, etc, shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel. The air diffusion piping shall be constructed of polyethylene. No carbon steel or other stainless -steel grades shall be located beneath the water surface. 2. The mixer shall be capable of producing either fine or coarse bubbles depending on unit orientation. Fine bubbles are best for aeration, coarse bubbles are preferred for better mixing. 3. The diffusers shall be LDPE diffusers. More than one diffuser must be configured in parallel to aid in substantial mixing between them. Units with single or round diffusers shall not be accepted. 4. The unit shall be provided with 25 -ft of hoisting chain and 50 -ft of EPDM air line as standard B. Air Supply Unit 1. 1 HP rated air continuous rated compressor capable of producing 6.7 SCFM @ 20 psi with a maximum depth rating of 40 -ft. 2. The air unit shall be operated on a continuous duty cycle 3. A 120V, 7.5 Amp unit with double insulated power cord, sealed connecting rod and bearing lubrication, oil -free air compressing chamber, and shock absorbing and vibration isolating mounts shall be supplied by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER 4. The air unit shall be supplied by a 15-ap receptacle power source. 5. The air unit shall be mounted inside a weatherproof steel enclosure with vibration isolation and sound attenuation and include a ventilation fan to avoid heat buildup. C. Maintenance Requirements. The aeration/mixing equipment shall operate normally with the following maintenance features. 1. No scheduled lubrication is required of any system components. 2. No spare parts shall be required to be kept on hand. 3. No tools beyond normal cleaning supplies and a few common hand tools shall be required for scheduled maintenance. 4. Periodically check compressor air filter for debris. 2.05 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 40 05 93 "Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for motors, 600 volts and FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT JULY 30, 2026 4625 34-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF lower, and 250 HP and smaller. Requirements of this Section supersede any conflicting requirements of Section 40 05 93. B. Motors shall be inverter rated duty, when indicated. When inverter rated duty is required, provide statement of compliance that the motors are capable of operation with variable frequency drives. C. Motor Sizes: Motor size and detail requirements shall be as indicated in the Design and Performance Criteria table at the End of Section. Motors shall be properly sized so that the driven loads will not require the motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0 along the complete operating range. D. If a motor horsepower rating larger than specified is offered as a substitute and accepted, provided required changes in conductors, motor controllers, variable frequency drives, overload relays, fuses, switches and other related items with no change in the Contract price. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER's instructions. The location of the air compressor and hose penetrations are approximate. The precise placement and alignment of anchor bolts, hose manifold, and associated connections shall be in accordance with the supplemental construction details provided by the equipment manufacturer. The contractor and manufacturer shall verify and check installation during start up field testing. Improper installation shall be corrected by the CONTACTOR prior to continuation of testing. B. Comply with the requirements of all Division 1 Sections. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. A. The services of a qualified Manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for installation inspection, testing, startup and training. The system Manufacturer shall include the following site visits and days on site: Service Number of Number of Trips Days/Trip Installation Inspection, Commissioning, Training, Testing, and Maintenance Procedures 2 2 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Verify equipment runs as expected with no visible or audible leaking. Ensure motors/blowers turn on and off when functioned. Verify isolation valves properly isolate the line and ejector while still allowing the rest of the system to function. JULY 30, 2026 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4625 34-7 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00. B. Installation Assistance and Inspection: 1. After Equipment Installation and before startup, the CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative shall inspect the installation of the equipment. A preliminary running period (as applicable) will be provided for the CONTRACTOR to make field adjustments with the SUPPLIER Field Representative. CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for SUPPLIER approval of equipment installation. C. Functional Test: CONTRACTOR to start up equipment with SUPPLIER Field Representative. Equipment shall be able to run in manual mode with all associated piping, electrical and equipment installed to show proper equipment operation. Functional Test shall be 5 days of uninterrupted service. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for equipment operation for the 5 -day period. Any delays or additional person days and trips required for SUPPLIER Field Representative to perform Functional Testing beyond what is specified is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Functional Test can be run with clean water to demonstrate equipment operation. D. Performance Test and Initial Training: 1. CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative to start up equipment in Automatic Mode (Normal Operation). Equipment shall run in 2 modes: normal operation and peak flow conditions. CONTRACTOR and SUPPLIER Field Representative should demonstrate any alarms, lead lag conditions, or total auto mode or other conditions related to equipment operation. Performance Test shall run with uninterrupted service for 30 days. Performance Test shall be run with wastewater under normal operating conditions. If equipment fails before 30 days, SUPPLIER shall correct problems at their own expense and restart the 30 day Performance Test. SUPPLIER and CONTRACTOR are responsible for equipment operation during the 30 day Performance Test. SUPPLIER shall perform initial training at the end of the 30 day Performance Test for OWNER's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Upon completion of Performance Test and Training, the OWNER shall consider equipment substantially complete and start the warranty period. E. Post -Startup Training: SUPPLIER will perform additional training at a time mutually agreeable to the OWNER and SUPPLIER to take place no earlier than 30 days after FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT JULY 30, 2026 4625 34-8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF equipment substantial completion and no later than 90 days after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4625 34-9 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOG AND SCUM MIXING EQUIPMENT JULY 30, 2026 4625 34- 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 46 46 23 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: This specification section includes the requirements of one (1) tank washdown system for the Equalization (EQ) Tank, one (1) tank washdown system for the Peak Flow Storage (PFS) tank, a shared booster packaged pump skid system to feed service water to the washdown system and two (2) booster packaged pump skid system to supply dilution water from Service Water and Potable Water source, respectively to Polymer Blending Unit for centrifuge dewatering process. 2. The Tank Manufacturer shall supply a complete washdown system for the Equalization Basin (EQ), including: a. A total of four (4) cleaning nozzles and related piping as shown on the drawings. b. All piping, valves, insulation, and appurtenances for a complete and functional system. 3. The Tank Manufacturer shall supply a complete washdown system for the Peak Flow Storage Basin (PFS), including: a. A total of four (4) cleaning nozzles and related piping as shown on the drawings. b. All piping, valves, insulation, and appurtenances on the skid for a complete and functional system. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall supply one (1) packaged booster pump skid with duplex pumps (i.e., EQPFOI_C01_PMPO1, EQPFOI_COl_PMPO1) and an enclosure to provide service water, sized for the capacity of one washdown system. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall supply two (2) packaged booster pump skid with duplex pumps and an enclosure to supply dilution water from Service Water and Potable Water source line to the Polymer Blending Units of centrifuge dewatering process. 6. Piping included in each washdown system starts on the discharge side of the booster pumps, at a point 5 feet outside the equipment pad, and continues to include all downstream piping, valves and appurtenances. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall install one (1) tank washdown system for the Equalization (EQ) Tank, one (1) tank washdown system for the Peak Flow Storage (PFS) tank, a shared booster packaged pump skid system to feed service water to both washdown systems and two booster packaged pump skid system to supply dilution water from Service Water and Potable Water to polymer blending units of centrifuge dewatering process. 8. The complete packaged booster pump station shall be manufactured and tested APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF as a complete unit. B. Related Documents: Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS 1. Division 1 — General Requirements 2. Division 9 — Finishes 3. Division 26 — Electrical 4. Specification Section 33 16 13.15 — Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm 5. Division 40 - Instrumentation 6. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall furnish all applicable submittal requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittals. B. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Complete list of system components to be provided. 2. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly. 3. System layout, installation, and drawings of equipment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In preparation to execute assigned work, equipment vendors, contractors, and subcontractors shall provide quality submittals as outlined in Section 01 40 00 — Quality Requirements and Section 01 33 00 — Submittals. 1.05 STORAGE & HANDLING A. Systems that require modular construction to allow access to the site due to freight restrictions shall be shipped in separate modules and re -assembly at the jobsite is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The modular system will be approved by the OWNER and coordinated between the CONTRACTOR and the Tank Manufacturer. B. Drain plugs, if applicable, shall be removed from the system to prevent freezing during storage and shipping. C. Comply with all of the Manufacturer's recommendations and submittal data for handling and storage of the equipment. D. Follow the maintenance instructions per manufacturer to keep all parts in proper working condition. 1.06 DESIGN CONDITIONS A. The tables below describe the design conditions for the Tank Washdown System(s) the Booster Pumps Skid System for EQ/PFS Washdown System and Polymer TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 -2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY Blending Unit Dilution Water System. Table 1— Tank Washdown System Design Parameters Application EQ Basin PFS Basin Number of tank cleaning machines 4 4 Water flow m/nozzle 160 gpm 160 gpm Operating pressure (psi at machine nozzle inlet flange) 150 psi 150 psi Water connection piping diameter (inches)1 4 to 8 4 to 8 Nozzle size (mm) 18 mm 18 mm Fi C The Tank Manufacturer shall confirm system piping is designed to ensure adequate pressure and flow to the tank cleaning machines. Table 2 — Booster Pump Skid Design Parameters Application Shared Booster Pump Skid # of pumps 1 duty, 1 redundant) 2 Assumed suction pressure 60 - 70 psi Target discharge pressure 170 psi Additional pressure required by um 110 psi Pump flowrate 320 gpm Supply water service size 8 -inch Supply e Service Water VFD Yes The Contractor shall confirm system piping is designed to ensure adequate pressure and flow to the polymer blending units. Table 3 — Polymer Blending Unit (centrifuge dewatering process) Booster Pump Skid Design Parameters Application Booster Pump Skid # of Booster Pump Skid 2 # of pumps in each Pump Skid (1 duty, 1 redundant) 2 Assumed suction pressure 50-75 psi Target discharge pressure 95 psi Pump flowrate (max) 30 gpm Dilution water (service water) Service Size 3 -inch Dilution water (potable water) Service Size 3 -inch Supply e Service Water and Potable Water VFD Yes APRIL 6, 2026 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP 464623-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Operation: Equipment shall be designed and capable of either continuous or intermittent operation. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10°F to 120°F. 2. See Products section for specifications relating to the booster pump enclosures. 3. Field Measurements, Existing Facilities Installation: Contractor shall verify actual dimensions of openings, adjacent facilities and equipment, utilities, and related items by field measurements before fabrication as applicable. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. Tank Washdown Systems 1. The Tank Manufacturer will provide a warranty stating that the washdown systems are warranted to be in accordance with the product specifications mutually agreed upon and to be free from defects in workmanship and materials. The washdown system manufacturer's product warranties will extend to all products supplied by the washdown system manufacturer, regardless of whether it is manufactured by the washdown system manufacturer. D. Packaged Booster Pumps Skid The manufacturer's warranty shall cover all equipment, components, and systems provided in or with the packaged booster pump skid. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: EQ Basin and PFS Basin Washdown Nozzles a. Scanjet SC30T b. Orbijet, Inc. 2. EQ/PFS Basin and Polymer Blending Unit Dilution Water Packaged Booster TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 -4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY Pumps Skids a. PREMIER Flow LLC. Tulsa, OK. b. Dakota Pump, Mitchell, SD. c. PumpTech Inc d. Grundfos 2.02 CLEANING MACHINES A. Tank Cleaning Machine Characteristics 1. Each tank cleaning machine shall have a single washdown nozzle, in order to maximize the available impact pressure of the cleaning jet on the tank surfaces (floor and wall). 2. The maximum turning angle (elevation) for the tank cleaning machine washdown nozzle shall be determined by the supplier/manufacturer to achieve optimum cleaning results. For covered tanks, the maximum turning angle will be selected such that the floor and tank wall(s) will be cleaned, without impacting the tank roof unnecessarily. 3. The spray pattern pitch for the tank cleaning machine washdown nozzle shall be selectable via external mechanical actuators, which are easily accessible to the operator. The pitch is the amount (in degrees) by which the nozzle is elevated after each rotation of the nozzle about the vertical axis. The pitch shall be selectable to either 1.2 degrees, 2.4 degrees, or 3.6 degrees. The initial setting for the pitch shall be recommended by the tank cleaning machine supplier. 4. The tank cleaning machine shall be entirely mechanical operation with no electrical motors or controls. 5. The tank cleaning machine shall have a grease lubricated drive unit, located external to tank, that drives cleaning machine to rotate in both the horizontal and vertical plane. 6. The design and construction of the tank cleaning machine(s) shall be such that when the flow of cleaning fluid is stopped, the tank cleaning machine is self - draining, regardless of the nozzle orientation. This design feature is important when the tank cleaning machine(s) are installed in environments where temperatures may decrease below freezing. 7. The water line supplying each washdown nozzle shall each have an independent, 2 -inch ball valve which can be opened or closed manually. B. Tank Cleaning Machine Construction 1. Wetted parts for the tank cleaning machine will be constructed 316 of stainless steel (316 SS), Teflon, PEEK and/or other materials generally considered to be corrosion resistant. 2. The portion of the tank cleaning machine that extends into the tank beneath the tank mounting flange will have a nominal length of 1500 mm, as measured from the face of the tank mounting flange to the nozzle hub. 3. Each tank cleaning machine shall be equipped with a 2.0 inch ANSI 150 RF APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 464623-5 MARYS CREEK WRF inlet flange to convey the cleaning fluid from the supply piping into the tank. 4. Each tank cleaning machine shall be equipped with a horizontal mounting flange. This flange will connect to a 6.0 inch ANSI Class 150 FF flange which is located on the tank to be cleaned. C. Factory Testing / Proof of Design Prior to shipment from the factory, Proof -of -Design tests shall be conducted on the actual tank cleaning machines for this project, to demonstrate that the nozzles operate at the service flow and pressure, free from binding, excessive noise, and any potential defects. Proof -of -Design test results shall be available to the ENGINEER on request. At the option of the OWNER, the OWNER or OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE may witness the execution of the Proof -of - Design tests at the factory. 2. At the option of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may submit evidence of certification and type approval by a major classification society (e.g. ABS, Det Norske Veritas, or Lloyds Register), in lieu of Proof -of -Design tests. It is understood that these tests are conducted by independent third parties, on the same model of tank cleaning machine, but not on the actual tank cleaning machines for this project. 2.03 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMP SKID A. The Washdown booster pumps and Polymer Blending Unit Dilution Water booster pumps skids shall be skid -mounted and selected by the OWNER to provide flow and pressure that meets the design criteria listed in Section 1.6. Appropriate piping, valves, pressure gauges, and other appurtenances shall be provided to allow for isolation of the booster pump station and monitoring of system conditions. The booster pumps skid system shall strictly adhere to the project specifications and drawings. The following specifications cover the minimum requirements; however, the specification should not be construed as all encompassing. It is the manufacturer's responsibility to include all the necessary engineering, manufacturing, and testing to provide the end user with a complete and fully operational pump skid system. B. Structural Steel Base 1. All components shall be mounted on a structural carbon steel base of open construction. 2. The base shall be designed to support all the systems components including but not limited to pump, drivers, piping, valves, and controls. 3. The base depth shall be equal to 1/12 the longest span between the lifting eyes but no greater than 12 inches. The minimum depth shall not be less than 6 inches. 4. The base shall be designed to accept grout or concrete to be installed by the contractor after all field connections are complete. 5. Steel shall be ASTM A-36, prime steel stored inside to avoid rust or pitting. 6. All steel components shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00. TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 -6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY 7. The structural steel skid shall be covered in 1/a -inch carbon steel diamond deck plate. The deck plate shall be 100% seal welded on top and skip welded to the sub -structure from below. The deck plate will eliminate the need to fill the base with grout or concrete. Steel shall be ASTM A-36, prime steel stored inside to avoid rust or pitting. C. Pumps 1. To ensure stable operation, the pump curve shall be constantly rising from run out to shut off. To ensure cavitation free operation, each pump NPSHr must be low enough to permit stable continuous operation at 120% of greater of the BEP (best efficiency point). Each pump shall be capable of continuous operation without producing noise in excess of Hydraulic Institute and OSHA guidelines. 2. Performance Requirements: The pumps and drive motors shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under the full range of conditions from shut-off through run -out. Motors shall be non -overloading throughout the range of operations. 3. The pumps shall be of the vertical type with flow and head defined in Section 1.6. 4. The pumps shall be manufactured according to the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and to ANSI specification number B58.1. Pumps volute shall be Class 30 250# rated cast iron with integrally -cast pedestal support. 5. Flange connection shall be 250 PSI ANSI. 6. The chamber stack, impellers and stack sleeve shall be 316 stainless steel. a. The impeller shall be enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking cap screw. b. The liquid cavity of the pump shall be sealed off at the shaft by an internally -flushed mechanical seal. c. Pumps shall be rated for a minimum of 250 PSI working pressure. d. Casings shall have gauge ports at nozzles and vent and drain ports at top and bottom of casing. 7. Pumps shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. The mechanical seal shall be cartridge design for the specific application. Mechanical seal shall be able to be changed without complete removal of the motor. D. Motors 1. The motors shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating as outlined on the equipment schedule regardless of the flow and head throughout the operating range of the "System Curve." 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in in Section 40 05 93, "Common Motor Requirements" and in accordance with the requirements in the Pump Data Sheet. 3. Motor Sizes: Size as indicated. Horsepower nameplate rating of motor, at the 1.0 service factor, shall be equal to or greater than the total horsepower APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 -7 MARYS CREEK WRF requirement of the pump when operating at any head between shutoff and minimum operating head, including power requirements for bowl assembly, column and line shaft bearing loss, and motor thrust bearing loss from pump load. Motor shall have a service factor of 1.15. E. Piping: 1. Refer to Division 33 and Division 40 for information relating to piping systems, materials, methods and supports. 2. Exposed Piping: a. 4 inches in diameter and smaller shall be UV -stabilized HDPE per Drawings and Specifications. b. Larger than 4 inches in diameter shall be ductile iron (DI) per Drawings and Specifications. 3. Buried Piping: a. 4 inches in diameter and smaller shall be HDPE per Drawings and Specifications. b. Larger than 4 inches in diameter shall be PVC C900 per Drawings and Specifications. 4. Appurtenances: a. S40 stainless steel ASTM A312 with fittings conforming to ASTM A403, and flanges conforming to ASTM A182. F. Butterfly Valves 1. The 4 -inch valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) standard C-504. 2. All butterfly valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C-504 and be installed as indicated on the drawings. Valves shall be certified to ASME/NSF-61 Drinking Water System Components. 3. Flanged end connection shall fully conform with ANSI B16.1 for class 125, 250 iron flanges, or AWWA C207, class D. Both class 125 & 250 shall be flat face. 4. Wafer end connections shall be designed for installation between ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 iron flanges. 5. Valves 6 inches and smaller shall be equipped with lever operator. Valves 8 inches and larger shall be equipped with gear operators. 6. Valve exteriors shall be coated with a universal, Alkyd Primer. G. Pressure Relief Valves 1. Pressure Relief Valves shall be located on the discharge of each pump and anywhere else as indicated on the drawings. 2. The 4 -inch valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) standard C-504. 3. Flanged end connection shall fully conform with ANSI B16.1 for class 125, 250 iron flanges, or AWWA C207, class D. Both class 125 & 250 shall be flat TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 -8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY face. 4. Wafer end connections shall be designed for installation between ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 iron flanges. 5. Valves 6 inches and smaller shall be equipped with lever operator. Valves 8 inches and larger shall be equipped with gear operators. 6. Valve exteriors shall be coated with a universal, Alkyd Primer. H. Non -Slam Check Valves: 1. Check valves shall be located on the discharge of each pump and anywhere else as indicated on the drawings. 2. Valves shall be of the silent operating type that begins to close as the forward velocity diminishes and be fully closed at zero velocity preventing reverse flow. 3. The check valve bodies shall be ASTM A126, grade B cast iron, or better. And shall be free from blow holes, sand holes or other impurities. 4. The check valve design shall be center guided, spring -loaded poppet guided at opposite ends, and shall have a short linear stroke that generates a flow area equal to the pipe diameter. 5. The internals shall be machined bronze disc seat, and stem guide. The seat shall contain a Buna-N seal to provide zero leakage. 6. The valves shall be sized to permit full pump capacity to discharge through them without exceeding a pressure drop of 2.0 PSIG. I. Gauges: 1. Pressure gauges shall be provided at the suction and discharge connections of each pump as well as the suction and discharge headers. Gauges shall be mounted at the control module. Pump and pipe mounted gauges shall not be acceptable. 2. All gauges shall be a minimum of 4 inches in diameter, liquid filled, brass connection port, stainless steel case and bayonet ring and be in accordance with ASME B40-100, grade lA. 3. Gauge accuracy shall be +/- 1% of span throughout the full range. Gauges shall be selected to read at mid -point when operating at design conditions. 4. Gauge operating temperature shall be -400F to 1400F (-400-+600C) ambient and +1400F (+600C) medium maximum. J. Enclosures: 1. Provide a lift -up fiberglass enclosure complete with stainless steel hinges and lifting hardware. 2. Provide a 3 KVA Mini power zone transformer, GFCI, 1500W heater. Exhaust fan and louvers. 2.04 CONTROL SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENTATION A. General Requirements 1. Refer to Section 40 05 91, "Common Control Panel Requirements for Process APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 -9 MARYS CREEK WRF Equipment" for general requirements of control panels requirements. Control panels shall be provided with main circuit breakers, starters, VFDs, control power transformer, lights, switches, relays, terminal strips, etc. for a complete and operational system. 2. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Divisions 26 and 40. 3. Provide thermostatically and humidity -controlled heaters and close loop air conditioning in the panel if required to maintain proper operating temperature range for the equipment minimize condensation. 4. All internal components shall be mounted and secured to the removable back plane assembly. 5. The entire control system shall be furnished, configured, and completely commissioned by the Supplier. B. Packaged Booster Pump Skid 1. Provide complete electrical distribution, control, and instrumentation to automatically start, stop and modulate the pumps to smoothly, efficiently and reliably deliver designed flow rates at a constant discharge pressure. The electrical system shall provide alarms, and safety features needed to protect the equipment, piping system and personnel. 2. The electrical distribution, control panel and instrumentation design, installation and testing along with integration of component parts shall be the responsibility of the pump station manufacturer. 3. The manufacturer of the control panel and pump station shall be one in the same. Control panels not designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the pump station shall not be accepted. 4. The control panel shall bear the U.L. 508A label for Industrial Control Panels and shall meet the requirements of IEEE 519. 5. All electrical distribution, instrumentation and controls shall be in accordance with NEC 70 latest edition. C. Control Panel 1. The manufacturer of the pump station shall assemble the complete control panel in accordance with NEC 70 latest edition and be so authorized under U.L. 508A. All components and wiring shall be housed within a U.L. listed electrical enclosure. All components shall be labeled for proper identification. Adjustment of all operating parameters shall be accomplished from the front of the panel through an industrial grade HMI (human interface machine). A complete wiring diagram shall be permanently affixed to the inside door of the control panel including a legend and. All wiring terminations shall be numbered with pre -laminated wire labels. 2. The control system shall be microprocessor based Direct Digital Control (DDC) and shall have standalone capability. The controller shall be completely wired, programmed, and fully tested before shipment. All testing shall be TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY recorded on the appropriate quality control documents and be provided as part of the IO&M manual. 3. All the control panel components shall be housed in a NEMA 4X 304 SST enclosure, with white powder coated paint. Enclosure shall have three point latching handle. 4. The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be equal to Delta Corporation PDVP or better. The PLC shall provide program capacity to a minimum of 15 steps, shall have two (2) built-in serial ports, (1) RS485 port and 512 local 11O points as a minimum. The PLC shall be capable of supporting Modbus communications. 5. The system operator shall be capable of starting or stopping the pumps manually and allowing the system to operate automatically via a signal from the operator. The pump controller shall include individual H -O -A switches mounted on the panel face. 6. 7 -inch Color Human interface machine (HMI) for local interface. The unit shall be mounted in the controller door and shall not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure. The HMI shall be microprocessor based and hold its firmware in EPROM memory. Online programmable data entries such as system set points, calculated results and tantalization shall be stored in non-volatile memory. All data and set points shall be field adjustable thought an escalating series of passwords. All the set points shall be modifiable though the controller mounted HMI using standard engineering units such as system flow (GPM), system pressure (PSI), elapsed pump runs time and feet of head. The program shall be modifiable by remote operator as well via optional SCADA system. 7. The operator display shall be provided in a single integrated graphic display screen with a separate processor for control. The processor shall be an industrial PLC as manufactured by Eaton Corporation. The use of a computer for process control is not acceptable. 8. The HMI shall be suitable for mounting in a door a NEMA 4 enclosure so that it maintains the enclosures NEMA 4 rating. Provide sunshield by Sun Aide. 9. The HMI shall be mounted at a suitable height to assure proper visibility and easy access by the operator 10. The HMI shall provide as a minimum the following: a. CPU: Minimum 32 -bit Micro -controller / 206.4 MHz b. System memory: 8Mb 11. Program: 7Mb 12. History: 360Kb 13. Recipe: 128 Kb 14. Alarm: 16Kb 15. Data: 64Kb volatile/IKb non-volatile 16. Backup memory: 512Kb a. Storage memory: SM card and USB memory disk capable b. Serial ports: Total of three (3), with at least two (2) ports configurable APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF for RS232/422/485 c. The HMI shall be industrial rated and certified for the following conditions: d. Relative humidity 10% to 90% @0-40°C, 10%-55% @41-50°C e. Vibration: 30G@ llmsec f. The HMI shall be industrial rated and certified for agency approval for the following: NEMA 4. g. The HMI shall be certified for compliance with electromagnetic immunity susceptibility for the following: EMC directive 89/336/EEC + 92/31/EEC + 93/68/EEC, EN61132 17. The system controller shall include a pump failure alarm for each pump. The pump alarm shall consist of a differential pressure switch of the current switch type with adjustable time delay, alarm light and manual reset. When pump failure is detected, the pump shall be stopped and locked out of service until the alarm is manually reset via a panel mounted reset button. The control system will upon pump failure replace the failed pump with the next pump in the sequence. The pump alarm shall consist of enable switch for regular operation. 18. Provide a U.L./C-U.L., NEMA 4X and Control center with: Micro -controller utilizes the latest in 8051 micro -processor technology. This solid-state controller has an easy to use 20 -key push button keypad with tactile feedback. The micro -controller has a four -line, 20 -character display, which displays the users' input and systems current condition. 19. Standard features shall be as follows: a. NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel enclosure with white powder coated paint. b. U.L./C-U.L. 508 label c. Customer Specific Programs d. 16 discrete 11O per each digital 11O board e. 8 Optically Isolated inputs f. 8 Form C Relays rated at 8 Amps resistive @ 120 Vac 1) 12 analog channels (4 outputs & 8 inputs) per each analog I/O board (all inputs are scalable) a) Universal Inputs (4-20 MA, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC) b) Outputs of 1-5,0-10,2-10 VDC g. Multiple board configurations 1) Standard 3 -Board Configuration, additional 11O boards can be added to any controller h. Menu driven operator interface i. Multiple level password protection i . Built in calibration routines TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER MARYS CREEK WRY k. Remote Enable 1. Individual pump run indicator m. Individual ETMs n. Hand -off -auto selector switches o. Power on light p. Alarm horn and reset button q. 14 V U.L./C-U.L. CE approved switching power supply. Unit must have built-in breaker bar with over demand protection r. 120/1/60 control circuit transformer s. Adjustable alarm settings 1) Flow 2) Transducer failure alarms 3) Communication alarms 4) Best efficiency combination flow and PID pump control sequencing 5) Individual pump failure alarms with differential pressure switches and TDRs t. Pump start counters and timers u. Pump alternation (24 Hour or Sequential) v. Independent time delays w. Real time clock x. Main program stored in FLASH y. Data stored in EEPROM z. Individual auxiliary alarm contacts 20. The controller shall start and stop each pump based on system requirements. The discharge pressure reading shall be displayed through the door mounted HMI device 21. The controller shall continually monitor the station flow rate based on a signal from a station or remote mounted flow meter. The flow rate shall be displayed on the door mounted HMI device 22. In the hand position the controller will run all the main pumps (not standby) at a speed designated via the controller keypad 23. All internal panel wiring shall be accomplished in a neat and orderly manner. Where practicable, wiring trough or gutter with readily removable covers shall be used. An any two or more wires run together outside the trough shall be clamped or tied in straight lay bundles at approximately 15 -inch intervals. Ties or clamps shall be non-metallic. 24. Wiring shall be arranged so as to be readily accessible for inspection and maintenance, and in no case shall wiring impede access to the panel mounted devices or spaces for future equipment. All cables shall be identified with a permanent tag securely affixed to the cable at the termination point. Cable tag APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 - 13 MARYS CREEK WRF shall be visible from the cabinet door or opening. 25. Splices shall not be permitted in power, lighting, control, or instrumentation wiring. 2.05 ELECTRICAL A. Packaged Booster Pump Skid 1. All power and control wiring shall be run in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and shall be hot galvanized steel O.D. with organic corrosion resistant I.D. coating and shall be produced in accordance with U.L. Safety Standard #797 and ANSI C80.3 and shall be listed by a NRTL with follow up service. 2. Connections to all motors or other equipment subject to vibration, thermal movement or requiring the flexibility to be moved aside during maintenance shall be made with liquid -tight flexible conduit with proper end fittings. The length of the flexible conduit shall not exceed 36 inches. 3. All conduits entering enclosures shall enter either form the side or bottom. Top entries will not be permitted. All power conduits shall be a minimum of 3/4 -inch trade size. All control and instrumentation conduit shall be a minimum of 1/2 - inch trade size. 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) that meets the requirements of UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel, ANSI C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), and ANSUNFPA 70 National Electrical Code, Article 358. 5. For Electrical Metallic Tubing, furnish zinc -plated steel or zinc -plated malleable iron fittings bodies that meet the requirements of UL 514B Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings, and ANSI NEMA FB 1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable. Connectors should have insulated throat. 6. Associated fittings shall meet the requirements of UL and ANSI C80 standards for the applicable raceway system, except IMC which uses UL 6 and C80.1 compliant nipples, elbows, and couplings. 7. Splices shall not be permitted in power, lighting, control, or instrumentation wiring. 8. No run of conduit shall contain more than the equivalent of four 90 -degree bends for a total of 360 degrees including those immediately at outlets or fittings. Bend in the conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the conduit. 9. All conduit runs shall be rigidly supported. Each conduit shall be supported within one (1) foot of junction boxes and fittings. Piping shall not be utilized for conduit support. 2.06 TESTING A. Packaged Booster Pump Skid 1. Testing Facility a. The manufacturer of the packaged pumping system shall maintain an operating testing facility at the point of manufacture of the pumping TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 - 14 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY system. The complete pumping systems subsystems shall be completely tested as a unit. This includes but is not limited to hydrostatic, electrical and performance tests. The test shall include each component and feature of the assembled unit including all remote mounted instruments. The complete testing facility shall include flow meters, pressure gauges, watt meters, digital multimeter, tachometer, and differential pressure transmitters for measuring system performance. The entire testing facility shall be traceable to NIST standards and have documentation of yearly calibration of instruments as required. 2. Factory Tests a. After factory assembly is complete the entire pumping system shall be hydrostatically tested as a complete unit. The system shall be tested at 150 PSIG or 150% of working pressure whichever is higher for a minimum of one hour. b. Each pump on the system shall be individually tested for performance at full speed. Pump performance measurements shall include shut-off pressure and pump TDH and motor FLS (full load amps) at 25%. 50%, 75% and 100% of the pumps design capacity. c. Each pumping system controller must be designed, built, and tested at a U.L. 508A facility that is the same as the pumping system manufacturer prior to integrating with the pumping system. Testing shall be in accordance with U.L.508A procedures and include as a minimum verification of wiring, component operation, programming, and sequencing. d. The pumping system shall be connected to a test tank of sufficient capacity to perform the testing. The tank shall be protected so as not to impart contaminants into the pumping system. The system shall be connected to the tank with all the actual components, valves, and sensors specific to this project. During the test any calibrations or adjustments that are required for correct system operation shall be performed. All controls, sequencing and alarms shall be tested verified and documented prior to removal from the testing facility. These tests may be witnessed by the contractor, commissioning agent, owner or engineer if required. e. All testing shall be performed with NIST traceable equipment. The NIST traceable instrumentation shall be independently calibrated and tested in accordance with NIST and Hydraulic institute standards. 3. Inspections, Verification and Performance a. The manufacturer of the pumping station shall provide access to the owner or his representative to the manufacturing facility at any time during the fabrication of the pumping system. All testing and production documents shall be made available to the owner or his representative at his request. b. Upon completion of fabrication and system testing a written report certified by a company officer of the manufacturing company shall be provided to the owner's representative. This form may be requested prior APRIL 6, 2026 TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 46 23 - 15 MARYS CREEK WRF to release of the system for shipping but shall not affect the payment terms of the contract. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION / INSTALLATION APPLICATION A. Required Ancillary Equipment 1. The CONTRACTOR shall install a wye strainer or basket strainer on the cleaning fluid main supply to the tank cleaning machine(s). The strainer(s) shall be located at the inlet to each tank cleaning machine, or at grade level adjacent to the tank wall. The strainer shall have a perforation size of 1/16 inch or 3/32 inch. Excessive amounts of solids, or large particles, can cause the turbine drive in the tank cleaning machine to bind, thus inhibiting proper rotation of the tank cleaning machine. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall install a 2.0" ball valve and pressure gauge (0 to 200 psig) on the cleaning fluid (water) supply piping to each tank cleaning machine. The ball valve will enable the tank cleaning machine to be removed from service if necessary, for maintenance purposes, regardless of whether the cleaning fluid (water) supply piping is pressurized. 3. The ball valve shall be a full port design, in order to minimize flow disturbances as the cleaning fluid (water) enters the tank cleaning machine inlet. The ball valve shall be installed between the pressure gauge and the tank cleaning machine inlet. This arrangement allows for the monitoring of inlet pressure during both static (machine not in service) and dynamic states (machine in service). B. The following points must be followed to ensure an adequate installation of the tank cleaning machines: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall flush the cleaning fluid supply piping before the tank cleaning machines are installed, to ensure that solids, construction materials and other debris are flushed from the system. Excessive amounts of solids can prevent the machines from rotating, which will increase the initial startup and commissioning efforts, and cause delays. 2. During installation of the tank cleaning machines, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure proper alignment of the flanges (cleaning fluid supply pipe flange and tank cleaning machine inlet flange) before the flanges are bolted together. Improper flange alignment can cause distortion of the tank cleaning machine housing, which can impede the normal operation of the tank cleaning machine. 3. The cleaning unit shall be turbine driven with a set turning angle to be determine by the cleaning system manufacturer and provided on the installation drawings. The spray pattern shall be programming by use of external mechanical actuators. The cleaning unit shall be set up and programmed specifically for the tank on the project to cover the floor and walls up to the high-water elevation plus 12 inches as shown on the drawings. The unit shall operate without pneumatic or electrical drives or controls. TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 - 16 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY C. The following points must be followed to an adequate installation of the packaged booster pump skids: 1. The contractor shall off load, store, locate, level, anchor, pipe & wire the system and the remote components in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 2. Alignment: The system skid shall be set in place in a level state. The base mounted pumps shall be aligned by the contractor after installation of all associated piping and wiring. The pump alignment shall be performed by a qualified millwright and documentations stating such shall be submitted as part of the warranty activation program. 3. The owner's representatives or the contractor shall confirm in writing that all the components necessary for a complete and proper startup and commissioning are installed, piped, wired and operational prior to scheduling startup. A system startup request form shall be filled out and signed by the contractor or owner's representative and returned to the factory to certify readiness. 4. All piping in the building chilled water system shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris, dirt, welding slag, sand, and other impurities. After flushing the system and removable of startup strainers the system shall be deemed ready for service and pumping may commence. 3.02 STARTUP SERVICES A. Washdown Nozzles One (1) day of startup and training shall be provided by the Manufacturer prior to acceptance by the OWNER. B. Packaged Booster Pump Skids During initial start up the contractor shall under the supervision and assistance of the manufacturer or his authorized representative, adjust all mechanical and electrical components to make the system operate properly under actual site conditions. 2. Demonstration — After all field adjustments have been completed, the owner and/or his representatives will receive a through demonstration of the system operation and will receive training in the correct operation, adjustment of all components as well as component maintenance. 3. The system manufacturer and his representative shall provide up to two (2) 8 - hour training days, during not more than one (1) trip to the j obsite for startup, adjustment, and training of the owners personal on the operation and maintenance of the packaged pumping equipment. APRIL 6, 2026 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP 464623-17 MARYS CREEK WRF C. The washdown nozzle supplier shall provide the following spare parts and accessories: 1. Complete o -ring kit 2. Tool kit for nozzle gun unit END OF SECTION TANK WASHDOWN AND BOOSTER PUMP April 6, 2026 46 46 23 - 18 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 46 51 21 AERATION SYSTEM, COARSE BUBBLE -MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMVIMARY A. Furnish, install, startup and test the following: 1. Supplier shall design and furnish aeration system equipment with air piping/diffuser system, provide equipment and pipe supports, provide manufacturer services during installation, and provide service for startup, testing, and training for the following items: a. Drop leg(s). b. Assistance Air piping manifold(s). c. Air distribution headers. d. Coarse bubble diffusers. e. Pipe supports. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 9114 - Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 3. Division 26 - Electrical 4. Division 40 — Instrumentation 5. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing 6. Section 40 27 00.00 — Process Piping General 40 05 05 - Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 7. Section 4O2 00.02 Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings 40 05 24 — Steel Pipe 8. Section 40 27 00.08 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 9. Section 44 42 19.04 — Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 1.02 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A. References: Following is a list of standards, which might be referenced in this Section. 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): Standard No. 002-06 "Measurement of Oxygen Transfer Efficiency in Clean Water" 2. ASTM Internation al (ASTM): a. A 240 - Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF b. A312 — Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes c. A 380 — Practice for cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems d. A 774 — Specification for As -Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures e. A 778 — Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products B. Definitions: 1. AOR: Actual oxygen requirements. 2. SOR: Standard oxygen requirements. 3. SCFM: Standard cubic feet per minute are understood to be air at 68°F, 14.7 PSIA and 36% relative humidity flowing at a rate of 1 cubic feet per minute. 4. SOTR: Standard oxygen transfer rate is understood to be the rate of oxygen transferred to tap water (pounds of oxygen per hour) at standard conditions of 20°C, 0.0 mg/1 residual dissolved oxygen concentration, and a barometric pressure of 760 mm Hg (dry air). 5. SOTE: Standard oxygen transfer efficiency is understood to be the percentage of oxygen transferred under standard conditions of 20°C, 0.0 mg/1 residual dissolved oxygen concentration, and a barometric pressure of 760 mm Hg (dry air). 6. SWD: Side water depth is understood to be the overall dimension from the high point of the tank floor to the water surface. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Requirements: Furnish equipment, design air piping/diffuser system, provide support for installation, and provide service, testing, and training for a coarse bubble system for mixing aerated sludge in the sludge storage tanks as designated in Table 1, as shown on the Drawings, described herein. The coarse bubble aeration system is designed to keep these solids in suspension within the tank. The system shall consist of a drop air supply pipe, air piping manifold, air distribution headers, coarse bubble diffusers, pipe supports, expansion joints, and related items for a complete and operating system. B. Design Requirements: 1. All equipment specified herein shall be specifically designed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation. 2. The aeration system shall be installed in the Sludge Storage Tanks having the dimensions and system design requirements as shown in Table 1 and on the Drawings. 3. Refer to P&ID's, Drawings, and Division 40 Sections regarding the control logic and description for additional equipment monitoring and control information as applicable. AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS JULY 30, 2026 4651 21 -2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Parameters and Performance: Aeration system shall be installed in the Sludge Storage Tank and comply with the design performance and parameters indicated in. Table 1. Aeration system shall be installed in the mixed liquor channel and comply with the design performance and parameters indicated in Table 2. Table 1 Coarse Bubble Aeration System Performance Requirements Sludge Holding Tank nk 1 and 2 Environmental Oeratin Conditions Tank Floor Elevation, Feet MSL 772.00 Ambient Air Temperature, °F Maximum Minimum 110 0 Aerated Liquid Temperature, °F Maximum Minimum 86 50 Coarse Bubble Zone Configuration (per Tank) Number of Zones 1 Diameter, Feet 56 Max SWD, Feet 28 Number of Diffusers per tank (minimum) 3 414 Operating Pressure, psig 13 Compressed Air Temperature, °F 230 Air Supply per Zone, SCFM Average 1,800 2,069 NOTE: diffuser drawings are illustrative of the diffuser quantity and layout. Refer to this Table for actual design quantities. JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS OO COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 -3 MARYS CREEK WRF Table 2 Coarse Bubble Aeration System Performance Requirements Location Bioreactor Mixed Liquor Channel Environmental Oeratin Conditions Tank Floor Elevation, Feet MSL 772.00 Ambient Air Temperature, °F Maximum Minimum 110 0 Aerated Liquid Temperature, °F Maximum Minimum 86 50 Coarse Bubble Zone Configuration (per Tank) Number of Zones 1 Length of Aerated Section, Feet 10 Width of Aerated Section, Feet 6 Max SWD, Feet 6.4 Number of Diffusers (minimum) 4 Operating Pressure, psig 13 Compressed Air Temperature, °F 230 Air Supply per Zone, SCFM Average 32 NOTE: diffuser drawings are illustrative of the diffuser quantity and layout. Refer to this Table for actual design quantities. B. Performance Requirements: Comply with performance requirements specified. C. Structural Performance: 1. All equipment, supports, anchors and fasteners shall be of adequate size and strength to withstand loads associated with starting, turbulence, debris, thrusts from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction and other loads encountered under operating conditions. 2. System shall be designed contraction/expansion over a temperature range of 120 of without deforming any component. Fixed supports will anchor the header against movement and intermediate supports will allow for longitudinal movement. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Provide plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide dimensional layouts, materials, details of appurtenances, anchoring, installation, and operation instructions. Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance with such approved drawings. AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS JULY 30, 2026 4651 21 -4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER D MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Headloss Calculations for the complete aeration system from the top of the drop leg. Calculations shall include the total headloss across the membrane, balancing orifice, piping system and static head at both design and maximum airflow. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative. 6. Location of nearest stocking distribution of spare parts. 7. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 8. List of equipment installations. 9. Factory Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer. 10. Source Quality- Control Reports. 11. Field Quality- Control Reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least twenty (20) U.S. installations of the type being proposed each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished upon request with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units for this project. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain aeration system from single source. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store pumping system components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 61 00 " Common Product Requirements." 1.08 EXTRA MATTERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 -5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Furnish a supply of spare parts equal to a minimum of 2 percent of the material installed, which includes diffuser assemblies, gaskets, retainer rings, pipe couplings, orifice plates, expansion joint tees and coupling assemblies, pipe coupling assemblies, expansion joint ties, and pipe supports. B. Furnish all special tools or jigs needed to assemble, disassemble, adjust or service the aeration equipment. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 01 78 36 "Warranties", for manufacturer's Special Equipment Warranty requirements. A letter of acknowledgement accepting the Special Equipment Warranty shall be included with the shop drawing. Payment for equipment WILL NOT be made until an approved Special Equipment Warranty is received by the OWNER. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Sanitaire Corporation (Xylem) 2. Aquarius 3. Stamford Scientific International, Inc. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONS A. Fabricate 304 stainless steel piping in compliance with ASTM A778 or ASTM A312 and 304 stainless steel fittings in compliance with ASTM A774. 1. Pipe dimensions shall comply with Schedule 10, ASTM A312; diameter as shown on Drawings. 2. Air headers shall have 125 or 150 lb. drilled flanged stub connections for air diffuser piping. B. Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of Type 304L stainless steel complying with ASTM A240. Fabricate all non -welded parts and pieces from sheets and plates of Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A240. All fabricated stainless steel parts shall have a No. 2D finish. C. Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. D. Welding shall be performed in the factory using the shielded arc, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Field welding will not be permitted. E. Passivation: Pickle all stainless steel assemblies and parts after welding, fabricate and wire brushing by complete immersion in an acid solution as AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS 465121-6 JULY 30, 2026 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY specified in ASTM A380. The acid shall be a nitric -hydrofluoric solution as defined in Table A2.1, Annex A2 of ASTM A-380. Provide a final rinse using ordinary industrial or potable water and dry in conformance with Section 8.3 of ASTM-A380. Corrosion protection techniques not employing full immersion methods are not acceptable. 2.03 PIPING A. Piping system: The diffuser piping system shall conform to Specification Section 40 27 00.08 "Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings." B. Drop Pipe: Provide a Type 304L stainless steel drop pipe for each aeration grid having flanged connection for connecting to the isolation/control valve. Drop pipe will connect to the supply pipe furnished by the Contractor starting at the top of the basin with a flanged connection to a point approximately 2 feet above the manifold as shown on the Drawings, at which point it shall be connected to the PVC lower drop pipe. Contractor shall provide an insulating flange connection rated for 250°F service. 1. Upper Drop Pipe: a. Material: 1) Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 10, 304L stainless steel per specification section 40 27 00.08 "Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings." Size shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2) Fittings: Type 304L stainless steel per ASTM D774. 3) Welding: Welding shall be performed in the factory using the shielded arc, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Field welding will not be permitted. 4) Passivation: Pickle all stainless steel assemblies and parts after welding, fabrication and wire brushing by complete immersion in an acid solution as specified in ASTM A-380. The acid shall be a nitric -hydrofluoric solution as defined in Table A2.1, Annex A2 of ASTM A-380. Providing a final rinse using ordinary industrial or potable water and dry in conformance with Section 8.3 of ASTM-380. Corrosion protection techniques not employing full immersion methods are not acceptable. b. End connections: 1) Lower End: Plain end for connecting stainless drop pipe to the PVC lower drop pipe using a Series 316 stainless steel band coupling. 2) Upper End: Flanged end for connecting to the air piping system. 2. Lower Drop Pipe: PVC Schedule 40 per ASTM D 1784 and D 1785. 3. Fasteners: Nuts, bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. C. Manifold and Distribution Headers: 1. Description: Provide a manifold connected to the lower drop pipe to which the distribution air headers are connected as shown on the drawings. JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 -7 MARYS CREEK WRF a. Material: Schedule 40 PVC, conforming to ASTM D1784 and D1785 b. Construction: 1) Manifold shall be same diameter as lower drop pipe, fabricated in 20 -foot lengths maximum. 2) Distribution Header: 4 -inch minimum, fabricated in 20 -foot lengths maximum. Provide threaded removable end caps complete with gasket, threaded coupling and end plate for clean out at the end of each distributor. 3) Produce PVC moldings and extrusions from PVC compounds conforming to ASTM D3034. • Tensile Strength: 7000 psi. • Hydrostatic Design Stress Rating: 2000 psi. • UV Protection: Add two parts by weight of titanium dioxide per 100 parts of resin to PVC compounds for air distribution headers, baseplates, retainer rings, and related components to minimize ultraviolet light degradation. 4) Factory Solvent Welds: In accordance with ASTM D2855 except edges need not be chamfered. Use only solvent cements specifically formulated for use with PVC in accordance with ASTM D2564. 2. All piping, fittings, and associated hardware shall be supplied by the MANUFACTURER and shall be designed to be installed in the field without solvent welding. All solvent welds must be factory assembled prior to shipment, except for lower dropleg section. 3. Pipe lengths along the distribution manifold shall be joined using 125 lb. drilled flanges and gaskets, series 304L stainless steel band couplings, or stainless steel or PVC expansion or fixed joints. Joints shall be designed to resist 80 ft-lbs torque without movement or failure. 4. Design of the manifold piping and pipe joints shall resist expansion/contraction thrust forces of the air distribution headers over a temperature range of 125°F. 5. Pipe lengths along individual air distributors shall be joined using a union joint. 6. The air distributors' centerline spacing shall not exceed 4 feet. This allows the air distributors to maximize oxygen transfer efficiency and mixing efficiency and to minimize solids deposition between air distributors. 2.04 DIFFUSER ASSEMBLIES A. Description: 1. Diffuser shall be of proven non -clog disk diaphragm design, diffuser cap, diffuser base, and diffuser connector. B. Balancing Nozzle: Fitted with a replaceable orifice. C. The diffuser shall be designed to release air in a steady stream of bubbles. D. Diffuser Layout: AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS JULY 30, 2026 4651 21 -8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Provide diffusers as specified in Table 1, with arrangement and spacing as recommended by the Equipment Supplier and approved by the Engineer. E. Requirements: 1. Furnish diffuser assemblies including diffuser cap, diffuser base, and diffuser connector. 2. Air Diffuser a. Diffuser shall be of the flexible diaphragm type. b. Provide diffuser fabricated of injection molded corrosion resistant polypropylene base with a long -life EPDM diaphragm. c. The diffuser shall incorporate air discharge from the underside of the assembly to prevent fouling and shall provide a self-cleaning wiping action between the diaphragm and the base. d. A molded baffle on the base shall be designed to distribute the air evenly around the periphery of the diffuser. e. The diaphragm shall be designed to provide a positive check valve action to minimize the entry of debris and liquid into the air piping when air flow ceases. f. The diaphragm shall be field replaceable. g. The base of the diffuser shall include an integrally molded 3/4" NPT Sch 80 pipe thread. 3. Diffuser Connectors a. Design diffuser connector for each diffuser. b. Furnish PVC plugs for all unused diffuser connectors. c. Design diffuser connector with cast stainless steel alloy equivalent to 304L stainless steel. May also be PVC connector welded to the PVC pipe. d. Diffuser connection shall include a female 3/4" NPT Sch. 80 pipe thread. e. Factory weld connector to the top centerline of the air distribution header with a full penetration weld. 2.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Requirements: 1. Distribution header supports shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel for non -welded components and Type 316L stainless steel for welded components. Supports shall be designed for the sloped floor of the tanks. 2. Each support shall have a support base, crosstree support cradle, or U -bolt, epoxy adhesive anchor bolts, and all necessary hardware. 3. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Supports shall be designed to withstand 4 times the calculated buoyant force without exceeding 24,000 -psi stress. Maximum spacing between supports is 10 feet. Each drop pipe, manifold, adistribution pipe shall have at least two (2) supports regardless of the overall length. 5. Supports shall have 2 -inch vertical adjustment to allow for leveling of the diffusers. JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 -9 MARYS CREEK WRF B. Design: 1. The support system shall be designed for contraction/expansion over a temperature range of 140°F without deforming any component. Fixed supports will anchor the header at the dropleg against movement and intermediate supports will allow for longitudinal movement. 2. Fixed or expansion joints shall be provided as required. 3. Flanged joints shall be the loose follower type. The flanged joints shall transmit the longitudinal forces caused by expansion and contraction of the air distribution header. a. All flanged joints shall have 45 to 55 durometer, Shore A, neoprene gaskets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine tank areas and conditions, with manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with requirements for installation aeration system and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine aeration system components before installation. Reject components that are damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. B. Prior to connecting the diffuser to the headers, Contractor shall clean all piping, headers, and accessories through which air is delivered, so that all dust, dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign material will be effectively removed from contact with the air being blown through the diffusers. This cleaning shall be done with clean water at velocity of 2 to 3 feet per second. C. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to manufacturer's instructions. Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and Inspections: 1. General: After the installation of aeration equipment is complete and the installation is certified by the equipment manufacturer, field acceptance tests shall be conducted. The test procedures shall be generally as specified herein; specific written test procedures shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR for review and approval by the ENGINEER. The field acceptance tests shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR under the direct supervision of the equipment manufacturer. AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS JULY 30, 2026 4651 21 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY 2. Mounting Tests: Support and tie -down provisions of the diffuser piping shall be tested to ensure that they have a margin of safety of four (4) against calculated buoyant forces. The stainless steel air header supply pipe shall be tested to ensure that they have a margin of safety of four (4) against calculated buoyant forces. 3. Support Testing: a. Upon installation of the supports and prior to installation of piping, all of the supports of each type shall be tested with not less than 10 percent of the supports of each type, chosen at random, to be witness tested by the ENGINEER. b. Each support chosen for test shall be attached to a lever which shall be placed on a fulcrum. A static load shall be applied to the opposite end producing a vertical extracting force on the support tie -down equal to four (4) times the calculated uplift force for air diffuser piping, and four (4) times the calculated uplift force for air header supply piping, to which the support tie -downs shall be subjected in normal operation. 4. Level Test: The tank shall be flooded with clear water to the tops of the diffusers. The level of the diffusers shall then be checked to ensure that they are at the same elevation, within 3/8 -inch. 5. Uniformity and Leakage Test: The air flow from the blowers shall be supplied evenly to each grid. Operate system at average air flow per diffuser. 6. Air Distribution: The tank shall be flooded with clear water to a depth of 2 to 4 inches above the diffusers. The surface of the water will then be visually inspected to see that airflow is uniformly distributed across the tank. 7. Air Leakage: In addition, at the same time, the grid system shall be observed for air leakage. The depth of water shall then be increased to above the manifold and observed for leakage. B. Test Results: If the equipment fails a field acceptance test, repairs, revisions or replacement of equipment shall be made as deemed necessary by the ENGINEER C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 46 51 21 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: No. Person Days Work Description 1 day/grid Installation assistance and inspection. 1/2 day total Pre -startup classroom or site training. 1/2 day/skid Facility startup. B. Services Provided: 1. Approve installation before operation. 2. Furnish startup services. a. Furnish test forms and procedures for field testing. b. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. c. Verify conformance to requirements. 3. Furnish training of OWNER'S personnel at such times requested by OWNER. 4. Revisit job site as often as necessary to correct deficiencies to satisfaction of ENGINEER C. Manufacturer's services and training shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 9114 "Equipment Testing and Facility Startup." 3.06 FACILITY STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Division 1. After initial startup under the supervision of the System Integrator, a preliminary "running -in" period will be provided for the Contractor, per the Contract Documents, to make field tests and necessary adjustments B. Diffuser system shall continue to operate without alarms or shut downs, except as intended, for five (5) consecutive days to be considered started up. C. Perform the Performance Test as previously defined in this Section. 1. Field-testing results 2. Descriptions of installation deficiencies not resolved to the manufacturer's satisfaction. 3. Description of problems or potential problems. 4. Names of the Owner's personnel who attended operations and maintenance training sessions. 5. Record copy of materials used for training session including outlined summary of course. 6. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Performance. AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS JULY 30, 2026 4651 21 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY D. At the end of the specified period of operation, the aeration system will be accepted if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the system has operated satisfactorily. END OF SECTION JULY 30, 2026 AERATION SYSTEMS, COARSE -BUBBLE MEMBRANE DIFFUSERS O0 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 4651 21 - 13 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK